Home

Applications Desktop Integrator User`s Guide

1. Prompt ix C Standard Variable Format Default Output Type Financial Statement Toa Plain hemes Apply Theme 2 al fp ORANT GLDIIO THEME S VISION1 1 SUMMARYINCOME_PRINT XLS zj Output Type Afiribute Sets Apply Attribute Set 2 Zj Local PPY X C Web Page i r Text Options amp C Spreadsheet Publish To x CATEMP Summary_Income_Statement TX1 LD i Database Launch Viewer Web Page eles Publish To Enter a path and filename for the text file that the Request Center will create Optionally press the Find button to locate the directory you want Launch Viewer When the report output is complete the Request Center starts your specified output viewer downloads the report and displays it if this box is checked Using Report Output Themes on page 12 33 Setting Report Submission Options on page 12 30 Submitting Reports on page 12 8 Formatting Report Output on page 12 33 Monitoring Requests on page 12 51 Request Center 12 29 Setting Report Submission Options Setting Report Submission Options When you submit a report for processing you can set the Oracle Applications request submission options You can schedule the report to be processed at a specific time on a specific date You can also choose to print your report to a local or network printer and you can specify the number of copies to print Report Submission and Publishing Cfe
2. ssssseessssssssisessesirsissesstsnensinsesnesneesees 7 1 Analysis Wizatd Features snis e aaa S niaes 7 2 Prereg isitei cocci ses veces Fates ean sestanssoccussusvavesestabce E a Ea Eate e E Ea eE aa E a EE 7 2 Starting Analysis Wizard essiri ccs cscs a a a E E ias AER A EN eei 7 3 Drilling Down to Summary and Detail Account sssssessesseesessessesreetersesressensinressesseseesesnes 7 6 Drilling Down to View Subledger Detail 00 0 0 cece cece ceeeeeeeneneseneeeneneseseseneseteseseenes 7 9 Analysis Wizatd Toolbar ici c s s cccisesseesessarseenvennicsesiee serie S ES aa ap EES 7 10 Setting Analysis Wizard Options sessssessesisssessesressestestisnessstensiseesnentensissesnententessesnnsneeresresnes 7 11 Analysis Wizard Drilldown Flows 0 cccccccseseesesesesssssesesesesesesesesesesssesesescseseseseseseseseseseseseses 7 13 NE E e N EEN EE DA T E EE OEN E A EA EA T A ANAT 7 14 8 Account Hierarchy Editor vi The Account Hierarchy EditOf sssnensssnsasuisisnsssninnen anisi ei 8 1 Parent Levels in an Account Hierarchy e ss ssesseesiesissesssessesisstesenstestesninsessesnesnterensesnesneeneet 8 2 The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface sssssessessesseesesseestestessessesissteseesnestestesensnestesiesreseesnes 8 4 Segment Values WINdOW perseris i eiee i iaraa a AE ee EA EOR A EAER oie Espa Erta 8 5 Hierarchy Diagram Window s sssssssssessessestessissessssnensiestesesnsnntententensnnte
3. Options Rows To Upload Flagged Rows All Rows Duplicate Assets C Do Not Upload Increment Units Mieli amp Replace Units Compare Physical Inventory x ni F View Results DB To upload physical inventory data from a physical inventory worksheet to the interface table 1 While viewing your physical inventory worksheet choose the Upload to Interface button from the Assets toolbar 2 Enter your Physical Inventory Upload Options See Physical Inventory Upload Options on page 10 12 3 Choose OK to start the physical inventory upload or Cancel to abandon For rows that do not upload successfully the system provides an explanation in the Messages section of the physical inventory worksheet If you selected Show Upload Success Indicator from the general options window the system will also display status indicators in the Messages section for each physical inventory entry DB To import physical inventory data from the interface table to Oracle Assets 1 Choose Submit Process gt Compare Physical Inventory from the toolbar 2 Enter your Select Process Type options 3 Choose OK to submit your request or Cancel to abandon See Also Physical Inventory Upload Options on page 10 12 Choosing Values from Lists on page 3 37 Record Physical Inventory 10 11 Physical Inventory Upload Options Choosing Account Segment Values on page 3 38 Submitting Processes on page 3 42
4. Select a Set to publish from the list of available Financial Report or Standard Request Sets Select from the Financial Reports listed or query the report you want to publish Choose OK The Select Publishing Options for your Set appears All the reports and their publishing options for your Set are listed Request Center 12 15 Request Sets 10 11 Select Publishing Options for ZBIS Reports Test Flow 1 Publishing Template DAORANT GLDI90 SETS ZBIS_Reports_Test_Flow_1 1 XT ER Reports Request Report Publishing Options sll kkk aaa aaa aI Ly zi F Show Tips e To publish a report in the Set ensure that the checkbox next to the report is marked and that publishing options have been selected for that report e Select publishing options for individual reports in the set by double clicking on the report row You can choose to publish your report to a web page a spreadsheet a text file or into the database You can also choose to apply a Theme to customize the look and feel of your report output Your publishing options are stored in a Publishing Template which can be saved and re used the Pp g opti g p next time you publish the Set Check the check box for each report you want to publish in the set Note You can use the Publish all or Publish none buttons to enable or disable publishing for all the reports in y
5. D To drill down to detail accounts 1 From the Context window choose the Show Detail Accounts button The Detail Balances window appears Choose the Show Summary Accounts button to view the summary balances for the detail account To drill down to journal details select a detail balance then choose the Show Journal Details button For more information about how drilldowns work see Analysis Wizard Drilldown Flows on page 7 13 Analysis Wizard 7 7 Drilling Down to Summary and Detail Accounts Unused Heading in Page Area Column Heading Detail Batances Net 01 000 4100 000 000 000 Sales Parts and Service 1740 000 00 1 740 000 00 03 000 4100 000 000 000 Sales Parts and Service 2 105 400 00 2 105 400 00 Sales Parts and Service 2 315 940 00 2 315 940 00 Sales Parts and Service 2 547 534 00 2 547 534 00 8 708 874 00 8 708 874 00 Lael lt Show Summary Accounts Show Journal Details gt D To pivot information in drilldown windows 1 From the drilldown window select one of the relocatable grey heading boxes from the row headings column headings or page areas 2 Drag the heading box to a new location in one of the three areas then drop it Alternatively choose the right mouse button then choose the desired pivot action from the menu You can choose Move to Page Move to Column or Move to Row The Analysis Wizard rearranges the displayed data as needed
6. use to access sign on and ADI release information Hot key Ctrl Shift O Toolbar Options Use to add delete or arrange icons on the ADI toolbar General Options Define general settings for your ADI interface environment Set worksheet colors and default formatting for your report themes z5 General Ledger Options Define default settings for Budget Wizard Journal Wizard Report Wizard and Analysis Wizard i Hot key Ctrl Shift W Request Center Options Set defaults for Request Center queries and sound notifications Define print settings Language Options Change the language ADI uses in windows menus and tool tips Set fonts and font characteristics o E 3 8 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator ADI Toolbar Information Check details for the set of books you are using and your current signon information Check ID numbers reated to your signon authority and th set of books you are accesing About ADI ADI Release information plications Desktop Integrator Sil a tid w x Tip Wizard Set Tip Wizard Options Display the greeting or disable the Tip Wizard Help Access the online help features of ADI Hot key Ctrl Shift H Minimize Minimize the toolbar to an icon of the Windows 4 2 desktop x Hot key Ctrl Shift M Exit Close and exit ADI Hot key Ctrl Shift X See Also Signing On to ADI on page 3 10 Frequently Asked Questions on page 2 1 Getti
7. Drag and drop fields between grids to create your own Layout X Indicates that the field must be assigned in either the layout header or lines Indicates that at least one of the marked fields must be assigned to either the layout header or lines Help Cancel L ok _ BD To create a new layout template 5 From the Record Physical Inventory window choose the Actions button 6 Choose the New option from the poplist 10 4 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Physical Inventory Worksheet Parameters Enter a name for the new layout template At the Edit Layout window use the drag and drop functions and the directional buttons to arrange the fields on your layout template Choose OK See Editing Layout Templates on page 10 6 DB To customize an existing physical inventory layout template 1 From the Record Physical Inventory window select a layout to customize and choose the Actions button Choose the View Edit option from the poplist At the Edit Layout window edit the layout Choose OK See Editing Layout Templates on page 10 6 DB To copy an existing layout template 1 From the Record Physical Inventory window select a layout to copy Choose the Actions button Choose the Copy option from the poplist Enter a unique name for the copied layout template Choose OK DB To rename an existing layout template 1 From the Record Physical Inventory window select a layout to rename a
8. depreciation reserve See accumulated depreciation descriptive flexfield Descriptive Flexfield A field that your organization can extend to capture extra information not otherwise tracked by Oracle Applications A descriptive flexfield appears in your window as a single character unnamed field Your organization can customize this field to capture additional information unique to your business A field that your organization can extend to capture extra information that is otherwise not tracked by Oracle Applications A Descriptive Flexfield appears on your window as a single character unnamed field Your organization can customize this field to capture additional information that is necessary and unique to your business direct project An obsolete term See contract project detail budget A budget whose authority is controlled by another budget dimension An Oracle Financial Analyzer database object used to organize and index the data stored in a variable Dimensions answer the following questions about data What When and Where For example a variable called Units Sold might be associated with the dimensions Product Month and District In this case Units Sold describes the number of products sold during specific months within specific districts dimension label A text label that displays the name of the Oracle Financial Analyzer dimension associated with an element of a report graph or worksheet Fo
9. usage See non labor resource usage cost rate override The cost rate assigned to a particular non labor resource and non labor organization which overrides the rate assigned to its expenditure type usage logs Usage logs record the utilization of company assets on projects as the asset is used use tax A tax that you pay directly to a tax authority instead of to the supplier Suppliers do not include use tax on their invoices You sometimes owe use tax for goods or services you purchased outside of but consumed used within the territory of a tax authority Use taxes are liabilities to the buyer of goods and services You can define a tax name for use taxes When you enter a use tax name on an invoice Applications Desktop Integrator does not create an invoice distribution or general ledger journal entry for the tax user procedures Applications Desktop Integrator provides you with a report set so that you can run through your concurrent manager to generate the reports from the rollforward process You must specify the report parameters as you are prompted You must also specify the same GL Date range for all of the reports in the set except for the Aging reports The Aging reports require that you declare an As Of Date The As Of Date represents the date that Applications Desktop Integrator uses to determine the balance of the transaction Applications Desktop Integrator determines the balance by taking the current balance of a
10. A job billing title which differs from a job title that may appear on an invoice job discipline A categorization of job vocation used with Job Level to create a job title For example a job discipline may be Engineer or Consultant job level A categorization of job rank used with Job Discipline to create a job title For example a job level may be Staff or Principal Japanese consumption tax The Value Added Tax VAT paid on any expense Input VAT is usually recoverable against the VAT charged on revenue Output VAT This ensures that VAT is not inflationary within a supply chain job title A unique combination of job level and job discipline that identifies a particular job A brief description of your customer contact s role within their organization journal details tables Journal details are stored in the database tables GL_JE_BATCHES GL_JE_ HEADERS and GL_JE_LINES journal entry A debit or credit to a general ledger account A debit or credit to a general ledger account See also manual journal entry A debit or credit to a general ledger account journal entry batch A method used to group journal entries according to your set of books and accounting period When you initiate the transfer of invoice or payment information to your general ledger for posting Applications Desktop Integrator transfers the necessary information to create journal entry batches for the information you transfer Journal Import i
11. A site where a customer is located A customer can have more than one site Site names can more easily identify a customer address facilitating invoice and order entry See also location customer status The Active Inactive flag you use to inactivate customers with whom you no longer do business If you are using Oracle Order Entry you can only enter orders agreements and returns for active customers but you can continue to process returns for inactive customers If you are using Oracle Receivables you can only create invoices for active customers but you can continue collections activities for inactive customers cutoff day The day of the month that determines when an invoice with proxima payment terms is due For example if it is January and the cutoff day is the 10th invoices dated before or on January 10 are due in the next billing period invoices dated after the 10th are due in the following period cycle action A cycle action is a discrete event that can occur one or more times during the life of an order Actions can occur at the order level where all lines on the order are processed together such as credit or legal reviews Actions can also occur at the line level where each line can be processed independently such as shipping confirmation or backordering Oracle Order Entry uses actions to identify each step in your order cycle See also action result order cycle DBA library If an Oracle Financial Analyzer
12. Enabling Security within ADI Appendix B Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Installation Guide Signing On to ADI on page 3 10 Security on page 3 1 Selecting an Applications Database on page 3 12 3 2 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator ADI Toolbar Choosing a Responsibility on page 3 15 Validation and Segment Security See Also Below are validation and segment security rules ADI performs with Oracle Applications Flexfield Validation ADI performs flexfield validation checking as follows Q Provides full support for table validated value sets I Uses server side validation if the profile option Flexfields Validate On Server is set to Yes Otherwise ADI uses its own client side validation logic Cross Validation Rules ADI enforces cross validation rules when the profile option Flexfields Validate On Server is set to Yes Otherwise no cross validation checking is done in ADI Segment Security For journals ADI enforces the segment security rules that have been defined in General Ledger For budgets ADI only enforces segment security rules when the profile option GLDI Enforce Budget Wizard Segment Security is enabled Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Installation Guide ADI Toolbar QS oe Fs vx You can access ADI s functions from the toolbar buttons or from the system s hot keys Getting Started 3 3 ADI Toolbar Signon Enter your username and password then choose a
13. The Request Center on page 12 1 Saving a Report Using Report Wizard After creating or modifying a report in Report Wizard you can save it directly to General Ledger by using Report Wizard the Reports Toolbar or the ReportWizard menu Optionally you can save a report as an Excel workbook file perform further Report Wizard 6 17 Saving a Report Using Report Wizard See Also modifications in Excel even while disconnected from your applications database then save the report to General Ledger at a later time Note When you save a report to General Ledger the system will validate any control values specified in your report To save a report From Report Wizard 1 Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Report Wizard from the list of values Step 1 of Report Wizard appears 2 Select Save Report to Database 3 Choose Finish From the Reports Toolbar 1 Ifitis not already displayed open the Reports Toolbar 2 Choose the Save Report to Database button Using menu options 1 Choose ReportWizard gt Save Report to Database from the Excel menu DB To save a report worksheet to disk 1 Select File gt Save As from the Excel menu 2 Enter a name and specify a path for the report worksheet file 3 Choose OK to save the file or Cancel to abandon the operation Report Wizard Interface on page 6 5 Reports Toolbar on page 6 2 Report Wizard Tools on page 6 5 The Request Center o
14. dimensions to different areas of your drill window Analysis Wizard reorganizes the displayed financial information to reflect your new dimensions Exporting data to Excel or to the Windows clipboard Drilling down to summary accounts detail accounts journal details and subledger details including Payables Receivables Assets Projects Purchasing Inventory and WIP Full support for multiple database access User definable options Printing Your System Administrator must grant you permission to use the Analysis Wizard by enabling the profile option GLDI Analysis Wizard Privileges for your responsibility Also to drill down across sets of books your System Administrator must enable the profile option GLDI Allow Drilldown Across Books for your responsibility Your System Administrator can also set the profile option GLDI Maximum Effective Ranges for Drilldown This setting a positive integer greater than zero specifies the maximum account ranges that can be drilled on with the 7 2 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Applications Desktop Integrator Analysis Wizard Analysis Wizard See your System Administrator to optimize this setting to meet your drilldown and system performance needs Note If these profile options are not available in your Release of Oracle General Ledger all ADI users are given access to the Analysis Wizard automatically See Security Applications Desktop Integrator Installati
15. project segment To set up your account you define the individual segments of your general ledger account code You can define a project segment to enter your project identifier You define all key attributes of the segment including field length position of the segment within your account prompt type of characters numeric or alphanumeric and default value optional project segment value The identifier project name number or code you use to designate each project After you define a project segment in your account you set up a project in Applications Desktop Integrator by simply defining a project segment value For example you could define a project name ALPHA a project number 583 or a project code D890 project status An implementation defined classification of the status of a project Typical project statuses are Active and Closed project type An implementation defined template that consists of essential project attributes such as whether a project is direct or indirect a project s default revenue distribution rule and bill rate schedules and whether a project burdens costs For example you can define a project type with a name such as Time and Materials for all projects that are based on time and materials contracts project type class An additional classification for project types that indicates how to collect and track costs quantities and in some cases revenue and billing Oracle Projects pre
16. purge To purge a fiscal year is to remove the depreciation expense and adjustment transaction records for that year from Oracle Assets You must archive and purge all earlier fiscal years and archive this fiscal year before you can purge it A Applications Desktop Integrator process where you identify a group of records for Applications Desktop Integrator to delete from the database Applications Desktop Integrator purges each record and its related records Applications Desktop Integrator maintains summary data for each record it purges purgeable flag A flag in Applications Desktop Integrator you use to determine whether you can purge an imported invoice from the database Applications Desktop Integrator automatically enters Yes for the purgeable flag on Glossary 121 Glossary 122 all expense reports you enter in the Payables Expense Report window allowing you to purge all expense reports after importing without updating the purgeable flag Oracle Projects enters No for the purgeable flag on all expense reports you enter in Oracle Projects You must update the purgeable flag to Yes in Oracle Projects before you can purge the expense report in Applications Desktop Integrator Applications Desktop Integrator does not display the purgeable flag for any invoices quarter average to date The average of the end of day balances for a related range of days within a quarter quantity on hand Current quantity of an item in inventory
17. sssssessessesssssiesiesesssestesiesessrententesennnenesntntenresnesneene 10 8 INObOS iiss Seskd EE EE Mobeob lables A E vonventen Missed 10 8 Uploading Physical Inventory Data into Oracle Assets 0ccccccessssesesestetetescecetesesestanenes 10 9 Physical Inventory Upload Options 0 0 0 0 ccc esccessssesssesessesesesesessesesesesssssesesesessneseseecsens 10 12 Import Text File Import Text Fil Feature nisni nea aa ara a aE EEA Ra E eia e Eai 11 1 vii Importing Data into a Worksheet cccccc cece csesesescsceseesescsesesesesesesesesesescsesssesesescseseanseseecees 11 1 Import Text File Parameters cnino ningne aa e e E EEE 11 2 ChOOSe SOurce FE a a a a aids a id shag esta e a eas Pec a A Ta 11 2 DeliMite inansa a a eee hed an Sted ees eee ea a e eesti r need 11 2 Mapping Templates nentet RE E E A E 11 2 Actions Butto Options srss nisreen e dso e e E na En er ae E aS a EREE 11 4 Editing Mapping Templates ccc ccseesesesssssesesesssssssesesesessssesesesssssesesesssesssesesesessseeesees 11 5 12 Request Center viii The Request Center 2 220 s2 tcscteiesvnveiennniiaia neces asana aiaiaaeo eedt aas Anais 12 1 The Request Center Toolbars pesii apaa a erae i eS eaaa aaaea 12 2 Setting Request Center Options esine iie le Stee aes ak stele a E E Bala ARs 12 5 Specifying a Sound File for Request Completion ccccc ce cceccscsesesescscseeeeecseeaeseseeeee 12 7 Submitting Reports nann ua En eves EAA E E E lac
18. A set of standard bill rates that maintains the rates and percentage markups over cost that you charge clients for your labor and non labor expenditures bill site The customer address to which project invoices are sent bill through date The date through which you want to invoice a project Oracle Projects picks up revenue distributed expenditure items having an expenditure item date on or before this date and events having a completion date on or before this date when generating an invoice Bill To Address The address of the customer who is to receive the invoice Equivalent to Invoice To Address in Oracle Order Entry Bill To Site A customer location to which you have assigned a Bill To business purpose You can define your customer s bill to sites in the Customers windows billing The functions of revenue accrual and invoicing billing invoice number A system generated number assigned to a consolidated billing invoice when you print draft or final versions of these invoices This number appears in some Oracle Glossary 21 Glossary 22 Receivables windows next to the transaction number and reports if the profile option AR Show Billing Number is set to Yes See also consolidated billing invoice billing cycle The billing period for a project Examples of billing cycles you can define are a set number of days the same day each week or month or the project completion date You can optionally use a client extension
19. An account segment in which the available values depend on values entered in a previous segment called the independent segment For example the dependent segment Sub Account 0001 might mean Bank of Alaska when combined with the independent segment Account 1100 Cash but the same Sub Account 0001 might mean Building 3 when combined with Account 1700 Fixed Assets deposit A type of commitment whereby a customer agrees to deposit or prepay a sum of money for the future purchase of goods and services depreciable basis The amount of your asset that is subject to depreciation generally the cost minus the salvage value Also known as recoverable cost depreciate To depreciate an asset is to spread its cost over the time you use it You charge depreciation expense for the asset each period The total depreciation taken for an asset is stored in the accumulated depreciation account Glossary 45 Glossary 46 depreciation book A book to store financial information for a group of assets A depreciation book can be corporate tax or budget Also known as book depreciation calendar The depreciation calendar determines the number of accounting periods in a fiscal year It also determines with the divide depreciation flag what fraction of the annual depreciation amount to take each period You must specify a depreciation calendar for each book depreciation projection The expected depreciation expense for specified future periods
20. where Oracle Projects looks when processing task charges and for determining task revenue accrual amounts See task summarization Processing a project s cost revenue commitment and budget information to be displayed in the Project Task and Resource Project Status windows You must distribute costs for any expenditure items accrue and release any revenue create any commitments and baseline a budget for your project before you can view summary project amounts Formerly known as accumulation summary account An account whose balance represents the sum of other account balances You can use summary accounts for faster reporting and inquiry as well as in formulas and allocations summary message A summary message is a message representing one or more exceptions The message includes an introductory paragraph followed by the exceptions listed in a columnar report format summary threshold The number of exceptions after which you want Oracle Alert to send a message for a particular distribution For example if you define the threshold at five and Oracle Alert locates between one and five exceptions the recipients get one to five separate detail messages But if Oracle Alert locates six or more exceptions the recipients get one summary message that includes all the exceptions supplier A business or individual that provides goods or services or both in return for payment supplier codes A feature you use to define va
21. Find What Payroll Tax I Parent l V Child Replace Replace With Payroll Taxes gt F Match Case fa etch viele Toe Orly Cancel E ALL fd In Level RESF VTS Payroll Taxes Fl 6110 Payroll Tax FICA em MUS Payroll Taxes Fl 6115 Payroll Tax FICA em 2 M Payroll Taxes F 6120 Payroll Tax FUTA 2 H Payroll Taxes S 6125 Payroll Tax SUI SU 2 Found 4 matching node description s Use the Replacement Description region to review your new and original descriptions before you apply your changes In this window you can choose to preserve your original descriptions adopt the new descriptions or edit the new descriptions for any listed segment value before you commit your changes 6 Complete the following fields Description Check Box Retain the check to use the new segment value description Clear the check box to retain the original segment value description New Description You can edit any new description To complete your edits choose the new description or press the right mouse button then choose Rename 7 Choose the Replace button to apply your changes Note To discard your changes choose the New Find button enter a new description in the Find What field complete the remaining fields and choose the Find button The region below refreshes with new segment values and descriptions See Also The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface on page 8 4 The Account Hierarchy E
22. I Start Budget Import Check this box to automatically start the budget import concurrent request after uploading your budget amounts If you do not check this box or if there are errors in the budget upload the budget import process will not start Once the budget upload completes the system a Displays a window showing Number of rows successfully uploaded Number of errors in the upload to the GL Budget Interface table Budget import request ID if no errors in upload Message indicating that a watch request has been submitted for the budget post request ID if no errors in upload If there were no errors in the budget upload the system will Submits your budget import concurrent request a Submits a watch request to monitor your concurrent request Budget Wizard 4 23 Budget Upload Options See Also Submitting Processes on page 3 42 Uploading Budgets from ADI to General Ledger on page 4 19 4 24 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator 9 Journal Wizard Applications Desktop Integrator Journal Wizard With the Applications Desktop Integrator ADI Journal Wizard you can create journal entries using Microsoft Excel then automatically upload them to Oracle General Ledger You make your journal entries using journal worksheets that are created automatically by Journal Wizard These journal worksheets include fields for all of the journal entry information required by your organization s specific impl
23. Setting Request Center Options You can set various Request Center options by choosing the Options button from the Request Center toolbar From the Options window you can set Limits toolbar Icon Size Sounds and the default Output Viewer You can also define default print settings and change the language options Request Center 12 5 Setting Request Center Options Options m Limits Update Every a g Seconds Query Last foo fF Requests Flash Notification 6b B Times Display jam o Programs Sounds w Play Sound When Request Completes Normal DAORANT GLDI90 SOUNDS WOW WAV Error D ORANT GLDISO SOUNDS HORNWHST WAY Tp Output Viewer ta i ele NOTEPAD EXE Help Print Settings Request Center 4 0 10 0 0 32 Bit Language Options Copyright c Oracle Corporation OK Cancel ml Update Every This is the interval in seconds that the Request Center waits between queries it makes to the server while monitoring requests For example if you set the interval to 60 the system checks every 60 seconds to see if your request has completed processing Query Last Determines how many requests are retrieved in the Select Request to Monitor window when you choose the Query button Flash Notification The number of times the Request Center title bar flashes when a request completes Display You can limit which Oracle Applications requests are monitored by the Request
24. Use the Add and Delete buttons to move or delete available attributes to and from the Selected Attributes grid 4 Apply sorting and group characteristics to attributes in a column by using the Ascending Descending and Group By buttons 5 Move columns within the Selected Attributes grid to specify the order in which they should appear in your report 6 Save your work Local Web Page Options You can publish your reports in HTML so that others can access them by web browser Local Web Page reports are automatically stored on a local drive you specify If you used content sets when you defined your reports you can create a Request Center 12 23 Setting Report Publishing Options published web report that contains a separate directory frame with navigation links adjacent to the report output Background colors you specify in a report theme are automatically applied to web published reports Suggestion If you use content sets in your report definition and you want to publish to the web use Link Reports and Separate Directories together to create meaningful web reports Set the following options if you choose Local Web Page as your Output Type when publishing a report Report Submission and Publishing Report Type C Standard Fixed Format Publish Report xX Prompt X C Standard Variable Format Default Output Type Financial Statement N Web Page gt Themes Apply
25. existing summary accounts you must delete and recreate your summary templates in General Ledger Account Hierarchy Editor 8 1 The Account Hierarchy Editor Attention If you use budgetary control with summary accounts you cannot change child parent and rollup summary account relationships with the Account Hierarchy Editor Attention The View Account Hierarchy option is only visible if your responsibility allows you to modify account structures Parent Levels in an Account Hierarchy The diagram below illustrates the concept of parent levels in an account hierarchy This concept is used throughout the remainder of this chapter A parent level contains a parent segment value that has one or more child segment values associated with it Parent levels are displayed in Account Hierarchy Editor in a top down fashion The level 1 parent is always the topmost parent as shown in the diagram The remaining parent levels starting with level 2 are referred to as lower level parents 8 2 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator The Account Hierarchy Editor See Also Parent Levels in an Account Hierarchy I Topmest I r4 Lower Level Parents _ Parent H I Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 As illustrated in the diagram a parent value can be a child of a higher level parent For example in the diagram parent value 3110 has two child segment values 3111 and 3115 The parent is i
26. l Run Reports Choose Sequentially to process your multiple reports in sequential order Choose In Parallel to process your multiple reports at the same time Note The run reports option operates on the entire content set rather than for each hierarchy within the content set See Also Hierarchy Filtering Options on page 6 34 Generating Content Sets on page 6 28 Report Wizard 6 33 Hierarchy Filtering Options Hierarchy Filtering Options See Also i Report Wizard Step 4 Generate Content Set x Optionally you can filter report contents by range or balance Segment Yalue Ranges Low for 100 1000 000 000 000 High o3 400 1732 000 000 000 Display N N N N N N Filter Balances Detail Only Summary Only Cancel lt Back Next gt For each hierarchy you add to a content set definition enter optional filtering options that control how the hierarchy is expanded You can specify segment value ranges and set different display types for each segment of the range The filter is applied to each row that is created in the content set for this hierarchy Low High Enter the account range for the rows that will be created in the content set for this hierarchy Any Low High values you enter for the parent segment associated with the hierarchy are ignored here Display Enter the display type for each segment of your account range Any display type you enter for the parent segment ass
27. query A search for applications information that you initiate using an Oracle Applications window Quick Check See Quick payment Quick payment A feature you use to create an automatic payment on demand With Quick payment you choose the invoices you want to pay and Payables creates the check on a printer you choose You can also void and reissue a Quick payment if your printer spoils it while printing Quick Release A feature you can use to release all user assigned and many system assigned invoice holds You can define and apply unlimited approval criteria to an invoice and you can then use QuickRelease to release all holds for a particular invoice batch or supplier with a single keystroke QuickCash A feature that lets you enter receipts quickly by providing only minimal information After using QuickCash to enter your receipts you can post your payment batches to your customer accounts by running Post QuickCash See also Post QuickCash QuickCodes Codes that you define for the activities and terminology you use in your business For example you can define QuickCodes for personal titles such as Sales Manager so you can refer to people using these titles For example you can define QuickCodes for sales channels so that you can specify the various sales channels used for different kinds of orders An Oracle Assets feature that allows you to enter standard descriptions for your business You can enter QuickCode val
28. secondary set of books The set of books you maintain for reporting purposes You can run your business using accrual accounting and report on a cash basis or run your business on a cash basis and report on an accrual basis security rules Order Entry The control over the steps in the order process where you no longer allow users to add delete or cancel order or return lines or change order or return information segment A single sub field within a flexfield You define the structure and meaning of individual segments when customizing a flexfield selection options For each report Applications Desktop Integrator provides you with parameters you can choose to make your report as brief as possible For example on the Aging 4 Buckets report you can specify that you want to review the report for a range of customers or only the aging information for one customer This feature saves time and lets you retrieve data in different ways senior tax authority The first tax location in your sales tax structure This segment does not have a parent location For example in the sales tax structure State County City State is the senior tax authority sequence type Receivables provides two types of sequences Automatic and Manual Automatic numbering sequentially assigns a unique number to each transaction as it is created Manual numbering requires that you manually assign a unique number to each transaction when you create it
29. them with asterisks in summary messages For example if on Monday Oracle Alert notifies a purchasing agent that a supplier shipment is overdue then on Tuesday Oracle Alert finds that the shipment is still overdue you can choose whether Oracle Alert should renotify the purchasing agent or suppress the message dynamic distribution A distribution that includes at least one recipient whose electronic mail ID is represented by an alert output Oracle Alert locates the actual electronic mail ID in one of the application tables and substitutes it into the distribution before sending the alert message dynamic insertion An Accounting Flexfields feature that allows you to enter and define new combinations of segment values directly in a flexfield pop up window The new combination must satisfy any cross validation rules before it is accepted Your organization can decide if an Accounting Flexfield supports dynamic insertion If an account does not support dynamic insertion you can only enter new combinations of segment values using the Define Accounts windowA feature specific to key flexfields that allows you to enter and define new combinations of segment values directly into a flexfield pop up window The new combination must satisfy any cross validation rules before your flexfield accepts the new combination Your organization can decide if a key flexfield supports dynamic insertion If a flexfield does not support dynamic insertion you c
30. you could have a balance sheet theme an income statement theme or an asset theme saved on your hard disk each with different formatting When you run an income statement you can choose to publish the report using the income statement theme When you run a balance sheet you can choose to publish the report using the balance sheet theme When you run an asset report you can choose to publish the report using the asset theme With this unique feature no additional preparation is needed before you distribute your reports to senior management You can also use the Request Center to monitor your concurrent requests The Request Center automatically notifies you by flashing a completion message on your screen when your financial reports journal uploads budget uploads or asset 1 4 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator uploads finish processing The Request Center is particularly useful because you can use it to simultaneously monitor any concurrent program submitted by any Oracle Application against any database not just the requests you submit from ADI Once a request finishes processing you can view the concurrent request log or the output report using any word processor or editor You can even categorize your concurrent requests by adding specific requests to a Hot List for immediate access in the future See Also Getting Started with ADI on page 3 1 ADI Toolbar on page 3 3 Frequently Asked Questions on page 2 1 Introductio
31. 11 4 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Import Text File Parameters When you choose this option when the default template is selected you have the option only to view the default template You cannot edit the default template T Copy Choose this option to copy an existing mapping template I Rename Choose this option to rename an existing mapping template Note You cannot rename the default template 1 Delete Choose this option to delete an existing mapping template Note You cannot delete the default template Mapping fof Mapping Template kdt0824a P gt Import File Fields Excel Spreadsheet Fields Accounting Date Asset T Klf ccpreciat Description Expense Account Clearing Account Date Placed in Service Drag and drop fields within grids to create a match between fields from your Import File and your Excel spreadsheet Help Cancel L ox Editing Mapping Templates You can use either the directional buttons or the drag and drop feature to move fields from the Import File Fields region to the corresponding field in the Excel Spreadsheet Fields region Import Text File 11 5 Import Text File Parameters See Also Creating Asset Worksheets on page 9 2 Creating Physical Inventory Worksheets on page 10 2 11 6 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator 12 Request Center The Request Center Use the Request Center as a c
32. 1537886 154557 0 130 420 4220 000 0000 Support Renewal 125000 125625 126253 126884 127519 128156 128797 01 130 420 4420 000 0000 Training Revenue Telesales 80000 80400 80802 81206 81612 82020 82430 01 130 420 4430 000 0000 Training Revenue Partnership 80000 80400 80802 81206 81612 82020 82430 01 130 420 4510 000 0000 Miscellaneous Revenue 55000 55275 55551 55629 56108 56389 56671 01 130 420 5110 000 0000 Cost of Sales 2354250 2366021 2377651 2389741 2401689 2413698 2425766 01 130 420 5240 000 0000 Scrap inventory 251352 252609 253872 255141 256417 257699 258987 o 130 420 5241 000 0000 Floor Stock 5000000 5025000 5050125 5075376 5100753 5126256 5151888 o 130 420 5340 000 0000 Scrap Assembly 1250000 1256250 1262531 1268844 1275188 1281564 1287972 o 130 420 5370 000 0000 Mati Value Expense Non Std 2500000 2512500 2525063 2537668 2550376 2563126 2575944 B fo 130 420 5410 000 0000 Warranty Expense 150000 150750 151504 152261 153023 153788 154557 D To hide or display budget worksheet context information Choose the View Context button at the top of the budget worksheet This toggles between hiding and displaying the context information DB To view or hide account segment descriptions 1 When entering your budget worksheet parameters indicate the account segments whose descriptions you want to display in yo
33. 16 1 or 10 7 NCA or later Question Does Applications Desktop Integrator support network installations Frequently Asked Questions 2 3 Installation Considerations Yes you can install Applications Desktop Integrator Release 6 0 or earlier on a network drive using the Oracle Client Software Manager ADI Release 7 0 does not support this functionality Question What does it mean if get a message that a file was replaced with an older version during installation of Applications Desktop Integrator The Applications Desktop Integrator installation process may install different versions of some files that are currently on your system This is common and the installation process will handle this situation Simply reboot your system after installing Applications Desktop Integrator and you will not see the message again Question What does it mean if get the message Object variable or with block variable not set Error Number 91 while signing on to Applications Desktop Integrator This is an indication that Applications Desktop Integrator is not installed correctly This is probably because Oracle Objects is not registered correctly or your version of Required Support Files RSF is incorrect Run the Diagnostic Wizard and follow its recommendations Question What does it mean if get a message containing ERROR ORA 12154 TNS could not resolve service name when using Applications Desktop Integrator for Excel 7 97 2000
34. 21 Adding or Changing Child Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 24 Duplicating Parent Hierarchies on page 8 26 8 38 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Closing the Account Hierarchy Editor Closing the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 39 Defining Rollup Groups Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide Defining Rollup Groups Oracle Public Sector Applications Flexfields Guide Defining Segment Values Defining Key Flexfields Planning Your Summary Accounts Oracle General Ledger User s Guide Closing the Account Hierarchy Editor DB To close the Account Hierarchy Editor 1 Choose File gt Exit from the Account Hierarchy Editor menu 2 If you have not already done so the system asks if you want to save any changes you ve made Choose Yes to save your work or No to abandon your changes Choose Cancel to leave your Account Hierarchy Editor session open See Also The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface on page 8 4 The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu on page 8 10 The Account Hierarchy Editor Toolbar on page 8 14 Account Hierarchy Editor 8 39 Closing the Account Hierarchy Editor 8 40 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator 9 Asset Wizard Create Assets Feature See Also The Create Assets feature provides a spreadsheet based interface to simplify asset creation in a disconnected environment Use the Create Assets feature to automatically build personalized asset entry spreadsheets based o
35. 47 Formatting Standard Variable Format Reports Note The Format Cells window is part of Excel s standard functionality Please refer to your Excel reference manual or Excel s online help for more information on formatting cells Note When you format the first cell for any column in the amounts region row 13 in the example above the remainder of that column expresses the same formatting characteristics Warning Formatting with tokens will override the General formats you establish using customize themes 4 Choose OK to save your changes then choose OK to close the Style window 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 above for each report output feature you want to customize in this theme Caution Make sure you close the Style window in step 4 before you change the formatting for other report output features If you don t close the Style window you may lose the formatting changes you ve already made 6 Optional As desired insert pictures into your theme by selecting Insert Picture from the Excel menu 7 Optional Choose the Publish To button then select a default path and filename to use for publishing web based reports with this theme The related HTML files for the report are always stored in this location regardless of the location you specify when you submit the report request Use this feature when you need to periodically publish reports to a consistent location 8 Op
36. 860 12 Heading amp Heading2 amp Heading3 amp Heading4 amp Heading5 amp Heading6 13 14 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 900 00 15 fo 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 16 0 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 ar 830 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 LEN 840 e Item 4 1 000 00 1 000 00 41 000 00 1 000 00 41 000 00 1 000 00 Default Line 7 850 Line tems 1 000 00 1 000 00 7 000 00 1 000 00 7 000 00 1 000 00 20 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 7 000 00 tem Column A 870 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 ZA 880 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 23 0 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 24 25 26 Background Fina 27 Publish To Find 28 Custom Macro 29 30 Tip you add a logo to a theme it will automatically be Tip Shortcut Double click in an output region to open 31 displayed on report output the advanced formatting window 32 33 34 L 37 a oe You can position the line item column in any column of your theme Choose the right or left Line Item Position button to move the line item column to your desired column location Your report output positions the line item column based on your theme definition Formatting with Tokens You can customize themes applied to financial reports using tokens to place titles set o
37. ADI starts automatically when you open the journal worksheet See Also Journal Worksheet Options on page 5 4 Customizing Journal Worksheets on page 5 6 ADI Options on page 3 16 Journal Worksheet Options Use the Create Journal Worksheet window to specify the journal type and number of journals you will enter in your journal worksheet 5 4 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Journal Worksheet Options Choose Journal Type There are four types of journals you can enter from the Journal Wizard When you select one ADI creates a corresponding journal worksheet in Excel a J J Functional Actuals Create actual journal entries using the functional currency for your selected set of books Foreign Actuals Create actual journal entries using a foreign currency A foreign currency is one which is different from the functional currency for your selected set of books Budgets Create journal entries that are to be posted against a budget Encumbrances Create journal entries to update encumbrance balances Number of Journals You can use a journal worksheet to enter one journal entry or a journal batch You must specify the number of journal entries you are going to enter before the Journal Wizard creates a journal worksheet m Single Use to prepare an individual journal entry Information common to all lines in your journal entry is reflected in the journal worksheet header This includes Category Source
38. ADI to General Ledger on page 5 17 Uploading Budgets from ADI to General Ledger on page 4 19 Submitting Reports on page 12 8 Monitoring Requests on page 12 51 Oracle Assets You can start the following processes by choosing Assets gt Submit Process from the Assets toolbar a Post Mass Additions to Oracle Assets Compare Physical Inventory 3 46 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Submitting Processes W Submit Mass Additions Post m Parameters Corporate Book Records To submit the Post Mass Additions process 1 Choose the Assets button from the ADI toolbar and select Submit Process gt Post Mass Additions from the list of values 2 Select the corporate depreciation book for which you want to post your mass additions ADI displays the number of records associated with each book 3 Choose OK to submit your request or Cancel to abandon Note Once you submit the process the system starts a Post Mass Additions concurrent request and displays the Post Mass Additions request ID The ADI Request Center automatically monitors the request and notifies you of the completion status when it is done When you post mass additions to Oracle Assets by choosing Submit Process gt Post Mass Additions this process does not submit the Mass Additions Posting Report You must submit this request separately Getting Started 3 47 Submitting Processes W Submit Physical Invento
39. Cancel to abort The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface on page 8 4 The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu on page 8 10 The Account Hierarchy Editor Toolbar on page 8 14 Finding Segment Values on page 8 15 Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 17 Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 21 Adding or Changing Child Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 24 Modifying Segment Value Descriptions on page 8 34 Adding and Changing Rollup Groups with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 37 Closing the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 39 Defining Segment Values Defining Key Flexfields Oracle General Ledger User s Guide Adding or Changing Child Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor You can use the Account Hierarchy Editor to add new child segment values or modify existing child values BD To create a new child segment value for your hierarchy 1 Start the Account Hierarchy Editor by choosing the Ledger button from the ADI toolbar then selecting the View Account Hierarchy option from the list of values 8 24 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Adding or Changing Child Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor 9 10 From the related poplists select the Chart of Accounts and Segment for the existing hierarchy Choose New Child Value from the Segment Values window The Child Attributes window appears Enter a new Segme
40. Center by selecting the application name from the poplist If you select All you can monitor requests from all installed Oracle Applications Sounds See Specifying a Sound File for Request Completion on page 12 7 Output Viewer Select the program you want to use to view report output or request logs whenever you choose the View Output Log button from the Request Center toolbar You can enter the path and program name directly or choose the Find button to search your computer for the program you want Printer Settings Choose the Printer Settings button to specify a default font to use when printing reports to a local printer See Specifying Your Printer Settings on page 12 31 12 6 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Specifying a Sound File for Request Completion Language Options Choose the Language Options button to change the language that the Request Center uses in windows menus and tool tips See Language Options on page 3 32 See Also The Request Center Toolbar on page 12 2 Monitoring Requests on page 12 51 Specifying a Sound File for Request Completion on page 12 7 Specifying a Sound File for Request Completion You can have the Request Center give you an audible alert when a request finishes processing You do this by defining a sound WAV file the system plays when a request completes processing You can also specify a sound file to be played when an error occurs Note When you ins
41. Column Exceptions See Column Properties Window on page 6 11 Insert Delete Row Object Insert a new line item row into your row set or for an existing line item insert account assignments You can also delete a line item or its account assignments Insert Delete Column Object Insert a new column or column heading row into your report worksheet You can also delete a column or column heading row Move Column Left Move a column to the left Report Wizard 6 3 Report Wizard Interface See Also Move Column Right Move a column to the right Save Report to Database Save your report back to General Ledger If you want to save your report to a diskette for later editing use the File Save function in Excel spreadsheet Refresh Report From Database Restore your report from the General Ledger database to your currently open report worksheet Hide Tools Close the Reports Toolbar o a oO m Report Wizard Interface on page 6 5 Reports Toolbar on page 6 2 Report Wizard Tools on page 6 5 Creating a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 12 Saving a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 17 Adding and Deleting Rows Using Report Wizard on page 6 19 Adding and Deleting Columns Using Report Wizard on page 6 20 Report Wizard Interface Figure 6 1shows what an existing report looks like when you first open it using Report Wizard Your report appears as a graphical layout within an Excel worksheet The report wor
42. Columns 5 S x Column Width 15 fF Factor Units Line Item Width 24 fj Indicator al Account Assignments a Calculations Exceptions Copy Options Make Copy Default No i Enforcement Level Do Not Prompt E Report Definition Tab Choose default settings to define new reports or to copy report objects You use the Report Wizard to define report objects which are row sets column sets content sets and row order 3 26 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator General Ledger Options Defaults Set the following defaults Rows Number of rows to use for new report worksheets Columns Number of columns to use for new report worksheets Column Width Width to use for each column definition Line Item Width Width of the report area where the row labels appear Format Format mask to use for amounts in the report Factor The factor Billions Millions Thousands Units or Percentiles to use for displaying numeric values Indicator The colors to use to display the Account Assignments Calculations and Exceptions report indicators on your report worksheet The report indicators are the small symbols that appear to the left of your row definitions or above your column definitions They indicate the number of account ranges assigned to a row or column as well as whether there are calculations defined or column exceptions applied Copy Options When you use the Report Wizard th
43. Currency and Accounting Date For each line of the actual entry you enter information such as Account Debit amount and Credit amount Multiple Use to prepare multiple journal entries All information pertaining to a journal entry even that which is common to more than one line is entered on each line of a multiple journal entry With multiple journal entries you can combine journal entries that have different categories sources and currencies on a single journal worksheet You can then upload these different journal entries at the same time When Oracle General Ledger imports the entries from the GL Interface table it separates the lines into appropriate entries and batches Create Worksheet in m m New Workbook Select this option to create your journal worksheet as a new Excel workbook Current Workbook Select to create your journal worksheet as a new worksheet within the current Excel workbook This option is only available when you already have an Excel workbook open Journal Wizard 5 5 Customizing Journal Worksheets See Also Journal Worksheet Options on page 5 4 Customizing Journal Worksheets on page 5 6 Creating Journal Worksheets on page 5 2 Customizing Journal Worksheets When you create a journal worksheet you can choose to use the template s standard layout or customize it Selecting the Edit Layout button on the Create Journal Worksheet window opens the Define Worksheet Layout window where
44. Drill Enabled Hide Windows When Navigating Maximum Active Drills 5 Fd Report Analysis Tab els Set options to help you drill down on financial reports If you change these settings the changes only apply to new drills that you initiate Drill Options Region Drill Options can be set in two places Ledger Options Report Analysis tab choose the default setting you want to take effect each time you initiate a drill down a Drill Options window You can change the same drill options as you drill down on a report amount You are not required to return to the Report Analysis tab to change the drill options settings 0 Drill Options Make your selections to set Drill Options a Display Segment Values Check the Grouped check box to have your account segments displayed together as one value Mark the Individually check box to have your account segments displayed separately Suggestion Select Individually if you want to perform multidimensional analysis of your drilldown data a Minimum Amount Width Enter the minimum column width to use for the amount columns in your drill windows 3 28 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator General Ledger Options Include Descriptions for Mark the appropriate check box to display descriptions in your drill windows for your account Balancing Segment Cost Center Segment and Natural Account Segment Note On the Current Drill Options wind
45. Expositions INCOME Company Sales Product 998 000 00 1 138 587 00 1 200 000 00 03 Nuts and Bolts Export Sales Paris and Service 1 200 000 00 1 312 700 00 1 440 000 00 Inc Sales Export 797 250 00 992 000 00 1 080 000 00 04 Wester Sailboard 2 995 250 00 3 443 287 00 3 720 000 00 Company 05 Eastern Sporting Goods issi 494 444 00 550 000 00 600 000 00 Ine 599 600 00 660 000 00 720 000 00 Total Expenses 1 094 044 00 1 210 000 00 1 320 000 00 Spreadsheet Options Set the following options if you choose Spreadsheet as your Output Type when publishing a report 12 26 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Setting Report Publishing Options Report Submission and Publishing r Report Type Publish Report x C Standard Fixed Format seule ecll Prompt ix Default Output Type 7 Spreadsheet C Standard Variable Format Financial Statement Option Themes Apply Theme ej DAORANT GLDIS0 THEMES VISION11 SUMMARYINCOME_PRINT XLS Output Type _ Attribute Sets Apply Attribute Set 2 ZI Local pply Spreadsheet Options Publish To mR CATEMP Summary_Income_StatementXLS New Workbook Curent Workbook Add Output Replace Output Z 5 Apply Formatting N Web Page 7 Spreadsheet a C Text Plain Database Web Page Lx eels New Workbook The report is published to a new Excel workbook using the theme you selected i
46. FastFormatting amp FastFormatting Disables all cell level formatting Period of amp POIMonth n wherennis Period Report Interest Month the offset Submission and number Publishing window Period of amp POIQUARTER n where n is Period Report Interest Quarter the offset Submission and number Publishing window Period of amp POI StartDate n where n is Period Report Interest Start the offset Submission and Date number Publishing window Request Center 12 39 Customizing Themes for Financial Reports Table 12 1 Formatting Tokens Description Token n Reference Setting Period of amp POTYear n where n is Period Report Interest Year the offset Submission and number Publishing window Report amp Currency Report Submission and Currency Publshing window Report Title amp ReportTitle Existing Report Report Submission and Publshing window Report amp ReportPublished User Name Published by By Request ID amp ConcurrentReque Request Center stID Set of Books amp SetofBooksName Set of books name Save In XL 95 amp SavelnXL95Form Report accessibility Format at Excel 97 users can publish web output viewable by Excel 95 users Submission amp SubmissionDate Date Report Date Submission and Publishing window Formatting with Line Item Tokens You can also use line item tokens listed in the table below to replace line item text and expanded line item text in your financial report output Line item tokens can b
47. Integrator Journal Upload Options Select Without Validation General Ledger imports descriptive flexfield values without validating them If you choose to start the journal import process automatically after the upload completes the system will do the following a Submit your journal import request a Submit a watch request to monitor your journal import request a Display a window showing Number of errors in the upload to the interface table Journal Import Request ID A message indicating that a watch request has been submitted for the Journal Import Request ID See Also Journal Upload Options on page 5 21 Submitting Processes on page 3 42 Uploading Journal Entries from ADI to General Ledger on page 5 17 Journal Wizard 5 23 Journal Upload Options 5 24 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator 6 Report Wizard Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard With the Applications Desktop Integrator ADI Report Wizard you can define reports graphically in Microsoft Excel then upload the report definitions to General Ledger as Financial Statement Generator FSG report objects You can also download existing FSG reports modify them in Report Wizard then save the modified definition to General Ledger From the Report Wizard you can directly access the Request Center s Report Submission and Publishing window to submit your report You can also choose to download format and publish your report ou
48. On to ADI on page 3 10 General Ledger Options on page 3 23 Language Options on page 3 32 Displaying ADI Release Information You can display information about the release and production status of the ADI version currently installed on your computer 3 36 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Choosing Values from Lists 6 0 1 12 9 32 Bit olick anvwhere ta clase English United States ORACLE Applications Desktop Integrator Copyright c Oracle Corporation To display ADI release information 1 Choose the Options button from the ADI toolbar 2 Choose About ADI from the list of values The Applications Desktop Integrator Release Information window appears 3 When you are done reviewing the release information click anywhere to close the window See Also General Ledger Options on page 3 23 Language Options on page 3 32 Choosing Values from Lists For certain data entry fields on a journal asset or inventory or report worksheet you can select an entry from a list of values Fields with lists are identified by the word list that appears to the left of the field name Getting Started 3 37 Choosing Account Segment Values D To choose from a list of values 1 2 4 Select the data entry field in your journal asset inventory or report worksheet Choose General Ledger or Assets from the ADI toolbar and select the List of Values Alternatively you can double click the left m
49. Option Currency and Exceptions Only Suggestion If you run an existing report that already has a content set defined you can override the original content set by specifying a new one when you submit the report See FSG Report Parameters Oracle General Ledger User s Guide for a further description of the report parameters Optional Choose the Publishing button to set your report publishing options See Setting Report Publishing Options on page 12 18 Note When publishing to a spreadsheet the column set in the report must be lt 255 columns Optional Choose the Options button to set your report submission options See Setting Report Submission Options on page 12 30 Choose OK to submit your request or Cancel to abandon Alternatively if you want to run additional reports choose the Submit button to submit your request 12 12 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Ad Hoc Report Components Request Center Ea Financial report submitted successfully Request ID is 194773 When you submit a request you receive a message containing the Request ID number The request ID number is listed on the Pending and Completed tabs of the Request Center Locate your request by choosing the Pending or Completed tabs in the Request Center Each tab lists reports by Request ID number Financial report name under the column Program Name a Program name under the column Program Name for St
50. Sets and Request Sets from your standard application Submit Sets to group reports you frequently need such as reports you rely on for month end closing a Reports Sets support FSG reports submitted from Oracle General Ledger a Request Sets support Financial and Standard reports submitted from any Oracle Application such as Oracle General Ledger Assets Receivables or Payables For each report in your Set you can apply formatting and publishing options You can save these options in a template to use again Oracle Applications User s Guide Oracle General Ledger User s Guide 12 14 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Request Sets Oracle Assets User s Guide D To publish a Report or Request Set 1 Submit a Report or Request Set from your standard Oracle Application Oracle General Ledger or Oracle Assets Note the Request ID Navigate to the Request Center Choose the Submit and Publish Sets button from the toolbar The Submit and Publish Sets window appears Choose the Publish button The Publish Select a Set window appears Publish Select a Set Miel Ei Return last 100 requests V Query Financial Report Sets Standard Request Sets Report Set Last Run Request Request Set x 05 07 2001 KDT Test Report Set 12 28 2000 ZTEST 10 25 2000 2815 Repons TestFiow1 2 04 24 1997 End of Month Reports 03 31 1997 Financial Reports 03 31 1997 Statutory Reports 03 31 1997 Branch Reports
51. Size lt 10 Size 1 Size gt 10 and Size lt 12 Size 2 Size gt 12 and Size lt 14 Size 3 Size gt 14 and Size lt 18 Size 4 Size gt 18 and Size lt 24 Size 5 Size gt 24 and Size lt 36 Size 6 Size gt 36 Size 7 a Font Bold a Font Italic a Fore Color a Background Color a Background Image Logo Features such as cell borders background patterns Font underline page settings custom formatting macros etc available in Excel are not supported in Web Output Frequently Asked Questions 2 19 Technical Issues 2 20 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator 3 Getting Started Getting Started with ADI You start ADI directly from Microsoft Windows DB To start ADI 1 For Windows 95 or Windows NT choose Programs gt Oracle ADI gt Applications Desktop Integrator from the Start button Note If you ve already started the Request Center you can start ADI by choosing the Applications Desktop Integrator button from the Request Center toolbar 2 Choose the User Signon button from the ADI toolbar 3 Signon to ADI using your Oracle Applications username and password Security When you start ADI a toolbar appears After you sign on the system determines the functions you are authorized to access Icons for these functions appear on the toolbar if you have enabled them in your options settings Getting Started 3 1 Security See Also See ADI Opt
52. Statemen Warning 193926 SYSADMIN Cumulative Monthly Inc St Normal 193925 SYSADMIN Summary Income Statemen Warning 193924 SYSADMIN Company Income Statemen Normal 193922 SYSADMIN Actual Budget Income Stati Normal 193921 SYSADMIN Actual Budget Income Stati Normal 193915 SYSADMIN Company Income Statemen Normal 193865 OPERATIONS Company Income Statemen Error Ir To monitor a request 1 Start the Request Center if it is not already running Suggestion If ADI is running you can start the Request Center by choosing the Applications button from the ADI toolbar and selecting Requ est Center from the list of values sign on userid Choose the Monitor Request button from the Request Center toolbar The Select Request to Monitor window appears listing all requests submitted by your 12 52 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Monitoring Requests 3 Choose which requests to include in the list by setting the following Selection Criteria Request Status sIncomplete Mark this check box to include pending running or paused requests in the list Complete Mark this check box to include completed requests in the list Request Owner username Select this option to view only your own requests Note The Request Center displays the username you used to sign on to Oracle Applications All Users Select this option to view requests submitted by all users Note This opti
53. The attribute or value Applications Desktop Integrator can use to provide a standard value or default for an order attribute start organization An organization that defines a set which includes itself and all subordinate organizations in the organization hierarchy When you choose a start organization as a report parameter all organizations below the start organization are included in the report statements Printed documents you send to your customers to communicate their invoice debit memo chargeback deposit payment on account credit credit memo and adjustment activity statistical journal entry A journal entry in which you enter nonfinancial information such as headcount production units and sales units statistical quantity Statistical information relating to the unit of measure for an invoice distribution line For example when you enter invoices for office rent you can enter Square Feet or whatever Unit of Measure you define in General Ledger in the Unit field for an invoice distribution and the number of square feet in the Statistical Quantity field for an invoice distribution Applications Desktop Integrator includes the statistical quantity in the journal entries it creates for General Ledger during posting You must use General Ledger in order to define a unit of measure and to be able to enter statistical quantities statistics Accounting information other than currency amounts you use to manage your bus
54. The macro is run at the time the report is published DB To create a custom macro 1 Enter the name of the macro in the Spreadsheet Custom Macro cell If your macro and report theme are located in the same workbook you enter the name of the macro Note If your macro is located in a separate workbook that workbook must be open You can save the workbook that contains the macro in the xlStart directory so that it is always loaded when Excel is launched With this option you enter the name of the workbook and macro workbook xls macro Request Center 12 49 Viewing Report Output and Logs Viewing Report Output and Logs D To view other output or log files using the Request Center 1 From the Completed tab of the Request Center window select the entry for the completed report 2 Choose the View Output Log button from the Request Center toolbar A poplist appears For other output reports choose View Output File For log files choose View Log File The output or log file is downloaded then opened in the default output viewer you specified in the Request Center Options window See Setting Request Center Options on page 12 5 Cancelling Requests From the Request Center you can cancel pending requests or requests that are still running You can cancel any request you submit under your responsibility In addition anyone with a system administrator responsibility can cancel any pending request Note When you
55. Theme r Output Type Database C Web Page DAORANT GLDISO THEMES VISION1 1 SUMMARYINCOME_PRINT_XLS z 3 Attribute Sets DA Apply Attribute Set e L Web Page Options Publish To CATEMP Summary_Income_Statement HT x Launch Browser i Include Spreadsheet f Include Printable Copy Report Expand x Link Reports Separate Directories Publish To Enter a path and filename for the web page that ADI creates erkk Optionally press the Find button to locate the directory you want Note chosen it overrides any value you enter now If a Publish To value has been defined in the theme you ve 12 24 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Setting Report Publishing Options Launch Browser When the report output is complete ADI starts your browser software downloads the report and displays it in your browser if this box is checked Include Spreadsheet Check this box to download both web page and spreadsheet output When you view the report in your browser there is a link you can choose to retrieve the spreadsheet version of the report This option only appears for FSG and Ad Hoc reports Include Text Plain File Check this box to download both web page and text output When you view the report in your browser there is a link you can choose to retrieve the text version of the report Note This option only appears for standard reports
56. Total T 000 5100 000 000 000 Commissions Expense 4 426 197 50 4 426 197 50 F Total 4 426 197 50 4 426 197 50 ca rt Show Detail Accounts gt D To drill down to summary accounts 1 From the Context window choose the Show Summary Accounts button The Summary Balances window appears 7 6 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Drilling Down to Summary and Detail Accounts To drill down further select a summary balance then choose the Show Detail Accounts button This displays the balances of the detail accounts associated with the summary balance To drill down to journal details select a detail balance then choose the Show Journal Details button Alternatively choose the Return to Summary Accounts button to return to the Summary Balances window For more information about how drilldowns work see Analysis Wizard Drilldown Flows on page 7 13 Detail Balances Net JUN 31 Total 01 000 4100 000 000 000 Sales Parts and Service Revenue i 1 740 000 00 1 740 000 00 03 000 4100 000 000 000 Sales Parts and Service Revenue 2 105 400 00 2 105 400 00 04 000 4100 000 000 000 Sales Parts and Service Revenue 2 315 940 00 2 315 940 00 05 000 4100 000 000 000 Sales Parts and Service Revenue 2 547 534 00 2 547 534 00 Total 8 708 874 00 8 708 874 00 ist mt lt Show Summary Accounts Show Journal Details gt
57. Traditional mathematical nesting uses parenthesis and brackets Applications Desktop Integrator EasyCalc uses a straightforward and logical nesting method that eliminates the need for parenthetical expressions net allocation Allocation in which you post the net of all allocations to an allocated out account node An instance of an activity in an Oracle Workflow process diagram as shown in the Process window of Oracle Workflow Builder See also process non labor invoice burden schedule A burden schedule used to derive invoice amounts for non labor items non labor resource An implementation defined asset or pool of assets For example you can define a non labor resource with a name such as PC to represent multiple personal computers your business owns non labor revenue burden schedule A burden schedule used to derive revenue amounts for non labor items non posting hold A hold that prevents you from paying your invoice but allows posting All holds prevent payment but you can decide if you want to allow or disallow posting for each hold you define non quota sales credit See non revenue sales credit non revenue credit Revenue credit you assign to your agents that is not associated with your invoice lines This is revenue credit given in excess of your revenue credit See also revenue credit non revenue sales credit Sales credit you assign to your salespeople that is not associated with your invoice lines This i
58. Unbilled Receivables and the Unbilled Revenue accounts on account Payments where you intentionally apply all or part of the payment amount to a customer without reference to a debit item On account examples include prepayments and deposits on account credits Credits that you assign to your customer s account that are not related to a specific invoice You can create on account credits in the Transactions window or using AutolInvoice on account payment The status of a payment of which you apply all or part of its amount to a customer without reference to a specific debit item Examples of these are prepayments and deposits one time billing hold A type of hold that places expenditure items and events on billing hold for a particular invoice when you release that invoice the items are billed on the next invoice operating unit An organization that partitions data for subledger products AP AR PA PO OE It is roughly equivalent to a single pre Multi Org installation one time note A unique message you can attach to orders returns order lines and return lines to convey important information See also standard note online processing When during the execution of a single process no further input is allowed until the process is complete open batch Status of a batch that is in balance but contains unapplied or unidentified payments open interface transaction Any transaction not created by an Oracle Financia
59. X Indicates that the field must be assigned in either the layout header or lines Help Cancel DB To create a new layout template 1 2 3 From the Create Assets window choose the Actions button Choose the New option from the poplist Enter a name for the new layout template At the Edit Layout window use the drag and drop functions and the directional buttons to arrange the fields on your layout template Choose OK See Editing Layout Templates on page 9 6 DB To customize an existing layout template 1 From the Create Assets window select a layout to customize and choose the Actions button Choose the View Edit option from the poplist At the Edit Layout window edit the layout Choose OK 9 4 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Asset Worksheet Parameters See Editing Layout Templates on page 9 6 DB To copy an existing layout template 1 From the Create Assets window select a layout to copy Choose the Actions button 2 Choose the Copy option from the poplist 3 Enter a unique name for the copied layout template Choose OK DB To rename an existing layout template 1 From the Create Assets window select a layout to rename Choose the Actions button Choose the Rename option from the poplist Enter the new name of the layout template Choose OK From the Create Assets window choose the layout template you want to delete Choose the Actions button Select the Delete option
60. You can skip or omit numbers if desired sequencing A parameter you can set when defining your dunning letter sets to ensure that your customers and sites receive proper notification of past due debit items Sequencing ensures that a customer receives each of the dunning letters in their dunning letter set in the proper order See also document sequence serial number A number assigned to each unit of an item and used to track the item serial number control A system technique for enforcing use of serial numbers during a material transaction such as receipt or shipment service type An implementation defined classification of the type of work performed on a task set of books A financial reporting entity that uses a particular chart of accounts functional currency and accounting calendar You must define at least one set of books for each business location set of books An organization or group of organizations within Applications Desktop Integrator that shares a common account structure calendar and functional currency An organization or group of organizations within Oracle Applications that shares a common Accounting Flexfield structure calendar and functional currency You must define at least one set of books for each business location soft limit The default option for an agreement that generates a warning when you accrue revenue or generate invoices beyond the amount allocated to a project or task by the agr
61. Your report output reflects the deleted rows amp SetOfBooksName amp CurrentPeriod amp Currency Tokens amp SubmissionDate Row Sequence Number amp ContentSetExpansionValue Column Sequence Number lt Line Item Line Item gt amp 10 amp 20 amp 30 amp 40 amp 50 amp 60 S amp Headingt amp Heading2 amp Heading3 amp Heading4 amp Heading5 amp Heading E amp defav_line_format 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 15 amp 10 Line Item1 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 16 amp 20 Line Item2 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 4 000 00 1 000 00 830 Line item3 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 EA 240 Line Item 4 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 4 000 00 1 000 00 Line Item5 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 Line Item 6 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 Line Item7 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 Line Item8 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 Line Item9 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 4 000 00 1 000 00 Background t Publish To eet Custom Macro Tip If you add a logo to a theme it will automatically be Tip Shortcut Double click in an output region to open displayed on report output the advanced formatting window Tip Only GIF and JPEG file formats are supported for backgrounds
62. about your asset categories You use your Category Flexfield to define how you want to keep the information chargebacks A new debit item that you assign to your customer when closing an existing outstanding debit item child segment value A detail level segment value that is part of a parent segment value chart of accounts The account structure your organization uses to record transactions and maintain account balances chart of accounts structure A classification of account segment values that assigns a particular range of values a common characteristic For example 1000 to 1999 might be the range of segment values for assets in the account segment of your accounting flexfield check A bill of exchange drawn on a bank and payable on demand Or a written order on a bank to pay on demand a specified sum of money to a named person to his or her order or to the bearer out of money on deposit to the credit of the maker A check differs from a warrant in that a warrant is not necessarily payable on demand and may not be negotiable It differs from a voucher in that a voucher is not an order to pay check box You can indicate an on off or yes no state for a value by checking or unchecking its check box One or more check boxes can be checked since each check box is independent of other check boxes check overflow A check printing situation where there are more invoices paid by a check than can fit on the remittance advice of
63. according to your purchase approval process and better control your planned expenditures You can also attach an encumbrance type to your invoices for reporting purposes Examples of encumbrance types are commitments requisition encumbrances and obligations purchase order encumbrances end of day balance The actual balance of a general ledger account at the end of a day This balance includes all transactions whose effective date precedes or is the same as the calendar day ending balance The ending balance represents the balance of the transaction as of the ending GL Date that you have specified This column should be the same as the Outstanding Balance of the Aging 7 Buckets Report for this item EU The EU European Union is a single European market where customs and tariff barriers between member states have been removed engineer to order An environment where customers order unique configurations that engineering must define and release custom bills for material and routings that specify how to build them Oracle Manufacturing Release 10 does not provide special support for Glossary 53 Glossary 54 this environment beyond the support it provides for assemble to order manufacturing engineering change order ECO A record of revisions to one or more items usually released by engineering euro A single currency adopted by the 11 member countries of the European Monetary Union EMU beginning January 1 1999 These c
64. added accounts must fall into the budget organization that was originally downloaded Question Can I create and upload a new budget worksheet without first doing a budget download No You must create the budget worksheet in Excel first even if that means you must download a single account If you want to upload data from another source Frequently Asked Questions 2 9 Functional Issues create the budget worksheet then use Excel s cell referencing or cut amp paste functions to transfer amounts into the worksheet Question Is it possible to permit users to download without giving them upload privileges without defining a password for the budget organization Yes The ADI security profile options that are available in General Ledger provide this level of control Additional Information See Enabling Security within ADI Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Installation Guide Question Why do my period names appear as numbers after retrieving report output into Excel using Reports Excel converts any value that looks like a date into its numeric equivalent To ensure that Excel treats your period names as labels put at least one space before the amp POI token in the report definition column headings Question Are Standard Variable Format reports available for all Oracle Applications Release 11i supports Standard Variable Format reports for General Ledger Oracle Assets and Accounts Receivable Question Can su
65. adjoining blank rows in a physical inventory worksheet as the end of the physical inventory entry Therefore any lines that appear after three blank rows will be ignored when you upload your physical inventory data Record Physical Inventory 10 9 Uploading Physical Inventory Data into Oracle Assets Figure 10 1 Uploading Physical Inventory Data Enter physical inventory information into the physical inventory worksheet Elle Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help a xl A B c D E Tieu Cuntoxe FiewHeeser Inventory Name HQ SEPT 93 Database adil ISA CA SAN FRANCH Upload to interface Choose the Upload to Interface button SFFFFTITST ee Note This is not the end of the Inventory worksheet Unprotect the sheet and insert as m SIMII Inventory 2 Hssethifare nt j a This action populates the interface table in Oracle Assets FA_INV_INVENTORY eE Submit Compare Physical Inventory process Automatic Procedure Submitted automatically if you chose the auto submit option when uploading physical inventory data Manual Procedure Choose the Submit Process button to start the Compare Physical Inventory process 10 10 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Uploading Physical Inventory Data into Oracle Assets Upload Physical Inventory to Interface
66. aitse eei r a t aara aa NEEE aah 5 2 Journal Worksheet Options iisaensneenui nn e S a E a 5 4 Choose Jo rnal Typ nss siren eea aE a vie a a E r E r EA AS Ra RE 5 5 Numb rof Journals ss ressentit e e aiii E e aE E a elias 5 5 Create Works hett iniiaiith ER AE EENE EAEE 5 5 Customizing Journal Worksheets cccccscccssssesesccscesesescscsesesesescscssseseececscssseseesecssensneseseeenes 5 6 Worksheet lab sata cist Deceit Seca testis teeta a ete su ea e iN Seon dines TA E a 5 7 Header Tabon tienenia ee a n iare aae teea Lesh i sable besten cesseds 5 8 Limes Tabirini a aa ae eoa E E a a a a a a eriat 5 10 Creating Journal Entries Using ADI ss ss sssssssssssississsessesiestestnssentestesessnnstestestnsnnntestentesnessestenee 5 12 a e E IE A N T E E E A A A IE E E E slabtens 5 15 Uploading Journal Entries from ADI to General Ledger s ss sssssisssssserisrrssrsssesieseesressesens 5 17 Journal Upload Options asiente oekoer aa aa aa ripe Aaaa aae AE a keeg 5 21 6 Report Wizard Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard se sssssesssesesseessessestestssessnestentessesnesnenreneess 6 1 PTCTEGUISILES wit sigre e RA E E A NA Met ae teen Alas 6 2 Reports Tool Dart miiie eea ea aa a EEE aa a a e aaa a aa td lene ae 6 2 Report Wi atd Intetf c nnen en e e AE tia ands ERE N A A AE 6 4 Report Wizard TOS cz iiss ieee c2h suse e a E a E a 6 5 Collapsible Expandable Regions 0 cccceeecce sess cessesssssses
67. also sometimes known as a list Post QuickCash Receipts entered through the QuickCash window or using AutoLockbox are stored in interim tables this lets you review them to ensure that all receipt and application information is correct After verifying that all information is correct you can run Post QuickCash to update your customer s account balances See also QuickCash posting The process of updating account balances in your general ledger from journal entries Applications Desktop Integrator uses the term posting to describe the process of transferring posting information to your general ledger When you initiate posting in Applications Desktop Integrator Applications Desktop Integrator transfers your invoice and payment transactions and sets the status of the payments and invoices to posted You must use your general ledger to create journal entries and post the journal entries to update your account balances The process of updating account balances in your general ledger from journal entries You can initiate posting in Oracle Payables and Oracle Receivables You must use your general ledger to create journal entries and post the journal entries to update your account balances Note that Oracle Applications sometimes use the term posting to describe the process of transferring posting information to your general ledger See also Journal Import posting hold A hold that prevents you from posting an invoice You also cannot pay an i
68. an alert check For example if an alert checking for invoices that Approval places on funds hold finds five such invoices each invoice is an exception exception reporting Exception reporting is an integrated system of alerts messages and distribution lists to focus attention on time sensitive or critical information streamline your communication channels shorten your reaction time and eliminate your information clutter Exception reporting communicates information by either electronic mail or paper reports exchange rate A rate that represents the amount of one currency that you can exchange for another at a particular point in time Oracle Applications use the daily periodic and historical exchange rates you maintain to perform foreign currency conversion revaluation and translation A rate that represents the amount in one currency that you can exchange for another at a particular point in time You can enter and maintain daily exchange rates for Applications Desktop Integrator to use to perform foreign currency conversion Applications Desktop Integrator multiplies the exchange rate by the foreign currency to calculate the functional currency exchange rate type A specification of the source of an exchange rate For example a user exchange rate or a corporate exchange rate See also corporate exchange rate spot exchange rate exchange rate variance The difference between the exchange rate for a foreign currency invoice and i
69. any report you create with this report output theme The 12 36 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Customizing Themes for Financial Reports background you choose is automatically applied to spreadsheet and web published reports The Request Center uses the most appropriate graphics file format when publishing reports that include a background For example if you choose a BMP file when publishing web output the Request Center will first try to locate a GIF file of the same name If a GIF file cannot be found Request Center will use the BMP file specified Note Not all web browsers can display BMP files 9 When you are finished making changes save the theme See Also Formatting Report Output Formatting with Tokens Cell Level Formatting General Options on page 3 19 Request Center 12 37 Customizing Themes for Financial Reports Positioning Line Items backgrounds in Web output Spreadsheet output however supports all background file formats Tip Only GIF and JPEG file formats are supported for IES A B G D E F E Z 3 amp ReportTitle 4 5 8 amp SetOfBooksName 6 amp CurrentPeriod amp Currency 7 amp SubmissionDate T Line Item a Gai Bi Position Buttons 9 amp ContentSetExpansionValue K Line Kew ie n gt 10 11 amp 10 amp 20 amp 30 amp 50
70. are shippable components of models kits option classes and option items See also bill of material pick to order standard item income tax region The region or state you assign to paid invoice distribution lines for a 1099 supplier If you participate in the Combined Filing Program Applications Desktop Integrator produces K records for all income tax regions participating in the Combined Filing Program that have qualifying payments income tax type A type of payment you make to 1099 suppliers With Applications Desktop Integrator you can assign an income tax type to each paid invoice distribution line for a supplier The Internal Revenue Service IRS requires that you report by income tax type payments made to 1099 suppliers incomplete invoice An invoice whose status has not been changed to Complete or that has failed validation indirect project A project for which you cannot generate revenue or invoices Generally you use indirect projects for the administration of overhead costs such as overtime Typical indirect project types include Bid and Proposal and Overtime installment One of many successive payments of a debt You specify a payment schedule when you define your payment terms installment number A number that identifies the installment for a specific transaction intraEU taxed transaction Transactions between non registered traders in different EU European Union countries VAT must be charged to cu
71. by activating the Converted Debit and Converted Credit optional fields on the Lines tab of the Define Worksheet Layout window General Ledger uses the converted value you enter See the Notes below for information about converted journal entries when the GLDI Converted Entry Threshold profile option is enabled Note Journals uploaded from ADI to General Ledger must pass EURO currency validation checks EMU Fixed is the only type currency that can be used for ADI journals with a Euro derived rate The exchange rate is derived from rate tables maintained by General Ledger See Oracle General Ledger User s Guide for more information 5 Enter information for any optional fields that you specified if you customized the journal worksheet 6 Upload your journals to General Ledger Note With the MRC Account Type Specific Conversion feature you no longer have to repeatedly run revaluation and translation to get your most current reporting currency balances With ADI Release 7 0 and above this functionality can be extended to foreign currency journals entered in the primary set of books See MRC Account Type Specific Conversion Oracle Multiple Reporting Curren cies in Oracle Applications posted on Metalink Notes For many of the fields on a journal worksheet you can select from a list of values See Choosing Account Segment Values on page 3 38 Journal Wizard 5 15 Creating Journal Entries U
72. change the budget budget organization currency or period range for a budget worksheet 1 While viewing a budget worksheet choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Enter Budget from the list of values 2 Select Edit Budget Criteria then choose OK ADI displays the Edit Budget Worksheet window showing the entries for your current worksheet 3 Enter your new budget worksheet parameters 4 Choose OK to save your changes See Also Budget Worksheet Parameters on page 4 6 Choosing Account Segment Values on page 3 38 Budget Worksheet Parameters When you use the Budget Wizard to create a budget worksheet or edit budget criteria you must specify certain parameters Once you set these parameters ADI creates a budget worksheet or modifies the currently open budget worksheet based on the parameters you ve provided There are two groups of parameters you can set budget Criteria and Worksheet Options In addition you can view the budget Status Criteria Budget Criteria specify the budget organization and budget you want to use in your budget worksheet as well as the currency and range of periods to use For each of these fields the list of values displays Organization Budget organizations you have defined in General Ledger Your budget organization determines the accounts against which you can budget Budget Budgets you have defined in General Ledger Note You can choose to download data from fr
73. choose to start the Create Assets process automatically ADI will do the following after the upload completes Submit your Create Assets request Submit a concurrent request to monitor your Create Assets request Display a window showing Number of errors in the upload to the interface table Post Mass Additions request ID Asset Wizard 9 11 Asset Upload Options A message indicating that a concurrent request has been submitted for the Post Mass Additions request ID m Asset Status Choose whether asset entries have a status of New On Hold or Post See Also Import Text File Feature on page 11 1 Oracle Assets System Setup Oracle Assets User s Guide Submitting Processes on page 3 42 9 12 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator 10 Record Physical Inventory Record Physical Inventory Feature The Record Physical Inventory feature provides a spreadsheet based interface to simplify the physical inventory process Use the Record Physical Inventory feature to automatically build personalized inventory spreadsheets based on the information required by your organization s specific implementation of Oracle Assets You can enter your inventory data manually use the list of values and take advantage of Excel s data entry shortcuts You can also map files created from scanned barcode data into the inventory worksheet When you are satisfied with the worksheet the Record Physical Inventory feature automatically
74. column When you upload Budget Wizard 4 13 Updating Budget Balances Using ADI your budget worksheet to General Ledger you can choose to upload all rows in the worksheet or only those marked with the flag character Note If you use Excel s copy and paste functions to replace an existing value ADI does not enter a flag character in the Upload column You can manually enter one by placing your cursor in the upload column cell where you want the flag character then entering any character or number from your keyboard DB To update budget balance manually D While viewing a budget worksheet edit your budget balances by entering new values by copying and pasting values from other cells or by entering Excel formulas If you copy and paste values from other cells remember to manually enter a flag character in the Upload column Apply Budget Rules r Budget Rules Rule Divide Evenly by Row M Amount 5000 00 Range 113 L21 Sample 1250 1250 When you are building your budget with ADI you can use the Apply Budget Rule feature to quickly generate entries in your budget This feature is quite useful when the values in a range of cells are to be the same or are computed in the same manner You apply a budget rule to a range of cells in your worksheet DB To update budget balance using budget rules 1 Select a range of cells in the worksheet The budget rule you select app
75. configuration that order pickers gather as separately finished included items just before they ship the order See also kit pick to order PTO model An item with an associated bill of material with optional and included items At order entry the configurator is used to choose the optional items to include for the order The order picker gets a detailed list of the chosen options and included items to gather as separately finished items just before the order is shipped picking The process of withdrawing items from inventory to be shipped to a customer picking batch A user defined group of pick slips for orders that you release for picking all at once You create picking batches when you release your orders for shipping For example a batch can contain all shipments for a specific warehouse or all priority shipments regardless of warehouse picking line A picking line is an instruction to pick a specific quantity of a specific item for a specific order Each pick slip contains one or more picking lines depending on the number of distinct items released on the pick slip picking rule A user defined set of criteria to define the priorities Oracle Order Entry uses when picking items out of finished goods inventory to ship to a customer Picking rules are defined in Oracle Inventory planned purchase order A type of purchase order you issue before you order delivery of goods and services for specific dates and locations You usu
76. earned discounts See also earned discounts unearned discounts payment terms discrete job A production order for the manufacture of a specific discrete quantity of an assembly using specific materials and resources within a limited range of time A discrete job collects the costs of production and allows you to report those costs including variances by job Also known as work order or assembly order Glossary 47 Glossary 48 display group A range of rows or columns in your row set or column set for which you want to control the display in your report You assign a display group to a display set where you specify whether you want to display or hide your rows or columns display set A Financial Statement Generator report component you build within Applications Desktop Integrator to control the display of ranges of rows and columns in a report without reformatting the report or losing header information You can define a display set that works for reports with specific row and column sets Alternatively you can define a generic display set that works for any report distribution line A line corresponding to an accounting transaction for an expenditure item on an invoice or a liability on a payment Information such as employee general ledger depreciation expense account and location to which you have assigned an asset You can create any number of distribution lines for each asset Oracle Assets uses distribution lines t
77. equal the total credits to company 01 An Accounting Flexfield segment that you define so that Applications Desktop Integrator automatically balances all journal entries for each value of this segment For example if your fund segment is a balancing segment Oracle Public Sector General Ledger assures that with every journal entry the total debits to Fund 01 equals the total credits to Fund 01 bank file The data file you receive from the bank that contains all of the payment information that the bank has deposited in your bank account The electronic statement file you receive from your bank for example BAI format or SWIFT940 It contains all transaction information that the bank has processed through your bank account bank statement A report sent from a bank to a customer showing all transaction activity for a bank account for a specific period of time Bank statements report beginning balance deposits made checks cleared bank charges credits and ending balance Enclosed with the bank statement are cancelled checks debit memos and credit memos Large institutional banking customers usually receive electronic bank statements as well as the paper versions bank statement tables The primary database tables Oracle Cash Management works with for each bank statement Bank statement tables are populated manually or by importing data from Bank Statement Open Interface There are two tables for each bank statement a bank statement
78. file recoverable cost The lesser of the cost ceiling or the current asset cost less the salvage value and ITC basis reduction amount Recoverable cost is the total amount of depreciation you are allowed to take on an asset throughout its life recurring formula See recurring journal entry recurring invoice A feature that lets you create invoices for an expense that occurs regularly and is not usually invoiced Monthly rents and lease payments are examples of typical recurring payments You define recurring invoice templates and Applications Desktop Integrator lets you define recurring invoices using these templates See also recurring rule recurring journal entry A journal entry you define once then at your request General Ledger repeats the journal entry for you each accounting period You use recurring journal entries to define automatic consolidating and eliminating entries Also known as recurring formula recurring rule A rule that is applied to the model invoice to determine the invoice dates of the recurring invoices You can choose Annually Bi Monthly Days Monthly Quarterly Semi Annually Single Copy and Weekly recurring schedule A schedule used to determine the number of recurring invoices created You specify the recurring rule and number of recurring invoices you want to create reference designator An optional identifier you can assign to a component on a bill For example when the bill requires f
79. flexfield opens if the country you enter has a flexible address style assigned to it allowing you to enter an address in the layout associated with that country FOB Free On Board The point or location where the ownership title of goods is transferred from the seller to the buyer This indicates that delivery of a shipment will be made on board or into a carrier by the shipper without charge and is usually followed by a shipping point or destination e g FOB Our warehouse in New York Receivables QuickCode folder A flexible entry and display window in which you can choose the fields you want to see and where each appears in the window folder A flexible entry and display window in which you can choose the fields you want to see and where each appears in the window See Customizing the Presentation of Data follow up date The date when you plan to perform a subsequent action Examples include a date that you specify for verifying that you have received payment or a date that you note for calling the customer again forecast An estimate of future demand on inventory items A forecast contains information on the original and current forecast quantities before and after consumption the confidence factor and any specific customer information You can assign any number of inventory items to the forecast and use the same item in multiple forecasts For each inventory item you specify any number of forecast entries fore
80. for a group of assets in a single transaction mass change order A record of a plan to replace delete or update one or more component items in many bills of material at the same time Mass Copy A feature that allows you to copy a group of asset transactions from your corporate book to a tax book Use Initial Mass Copy to create a new tax book Then use Periodic Mass Copy each period to update the tax book with new assets and transactions Mass Depreciation Adjustment A feature that allows you to adjust the depreciation expense in the previous fiscal year for all assets in a tax book Oracle Assets adjusts the depreciation expense between the minimum and maximum depreciation amounts by a depreciation adjustment factor you specify Mass Purge See archive purge restore Mass Revaluation See revaluation Mass Transfers A feature that allows you to transfer a group of assets between locations employees and general ledger depreciation expense accounts Glossary 89 Glossary 90 MassAllocations A single journal entry formula that allocates revenues and expenses across a group of cost centers departments divisions and so on For example you might want to allocate your employee benefit costs to each of your departments based on headcount in each department MassBudgeting A feature that allows you to build a complete budget using simple formulas based on actual results other budget amounts and statistics For ex
81. from the ADI toolbar and select Define Report from the list of values Select Define Report as your Report Wizard task then choose Next 6 16 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Saving a Report Using Report Wizard See Also Dapa og Select Load Existing Report then choose Next Enter optional Reduction Criteria then choose OK Select an existing report from the list of values Optional To make a copy of the existing report check the Make Copy check box The system gives your report a unique name by including a date and time stamp For example Report date time You can change the name by using the Report Object Properties window or directly in the Names and Descriptions region of the report worksheet Select the destination for the report worksheet Choose Finish to create the report worksheet To open a saved report worksheet 1 2 Select File gt Open from the Excel menu Select the path where the report worksheet is located Excel will display the names of the files in a separate list Choose the report worksheet name from the list of values Select OK to open the file or Cancel to abort If ADI is installed but not running ADI starts automatically when you open the report worksheet Report Wizard Interface on page 6 5 Reports Toolbar on page 6 2 Report Wizard Tools on page 6 5 Creating a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 12 Saving a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 17
82. from the Notes in Sheet region of the Cell Note window To edit the note make your changes in the Text Note region then choose OK to save your changes To delete the note choose Delete from the Cell Note window then choose OK Choose OK or Close to return to your budget worksheet Updating Budget Balances Using ADI on page 4 13 ADI Toolbar on page 3 3 Budget Wizard 4 17 Graphing Budgets Using ADI Graphing Budgets Using ADI You can use ADI to view your budget balances as area charts bar graphs column graphs line graphs or pie charts If you download both budget and actual balances from General Ledger you can plot both values on your graph DB To create and display a graph of your budget values 1 Select the contiguous range of cells you want to view as a graph Additional Information Select only those worksheet cells that contain or could contain budget values Do not select column headings and row labels when you specify the range ADI automatically uses the column headings and row labels from your budget worksheet as labels in your graphs 2 Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Create Graph from the list of values The system creates your graph in a new worksheet in your Excel workbook The appearance of the graph depends on your budget worksheet parameters as well as the default settings you defined for graphs The system gives the graph a name relative to the budget worksheet F
83. from the poplist N 9 o FP YOY DN Choose Yes to confirm that you want to delete the layout template BD To view an existing layout template 1 From the Create Assets window select a layout to view and choose the Actions button 2 Choose the View Edit option from the poplist 3 Choose Cancel when you are finished viewing the layout template Actions Button Options D New Choose this option to create a new layout template D View Edit Choose this option to view or edit an existing layout template Note When you choose this option when the default template is selected you have the option only to view the default template You cannot edit the default template Asset Wizard 9 5 Asset Worksheet Parameters D Copy Choose this option to copy an existing layout template T Rename Choose this option to rename an existing layout template Note You cannot rename the default template 1 Delete Choose this option to delete an existing layout template Note You cannot delete the default template Editing Layout Templates 1 Required Fields When editing a layout template you must ensure you include all required fields in the template Otherwise ADI will not be able to create your asset worksheet Required fields are indicated by a red asterisk 1 Directional Buttons Use the directional buttons to change the display sequence of fields in the header or body of your ass
84. headers table and a bank statement lines table Bank Statement Open Interface The database interface tables that must be populated when you automatically load an electronic bank file into Oracle Cash Management The Bank Statement Open Interface consists of one header and multiple detail lines for each bank statement bank transaction code The transaction code used by a bank to identify types of transactions on a bank statement such as debits credits bank charges and interest You define these codes for each bank account using the Cash Management Bank Transaction Codes window Bankers Automated Clearing System BACS The standard format of electronic funds transfer used in the United Kingdom You can refer to the BACS User Manual Part III Input Media Specifications published by the Bankers Automated Clearing System for the exact specifications for BACS electronic payments base amount The amount that represents the denominator for the ratio used to determine the amount due You specify your base amount when you define your payment terms Amount Due Relative Amount Base Amount Invoice Amount base model The model item from which a configuration item was created baseline budget The authorized budget for a project or task which is used for performance reporting and revenue calculation basis reduction rate Each Investment Tax Credit Rate has a basis reduction rate associated with it Oracle Assets applies the ba
85. hierarchy Note that if you remove a parent node you also remove its assigned child values There is a toolbar icon for this menu selection Account Hierarchy Editor 8 11 The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu Rollup Groups Opens the Rollup Groups window where you can create a new rollup group or edit an existing rollup group Node Properties Changes the color and style of the rectangles used to represent parent and child nodes in a hierarchy diagram You can also choose to display segment values descriptions or both as the node labels Also you can change the text color of the node label There is a toolbar icon for this menu selection Font Changes the Font Font Style and Size of the text used in your hierarchy diagrams Note that if you want your fonts to display correctly when using the View Zoom In and View Zoom Out functions you must change the default font System Color Background Color Changes the background color of the Hierarchy Diagram windows Line Color Changes the color of the connecting lines in hierarchy diagrams View Menu The View Menu includes the following selections Value List If the Segment Values window is closed this menu item opens it Vertical Changes the orientation of the hierarchy diagram to a typical tree structure Child nodes are displayed beneath and slightly indented from the parent node There is a toolbar icon for this menu selection Column Changes the orientation of t
86. in Web output Spreadsheet output however supports all background file formats 38 fiafia lH Theme 1 ial Request Center 12 43 Customizing Themes for Financial Reports Line Item and Amounts Regions See Also To apply cell level formatting to the line item and amounts regions of your theme follow the tasks below for General Ledger Release 11i 11 0 or 10 7 Release 11 0 and later Your report definition created in General Ledger or ADI uses sequence numbers to locate the position of rows and columns in your report output Use these sequence numbers in your report themes to apply formatting to specific areas of your report definition The Request Center matches the formatting specified in your report theme with the information in your report definition to generate formatted report output Sequence numbers also act as tokens by automatically inserting row and column descriptions in the Line Item and Column Heading areas of your report output To view sequence numbers associated with your report refer to your report definition in General Ledger or choose the View Output Log Button in the Request Center toolbar and select View Output File Defining Rows and Columns Financial Reporting Oracle General Ledger User Guide To apply individual cell formatting to your financial statement report output Release 11 0 and later 1 Use your report definition or view output in the Request C
87. in ascending or descending order based on a selected column and rearrange the sequence of segments in your Accounting Flexfield For example to review Total Expenditures in descending order by project you can rank rows in descending order by the Total Expenditures column and rearrange your segments so the project row appears first on the report row set A Financial Statement Generator report component that you build within Applications Desktop Integrator by defining all of the lines in your report For each row you control the format and content including line descriptions indentations spacing page breaks calculations units of measure precision and so on A typical row set includes row labels accounts and calculation rows for totals For example you might define a standard income statement row set or a standard balance sheet row set A report component you build within Applications Desktop Integrator by defining all of the rows in your report For each row you control the format and content including line descriptions indentations spacing page breaks calculations units of measure precision and so on rule numbers A sequential step in a calculation You use rule numbers to specify the order in which you want Applications Desktop Integrator to process the factors you use in your budget and actual formulas segments The building blocks of your chart of accounts in Oracle General Ledger Each account is comprised of multiple
88. in the corporate book or the amount needed to bring the accumulated depreciation up to the accumulated depreciation in the control book memo pad An area where you write as many notes as you need regarding your conversation with a customer message The text or data that Oracle Alert sends when it finds an exception while running an alert message distribution See distribution list A line at the bottom of the toolbar that displays helpful hints warning messages and basic data entry errors On the same line ZOOM PICK EDIT and HELP lamps appear to let you know when Zoom QuickPick Edit and online help features are available Glossary 91 Glossary 92 message line A line on the bottom of a window that displays helpful hints or warning messages when you encounter an error meta data Data you enter in Oracle General Ledger to represent structures in Oracle Financial Analyzer Meta data consists of the dimensions segment range sets hierarchies financial data items and financial data sets you define in Oracle General Ledger When you load financial data from Oracle General Ledger Oracle Financial Analyzer creates dimensions dimension values hierarchies and variables based on the meta data model A set of interrelated equations for calculating data in Oracle Financial Analyzer MICR number Magnetic Ink Character Recognition number A number that appears on a receipt and associates your customer with a ban
89. it D To delete a database from the list 1 Select the applications database name from the Current Database poplist 2 Choose the Delete button 3 Choose Yes to delete the database from the list or No to keep it Signing On to ADI on page 3 10 Choosing a Responsibility on page 3 15 Choosing a Responsibility A responsibility is the level of authority you have been given to access functions and data in Oracle Applications Depending on your job requirements you may have more than one responsibility each associated with one set of books in Oracle General Ledger or Oracle Assets Your system administrator sets up your responsibilities A responsibility is the level of authority you have been given to access functions and data in Oracle Applications Depending on your job requirements you may have more than one responsibility each of which is associated with one set of books in General Ledger or Oracle Assets Your system administrator sets up your responsibilities You can use ADI to upload journals to the set of books to which you have been given access under a responsibility You can also download budgets from General Ledger modify them and upload your changes if your responsibility allows You can create and submit reports for that set of books associated with your responsibility You can create assets log physical inventory and upload asset data to the set of books to which you have been given responsibility Note If
90. items of a particular category that share the same set of item attributes used as a high level grouping for processes For example each Account Generator item type e g FA Account Generator contains a group of processes for determining how an Accounting Flexfield code combination is created See also item type attribute item type attribute A feature of a particular Oracle Workflow item type also known as an item attribute An item type attribute is defined as a variable whose value can be looked up and set by the application that maintains the item An item type attribute and its value is available to all activities in a process Item Validation Organization The organization that contains your master list of items You define this organization by setting the OE Item Validation Organization profile option You must define all items and bills in your Item Validation Organization but you also need to maintain your items and bills in separate organizations if you want to ship them from other warehouses Oracle Order Entry refers to organizations as warehouses on all Order Entry forms and reports See also organization job A name for a set of duties to which an employee may be assigned You create jobs in Oracle Projects by combining a job level and a job discipline using your job key flexfield structure For example you can combine the job level Staff with the job discipline Engineer to create the job Staff Engineer job billing title
91. journal entries or an Encumbrance Type for encumbrance journal entries 2 Enter an Account for each journal line by entering the account directly or by choosing from a list of values See Choosing Account Segment Values on page 3 38 3 Enter a Debit or Credit amount for each journal line You can use Excel formulas to enter your amounts 4 Enter information for any optional fields that you specified if you customized the journal worksheet 5 Upload your journals to General Ledger Note Unprotect your worksheet to insert additional rows into the journal template Choose Tools gt Protection gt Unprotect from the Excel menu DB To create Foreign Actuals journal entries 1 Enter the Category Source Accounting Date Currency and Conversion Type 2 Enter the Conversion Date and or Conversion Rate as required a Ifyou selected conversion type User you must enter a Conversion Rate You do not enter a Conversion Date a Ifyou selected a conversion type other than User you must enter a Conversion Date You do not enter a Conversion Rate General Ledger provides the rate when you import your journals 3 Enter an Account for each journal line 4 Enter a Debit or Credit amount for each journal line 5 14 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Creating Journal Entries Using ADI Note General Ledger automatically calculates the converted value for foreign currency amounts You can override this
92. journal entry that does not balance by balancing segment value or fund interfund journal entry A journal entry that records transactions between affiliates Applications Desktop Integrator keeps your accounting records in balance for each fund by automatically creating offsetting entries to an interfund account you define interfund transfer All interfund transactions except for loans advances quasi external transactions and reimbursements intermediate value The parameter value constant or SQL statement result that is determined during the first step in the execution of an AutoAccounting rule internal organization See organization internal requisition See internal sales order purchase requisition internal sales order A request within your company for goods or services An internal sales order originates from an employee or from another process as a requisition such as inventory or manufacturing and becomes an internal sales order when the information is transferred from Purchasing to Order Entry Also known as internal requisition or purchase requisition intransit inventory Items being shipped from one inventory organization to another While items are intransit you can view and update arrival date freight charges and so on inventory controls Parameter settings that control how Oracle Inventory will function such as lot locator and serial number control inventory item Items that you stock i
93. new parent segment value you cannot delete it You can however disable the segment value at any time by unmarking the Enable check box on the Parent Attributes window Account Hierarchy Editor 8 21 Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor 8 Mark the appropriate check boxes if you want to Allow Posting and Allow Budgeting for this segment value 9 Optionally assign child value ranges to your parent value See the next task 10 Choose OK then save your work DB To assign child value ranges to a parent value 1 Choose the parent value from the Segment Values window to which you want to assign child value ranges The Parent Attributes window appears 2 Choose New The Range window appears 3 Select Parent Range or Child Range as the range type Note A parent range includes only the parent segment values falling within the range A child range includes all child values falling within the range 4 Enter a segment value range Range segment values must comply with the security rules you defined for the value set associated with the segment Values are validated when you close the Parent Attributes window Additional Information You can enter overlapping child ranges for a parent segment value However each segment value in the overlapping ranges is only assigned to the parent once Attention If you change parent child relationships that affect exis
94. on the Request Center options window Format Report Output Set the formatting options for your report output You can also select from predefined report themes or define your own Publish Output Download and publish a selected request s report output to a web page Excel worksheet text viewer or into the database Publish Report and Request Sets Publish Report and Request sets generated by your Oracle Application You can assign publishing options to all the reports in your set and save these options to use again Report Manager Tools Activate the Report Manager toolbar Print Output Log Download a selected request s report output or log file and print it Monitor Request Select a request to monitor The request is added to the Pending or Completed tab in the Request Center window depending on the request status Request Center 12 3 The Request Center Toolbar Add Request to Hotlist Place a completed request in a special hotlist holding area so you can review it later Deleting requests from the Completed tab of the Request Center window will not affect the entries in the hotlist G Stop Monitoring Selected Request Remove a selected request from either the Pending Completed or Hotlist tabs of the Request Center window el Stop Monitoring All Requests Remove all requests from either the Pending Completed or Hotlist tabs of the Request Center window Signon Sign on to an Oracle Applications da
95. payment A document that includes the amount disbursed to any supplier pay site combination as the result of a payment batch A payment can pay one or more invoices Any form of remittance including checks cash money orders credit cards and Electronic Funds Transfer payment application This report column represents the payments that were applied to the item within the GL Date range that you specified If the transaction number corresponds to the item the payment was applied to then the amount should be positive If the transaction number is the payment itself then the amount should be negative The amount in this column should match the sum of the amounts in the Applied Amount Earned Discount and Unearned Discount columns of the Applied Receipts Register Report payment batch A group of invoices selected for automatic payment processing Applications Desktop Integrator creates a payment batch when you initiate AutoSelect Applications Desktop Integrator selects invoices according to criteria you specify and produces payments for the invoices in the payment batch Applications Desktop Integrator uses the payment method and format you specify for the bank account you choose for a payment batch to build and format payments for the invoices in the batch See also Automatic Payment Processing Also known as a receipt batch A group of payments that you enter together to help you ensure accurate payment entry Payments within the sam
96. refer to your Excel user s guide or online help DB To add budget notes to a budget worksheet 1 Position your cursor within the budget worksheet at one of these locations 4 16 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Adding Budget Notes to a Budget Worksheet See Also a Ona budget amount cell To add a budget note to a specific amount in your budget worksheet a On any cell within an account row To add a budget note for a specific account in your budget worksheet a Anywhere To add a budget note for the entire budget worksheet Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Budget Notes from the list of values Select Budget Account or Amount from the Add Budget Note window then choose OK Excel s Cell Note window appears Enter the text of your budget note in the Text Note region Choose OK to attach the note or Close to cancel If you choose OK a small red square appears at the upper right corner of the cell where the budget note is attached Additional Information To see the note indicator in your budget worksheet you must enable the View Note Indicator option in Excel Tools gt Options gt View D To edit or delete budget notes 1 2 Choose the worksheet cell where the note is attached Choose Insert gt Note from the Excel menu Optionally choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Budget Notes from the list of values choose OK then select the note
97. retirement retroactive transfer See prior period transfer return The opposite of a sales order it involves receipt of goods previously sold to a customer credit to a customer and possibly replacement with an identical or similar product Return is often used synonymously with RMA See also Return Material Authorization RMA Return of Material Goods RMG See Return Material Authorization Return Material Authorization RMA Permission for a customer to return items Applications Desktop Integrator allows you to authorize the return of your sales orders as well as sales made by other dealers or suppliers as long as the items are part of your item master and price list RMA is often used synonymously with Return See also return return reason Justification for a return of product Many companies have standard reasons that are assigned to returns to be used to analyze the quantity and types of returns See also credit memo reasons revaluation See foreign currency revaluation An Fixed Assets feature that allows you to adjust the cost of your assets by a revaluation rate The cost adjustment is necessary due to inflation or deflation You can define revaluation rules for accumulated depreciation for amortization of revaluation reserve and for revaluation ceilings Restatement of assets of liabilities denominated in a foreign currency using exchange rates that you enter Fluctuations in exchange rate
98. s column properties The plus button also changes to a minus button to indicate that the region can be collapsed To display row properties you must first choose the plus button at the top of the report worksheet to open the row properties region Then you must choose the plus button for any specific rows whose properties and account assignments you want to see For example if you choose the topmost plus button and the plus button adjacent to the Sales Income row in Figure 6 2 you will see the screen shown in the figure below Figure 6 2 Report Wizard Worksheet mg B C D EJFi G H t J K L M N a Build Trim Heading Row 1 Widget Co Row 2 Row 3 Row 4 Chg Line Line Items 10 Income o SSS 20 Sales Income 399 999 99 999 999 99 Row Hame Row 2 List Display Row Yes List Level of Detail a 44 45 46 47 48 Display Tt Th 49 leave this row blank a a F ES S pa gt List Accounts Low 01 100 4000 000 000 000 No Net Accounts High 01 400 4470 000 000 000 Set of Books 50 30 Other Income 999 999 99 60 40 Total Income 999 999 99 Suggestion Choosing either of the 1 buttons from the upper left of the report worksheet will collapse all related vertical or horizontal regions Likewise choosing either of the 2 buttons will ex
99. segments Users choose which segments will make up their accounts commonly used segments include company cost center and product Glossary 139 Glossary 140 segment values The possible values for each segment of the account For example the Cost Center segment could have the values 100 which might represent Finance and 200 which might represent Marketing selection tools A set of tools in Oracle Financial Analyzer that provide shortcut methods for selecting the values that you want to work with in a report graph or worksheet sale or payment This report column represents either the invoiced amount of the transaction or the payment amount of the customer s remittance where the transaction was entered with a GL Date that is between the beginning and ending GL Dates If the transaction is an invoice a debit memo a credit memo a deposit a guarantee or a chargeback you should find the same amount on the Transaction Register in the Functional Currency column If the transaction is a payment you should find the same amount on the Payments Register in the Amount column If the payment has been reversed you should find the same amount on the Reversed Receipts Report in the Amount column sales channel A term that indicates the method used to generate a sales order such as Telemarketing or Direct Marketing You can use this attribute of an order to classify orders for reporting purposes Order Entry QuickCode sales cr
100. sensitive descriptive flexfield segment Each global segment typically prompts you for one item of information related to the zone or form in which you are working global segment value A response to your global segment prompt Your response is composed of a series of characters and a description The response and description together provide a unique value for your global segment such as J Smith Financial Analyst or 210 Building C governmental funds A type of fund whose objective is to provide services to the public Governmental funds are concerned with the availability of resources to provide services Examples of governmental funds are General Special Revenue Capital Projects and Debt Service grace period See Receipt Acceptance Period grant Assistance awards in which a government agency provides funding to another government agency or other recipient and in which the granting agency does not have substantial involvement with the receiving agency or recipient during the performance of the grant activity For example a state government might give Glossary 69 Glossary 70 grants to regional and local governments for various purposes The regional and local governments administer the grant for the state government grouping rule A rule set you define that AutoInvoice uses to group revenue and credit transactions into invoices debit and credit memos See line ordering rules GSA General Services Administra
101. submit report or request sets a request ID is created for each report processed in the set You cannot cancel request sets only individual reports that have a request id Request Center Cancel this request To cancel requests 1 Select a request from the Pending tab 2 Choose the Cancel Request button from the Request Center toolbar A confirmation message is displayed Select Yes to cancel the request 12 50 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Monitoring Requests 3 Choose the Completed tab Note that the cancelled request is displayed with a status of either Cancelled or Terminated The cancelled status indicates that the request was still pending at the time it was cancelled The terminated status indicates that the request was already running at the time it was cancelled Monitoring Requests When you start ADI the Request Center is also started Any request that you submit from ADI is automatically monitored When one of these requests finishes the Request Center notifies you of the completion status if you checked the Notify When Complete box when you submitted the request You can choose to monitor other requests as well including those which are submitted from other Oracle Applications New requests are placed automatically on either a pending or completed list depending on the status When a pending request is finished the Request Center automatically moves the monitored request from
102. that let you group detailed values of that segment to prepare summary reports You define summary parent values that reference the detailed children values of that segment request date The date the customer requests the products be either shipped or received request for quotation RFQ A document you use to solicit supplier quotations for goods or services you need You usually send a request for quotation to many suppliers to ensure that you get the best price and terms possible Depending on the way you do business you can use two general types of RFQs specific and generic Glossary 131 Glossary 132 requirement date The date when the requirement needed by the discrete job or repetitive schedule is to be consumed Requirement dates are defaulted to the start date of the operation where a requirement is consumed requisition See purchase requisition requisition encumbrance A transaction representing an intent to purchase goods and services as indicated by the completion and approval of a requisition Oracle Purchasing subtracts requisition encumbrances from funds available when you reserve funds for a requisition If you cancel a requisition Oracle Purchasing creates appropriate reversing entries in your general ledger Also known as commitment pre encumbrance or pre lien reservation A guaranteed allotment of product to a specific sales order A hold is placed on specific items that assures that a certain qua
103. that you can customize to clarify your adjustment entries debit memos customer responses invoices credit memos payment reversals and on account credits Use reasons to improve the quality of your reporting receipt acceptance period The number of days you allow for acceptance or rejection of goods Applications Desktop Integrator uses this to recalculate invoice scheduled payments You specify receipt acceptance days when you define your Financials options receipt batch source A name that you use to refer to how your agency accounts for payments Receipt batch sources relate your receipt batches to both the bank and the accounting information required for recording and posting your receipts A name that you use to refer to how your company accounts for receipts Receipt batch sources relate your receipt batches to both the bank and the accounting information required for recording and posting your receipts receipt class Automatic receipt processing steps that you relate to your payment methods You can choose whether to confirm remit and clear automatic receipts receipt grace days A specific number of days that you assign to your customers and sites to effectively extend the due dates for their outstanding debit items receipt source Your name for a source from which your agency receives cash Your receipt sources determine the accounting for payments that are associated with them Receipts that you deposit in different ba
104. the cash or accrual method You must choose a primary accounting method before you can choose a secondary accounting method and before you submit journal entries for posting to the general ledger primary agent The default agent that receives 100 of the revenue credits when you first enter an invoice or commitment primary customer information Address and contact information for your customer s headquarters or principal place of business Primary addresses and contacts can provide defaults during order entry primary role Your customer contact s principle business function according to your company s terminology For example people in your company may refer to accounting responsibilities such as Controller or Receivables Supervisor primary salesperson The salesperson that receives 100 of the sales credits when you first enter an invoice or commitment primary set of books The set of books you use to manage your business You can choose accrual or cash basis as the accounting method for your primary set of books print lead days The number of days you subtract from the payment due date to determine the invoice date for each installment You can only specify Print Lead Days when you are defining split payment terms prior period addition An addition is a prior period addition if you enter it in an accounting period that is after the period in which you placed the asset in service Also known as retroactive addition Glos
105. the check child request A concurrent request submitted by another concurrent request a parent request For example each of the reports and or programs in a report set are child requests of that report set CIP assets See construction in process assets chargeable project For each expenditure a project to which the expenditure can be charged or transferred class category An implementation defined category for classifying projects For example if you want to know the market sector to which a project belongs you can define a class category with a name such as Market Sector Each class category has a set of values class codes that can be chosen for a project See class code Glossary 29 Glossary 30 class code An implementation defined value within a class category that can be used to classify a project See class category clear A payment status when the bank has disbursed funds for the payment and the payment has been cleared but not matched to a bank statement within Oracle Cash Management clearing A process that assigns a cleared date and status to a transaction and creates accounting entries for the cash clearing account See also manual clearing reconciliationreconciliation clearing account An account used to ensure that both sides of an accounting transaction are recorded For example when you purchase an asset your payables group creates a journal entry to the asset clearing account When you
106. this option to create your physical inventory worksheet as a new worksheet within the current Excel workbook This option is only available when you already have an Excel workbook open See Also Creating Physical Inventory Worksheets Entering Data in Your Physical Inventory Worksheet You can enter data in a physical inventory worksheet manually or by importing it from a text file Entering Data Manually To enter information manually you simply type the data directly into the data fields Because you are in a spreadsheet environment you can use Excel s data entry functionality to drag and drop or copy and paste data You can also use the list of values to select data from a drop down box See Also Choosing Values from Lists on page 3 37 Choosing Account Segment Values on page 3 38 Record Physical Inventory 10 7 Entering Data in Your Physical Inventory Worksheet Importing Data into Your Worksheet Notes See Also You can import data from barcode scanner devices into your physical inventory worksheet Once you have created the map using the Import Text File feature you can save it and apply it to future conversions For many of the fields on a physical inventory worksheet you can select from a list of values See Choosing Values from Lists on page 3 37 Choosing the View Context button will display or hide the physical inventory worksheet context information at the top of the worksheet Context informa
107. to General Ledger 1 See Also Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar select Submit Process gt Budget Import from the list of values to view a list of Budgets and Organizations for which values were previously uploaded to the interface table Select the budget and organization whose balances you want to import to General Ledger Choose OK to initiate the process or Cancel to abandon your request Selecting OK will start a budget import concurrent request When the process completes the system notifies you of the completion status Budget Upload Options on page 4 22 Submitting Processes on page 3 42 Updating Budget Balances Using ADI on page 4 13 Monitoring Requests on page 12 51 Budget Upload Options You can select four options to control uploading and importing your budgets Rows to Upload Controls which rows in the budget worksheet to upload Select Flagged Rows to upload only those rows that are marked with a flag character in the upload column of your worksheet Select All Rows to upload all values in your worksheet regardless of whether changes have been made Upload Mode Determines whether the values in General Ledger are replaced or increased by the values in your budget worksheet Select Replace to replace the General Ledger amounts select Increment to increase them Pre Validation You can prevalidate your budget data before you upload it to General Ledger Prevalidating can minimize the possi
108. to submit this request separately 2 Select the corporate depreciation book for which you want to post your mass additions 3 Choose OK to submit your request or Cancel to abandon 9 10 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Asset Upload Options See Also Asset Upload Options on page 9 11 Asset Upload Options You can select from the following options to control uploading and importing m Rows to Upload Controls which rows in the asset worksheet to upload Select Flagged Rows to upload only those rows that are marked with a flag character in the upload column of your worksheet All Rows to upload all rows in your worksheet regardless of whether changes have been made Note The Upload process validates all asset data verifying field type and length ADI also performs flexfield validation cross validation and segment security checking In addition ADI makes sure that required fields are entered when the asset status is set to POST If the asset status is set to either ON HOLD or NEW null entries in the required data fields are accepted 1 Create Assets Now Post Check this box to start the Create Assets process and create assets automatically after the upload completes Note You can only check the Create Assets Now Post check box if you have also selected an asset status of POST You cannot check this box if the asset entries have a status of ON HOLD or NEW If you
109. with non Oracle applications and write custom reports for Oracle Assets Oracle Applications Product Update Notes This book contains a summary of each new feature we added since Oracle Applications Release 10 7 as well as information about database changes and seed data changes that may affect your operations or any custom report you have written If you are upgrading from Release 10 6 or earlier you also need to read Oracle Applications Product Update Notes Other Information Training Oracle Education offers a complete set of training courses to help you and your staff master Oracle Applications and ADI We can help you develop a training plan that provides thorough training for both your project team and your end users We will work with you to organize courses appropriate to your job or area of responsibility Training professionals can show you how to plan your training throughout the implementation process so that the right amount of information is delivered to key people when they need it the most You can attend courses at any one of our many Educational Centers or you can arrange for our trainers to teach at your facility In addition we can tailor standard courses or develop custom courses to meet your needs Support From on site support to central support our team of experienced professionals provides the help and information you need to keep ADI working for you This team includes your Technical Representative Account Man
110. work order to supply the Glossary 153 Glossary 154 demand Once the work order is complete and the finished product is received in inventory WIP transfers a reservation for the finished product to the sales order The schedule status for the order line or order line detail is then changed to be Reserved System Items Flexfield A flexfield that allows you to define the structure of your item identifier according to your business requirements You can choose the number and order of segments such as product and product line the length of each segment and other characteristics You can define up to twenty segments for your item Also known as Item Flexfield table based depreciation method A depreciation method that uses the table based method rates to calculate depreciation based on the asset life and the recoverable cost or net book value tablespace The area in which an Oracle database is divided to hold tables task A subdivision of project work Each project can have a set of top level tasks and a hierarchy of subtasks below each top level task See also Work Breakdown Structure subtask task organization The organization that is assigned to manage the work on a task task service type See service type tax authority A governmental entity that collects taxes on goods and services purchased by a customer from a supplier In some countries there are many authorities e g state local and federal governmen
111. you apply a custom filter to an account segment value column of your budget worksheet This is because Excel treats the values in these columns as text rather than numeric We recommend that you check your results carefully Also you may find that you need to precede your specified filter value with a single or double quote character For example gt 3750 Question Why do I receive the message Select an amount on a Financial Report worksheet when attempt to use the Analysis Wizard If multiple copies of Excel are running on your PC ADI is unable to correctly determine which copy to use with the Analysis Wizard You can resolve this one of two ways a Close all copies of Excel except the one from which you want to drill down a Enable the environment option Double Click Drill Enabled on the Default Drill Options window in the Analysis Wizard then select the amount on which you want to drill down and double click the left mouse button Question Why does the Analysis Wizard display an amount that is different from the original financial report amount drilled down upon There are several reasons why the drill down results of the Analysis Wizard can differ from the amount on the financial report This may occur when a Your report format is different from the original entry For example your report format may be set to 000 000 compared to your original entry which contained two decimal places 000 000 00 Frequently Asked Q
112. you can change the settings for Worksheet Header and Lines Note If you check the box labelled Sample located at the bottom of the Define Worksheet Layout window you can see a preview of your custom journal worksheet The preview window is dynamic and reflects your changes immediately DB To customize a journal worksheet 1 Select your customizing options as described below for the Worksheet Header and Lines tabs 2 Choose OK to enable your customized options or Cancel to abort Note When you choose OK to enable your customized options the system stores your options as default settings for future journal worksheets 5 6 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Customizing Journal Worksheets E Define Worksheet Layout Worksheet Tab Shows the selected Journal Type and Number of Journals You can select different options to change the journal type See Journal Worksheet Options on page 5 4 Journal Wizard 5 7 Customizing Journal Worksheets E Define Worksheet Layout x Worksheet Header Lines Required Fields r Optional Fields Group ID Batch Name Batch Description Journal Name Journal Description Journal Reference Reverse Journal Reversal Period Clearing Company Accounting Date elis 1a Show x Sample Header Tab Customize the header information for a single entry jour
113. you enter an invoice or make a payment in a currency other than your functional currency See also foreign exchange gain or loss foreign currency exchange gain or loss The difference in your functional currency between the invoiced amount and the payment amount when applying a receipt to an invoice A realized gain exists if the receipt amount in your functional currency exceeds the invoice amount a loss exists if the invoice amount in your functional currency exceeds the amount of the payment Such gains and losses arise from fluctuations in exchange rates of the Glossary 63 Glossary 64 receipt currency between the invoice date and the payment date See also realized gain or loss unrealized gain or loss foreign currency journal entry A journal entry in which you record transactions in a foreign currency Applications Desktop Integrator automatically converts foreign currency amounts into your functional currency using an exchange rate you specify See also foreign currency functional currency foreign currency revaluation A process that allows you to revalue assets and liabilities denominated in a foreign currency using a period end usually a balance sheet date exchange rate Applications Desktop Integrator automatically revalues your foreign assets and liabilities using the period end exchange rate you specify Revaluation gains and losses result from fluctuations in an exchange rate between a transaction date and a balance
114. you to enter the password Enter the password then choose OK D To limit the number of accounts included on your budget worksheet 1 2 3 When entering your budget worksheet parameters choose the Limit Accounts button Enter or choose your account segment values See Choosing Account Segment Values on page 3 38 Choose OK to return to the Create Budget Worksheet window DB To change the display and sort order of the account segment in your budget worksheet 1 When entering your budget worksheet parameters choose the Set Characteristics button The Set Display Characteristics window appears There are four columns Display Order Determines the sequence in which your account segments appear as columns in your budget worksheet Show Desc Determines which account segment s descriptions you can display in your budget worksheet Sort Order Determines the sorting order of your account For example you can sort by account within cost center within company or you can sort cost center within company within account Budget Wizard 4 3 Creating Budget Worksheets See Also Sort Order Determines the sorting order of your account For example you can sort by account within cost center within fund or you can sort cost center within fund within account Sort Direction Determines whether an account segment is sorted in Ascending or Descending order In the Display Order column select the accoun
115. your Accounting Flexfield segment to identify a particular element of your organization such as Agency Division Region or Project accounting method The method you select for recording accounts payable transactions You can choose between accrual basis cash basis or combined basis of accounting With accrual basis accounting Applications Desktop Integrator creates journal entries for invoices and payments With cash basis accounting Applications Desktop Integrator creates journal entries only after you make payments With combined basis accounting Applications Desktop Integrator creates journal entries for invoices and payments to post to your accrual set of books and creates journal entries for payments to post to your cash set of books accounting period The periods that make up your fiscal year You depreciate assets each period A time period making up your fiscal year used on financial statements They can be of any length but are usually a month quarter or year Periods are defined in Oracle General Ledger accounting rule start date The date Oracle Receivables uses for the first accounting entry it creates when you use an accounting rule to recognize revenue If you choose a variable accounting rule you need to specify a rule duration to let Receivables know how many accounting periods to use for this accounting rule accounting rules Rules that Oracle Receivables AutoInvoice uses to specify revenue recognition sched
116. your responsibility is not associated with a set of books you will not be able to use ADI s features To choose the responsibility you used during your last ADI session make sure you check the Use Last Responsibility check box Signon window before completing your ADI signon Getting Started 3 15 ADI Options You can easily change your responsibility from within ADI DB To choose a responsibility different from that used in your last session with ADI 1 Uncheck the Use Last Responsibility check box on the Signon window 2 Complete your signon 3 Select a responsibility from the displayed list of values 4 Choose OK to confirm your choice or Cancel to discard your selection DB To change your responsibility 1 Choose the Change Responsibility button from the ADI toolbar 2 Select a new responsibility from the displayed list of values 3 Choose OK to confirm your choice or Cancel to retain your current responsibility See Also Signing On to ADI on page 3 10 Selecting an Applications Database on page 3 12 ADI Options Choose the Options button from the ADI toolbar to set options for ADI components be and features Toolbar Options ii Toolbar Options ld Switch Orientation HD Reset Icons Select this option to customize the icons on your toolbar 3 16 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Toolbar Options Add Icons Tab Define custom toolbar buttons to invoke programs and processe
117. 2 Options Available When a Budget Worksheet is Open snssnssssssnssssssrsirsissessssisresressereesesses 4 5 Budget Worksheet Parameters cccccccscscssescscsssnssesesesnenesescecenesesssnananeseseeceseseseecanenesesesnanenenes 4 6 Changing the Budget Worksheet View cccccccscsseesessesseseecesesescsneneneseseeceeseseecenenesesesnsnenesees 4 8 Updating Budget Balances Using ADI 0cccc cece ccc ee cececeeensnececesesensnesesesessneneseseenes 4 13 Inserting a New Budget Account cccccccssssssesesessnsssseesesssssesesesesesssesesescsesssesesessseseseseseeese 4 15 Bud cet Rul eS rer inci hes ieee ced aed as eats a e lies aa tease eaten Aatentev deen oehes 4 16 Adding Budget Notes to a Budget Worksheet cccccccccscsseesesteneseseececeseseeeeeneneseseenesenesees 4 16 Graphing Budgets Using ADI cccccccccssessscenessesesesesesescecesescsesnaneneseseesesesescecenesesesnaanenens 4 18 Uploading Budgets from ADI to General Ledger ccccccccceeststetetesteceseseeeeteneneseseeeeneseees 4 19 Budget Upload Options oi secs cccaces csc seiecct beeen a a e e e a a e aE 4 22 Journal Wizard Applications Desktop Integrator Journal Wizard 0 0 0 0 ccc cesses teteteseeceneeseeceenenesesnenenenees 5 1 Prerequisites iip eiia as oia th shuts sales cote a O E E o Ea A S Nra 5 1 ProfIS OPONSE a n Ee Ea a Aera a lestval S Aa Ee Sowers T E RENAE A E ES 5 2 Creating Journal Worksheets ssrisieiianssn
118. 9 2 Asset Worksheet Parameters on page 9 3 Import Text File Feature on page 11 1 Uploading Asset Data into Oracle Assets After creating asset data in an asset worksheet you must upload them to Oracle Assets Uploading is a two step process First you must upload your asset data to the interface table Second you must post the asset data from the interface table to Oracle Assets Figure 9 1 illustrates this process Caution The Create Assets feature interprets three adjoining blank rows in an asset worksheet as the end of the asset entry Therefore any lines that appear after three blank rows will be ignored when you upload your asset data 9 8 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Uploading Asset Data into Oracle Assets Figure 9 1 Uploading Asset Data Ele Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Tieu Guasens su EENE Corporate Book OPS CORP Database adilt Enter asset information into the asset worksheet 35 9716198 Capitalized Yes Building Major Catego Upload to interface SAN FR OFFICE1 SAN FRANCISCO OFFICE1 SAN FRANCISCO OFFICE1 Choose the Upload SANFRANCISCO OFFICEt NEW YORK NONE to Interface button NEW YORK NONE NEW YORK NONE NEW YORK NONE is not the end of the Asset worksheet Unprotect the sheet and insert as many rows as E This action populates the interface table in Oracle Assets N enen h Asset 1 me i4
119. Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor Suggestion When you create a hierarchy start from the top of the hierarchy organization and build down In other words start with a top level grandparent then add parents then child nodes You change a hierarchy by a Adding child and parent segment values a Moving child or parent values within a hierarchy a Removing values Prerequisite D Define the Accounting Flexfield structure that represents your chart of accounts See Defining Your Account Structure Oracle General Ledger User s Guide D To create a new hierarchy 1 Start the Account Hierarchy Editor by choosing the Ledger button from the ADI toolbar then selecting the View Account Hierarchy option from the list of values 2 From the related poplists select the Chart of Accounts and Segment for which you want to create a hierarchy 3 Select the parent segment value representing the topmost node of your hierarchy Optionally you can create a new parent segment value See Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 21 4 Drag the selected parent segment value to the hierarchy diagram window and drop it Alternatively choose the Open Window option from the File menu or the related toolbar button 5 Add values to your hierarchy as needed working down from the topmost node See the next task 6 Save your work 8 18 Oracle Applica
120. Applications Desktop Integrator for Excel 7 97 2000 is a 32 bit application that resides in a 32 bit Oracle home that is separate from the 16 bit Oracle home You must ensure that the SQL Net and Net8 configuration files SQLNET ORA and TNSNAMES ORA in the 32 bit Oracle home include entries for your databases Question Can install ADI on an Apple Macintosh computer There is no native version of ADI for the Macintosh but you can install ADI on a Citrix WinFrame server or Windows Terminal Server with Citrix Metaframe Then the Macintosh can access ADI via the server Question Can use ADI with Citrix WinFrame or Windows Terminal Server Yes ADI will work with WinFrame and Windows Terminal Server Question How are my SQLNET ORA and TNSNAMES ORA files related When SQL Net or Net8 looks for your connect string in the TNSNAMES ORA file the NAMES DEFAULT_DOMAIN value in your SQLNET ORA file is automatically appended to the connect string specified unless you have already appended a domain to the string 2 4 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Installation Considerations For example your SQLNET ORA file has the following entry NAMES DEFAULT_DOMAIN us oracle com And your TNSNAMES ORA file has the connect string entered as he040f world If you enter the connect string in ADI s database definition window as he040f then SOL Net or Net8 will look in the TNSNAMES ORA file for he040f us oracle com This entry does not e
121. Asst to include the child range 1100 1100 If you do this repeatedly for multiple child values a parent segment can accumulate many entries for child ranges ranges which are actually adjacent in your chart of accounts You can use the Account Hierarchy Editor to consolidate adjacent child ranges into a single entry in the Parent Attributes window For example separate entries for child ranges 1100 1000 1200 1200 1300 1300 and 1400 1400 are combined into one range 1100 1400 If you do this repeatedly for multiple child values a parent segment can accumulate many entries for child ranges ranges which are actually adjacent in your chart of accounts You can use the Account Hierarchy Editor to consolidate adjacent child ranges into a single entry in the Parent Attributes window For example separate entries for child ranges 1100 1000 1200 1200 1300 1300 and 1400 1400 are combined into one range 1100 1400 DB To merge child ranges for a parent segment value 1 Choose the parent value whose ranges you want to merge Account Hierarchy Editor 8 23 Adding or Changing Child Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor See Also The Parent Attributes window appears 2 Choose Merge The Preview Merged Ranges window appears The left region shows the current child ranges The right region shows the merged ranges as they will appear if you confirm the merge operation 3 Choose Accept Merge to confirm the merge operation or choose
122. C Budget Import Lx Journal Import Delete Journal Import Data m Parameters Spreadsheet 1447 194899 1 Spreadsheet 1448 194911 31 Spreadsheet 1517 194948 36 Kila 4 D To delete journal import data 1 el ells Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Submit Process from the list of values Select Journal Import The Select Process Type window appears Select Delete Journal Import Data from the Process Type region then choose the Query button All available journal sources appear in the Parameters region Information for each journal source includes Source Group ID Request ID and number of Records Getting Started 3 45 Submitting Processes 3 Select the specific journal Source to delete 4 Choose OK to submit your request or Cancel to abandon Note Once you submit the process the system starts a concurrent request to delete the journal entry or batch and displays the delete journal import data request ID The Request Center automatically monitors the request and notifies you of the completion status when it is done DB To submit a report 1 Choose the General Ledger button from the ADI toolbar and select Submit Process gt Report from the list of values 2 Complete the information in the Report Submission and Publishing window 3 Submit your report request to the Request Center See Also Uploading Journal Entries from
123. Change Sign No Change Sign on Va No Control Value ae Yes Row Account Assignments Display Zero Yes 20 General Expense _ _ 20 General Expense W Z Sign Low Account High Account ets Caes 06 000 5200 000 000 06 900 5450 000 000 7 06 000 5550 000 000 06 900 5750 000 000 T EES H Row Calculations 20 General Expense W EE Seq _ Operator Constant Low Sequen u r Column Properties Window The Column Properties window is one of several ways you can enter values for your column properties When you choose the Column Properties button from the Report Wizard toolbar a poplist appears From the poplist you can choose Display Column m Properties Opens the Column Properties window When this window is open you can choose to open either of the other three windows a Choose the Accts button to open the Column Account Assignments window a Choose the Calcs button to open the Column Calculations window a Choose the Excpts button to open the Column Exceptions window T Account Assignments Opens the Column Account Assignments window Use this window to add edit or delete column account assignments T Calculations Opens the Column Calculations window Use this window to create edit or delete column calculations m edit or delete column exceptions Exceptions Opens the Column Exceptions window Use this window to create Report Wizard 6 11 Creating a Report Using Report Wiz
124. Cost Balance Report ORACLE Parameters Parameters Report Title Parameters Parameters Report Heading alee Asset Number Asset Key SerialNumber Company Cost Center Account Begin Balance Column Heading amp AF amp detault_ine_form Text Tet Text Tet Tet printable format Text Tet Tot Tot Tot Hear Amount Region 1 000 00 Line Item Background Publish To Custom Macro Tip Shortcut Double cick in an output regian to open the advanced formatting window Tip Fyou add a logo to a theme it will automatically be displayed on report output Tip Only GIF and JPEG file formats are supported for backgrounds in Web output Spreadshoet output however supports all background file formats a DB To customize a theme for a Standard Variable Format report 1 From the Report Output Themes window choose the Open Theme button to open the theme you want to customize Alternatively create a new theme Choose the Customize button From the menu that appears select the report output feature whose formatting you want to change You can change the formatting of the Report Title Report Heading Column Headings Line Items and Amounts The Format Cells window opens Define your formatting choices within each tab of the Format Cells window Request Center 12
125. FA_MASS_ADDITIONS Automatic Procedure Submitted automatically if you chose the auto submit option during asset upload Manual Procedure Choose the Submit Process button to start the Post Mass Additions process Asset Wizard 9 9 Uploading Asset Data into Oracle Assets W Upload Assets to Interface x m Options Rows To Upload F C All Rows Create Assets l Create Assets Now Post Asset Status New 7 BD To upload asset data from an asset worksheet to the interface table 1 While viewing your asset worksheet choose the Upload to Interface button from the Assets toolbar 2 Enter your Asset Upload Options See Asset Upload Options on page 9 11 3 Choose OK to start the asset upload or Cancel to abandon For rows that do not upload successfully ADI provides an explanation in the Messages section of the asset worksheet If you selected Show Upload Success Indicator from the general options window ADI will also display status indicators in the Messages section for each asset entry D To post assets from the interface table to Oracle Assets 1 Choose Submit Process gt Post Mass Additions from the Assets toolbar Note When you post mass additions to Oracle Assets by choosing Submit Process gt Post Mass Additions this process will not submit the Mass Additions Posting Report You need
126. HKEY_ CURRENT_USER Software ORACLE ADI and GLDI If you upgrade from an earlier version of ADI your custom preferences and values will be transferred automatically to the Windows Registry Frequently Asked Questions 2 15 Technical Issues Question Now that I can view my log and output files using the Request Center can change the report viewer Yes use the Request Center options window to define your report viewer Question What should I do if get General Protection Faults GPF and other errors We have created the Applications Desktop Integrator Diagnostic Wizard to help solve these sorts of problems This interactive tool guides you through a step by step process that eliminates many known problems inherent to Windows You can run the Diagnostic Wizard by choosing its program icon from the Oracle for Windows or Windows NT program group Question Do I need to apply the 10SC patch to use Applications Desktop Integrator security No You can manually set the profile options using the Application Developer responsibility See Enabling Security with ADI Applications Desktop Integrator Installation Guide Question What should I do if get a SQL error when trying to submit an FSG report through Reports This happens because Reports is unable to locate your printer If you do not want to print reports set the Concurrent Report Copies profile option to 0 If you want to print reports set the Printer profile option and e
127. Include Printable Copy Check this box to download a web based version of the report that is suitable for printing When you view the report in your browser there is a link you can choose to display the printable version of the report Note This option only appears for standard reports If you use content sets in your report definition use the following together to create meaningful web reports Link Reports If you used a content set when you defined your report you can check the Link Reports check box to include links to the separate report pages Note Link Reports influences the appearance of your web reports If you do not check the Link Reports check box your web report appears within a single frame If you check the Link Report check box ADI creates a separate frame which contains navigation entries to all the report files created by ADI Separate Directories If you used a content set when you defined your report check the Separate Directories check box to save each report page to distinct subdirectories of the Publish To directory You may want to create distinct directories for each report for security reasons You cannot define security access for files but you can define security access for directories Request Center 12 25 Setting Report Publishing Options ORACLE Web Report Output REPORTS Company 01 Widget Corporation PTD Actual 01 Widget Corporation FEB 91 e 02 Alaskan
128. Microsoft Windows the root window is titled Oracle Applications and contains all the Oracle Applications windows you run In the Motif environment the root window is titled Toolbar because it displays just the toolbar and main menu bar routing A sequence of manufacturing operations that you perform to manufacture an assembly A routing consists of an item a series of operations an operation sequence and operation effective dates row One occurrence of the information displayed in the fields of a block A block may show only one row of information at a time or it may display several rows of information at once depending on its layout The term row is synonymous with the term record row order A report component that you use to modify the order of detail rows and account segments in your report You can rank your rows in ascending or descending order based on the amounts in a particular column and or by sorting your account segments either by segment value or segment value description You also specify display options depending on the row ranking method you choose For example if you want to review Total Sales in descending order by product you can rank your rows in descending order by the Total Sales column and rearrange your segments so that product appears first on your report A report component you use to modify the current order of rows and Accounting Flexfield segments in your report You can rank rows
129. NS 12 38 Formatting with Line Item TokenS sssssessssisssssssssssiestesssssestsstesenssnsietensiesesnesnterienesnnen 12 40 Formatting with Line Item Image Tokens eee eeeeeeeeeenenseseenesesessseeneneeseseees 12 41 Gell Level Formatting inisiasie a E oh E ES SEE chieaeads 12 42 Heading Regions Report Title Report Heading and Column ssssssssssesississsssirresseeseess 12 43 Line Item and Amounts ReZi0ns 0 ccc cseeeeeseeeesesseseesssesessseesesessssseeseseseseseees 12 44 Expanded ROW S iaticn anit a waite ete EE R aan O R R 12 46 Formatting Standard Variable Format Reports cccccssesecesssesesesescseseeseseseseseseseeeees 12 47 Formatting With TOKENS sisson aaas iae a a A Raa 12 49 Custom Macio naa n a aa an aa 12 49 Viewing Report Output and Logs esse ssssssesssstertiseesssstesisresnestentesresnnsnsntenresntsnentensesnenenteenens 12 50 Cancelling Reg ests renet e ero neoa ea E E AEn rE AEA E EN deeds SA E 12 50 Monitoring Requests snaa aandaa nia aaa aaea eea a aaea a aaas eaaa Paa hasi aeaea 12 51 Index Send Us Your Comments Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Release 7 1 for Windows Part No A88712 01 Oracle Corporation welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document Your input is an important part of the information used for revision Did you find any errors Is the information clearly presented Do you need more information If so
130. Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator User s Guide Release 7 1 for Windows February 2001 Part No A88712 01 ORACLE Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator User s Guide Release 7 1 for Windows Part No A88712 01 Copyright 1996 2000 Oracle Corporation All rights reserved Primary Author Taite Darlington Contributing Authors Alex Drexel Karen de la Torre Contributors Frank Colligan The Programs which include both the software and documentation contain proprietary information of Oracle Corporation they are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are also protected by copyright patent and other intellectual and industrial property laws Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of the Programs is prohibited The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice If you find any problems in the documentation please report them to us in writing Oracle Corporation does not warrant that this document is error free Except as may be expressly permitted in your license agreement for these Programs no part of these Programs may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Oracle Corporation If the Programs are delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensing or using the programs on behalf of the U S Government the following notice is appli
131. Overlaps all windows Tile Displays all windows vertically Auto Tile Hierarchy Diagram windows are tiled automatically depending on whether you choose the Tile Vertical or Tile Horizontal option below Windows are tiled vertically or horizontally whenever you perform an action to create anew window Tile Vertical Multiple Hierarchy Diagram windows are tiled vertically when Auto Tile is on or when you choose Tile from the Window menu Tile Horizontal Multiple Hierarchy Diagram windows are tiled horizontally when Auto Tile is on or when you choose Tile from the Window menu List on Left Displays the Segment Values window on the left side of the Account Hierarchy Editor window List on Right Displays the Segment Values window on the right side of the Account Hierarchy Editor window Account Hierarchy Editor 8 13 The Account Hierarchy Editor Toolbar See Also The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface on page 8 4 The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu on page 8 10 The Account Hierarchy Editor Toolbar on page 8 14 The Account Hierarchy Editor Toolbar CN l A EJP The Account Hierarchy Editor toolbar provides pushbutton shortcuts for various menu commands as follows See Also File New View Column File Open View Horizontal 2 File Save Edit Node Properties o E File Print View Zoom In ir 2 Edit Remove View Zoom Out 2a e 8 14 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator F
132. Physical Inventory Upload Options You can select from the following options to control uploading and importing m Rows to Upload Controls which rows in the physical inventory worksheet to upload Select a Flagged Rows to upload only those rows that are marked with a flag character in the upload column of your worksheet a All Rows to upload all rows in your worksheet regardless of whether changes have been made ADI validates all physical inventory data including field length and type required fields and flexfields 1 Duplicate Assets Determines what action ADI will take when the Upload process detects older rows containing duplicate values already in the Physical Inventory Interface table Do Not Upload ADI will not upload the physical inventory worksheet rows An error message will be displayed on the worksheet indicating which rows did not upload successfully a Increment Units ADI will add the units in the physical inventory worksheet row to the corresponding entry already in the interface table a Replace Units ADI will replace the entries in the interface table with the new rows in the physical inventory worksheet m Run Comparison Check this box to start the Physical Inventory Comparison process automatically after the upload completes If you choose to start the Physical Inventory Comparison process automatically the system will do the following after the upload completes a Submit your Ph
133. Publish your report to Text using the Request Center Open the text file in Excel using the Import Wizard Set the boundaries for each column within the Import Wizard in Excel Use these column widths in your theme CPN Save your theme and use it to publish the report Question Does ADI provide Descriptive Flexfield validation No ADI does not offer Descriptive Flexfield validation Technical Issues Question What Versions of Excel can I use with Applications Desktop Integrator You can use Excel 2000 with version 6 0 or later Previous versions can be used with Excel 7 0 or Excel 97 All three are 32 Bit applications Earlier 16 bit versions of Excel are no longer supported Question What if have problems signing on to Applications Desktop Integrator You need to define at least one Applications database This tells Applications Desktop Integrator how to connect to your database For information on defining a database choose the Help button in the Oracle Applications Signon window within Applications Desktop Integrator Question What if I get a runtime error when signon 2 14 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Technical Issues This problem can occur with older versions of Applications Desktop Integrator when you do not have a budget or budget organization defined for your set of books To fix this problem define a budget or budget organization or obtain a more recent version of Applications Desktop Integra
134. TP The quantity of current on hand stock outstanding receipts and planned production that has not already been committed either through a reservation or placing demand In Oracle Inventory you define the types of supply and demand that should be included in your ATP calculation available to promise quantity See available to promise ATP available to promise rule A set of Yes No options for various entities that the user enters in Oracle Inventory The combination of the various entities are used to define what is considered supply and demand when calculating available to promise quantity Available to reserve ATR The quantity of on hand stock that is available for reservation ATR is the current on hand stock less any reserved stock average exchange rate An exchange rate that is the average rate for an entire accounting period General Ledger automatically translates revenue and expense account balances using period average rates in accordance with FASB 52 U S And for companies in highly inflationary economies General Ledger uses average exchange rates to translate your non historical revenue and expense accounts in accordance with FASB 8 U S Also known as period average exchange rate The average rate for an entire accounting period General Ledger automatically translates revenue and expense account balances using period average rates in accordance with FASB 52 U S For organizations in highly inflationary econom
135. Type Financial Statement amp Spreadsheet r Themes Apply Theme F kes D ORANT GLDI90 THEMES VISION11 SUMMARYINCOME_PRINT XLS bd r Output Type Attribute Sets J Apply Attribute Set o Z Local G C Web Page r Spreadsheet Options j gi Publish To Bi 5 CATEMP Summary_Income_Statement XLS c 2 a Tepian New Workbook Curent Workbook DABARA Add Output Replace Output INE Oo Web Page fk Apply Formatting To submit a Financial Statement or Ad Hoc report Choose the Submit Report button from the Request Center toolbar The Report 1 Submission and Publishing window will appear Select Financial Statement as the Report Type Optional Mark the Publish Report check box if you want the report to be automatically published after it finishes running The Request Center publishes the report using the options you specify in step 8 Request Center 12 11 Submitting Reports 10 Choose the Submission button to display the FSG submission parameters You can select a report from the Existing Report poplist or choose the Find button to query a report name To create an ad hoc report leave the Existing Report field blank and choose the Select Components button Optional for Ad Hoc Reports Enter your ad hoc report components See Ad Hoc Report Components on page 12 13 Enter or select your other report parameters including Period Date Content Set Segment Override Rounding
136. V01 Period Range JAN 96 to DEC 96 Organization Sales and Marketing Set of Books U S Operations Currency USD Database cdtest14 Up Co Reg CC Acct Prd Sub Account JAH 96 FEB 96 MAR 96 APR 96 MAY 96 JUN 96 JUL 96 01 110 420 7540 000 0000 Postage 1250 1256 0 0 0 0 0 o 110 420 7720 000 0000 Office Supplies 5250 5276 5303 5329 5356 5383 5409 01 110 420 7750 000 0000 Miscellaneous Other 1000 1005 1010 1015 1020 1025 1030 o 110 440 7110 000 0000 Advertising 15000 15075 15150 15226 15302 15379 15456 B 01 110 480 7550 000 0000 CompiComm Usage 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 205 2061 01 110 470 4410 000 0000 Training Revenue Direct 100000 400500 101003 101508 102015 102525 103038 B 01 110 470 6370 000 0000 Miscellaneous Employee Expense 3500 3518 3535 3553 3571 3588 3606 o 110 480 7430 000 0000 Depreciation Vehicle 25000 25125 25251 25377 25504 25631 25759 01 110 490 7120 000 0000 Public Relations 425 42768 42902 43197 43413 43630 43848 Of 130 420 4110 000 0000 Hardware Revenue Direct 13945000 14014725 14084799 14155223 14225999 14297129 14368614 01 130 420 4120 000 0000 Hardware Revenue Telesales 250000 251250 252506 253769 255038 258313 257594 fo 130 420 4130 000 0000 Hardware Revenue Partnership 125000 125625 126253 126084 127519 128156 128797 01 130 420 4140 000 0000 Hardware Revenue Other 80000 80400 80802 61206 81612 82020 82430 01 130 420 4210 000 0000 Support Initial 150000 150750 151504 152261 153023
137. XXX Default MiA Create Worksheet in New Workbook Current Workbook E Cancel BD To create a physical inventory worksheet 1 Choose the Assets button from the ADI toolbar 2 Choose the Record Physical Inventory button from the Assets toolbar 10 2 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Physical Inventory Worksheet Parameters Enter your physical inventory worksheet parameters See Physical Inventory Worksheet Parameters on page 10 3 Choose OK ADI automatically creates your physical inventory worksheet BD To create additional physical inventory worksheets in the same session 1 While viewing a physical inventory worksheet choose the Record Physical Inventory button from the Assets toolbar Enter your physical inventory worksheet parameters See Physical Inventory Worksheet Parameters on page 10 3 Choose OK ADI automatically creates your physical inventory worksheet BD To save a physical inventory worksheet to disk 1 2 3 Select File gt Save As from the Excel menu Enter a name and specify a path for the physical inventory worksheet file Choose OK to save the file or Cancel to abandon the operation BD To open a saved physical inventory worksheet 1 2 Select File gt Open from the Excel menu Select the path where the physical inventory worksheet is located Excel will display the names of the files in a separate list Choose the
138. a Optional Select a Content Set Row Order and Display Set To create new report objects choose the related option from the poplist new content set or new row order set There is no option to create a new display set Optional To copy a report object rather than use the original check the Make Copy check box to the right of the object you want to copy If you are creating a new report object the corresponding Make Copy check box is not available Note Report Wizard gives the copied object a unique name by including a date and time stamp For example if you copy a row set the system names it Row date time You can change the name and description from the Report Object Properties window or directly in the Names and Descriptions region of the report worksheet Choose Next Enter a Report Name If you selected new row set in step 4 enter the Number of Rows to use for this report If you selected new column set in step 5 enter the Number of Columns Default Column Width and Line Item Width Select the destination for the report worksheet Choose Finish to create the report worksheet Use the Report Wizard Tools to define and or change the row and column properties enter column headings assign accounts and create row and column calculations When you are finished save the report BD To open an existing report from General Ledger 1 Choose General Ledger
139. a new budget worksheet Refresh Budget Values Restore the budget values from your General Ledger database to your currently open budget worksheet Edit Budget Criteria Edit the budget worksheet parameters for your currently open budget worksheet DB To create additional budget worksheets in the same session 1 While viewing a budget worksheet choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Enter Budgets from the list of values Select Create Budget Worksheet Choose OK ADI displays the Create Budget Worksheet window whose default entries are the same as your currently open worksheet Enter your budget worksheet parameters Choose OK to create the new budget worksheet D To refresh budget worksheet values with existing General Ledger budget balances 1 While viewing a budget worksheet choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Enter Budget from the list of values Select Refresh Budget Values Choose OK Note If your budget organization is password protected the system prompts you to enter the password Enter the password then choose OK ADI replaces the worksheet budget values with the existing budget balances from General Ledger based on the current edited budget worksheet parameters The system asks you before replacing any worksheet budget values that have changed since you last uploaded amounts to General Ledger Budget Wizard 4 5 Budget Worksheet Parameters DB To
140. able this profile option you specify a single journal source to be used during upload from ADI to General Ledger Creating Journal Worksheets on page 5 2 Journal Worksheet Options on page 5 4 Customizing Journal Worksheets on page 5 6 Creating Journal Entries Using ADI on page 5 12 Uploading Journal Entries from ADI to General Ledger on page 5 17 Journal Upload Options on page 5 21 Creating Journal Worksheets You use Journal Wizard to create customized journal worksheets in Microsoft Excel From a journal worksheet you can enter journal entries then upload and post them to General Ledger 5 2 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Creating Journal Worksheets B Create Journal Worksheet r Choose Journal Type Functional Actuals C Foreign Actuals C Budgets Pick Organization C Encumbrances eki r Number of Journals Single C Multiple Create Worksheet in New Workbook Curent Workbook DB To create a journal worksheet 1 Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Enter Journals from list of values 2 Select your journal worksheet options See Journal Worksheet Options on page 5 4 Note If you choose to create a budget journal worksheet you must also select a budget Organization from the poplist If the budget organization you select is password protected the system asks you to enter the password 3 Optional Choose the Edit Lay
141. ables GL_JE_BATCHES GL_JE_HEADERS and GL_JE_LINES to your archive tables GL_LARCHIVE_BATCHES GL_ARCHIVE_HEADERS and GL_ARCHIVE_ LINES Oracle Assets copies depreciation expense and adjustment transaction data for a fiscal year to temporary tables called archive tables archive tablespace The tablespace where your archive table is stored A tablespace is the area in which an Oracle7 database is divided to hold tables attribute An Oracle Financial Analyzer database object that links or relates the values of two dimensions For example you might define an attribute that relates the Sales District dimension to the Region dimension so that you can select data for sales districts according to region assemble to order ATO An environment where you open a final assembly order to assemble items that customers order assemble to order ATO item An item you make in response to a customer order assemble to order ATO model A configuration you make in response to a customer order that includes optional items assembly An item that has a bill of material You can purchase or manufacture an assembly item See also assemble to order bill of material asset An object of value owned by a corporation or business Assets are entered Oracle Projects as non labor resources See non labor resource See fixed asset asset account A general ledger account to which you charge the cost of an asset when you purchase it You must define an a
142. acle Projects uses one business group with one hierarchy business purpose The business reason you have for communicating with a customer s address For example you would assign the business purpose of Ship To to an address if you ship products to that address If you also send invoices to that address you could also assign the business purpose Bill To Bill To and Ship To are the only business purposes recognized in Oracle Order Entry Receivables QuickCode button You choose a button to initiate a predefined action Buttons do not store values A button is usually labeled with text to describe its action or it can be an icon whose image illustrates its action cache A temporary storage area for holding information during processing calculated depreciation method A depreciation method that uses the straight line method to calculate depreciation based on the asset life and the recoverable cost call actions Actions that you record and plan to take as a result of a call with a customer Examples of actions that you might note for future reference include creating a credit memo excluding a customer from dunning or alerting another member of your staff about an escalated issue call topics Each call can have many points or topics of discussion Examples include invoice debit memo invoice lines and customer problems cancellation code A reason that justifies the cancellation of an order or order line To cancel an ord
143. action that retires part of an asset You can retire any number of units of a multiple unit asset or you can retire part of an asset cost If you retire by units Oracle Assets automatically calculates the cost retired passing result A passing result signals successful completion of an order cycle approval action Once an order or order line has achieved an approval action passing result it no longer appears on the approval window See also approval action order cycle Pay Date Basis A feature you assign to suppliers to determine when AutoSelect selects invoices for payment in a payment batch Pay Date Basis Due or Discount defaults from the system level when you enter a new supplier but you can override it When Pay Date Basis is Due for a supplier site Applications Desktop Integrator selects that supplier s sites invoices for payment only when the invoice due date falls on or before the Pay Through Date for the payment batch If Pay Date Basis is Discount Applications Desktop Integrator selects the supplier s sites invoices for payment if the discount date or due date is before the pay through date Pay Group A feature you use to select invoices for payment in a payment batch You can define a PayGroup and assign it to one or more suppliers You can override the supplier s PayGroup on individual invoices For example you can create an Employee PayGroup to pay your employee expenses separately from other invoices pay on rec
144. actions You specify the functional currency for each set of books in the Set of Books window The principal currency you use to record transactions and maintain your accounting data for your Glossary 65 Glossary 66 set of books You define the functional currency for each set of books within your organization When you enter and pay an invoice in a foreign currency Applications Desktop Integrator automatically converts the foreign currency into your functional currency based on the exchange rate you define Applications Desktop Integrator creates journal entries for your multiple currency invoices and payments in both your foreign and functional currencies fund A fiscal and accounting entity with a self balancing set of accounts in which cash and other financial resources all related liabilities and residual equities or balances and changes to these balances are recorded A fund is segregated to carry on specific activities or attain certain objectives in accordance with special regulations restrictions or limitations When you implement Oracle Public Sector Financials Fund is typically the balancing segment of your Accounting Flexfield fund balance Fund balance is the equity portion of a fund balance sheet Fund balance may contain one or more of the following subdivisions reserved A portion of the fund balance not available for expenditure or legally segregated for a specific future use For example Reserve for Encumbrances an
145. age of the spreadsheet s many data entry shortcuts such as copying and pasting cells dragging and dropping ranges of cells or even using formulas to calculate journal line amounts ADI validates the data you enter against the accounts security rules and reference information you defined in General Ledger Once you ve created your journal entries and ADI has validated the data you can automatically upload your journals to General Ledger Before uploading however you can save and distribute your journal worksheets for approval Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard on page 6 1 The Report Wizard provides a spreadsheet based interface to General Ledger s financial reporting engine the Financial Statement Generator FSG The Report Wizard seamlessly supports report definitions for all user levels Novice users can define simple reports entirely within a spreadsheet intermediate users can use a combination of spreadsheets and assistance windows and advanced users can use configurable property sheets that allow faster data entry than working in the spreadsheet alone Most importantly the spreadsheet interface allows users to manage the reporting process within the comfort and familiarity of a spreadsheet while still taking advantage of the FSG s reusable and interchangeable report objects server based processing for high performance and report scheduling for efficient use of system resources Applications Desktop Integrato
146. ager and Oracle s large staff of consultants and support specialists with expertise in your business area managing an Oracle server and your hardware and software environment About Oracle Oracle Corporation develops and markets an integrated line of software products for database management applications development decision support and office automation as well as Oracle Applications an integrated suite of more than 45 software modules for financial management supply chain management manufacturing project systems human resources and sales and service management Oracle products are available for mainframes minicomputers personal computers network computers and personal digital assistants allowing organizations to integrate different computers different operating systems different networks and even different database management systems into a single unified computing and information resource Oracle is the world s leading supplier of software for information management and the world s second largest software company Oracle offers its database tools and applications products along with related consulting education and support services in over 140 countries around the world xix Thank You XX Thank you for using Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator and this installation guide We value your comments and feedback At the end of this guide is a Reader s Comment Form you can use to explain what you
147. al fields for which a list of values is available The system also performs cross validation and segment security checking Note Cross validation checking is only performed if you have the General Ledger profile option Flexfields Validate On Server set to Yes a Partial validates all journal data except for accounts Segment security checking is also performed None performs segment security checking only Note Segment security checking is only performed if you have defined segment security rules D Start Journal Import Check this box to start the journal import process automatically after the upload completes When this box is checked you can select additional options for the journal import process a Post Account Errors to Suspense check this box to have journal entry lines with account errors posted to a predefined suspense account To use this function suspense posting must be enabled in General Ledger a Create Summary Journals check this box to have General Ledger summarize all transactions that share the same account period and currency If you don t check this box General Ledger creates a journal line for every row in your journal worksheet Descriptive Flex from the poplist make your selection Do Not Import prevents importing descriptive flexfields Select With Validation General Ledger validates descriptive flexfield values 5 22 Oracle Applications Desktop
148. alid information You also lose the ability to track who has changed your information because SQL Plus and other database tools do not keep a record of changes Consequently we STRONGLY RECOMMEND that you never use SQL Plus Oracle Data Browser database triggers or any other tool to modify Oracle Applications tables unless we tell you to do so in our manuals Several special notes are provided to alert you to particular information within the body of the manual Other Information Sources You can choose from many sources of information including documentation training and support services to increase your knowledge and understanding of ADI Related User s Guides Applications Desktop Integrator Tutorial This tutorial is designed to help you quickly learn about all of ADI s features The tutorial is available for the Vision demonstration database xvi Oracle Applications General Ledger User s Guide This guide is a complete source about General Ledger It contains overviews as well as task and reference information about the General Ledger accounting cycle journal entry budgeting consolidation financial reporting multi currency encumbrance accounting standard reports and listings and setting up General Ledger Oracle Assets User s Guide This guide provides information on using Oracle Assets to maintain your assets including information on Mass Addtiions the Mass Additions interface Physical Inventory and t
149. ally enter a planned purchase order to specify items you want to order and when you want the items delivered You later enter a shipment release against the planned purchase order to order the items Glossary 109 Glossary 110 Positive Pay Program Third party or custom software that formats the output file of the Payables Positive Pay Report into the format required by your bank and transmits it electronically to your bank This prevents check fraud by informing the bank which checks are negotiable or non negotiable and for what amount planning item A type of item representing a product family or demand channel whose bill of material contains a list of items and planning percentages planning percent A component usage percentage that facilitates planning for optional components on model and option class bills and all components on planning bills PO See purchase order pop up window An additional window that appears on an Oracle Applications form when your cursor enters a particular field posting date The date a journal transaction is actually posted to the general ledger poplist A poplist lets you choose a single value from a predefined list To choose a value press your left mouse button while on the poplist icon to display the list of choices then drag your mouse through the list to the desired value Release your mouse button to choose the value you highlight and display it in the poplist field A poplist is
150. ample you may want to draft next year s budget using last year s actual results plus 10 percent or some other growth factor With MassBudgeting you can apply one rule to a range of accounts master budget A budget that controls the authority of other budgets master detail relationship A master detail relationship is an association between two blocks a master block and its detail block When two blocks are linked by a master detail relationship the detail block displays only those records that are associated with the current master record in the master block and querying between the two blocks is always coordinated Master and detail blocks can often appear in the same window or they can each appear in separate windows matching The process where batches or detailed transactions are associated with a statement line based on the transaction number amount currency and other variables taking Cash Management system parameters into consideration In Oracle Cash Management matching can be done manually or automatically See also clearing reconciliation The process of comparing purchase order invoice and receiving information to verify that ordering billing and receiving information is consistent within accepted tolerance levels Applications Desktop Integrator uses matching to control payments to suppliers You can use the matching feature in Applications Desktop Integrator if you have Oracle Purchasing or another purchasing sys
151. an only enter new combinations of segment values using a combinations form a form specifically used for creating and maintaining code combinations An Oracle Applications feature that lets you automatically create new key flexfield combinations when you enter transactions or customers If you do not use dynamic insertion you can only create new key flexfield combinations using the various flexfield setup forms effective date The date a transaction affects the balances in the general ledger This does not have to be the same as the posting date Also known as the value date earned discounts Discounts your customers are allowed to take if they remit payment for their invoices on or before the discount date The discount date is determined by the payment terms assigned to an invoice Applications Desktop Integrator takes into account any discount grace days you assign to this customer s credit profile For example if the discount due date is the 15th of each month but discount grace days is 5 your customer must pay on or before the 20th to receive the earned discount Discounts are determined by the terms you assign to an invoice during invoice entry See also unearned discounts EFT See Electronic Funds Transfer EFT Glossary 51 Glossary 52 Electronic Funds Transfer EFT A method of payment in which your bank transfers funds electronically from your bank account into another bank account In Oracle Payables your bank transf
152. andard Fixed Format and Standard Variable Format reports See Also Ad Hoc Report Components on page 12 13 Setting Report Publishing Options on page 12 18 Setting Report Submission Options on page 12 30 Formatting Report Output on page 12 33 Monitoring Requests on page 12 51 Ad Hoc Report Components Before you can submit an ad hoc report from the Report Submission and Publishing window you must specify the report objects you want to use to create the report DB To specify report objects for an ad hoc report 1 From the Report Submission and Publishing window choose the Select Components button Request Center 12 13 Request Sets See Also The Select Ad Hoc Report Components window appears 2 Select your required report objects from the Row Set and Column Set poplists Note When publishing to a spreadsheet the column set in the report must be lt 255 columns 3 Optional Select any additional report objects from the Content Set Row Order and Display Set poplists 4 Choose OK to save your work and return to the Report Submission and Publishing window 5 Complete the report submission process See Submitting Reports on page 12 8 Overview of the Financial Statement Generator Oracle General Ledger User s Guide Deleting Ad Hoc Reports Oracle General Ledger User s Guide Defining Ad Hoc Reports Oracle General Ledger User s Guide Request Sets See Also You can submit Report
153. ange the font to one that supports the unique characters required by the language Chose OK to save your work DB To change the font ADI uses in windows menus and tool tips 1 Choose the Options button from the ADI toolbar then choose Language Options from the list of values The Language Options window appears In the Font region select Use default to use the standard ADI font which is MS Sans Serif 10 point bold To use any other font select Specific then enter the Font name and Size You can also choose to display your specific font in Bold and or Italic typeface Choose a setting in the Form Resizing Ratio Bar Your form may require resizing depending on the language you select Choose OK to save your work ADI Options on page 3 16 Setting the Help System Location on page 3 33 General Ledger Options on page 3 23 Setting the Help System Location ADI provides online help that you can view using your default web browser To use this feature you must first set the base URL address to the location where ADI s Getting Started 3 33 Displaying Signon Information web based help files are installed Your system administrator can provide you with this location D To set the ADI help system location 1 Choose the Options button from the ADI toolbar then choose Language Options from the list of values The Language Options window appears 2 Inthe Help region enter the base URL address of the Locatio
154. ansition In Oracle Workflow the relationship that defines the completion of one activity and the activation of another activity within a process In a process diagram the arrow drawn between two activities represents a transition See also activity Workflow Engine translation See revaluation foreign currency translation transmission format A transmission format defines what data your bank is sending in the bank file and how that data is organized In Applications Desktop Integrator you define a transmission format that identifies what types of records you want to import what data is in each type of record and the position in which that data is located on the record unapplied payment The status of a payment for which you can identify the customer but you have not applied or placed on account all or part of the payment For example you receive a check for 1200 00 and you apply it to an open debit item for 1000 00 The remaining 200 00 is unapplied until you either apply the payment to a debit item or place the amount On Account Unbilled Receivables The amount of open receivables that have not yet been billed for a project Oracle Projects calculates unbilled receivables using the following formula Unbilled Receivables Revenue Accrued Amount Invoice unearned discounts Discounts your customers are allowed to take if they pay for their invoices after the discount date The discount date is determined by the paym
155. antity received See also matching 4 way matching The process of verifying that purchase order invoice and receiving information matches within accepted tolerance levels Applications Desktop Integrator uses the following criteria to verify four way matching Invoice price lt Order price Quantity billed lt Quantity ordered Quantity billed lt Quantity received Quantity billed lt Quantity accepted See also matching accepted quantity The quantity of inventory items received from a customer based on a return authorization for which you credit the customer See also received quantity Account Generator A feature that uses Oracle Workflow to provide various Oracle Applications with the ability to construct Accounting Flexfield combinations automatically using custom construction criteria You define a group of steps that determine how to fill in your Accounting Flexfield segments You can define additional processes and or modify the default process es depending on the application See also activity function item type lookup type node process protection level result type transition Workflow Engine account groups Fixed asset or long term liabilities for which governments usually maintain separate accountability Governments usually maintain these transactions in account groups known as the general fixed assets account group and the general long term debt account group account hierarchy An Oracle Financ
156. apping templates 11 2 overview 11 1 parameters 11 2 J journal entries creating with ADI 5 12 uploading from ADI 5 17 Journal tab 3 25 journal upload options 5 21 Journal Wizard 5 1 creating journal entries 5 12 creating journal worksheets 5 2 customizing journal worksheets 5 6 journal upload options 5 21 journal worksheet options 5 4 uploading journal entries 5 17 journal worksheet options 5 4 journal worksheets creating 5 2 customizing 5 6 journals entering 5 1 L language options setting 3 32 layout templates Create Assets feature 9 3 Record Physical Inventory feature 10 4 local printer settings 12 31 macro report themes 12 49 mapping templates Import Text File feature 11 2 Modify Node Descriptions window 8 35 modifying segment value descriptions Account Hierarchy Editor 8 34 N New Theme tab 3 20 O options Analysis tab 3 28 Budget tab 3 24 Colors tab 3 19 drill 3 28 General tab 3 22 Journal tab 3 25 language 3 32 New Theme tab 3 20 Report Definition tab 3 26 Request Center 3 30 12 5 setting general 3 16 wizard 3 23 Oracle Assets Create Assets feature 9 1 import processes 3 46 Import Text File feature 11 1 Record Physical Inventory feature 10 1 P parameters Import Text File feature 11 2 parent levels concept 8 2 parent segment values replacing 8 30 publishing Index 3 setting publishing options 12 18 web options 12 23
157. ar item such as currency or journal category Hot key Ctrl Shift L E e E l k a 3 6 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator ADI Toolbar Upload to Interface Upload your asset and physical inventory data to Oracle Assets interface tables Provides the option to automatically start the Submit Process function see below Hot key Ctrl Shift U Submit Process Post MassAdditions from the MassAdditions interface table to Oracle Assets Your process can also be submitted automatically from the upload to Interface function see above Submit Physical Inventory Comparison Process Applications Desktop Integrator aa uks TI Yx Applications Menu Choose applications to access the Request Center Oracle Applications or Start Excel Request Center Format submit monitor and publish reports ot key Ctrl Shift W Oracle Applications Start Oracle Applications if it is installed on your PC When you select this button you will be asked to select an applications database If you use the same sttlicctias database as for your ADI session you will not have to enter your username and password Hot key Ctrl Shift A Getting Started 3 7 ADI Toolbar Excel Start Microsoft Excel Hot key Ctrl Shift E Applications Desktop Integrator DA URSI YX ADI Options Menu Use to access general options for ADI iT General Ledger Request Center and Language options Also
158. ard See Also Column Properties fo January Ss SY f0 January CY Januar AS PTD Actual No No January Actual data for POI 11 Yes Yes Thousands Accts Calcs Excpts The Column Properties window and its related secondary windows are linked in that all the column related windows displays the detail information for one column The linking is controlled by the poplist that appears at the top of each window Report Wizard Interface on page 6 5 Reports Toolbar on page 6 2 Report Wizard Tools on page 6 5 Creating a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 12 Saving a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 17 The Request Center on page 12 1 Overview of the Financial Statement Generator Oracle General Ledger User s Guide Creating a Report Using Report Wizard The Report Wizard guides you step by step through the process of creating a report worksheet Once you tell Report Wizard what task you want to accomplish the wizard asks you a series of questions related to that task Once it has all of the information it needs Report Wizard creates then displays your report worksheet in Excel With the Report Wizard you can create a report from existing FSG report objects or you can create new report objects Figure 6 3 illustrates the report creation process 6 12 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Report Width You can also open and edit reports that were previously saved
159. arer It may be payable upon demand in which case it usually circulates the same as a bank check or it may be payable only out of certain revenues when and if received in which case it does not circulate as freely warrant An order drawn by a legislative body or an officer of the government upon its treasurer directing the treasurer to pay a specified amount of money to the person named or to the bearer A warrant may be payable upon demand in which case it circulates the same as a bank check or it may be payable only out of certain revenues when and if received in which case it does not circulate as freely waybill A document containing a list of goods and shipping instructions relative to a shipment Glossary 163 Glossary 164 waybill number The number associated with a waybill that you record for the shipping batch at ship confirmation weighted average exchange rate An exchange rate that Applications Desktop Integrator automatically calculates by multiplying journal amounts for an account by the translation rate that applies to each journal amount You choose whether the rate that applies to each journal amount is based on the inverse of the daily conversation rate or on an exception rate you enter manually Applications Desktop Integrator uses the weighted average rate instead of the period end average or historical rates to translate balances for accounts assigned a weighted average rate type weighted average t
160. art of accounts and segment hierarchy 3 Select any segment value in the Segment Values window Right click to open the Find menu and choose Find or choose Find from the Edit menu The Find Segment window appears 4 Complete the following fields per your search requirements Find What Enter the segment value or description of the segment value you want to find Note The poplist for this field records your most recent segment value or description searches Parent Check this check box to limit your search to Parent values Child Check this check box to limit your search to Child values Note Check both Parent and Child check boxes to find all values Match Case Check this check box to use a case sensitive search Match Whole Words Only Choose this check box to match whole words in your search Your search locates the next instance of the word you specify Search for Segment Region Choose the check box that corresponds with your search Segment Value or Segment Value Description Direction Region You can direct your search up or down your chart of accounts to speed your search Choose the appropriate direction See Also The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface on page 8 4 The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu on page 8 10 The Account Hierarchy Editor Toolbar on page 8 14 8 16 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor Find
161. ary 105 Glossary 106 multiple payment formats for each payment method An attribute that associates receipt class remittance bank and receipt account information with your receipt entries You can define payment methods for both manual and automatic receipts In Payables you can assign a payment method to suppliers supplier sites invoice payment schedule lines and payment formats You can then assign one or more payment formats to a bank account You can have multiple payment formats for each payment method Receivables payment methods let you associate receipt class remittance bank and receipt account information with your receipt entries You can define payment methods for both manual and automatic receipts In Payroll there are three standard payment types for paying employees check cash and direct deposit You can also define your own payment methods corresponding to these types payment priority A value ranging from 1 high to 99 low assigned to an invoice that determines how Payables selects invoices for payment in a payment batch You can assign default payment priorities to suppliers supplier sites and invoice scheduled payments in Applications Desktop Integrator payment program A program you use to build and format your payment Applications Desktop Integrator provides several payment programs You can define as many additional programs as you need Applications Desktop Integrator recognizes three payment program ty
162. as the Payment Due Date gain loss The profit or loss resulting from the retirement of an asset gain See realized gain or loss unrealized gain or loss general ledger date The date used to determine the correct accounting period for your transactions The Applications Desktop Integrator posting program uses this date when posting transactions to your general ledger general ledger The accounting system that tracks the journal entries that affect each account General Services Administration See GSA generic agreement An agreement without a specified customer so it is available to all customers See also agreement customer family agreement GL Date The date used to determine the correct accounting period for your invoice and payment transactions You assign a GL Date to your invoices during invoice entry and your payments during payment creation The date used to determine the correct accounting period for your accounting transactions The end date of the GL Period in which costs or revenue are transferred to Oracle General Ledger This date is determined from the open or future GL Period on or after the PA Date of a cost distribution line or revenue For invoices the GL Date is the date within the GL Period on which an invoice is transferred to Oracle Receivables and is based on the invoice date GL Date range An accounting cycle that is defined by a beginning and ending GL Date global segment prompt A non context
163. at you submitted are shown on this tab You e completed list by choosing the Monitor Request button from the Request Center toolbar Hotlist This tab shows any completed requests that you have added to the hotlist by using the Add Request to Hotlist button from the Request Center toolbar Databases Shows all applications databases you have defined This tab also are connected to the database and shows how many requests indicates whether you related to the database Select Request To Monitor Query Options for Database adi110 are Complete Pending and Hotlisted LEL Request Status Request Owner Further Limit By baan last 100 Incomplete C OPERATIONS Program Name E Puenta Complete All Users Financial Statement Generator Query Reo Details Request ID Username Program Status H 194139 OPERATIONS Company Balance Sheet Normal 194098 OPERATIONS helen s report Normal 194096 OPERATIONS Company Balance Sheet Normal 194095 OPERATIONS Trial Balance Normal 194094 OPERATIONS Summary Income Statemen Normal 194016 OPERATIONS Summary Income Statemen Normal 194013 OPERATIONS Summary Income Statemen Normal 194012 OPERATIONS Summary Income Statemen Normal 193983 __ SYSADMIN _ Summary Income Statemen Normal _ 193939 OPERATIONS Summary Income Statemen Normal 193938 OPERATIONS Summary Income Statemen Normal 193937 OPERATIONS Summary Income Statemen Normal 193927 SYSADMIN Summary Income
164. ate available to other users by checking the Public check box on the Mapping window 11 2 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Import Text File Parameters e Import Assets Text file x Build an Assets spreadsheet by importing data from flat data files Choose Source File Source File Content Location Category Units Cost Deseriptio d ORANT GLDISO ASSET TXT R Expense W First row contains field names USA CA S Land Occi 1 2500000 Land 0000 00i USA CA S Building 0 2 1250000 Building 0000 00i USA CA S Building M 2 800000 Building 0000 00i 4 zi Help r Delimiter Tab C Semicolon C Comma C Other Choose Mapping kdt0824al aj cme o DB To create a new mapping template 1 From the Import Assets Text File window choose the Actions button 2 Choose the New option from the poplist 3 Enter a name for the new mapping template 4 At the Edit window use the drag and drop functions and the directional buttons to arrange the fields on your mapping template Choose OK See Editing Mapping Templates on page 11 5 DB To customize an existing mapping template 1 From the Import Assets Text File window select a mapping template to customize and choose the Actions button 2 Choose the View Edit option from the poplist 3 At the Mapping window edit the layout Choose OK See Editing Mapping Templates on page 11 5 Import Tex
165. ates General Ledger keeps your accounting records in balance for each company by automatically creating offsetting entries to an intercompany account you define interest invoice An invoice that Applications Desktop Integrator creates to pay interest on a past due invoice Applications Desktop Integrator automatically creates an expense distribution line for an interest invoice using an Accounting Flexfield you specify You cannot modify an interest invoice interface table A temporary database table used for transferring data between applications or from an external application See also database table interfund account A general ledger account you define in an Accounting Flexfield to balance interfund transactions You can define multiple interfund accounts for use with different types of journal entries You can define multiple interfund accounts and link them with balancing segment values so each fund can have multiple interfund accounts For example fund A can have an interfund payable account for fund B and an interfund receivable account for fund B Fund A can have an interfund payable account for fund C and an interfund receivable account for fund C interfund entry A transaction between two or more funds For example an activity funded out of the General Fund that is to be reimbursed by the Plant Fund is an interfund transaction Oracle Public Sector Financials can automatically create basic interfund entries when you post a
166. atic Billing extensions create automatic events to account for the revenue and invoice amounts calculated by the billing extensions automatic asset numbering A feature that automatically numbers your assets if you do not enter an asset number automatic note A standard note that you assign automatic application rules to so that it can be applied automatically to orders returns order lines and return lines See also one time note standard note automatic payment A Payables process that automatically selects invoices based on your selection criteria creates a payment check or electronic funds transfer and confirms the status of each payment automatic payment processing A Payables process that produces payments for groups of invoices The complete process includes invoice selection payment batch payment building manual modification addition to invoice payments in the payment batch payment formatting and confirmation of results You can modify a payment batch up until the time you format payments for the payment batch You can cancel a payment batch up until the time you confirm the payment batch automatic receipt In addition to standard check processing you can use the automatic receipt feature to automatically generate receipts for customers with whom you have predefined agreements These agreements let you transfer funds from the customer s bank account to yours on the receipt maturity date automatic reconcil
167. ation to allocate overhead to organizations within the operating funds based on headcount straight time cost The monetary amount that an employee is paid for straight time regular hours worked streamline process See streamline request streamline request A process that runs multiple Oracle Projects processes in sequence When using streamline processing you can reschedule your streamline requests by setting rescheduling parameters Rescheduling parameters allow you to configure your processes to run automatically according to a defined schedule When you reschedule a process the concurrent manager submits another concurrent request with a status of Pending and with a start date according to the parameters you define structure A structure is a specific combination of segments for a key flexfield If you add or remove segments or rearrange the order of segments in a key flexfield you get a different structure Glossary 151 Glossary 152 subinventory A subdivision of an organization or warehouse representing either a physical area or a logical grouping of items such as a storeroom or receiving dock substitute item An item that can be used in place of a component Oracle Master Scheduling MRP suggests substitutes items on some reports subtask A hierarchical unit of work Subtasks are any tasks that you create under a parent task Child subtasks constitute the lowest level of your work breakdown structure
168. awss H m E a p To set the report submission options 1 From the Report Submission and Publishing window choose the Options button 2 Enter the Date and Time you want to submit your report Alternatively choose the Set Date Time button to use the graphical Calendar window to select a date and time 12 30 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Specifying Your Printer Settings December 1997 Sun Fri 5 12 19 26 Torre eor Time 04 E po FAM G OK Cancel 3 Check the Local Printer check box and select the printer name if you want to print your report to your local printer 4 Check the Server Printer check box and select the printer name if you want to print your report to one of your organization s network printers Enter the number of Copies of the report you want to print 5 Complete the report submission process See Also Setting Report Submission Options on page 12 30 Submitting Reports on page 12 8 Specifying Your Printer Settings You can specify a default font to use when printing reports to a local printer rather than to a network printer You can also choose to put a border around the page Request Center 12 31 Specifying Your Printer Settings See Also _ gt BN Print Settings atx m Settings Font ERI ae Bold C Size 8 4 Italie C Preview Page Bord
169. bility that the General Ledger budget import process will fail because of a validation error Prevalidating is useful when you expect that the budget import process will be quite lengthy or when you plan to run it unattended such as overnight Additional Information Regardless of whether you choose to prevalidate your budget data the General Ledger budget import process still performs its usual server side validation activities 4 22 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Budget Upload Options You can choose one of two prevalidation options for your budget data a fFull Prevalidates all budget data for which a list of values is available and performs segment security checking None Performs segment security checking only Note Segment security checking is only performed if you have defined segment security rules Note If the General Ledger profile option GLDI Force Full Validation is set to yes ADI performs full validation of your budget data You cannot change this option from the Budget Wizard 1 Duplicate Rows in Interface Table Determines whether the system warns you before older rows of duplicate values already in the GL Budget Interface table are deleted by values in the new rows being uploaded Select Prompt Before Deletion of Existing Row to have the system issue a warning message Select Always Delete Existing Row to let the system perform the deletion automatically
170. bmit report sets through the Request Center Report set submission is not yet supported but you can publish report sets through the Request Center Question Can I perform cell level formatting with report themes Yes you can format financial reports at the cell level using report themes For additional information See Cell Level Formatting Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator User s Guide Question Is ADI a web enabled product No ADI is a client server application However ADI can be implemented in a three tier architecture using environments such as Citrix WinFrame and Windows Terminal Server Question Can I run a financial statement between different sets of books 2 10 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Functional Issues Yes if the sets of books contain the same chart of accounts and if the set of books for the report is determined based upon the user s responsibility If the set of books for the report is defined within the report itself you must first make a copy of the report using Report Wizard and change the set of books in the definition of the report copy Question Can drill down on a financial report amount produced by a row or column calculation using the Analysis Wizard No you can only drill down on financial report amounts associated with account segments Question Why aren t custom filters working on account segment values in budget worksheets You may notice unpredictable results when
171. board You can then paste the information into any other Windows application 7 10 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Setting Analysis Wizard Options Print Print the currently actrive drill window Analysis Wizard displays a print preview window first From the preview window you can set your print options and change the width of individual drill window columns Help Access the online help features of Analysis Wizard Exit Close and exit Analysis Wizard See Also Setting Analysis Wizard Options on page 7 11 Analysis Wizard Drilldown Flows on page 7 13 Applications Desktop Integrator Budget Wizard on page 4 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Journal Wizard on page 5 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard on page 6 1 ADI Options on page 3 16 The Request Center on page 12 1 Setting Analysis Wizard Options You can set default drill options or you can change the options for the drill that is currently displayed in the Context window Analysis Wizard 7 11 Setting Analysis Wizard Options Ledger Options Journal Report Definition D To set any of the options discussed in this section 1 To change the default drill options choose the General Options button from the ADI toolbar and select Ledger Options from the List of Values The Ledger Options window appears 2 Select the Report Analysis tab 3 Set your Drill and Environment options See Drill and Environment Options on pag
172. cable Restricted Rights Notice Programs delivered subject to the DOD FAR Supplement are commercial computer software and use duplication and disclosure of the Programs including documentation shall be subject to the licensing restrictions set forth in the applicable Oracle license agreement Otherwise Programs delivered subject to the Federal Acquisition Regulations are restricted computer software and use duplication and disclosure of the Programs shall be subject to the restrictions in FAR 52 227 19 Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights June 1987 Oracle Corporation 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood City CA 94065 The Programs are not intended for use in any nuclear aviation mass transit medical or other inherently dangerous applications It shall be the licensee s responsibility to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of such applications if the Programs are used for such purposes and Oracle Corporation disclaims liability for any damages caused by such use of the Programs Oracle is a registered trademark andOracle Applications Oracle Asets Oracle Cash Management Oracle Financial Analyzer Oracle General Ledger Oracle Human Resource Management System Oracle Payables Oracle Projects Oracle Purchasing Oracle Receivables Oracle Reports Oracle Workflow PL SQL Report Manager Oracle Business Intelligence System Oracle Self Service Web Applications are trade
173. cally by your receivables system to avoid assigning duplicate numbers invoice price variance The difference between the item price for an invoice and its matched purchase order For your inventory items Payables tracks any invoice price variances Glossary 77 Glossary 78 invoice quantity variance The difference between the quantity billed for an invoice and the quantity ordered or received accepted depending on the level of matching you use for its matched purchase order Payables distributes invoice quantity variances to the Accounting Flexfield for your invoice distribution lines invoice set For each given run of invoice generation for a project if multiple agreements exist and multiple invoices are created Oracle Projects creates the invoices within a unique set ID You approve release and cancel all invoices within an invoice set invoice split amount See split amount invoice transaction type An Oracle Receivables transaction type that is assigned to invoices and credit memos that are created from Oracle Projects draft invoices invoice write off A transaction that reduces the amount outstanding on an invoice by a given amount and credits a bad debt account invoicing The function of preparing a client invoice Invoice generation refers to the function of creating the invoice Invoicing is broader in the terms of creating adjusting and approving an invoice invoicing rules Rules that Oracle Rece
174. cast level The level at which a forecast is defined Also the level at which to consume a forecast Examples of forecast levels include items customers customer bill to and customer ship to locations foreign currency A currency that you define for your set of books for recording and conducting accounting transactions in a currency other than your functional currency When you enter and pay an invoice in a foreign currency Applications Desktop Integrator automatically converts the foreign currency into your functional currency based on the exchange rate you define See also exchange rate functional currency A currency that you define for your set of books to record and conduct accounting transactions in a currency other than your functional currency foreign currency conversion A process that converts a foreign currency journal entry into your functional currency Applications Desktop Integrator automatically converts currency whenever you enter a journal entry in a currency other than your functional currency Applications Desktop Integrator multiplies the daily exchange rate you define or the exchange rate you enter to convert amounts for your functional currency You can view the results of foreign currency conversion in the Enter Journals window The conversion of a foreign currency transaction such as an invoice or a payment into your functional currency Applications Desktop Integrator automatically performs this conversion whenever
175. ccount as an asset account Asset Key Flexfield Oracle Assets lets you define additional ways to sort and categorize your assets without any financial impact You use your Asset Key Flexfield to define how you want to keep the information ATO See assemble to order ATO item See assemble to order ATO item Glossary 11 Glossary 12 ATO Model See assemble to order ATO model ATP See available to promise ATR See available to reserve attribute See activity attribute item type attribute Audit Set The group of forms that are available for auditing in your application AutoAccounting A feature used by Oracle Projects to automatically determine the account coding for an accounting transaction based on the project task employee and expenditure information A feature that lets you determine how the Accounting Flexfields for your revenue receivable freight tax unbilled receivable and unearned revenue account types are created AutoAccounting function A group of related AutoAccounting transactions There is at least one AutoAccounting function for each Oracle Projects process that uses AutoAccounting AutoAccounting functions are predefined by Oracle Projects AutoAccounting Lookup Set An implementation defined list of intermediate values and corresponding Accounting Flexfield segment values AutoAccounting lookup sets are used to translate intermediate values such as organization names into account co
176. ce correction An invoice you receive from a supplier that is an adjustment to the unit price of an invoice you previously matched to a purchase order shipment You can match the price correction to specific purchase order distribution lines or you can have Applications Desktop Integrator prorate the price correction across all previously matched purchase order distributions If you receive a price correction that represents a price reduction you enter the price correction as a Credit invoice If you receive a price correction that represents a price increase you enter the price correction as a Standard invoice price list A register of all the products you offer and the selling price for each pricing components Combinations of pricing parameters you use when defining pricing rules Pricing components can be made up of one or multiple pricing parameters pricing parameters A parameter you use to create components to be used in a pricing rule Valid pricing parameters include segments of your item flexfield or Pricing Attribute Descriptive Flexfield pricing rule A mathematical formula used to define item pricing You create a pricing rule by combining pricing components and assigning a value to the components Oracle Order Entry automatically creates list prices based on formulas you define See also pricing components primary accounting method The accounting method you choose for your primary set of books You can choose either
177. cel DB To duplicate an existing parent hierarchy 1 Inthe Segment Values window select a parent value whose hierarchy you want to duplicate then drag drop it in the Hierarchy Diagram window 2 Select the top level parent value if you want to duplicate the entire hierarchy To duplicate a portion of the hierarchy select the lower level parent whose structure you want to duplicate Suggestion Youcan only duplicate parents that have child values assigned to them 3 Choose Duplicate Hierarchy from the Edit menu The Duplicate Hierarchy window appears 4 Enter the segment value for the New Top Level Parent Also enter a Description 8 28 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Duplicating Parent Hierarchies 5 Optional To replace lower level parent segment values with different values to be used in your duplicate hierarchy define replacement criteria by completing the Replace Lower Level Parent Value s region See Replacing Parent Segment Values on page 8 30 Note If you do not complete this optional step you will get an exact duplicate of your original hierarchy If you do not complete this optional step you will get an exact duplicate of your original hierarchy Suggestion To build your duplicate hierarchy one step at a time repeat this optional step as often as necessary making small changes each time To see the effect of each incremental change choose the Preview button b
178. changes to a specific hierarchy level or modify individual segment value descriptions DB To modify segment value descriptions 1 In the Hierarchy Diagram window drag an existing hierarchy or build a hierarchy for which you want to change descriptions Select the entire hierarchy by choosing the top most parent or select another level within the hierarchy Choose Modify Node Descriptions from the menu or right click to choose Modify Node Descriptions from the menu that appears The Modify Node Descriptions window appears Note The top level segment value in the hierarchy you selected appears in the window title bar Complete the following fields Find What Enter the description you want to change Replace With Enter the new description Level Specify the level of your hierarchy you want to change For example if you specify 2 for the second level your description changes apply only to the segment values in the second level You can limit your description search by checking the following check boxes Parent Value or Child Value Match Case Your search is case sensitive Match Whole Words Only Your search matches only the whole word s you specify in the Find What field Choose the Find button to initiate your search The Replacement Description region appears Account Hierarchy Editor 8 35 Modifying Segment Value Descriptions Modify Node Descriptions 6000 Total Employee Expenses Lx
179. cial institutions usually charge a fee for factoring FASB 52 U S See SFAS 52 FASB 8 U S See SFAS 8 Federal Identification Number See Tax Identification Number feeder program A custom program you write to transfer your transaction information from an original system into Oracle Application interface tables The type of feeder program you write depends on the environment from which you are importing data feeder system Another system from which you can pass information into Oracle Assets For example you can pass budget or production information from a spreadsheet into Oracle Assets fiduciary funds A fund type for which the accounting and reporting techniques depend on whether the fund is expendable or nonexpendable Examples of fiduciary funds include Trust and Agency funds financial data item An Oracle Financial Analyzer database object that is made up of either a variable or a variable and a formula For example a financial data item called Actuals would be a variable while a financial data item called Actuals Variance would be made up of a variable Actuals and a formula that calculates a variance field A position on a window that you use to enter view update or delete information A field prompt describes each field by telling you what kind of information appears in the field or alternatively what kind of information you should enter in the field Glossary 59 Glossary 60
180. ciation expense in the associated corporate book deferred revenue An event type classification that generates an invoice for the amount of the event and has no immediate effect on revenue The invoice amount is accounted for in an unearned revenue account that will be offset as the project accrues revenue delete group A set of items bills and routings you choose to delete demand An effective method of communicating current or future product need to Inventory and other manufacturing products Effective demand management allows you make timely decisions on product procurement and resource scheduling demand class A category you can use to segregate scheduled demand and supply into groups so that you can track and consume the groups independently You can define a demand class for a very important customer or a group of customers Manufacturing QuickCode demand management The function of recognizing and managing all demands for products to ensure the master scheduler is aware of them This encompasses forecasting order entry order promising available to promise branch warehouse requirements and other sources of demand demand time fence A date within which the planning process does not consider forecast demand when calculating actual demand Within the demand time fence sales orders are the only source of demand Outside the demand time fence the planning process considers forecast entries dependent segment
181. code structure The data elements a government activity uses to classify the financial aspects of a transaction Accounting Flexfield The code you use to identify a general ledger account in an Oracle Financials application Each Accounting Flexfield segment value corresponds to a summary or rollup account within your chart of accounts Accounting Flexfield structure The account structure you define to fit the specific needs of your organization You choose the number of segments as well as the length name and order of each segment in your Accounting Flexfield structure Accounting Flexfield value set A group of values and attributes of the values For example the value length and value type that you assign to your account segment to identify a particular element of your business such as Company Division Region or Product A group of values and attributes of the values For example the value length and value type that you assign to your Accounting Flexfield segment to identify a particular element of your business such as Company Division Region or Product Accounting Flexfield value set A group of values and attributes of those values For example the value length and value type that you assign to your account segment to identify a particular element of your business such as Company Division Region or Product A group of values and attributes of the values For example the value length and value type that you assign to
182. context amount a The Show Detail Accounts button is only available when detail account ranges are defined for the context amount The Show Subleger Details button is available for transactions that originated from Oracle Payables Receivables Assets Projects Purchasing Inventory and WIP See Also Setting Analysis Wizard Options on page 7 11 Analysis Wizard Drilldown Flows on page 7 13 Applications Desktop Integrator Budget Wizard on page 4 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Journal Wizard on page 5 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard on page 6 1 ADI Options on page 3 16 The Request Center on page 12 1 7 14 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator 8 Account Hierarchy Editor The Account Hierarchy Editor With the Account Hierarchy Editor you can graphically create maintain and review account structure hierarchies You can define new parent and child segment values as well as change parent child dependencies You can also create new rollup groups from the Account Hierarchy Editor and have your changes reflected automatically in both the Key Segment Values and Rollup Groups windows Additional Information There is a General Ledger profile option GL AHE Saving Allowed that must be set to Yes if you want to modify and save account hierarchies See Setting General Ledger Profile OptionsOracle General Ledger User s Guide Attention When you change parent child relationships that affect
183. controls the number of effective ranges you can drilldown upon If there are more effective ranges than the number set for the profile option the View Filter button label is colored blue If there are fewer effective ranges than the number set for the profile option the View Filter button label is black You can choose the View Filter button to open the Effective Ranges window Toward the bottom of the Effective Ranges window the message Up to __ ranges can be selected is displayed reflecting the current profile option setting Show Summary Accounts If summary account ranges have been defined for the amount in the Context window you can choose this button to drill down to see the summary accounts and amounts If no summary accounts are defined this button is not available Show Detail Accounts If detail account ranges have been defined for the amount in the Context window you can choose this button to drill down to see the detail accounts and amounts If no detail accounts are defined this button is not available Drill Options Choose this button to change the options for the current drill See Drill and Environment Options on page 3 28 Data Source Choose this button to open the Drill Source window which shows reference information pertaining to the amount in the Context window The information includes the General Ledger Database Application Workbook Name Worksheet Name and Worksheet Cell Set of Books 2 Set of Bo
184. count gt SEGMENT3 Product gt SEGMENT4 Product Line gt SEGMENTS Sub Account gt SEGMENT6 ells Applications Version 10 7 r Signon Details Application Username sysadmin Responsibility System Administrator Connect String jlapps Database glapps To display functional signon information 1 Choose the Options button from the ADI toolbar Choose Information from the list of values The Signon Information window appears Choose the Functional tab You can review your Set of Books Details and Signon Details Optional Choose the Technical tab to review technical information such as Identification Numbers and Language Details You can also turn on the SQL Trace function Getting Started 3 35 Displaying ADI Release Information Signon Information r Identification Numbers User ID oO Responsibility ID 50002 Resp Application ID 101 SetofBooks ID 2 CS Chart of Accounts ID joa o Seg Value SetIDs KALULUWA ETA Cost Center gt 1002322 Account gt 1002325 Turn SQL Trace On Product gt 1002323 Product Line gt 1002324 Sub Account gt 1002328 bells Windows Version 4 0 r Language Details Language Code jus English United States Font Text Height Sample 240 Font Text Width Sample e10 Form Resize Ratio ooo 5 When you are done reviewing the signon information choose OK to close the window See Also Signing
185. count segment For example assume your account segment consists of four characters and your Find Parent value is set to 32 5 The following table shows what replacement parent segment values Account Hierachy Editor uses in the duplicate hierarchy given different Replace With values Table 8 1 Example of Replacing Parent Segment Values Original Parent Segment Value Replace With Replace With Replace With Find Parent 3225 5222 2720 9999 3205 5205 3700 9999 3215 5215 3710 9999 3225 5225 3720 9999 3235 5235 3730 9999 3245 5245 3740 9999 3255 5255 3750 9999 3265 5265 3760 9999 8 32 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Replacing Parent Segment Values Table 8 1 Example of Replacing Parent Segment Values Original Parent Segment Value Replace With Replace With Replace With Find Parent 3275 5222 2720 9999 3275 5275 3770 9999 3285 5285 3780 9999 3295 5295 3790 9999 32T5 5215 37T0 9999 In Parent Level From the poplist select All to apply the replacement criteria to all parent levels in the original hierarchy that have parent segment values matching the Find Parent criteria Alternatively select a specific parent level 2 through the highest value from the poplist Note The poplist displays the levels of your original hierarchy as numbers with 1 being the topmost level Since the segment value for level 1 of your duplicate hierarchy is determined by the value you enter in the New T
186. created from scanned barcode data into the physical inventory worksheet When you are satisfied with the worksheet the Record Physical Inventory feature automatically uploads the data into Oracle Assets Import Text File Feature on page 11 1 The Import Text File feature allows you to import data from legacy systems third party payables applications barcode scanners or any other flat data file sources to your worksheet Using the Import Text File feature you can map fields in your source file to fields in your worksheet Once you have created the map using the Import Text File feature you can save it and apply it to future conversions Oracle Applications The Request Center on page 12 1 Use the Applications Desktop Integrator ADI Request Center as a centralized tool for submitting monitoring and publishing your organization s reports report sets and request sets You can submit any Standard Fixed Format Standard Variable Format or Financial FSG report from the Request Center for processing on your server as long as your responsibility permits you to do so You can create and submit ad hoc FSG reports When your report completes processing the Request Center can automatically publish the output to your spreadsheet the Web or directly into the database while also applying custom formatting such as colors fonts and a corporate logo Report formatting is accomplished with report themes that you create For example
187. cro Virus Protection check box Question When try to sign on to ADI receive a message stating Error ORA 12505 TNS listener could not resolve SID given in connect descriptor can successfully use TNSping to verify that there is a listener on the server What does this error mean This is a SQL Net error indicating that the SID does not exist on this host Since you can TNSping there is a listener on the host server but the SID you are trying to connect to does not exist on this host Frequently Asked Questions 2 17 Technical Issues You must ensure that the SID defined in your TNSNAMES ORA file is synchronized with the SID on the host Question What does it mean when I receive the message Could not establish an Oracle Objects session when try to sign on to ADI This message means that ADI cannot locate the ORACLE_HOME BIN directory in the Path The Oracle Installer should have added this directory to the Path when you installed ADI For more information see Installing Oracle ADI Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Installation Guide If this directory was not added to the Path complete the following steps to add it manually 1 Login to Windows NT as a user with Administrator privileges 2 For Windows NT 3 51 choose the Control Panel icon in the Main program group For Windows NT 4 0 choose Settings gt Control Panel from the Start menu 3 Choose the System icon 4 For Windows NT 4 0 choose th
188. ction See cycle action action result A possible outcome of an order cycle action You can assign any number of results to a cycle action Combinations of actions results are used as order cycle action prerequisites See also order cycle cycle action activity An Oracle Workflow unit of work performed during a business process Also a name that you use to refer to a receivables activity such as a payment credit memo or adjustment See also activity attribute function activity receivables activity name activity attribute A parameter for an Oracle Workflow function activity that controls how the function activity operates You define an activity attribute by displaying the activity s Attributes properties page in the Activities window of Oracle Workflow Builder You assign a value to an activity attribute by displaying the activity node s Attribute Values properties page in the Process window ad hoc Concerned with or formed for a particular purpose For example ad hoc tax codes or an ad hoc database query address validation The type of validation you want the system to use for your address if you are not using a flexible address format for validation You can implement address validation at three levels Error No Validation or Warning Error ensures that all locations exist for your address before it can be saved Warning displays a warning message if a tax rate does not exist for this address allows you to
189. ction for applicability to your state prompt payment act due date The date by which you must pay an invoice to comply with Prompt Payment Act regulations Applications Desktop Integrator automatically revises your scheduled payment in accordance with Prompt Payment Act requirements when you approve an invoice proprietary account An account segment value such as 3500 assigned one of the five proprietary account types The five types include Asset Liability Owner s Equity Revenue and Expense Proprietary account An account that contains a proprietary account proprietary account type Any of the five account types Asset Liability Owner s Equity Revenue and Expense proprietary funds A fund type that uses accounting and reporting techniques similar to commercial enterprises Examples of proprietary funds include internal service funds such as a central motor pool or central public works facility and enterprise funds prorate calendar The prorate calendar determines the number of prorate periods in your fiscal year It also determines with the prorate or retirement convention which depreciation rate to select from the rate table for your table based depreciation methods You must specify a prorate calendar for each book prorate convention Oracle Assets uses the prorate convention to determine how much depreciation to take in the first and last year of an asset s life based on when you place the asset in
190. ctions into logical groups You can assign a different sequence to each category and by doing so separately number each logical group Each category is associated with a table When you assign a sequence to a category the sequence numbers the transactions in that table Applications Desktop Integrator lets you set up categories for each type of transaction receipt and adjustment document sequence Used to uniquely number documents created by Applications Desktop Integrator A Document Sequence has a sequence name an initial value and a type of either Automatic or Manual Used to uniquely number documents such as bank statements in Cash Management and invoices in Receivables A Document Sequence has a sequence name an initial value and a type of either Automatic or Manual document sequence number A number that is manually or automatically assigned to your documents to provide an audit trail For example you can choose to sequentially number invoices in Oracle Receivables or journal entries in General Ledger See also voucher number domestic transaction Transactions between registered traders in the same EU European Union country Domestic transactions have VAT charged on goods and services with different countries applying different VAT rates to specific goods and services See also external transaction EU document sets A grouping of shipping documents that you can run from the Confirm Shipment window draft budget A preli
191. d Reserve for Inventory are reserved portions of fund balance Unreserved designated A portion of the fund balance established to indicate tentative plans for the future use of current resources Unreserved undesignated Fund balance available for use without predefined restrictions fund group A general category of funds for which you report fund activity as a whole Plant funds restricted funds and general operating funds are examples of fund groups Each fund group can have one or more funds associated with it In Oracle Public Sector Financials you can summarize funds into fund groups using rollup groups fund segment The segment of your Accounting Flexfield that you use to record fund appropriation or other information relating to a fiscal entity In Oracle Public Sector Financials fund segment is a generic term for the balancing segment you specify when you implement Oracle Public Sector Financials fund type A classification of funds for specifying accounting attributes GAAP and other accounting authorities specify the fund types in general use and the appropriate accounting method use of encumbrance use of budgetary or proprietary accounts and other attributes For example governmental units typically use the following fund types General Special Revenue Capital Projects Debt Service Internal Service Enterprise and Trust amp Agency funding budget A budget against which accounting transactions are checke
192. d for available funds when budgetary control is enabled for your set of books funds available The difference between budgeted amounts and all actual and anticipated expenditures Oracle Public Sector Financials lets you check funds available online for requisitions purchase orders and invoices The difference between the amount you are authorized to spend and all actual and anticipated expenditures In other words funds available is the amount budgeted less actual expenses and encumbrances of all types Oracle Financials lets you check funds available online for requisitions purchase orders and invoices Funds Available Budget Actual Expenses Encumbrances The difference between the amount you are authorized to spend and the amount of your expenditures plus commitments You can track funds availability at different authority levels using the Online Funds Available inquiry window or you can create custom reports with the Applications Desktop Integrator Financial Statement Generator funds checking The process of certifying funds available You can check funds when you enter a requisition purchase order or invoice You can check funds when you enter actual budget or encumbrance journals When you check funds Oracle Financials compares the amount of your transaction against your funds available and notifies you online whether funds are available for your transaction Oracle Financials does not reserve funds for your transaction wh
193. d symbols one for each character position in the account segment When you first open the Duplicate Hierarchy window the Find Parent field includes all wildcard symbols one for each character position in the account segment For example assume your account segment consists of four characters If you enter 3275 as your Find Parent value Account Hierachy Editor will replace the parent segment values 3205 3215 3225 3235 3245 3255 3265 3275 3285 3295 and 32T5 Account Hierarchy Editor 8 31 Replacing Parent Segment Values Note Leave this field blank to create a complete copy of your original parent level hierarchy Account Hierarchy Editor does not replace any parent segment values Leave this field blank to create a complete copy of your original parent level hierarchy Account Hierarchy Editor does not replace any parent segment values Replace With Enter the parent segment value that is to replace the original parent segment value You can enter a single parent segment value or use the wildcard symbol to have Account Hierarchy Editor use the character that occupies the same position in the original parent segment value Note that Account Hierarchy Editor interprets the wildcard symbol to mean any character including blanks Suggestion When you first open the Duplicate Hierarchy window the Replace With field includes all wildcard symbols one for each character position in the ac
194. database object belongs to a DBA library it means that the object was created by an administrator and cannot be modified by a user database table A basic data storage structure in a relational database management system A table consists of one or more units of information rows each of which contains the same kind of values columns Your application s programs and windows access the information in the tables for you See also customer interface tables Glossary 43 Glossary 44 date placed in service The calendar date on which you start using an asset debit invoice An invoice you generate to send to a supplier representing a credit amount that the supplier owes to you A debit invoice can represent a quantity credit or a price reduction debit items Any item that increases your customer s balance Applications Desktop Integrator includes invoices debit memos and chargebacks as debit items Debit items remain open until the balance due is zero debit memo reversal A reversal of a payment that generates a new debit memo instead of reopening old invoices and debit memos debit memos Debits that you assign to your customer for additional charges that you want to collect For example you may want to charge your customers for unearned discounts taken additional freight charges taxes and finance charges deferred depreciation The difference between the depreciation expense for an asset in a tax book and its depre
195. dated billing invoice A single monthly invoice that includes all of your customer s transactions for the period This feature lets you send a customer one consolidated billing invoice instead of a separate invoice for each transaction consolidation A General Ledger feature that allows you to combine the results of multiple funds even if they are in different sets of books with different currencies calendars and account classification code structures consolidation set of books A set of books that has average balance processing enabled and that is defined as a consolidation set of books A consolidation set of books must be used to consolidate average balances using the balances consolidation method construction in process CIP assets You construct CIP assets over a period of time rather than buying a finished asset Oracle Assets lets you create maintain and add to your CIP assets as you spend money for material and labor to construct them When you finish the assets and place them in service capitalize them Oracle Assets begins depreciating them consumption tax An indirect tax imposed on transfer of goods and services at each stage of their supply The difference between output tax tax collected for revenue earned from the transfer and the input tax tax paid on expense paid on the transfer will be the tax liability to the government This tax is in concept value added tax VAT contact A representative who i
196. ded parent value Account Hierarchy Editor 8 19 Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor See Also Additional Information If you are using multiple hierarchy diagram windows you can move values between the windows just as you would move values within a single window Simply select the value and drag it to its new location 3 Save your work DB To remove values from an existing hierarchy 1 Choose the hierarchy diagram from which you want to remove values 2 Select the value you want to remove then use one of these methods to remove it Drag it to the segment values window and drop it a Choose Remove from the Edit menu a Choose the Remove icon from the toolbar a Choose Delete Note You are not deleting the value you are simply removing it from the hierarchy 3 Save your work The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface on page 8 4 The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu on page 8 10 The Account Hierarchy Editor Toolbar on page 8 14 Finding Segment Values on page 8 15 Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 21 Adding or Changing Child Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 24 Duplicating Parent Hierarchies on page 8 26 Modifying Segment Value Descriptions on page 8 34 Adding and Changing Rollup Groups with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 37 8 20 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Adding o
197. defines three project type classes Indirect Contract or Capital For example you use an Indirect project type to collect and track project costs for overhead activities such as administrative and overhead work marketing and bid and proposal preparation Glossary 117 Glossary 118 Project customer relationship An implementation defined classification of the relationship between a project and acustomer Project Customer Relationships help you manage projects that involve multiple clients by specifying the various relationships your customers can have with a project Typical relationships include Primary or Non Paying Project Task Alias A user defined short name for a project or project task combination used to facilitate online timecard and expense report entry Project Task Organization The Organization that owns the project or task promise date The date on which a customer promises to pay for products or services The date on which you agree you can ship the products to your customer or that your customer will receive the products prompt payment act A law applying to U S Federal government agencies requiring them to pay interest on overdue invoices Oracle Public Sector Payables supports recalculation of scheduled payments and payment of interest on overdue invoices in accordance with the U S Federal Prompt Payment Act Many states have enacted their own prompt payment laws Have your Oracle consultant review this fun
198. des AutoAccounting parameter A variable that is passed into AutoAccounting AutoAccounting parameters are used by AutoAccounting to determine account codings Example AutoAccounting parameters available for an expenditure item are the expenditure type and project organization AutoAccounting parameters are predefined by Oracle Projects AutoAccounting Rule An implementation defined formula for deriving Accounting Flexfield segment values AutoAccounting rules may use a combination of AutoAccounting parameters AutoAccounting lookup sets SQL statements and constants to determine segment values AutoAccounting Transaction A repository of the account coding rules needed to create one accounting transaction For each accounting transaction created by Oracle Projects the necessary AutoAccounting rules are held in a corresponding AutoAccounting Transaction AutoAccounting transactions are predefined by Oracle Projects AutoAdjustment A feature used to automatically adjust the remaining balances of your invoices debit memos and chargebacks that meet the criteria that you define Approval A feature that prevents you from paying an invoice when your supplier overcharges you or bills you for items you have not received ordered or accepted Approval also validates tax period currency budgetary and other information If you use budgetary control and encumbrance accounting Approval also creates encumbrances for unmatched invoices or
199. ditor Menu on page 8 10 8 36 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Adding and Changing Rollup Groups with the Account Hierarchy Editor The Account Hierarchy Editor Toolbar on page 8 14 Finding Segment Values on page 8 15 Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 17 Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 21 Adding or Changing Child Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 24 Duplicating Parent Hierarchies on page 8 26 Modifying Segment Value Descriptions on page 8 34 Adding and Changing Rollup Groups with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 37 Closing the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 39 Adding and Changing Rollup Groups with the Account Hierarchy Editor You can create new rollup groups or edit existing rollup groups using the Account Hierarchy Editor Rollup groups are groups of parent segment values you use to create summary accounts Attention When you change the contents of a rollup group that is used in a summary template you must delete and recreate your summary accounts Prerequisites m Rollup groups must be unfrozen for the current chart of accounts See Defining Key Flexfields Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide D To create a new rollup group 1 Start the Account Hierarchy Editor by choosing the Ledger button from the ADI toolbar then selecting the View Account Hierarchy option from the list o
200. does not pay interest on an overdue invoice Applications Desktop Integrator automatically compares the interest amount it calculates on past due invoices with the minimum interest amount you have defined and does not create an interest invoice unless the amount of interest exceeds the minimum interest amount miscellaneous receipts A feature that lets you record payments that you do not apply to debit items such as refunds and interest income modal window Certain actions that you perform may cause a modal window to display A modal window requires you to act on its contents before you can continue usually by choosing OK or Cancel model model item An item whose bill of material lists options and option classes available when you place an order for the model item model bill of material A bill of material for a model item A model bill lists option classes and options available when you place an order for the model item model invoice An invoice used as a template that you copy to create new invoices multi org See multiple organizations multiple organizations The ability to define multiple organizations and the relationships among them within a single installation of Oracle Applications These organizations can be sets of books business groups legal entities operating units or inventory organizations Glossary 93 Glossary 94 multiple payment formats You can choose from several payment methods to pay your su
201. dow DB To stop monitoring a request 1 Select the request you want to stop monitoring from the Pending Completed or Hotlist tab of the Request Center window 2 Choose the Stop Monitoring Selected Request button from the Request Center toolbar Additional Information To stop monitoring all requests and remove them from the Pending Completed or Hotlist tab choose the Stop Monitoring ALL Requests button from the Request Center toolbar See Also The Request Center Toolbar on page 12 2 Setting Request Center Options on page 12 5 Submitting Reports on page 12 8 Formatting Report Output on page 12 33 12 54 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Glossary 4 4 5 calendar A depreciation calendar with 12 uneven periods four cycles of a four week period followed by a four week period followed by a five week period Depreciation is usually divided by days for a 4 4 5 calendar Since a 4 4 5 calendar has 364 days per year it has different start and end dates for the fiscal year each year 1099 form The forms the Internal Revenue Service supplies to record a particular category of payment or receipt 1099 number The tax identification number for a supplier According to IRS rules in the United States lack of a valid tax identification number may result in tax withholding Applications Desktop Integrator stores the tax identification number for each supplier Applications Desktop Integrator also enab
202. dow by selecting the column separators and moving them to the left or right From the poplist select the column whose account assignment information you want to change Change the account assignment information as needed Suggestions a Many of the fields in the Column Account Assignments window have poplists where you can select from a list of values To easily change the actual account range choose an existing account assignment from the Low Account or High Account columns The Select Account Segment Ranges window appears where you can select values for your account range Choose the Apply button to see your changes reflected in the report worksheet Report Wizard Interface on page 6 5 Reports Toolbar on page 6 2 Report Wizard Tools on page 6 5 Creating a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 12 Saving a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 17 Report Wizard 6 27 Generating Content Sets Generating Content Sets Use the Report Wizard to easily create content sets to use with your financial reports You can automatically maintain content sets that you subsequently use to produce reports for all levels of your reporting hierarchy e g cost center department fund When your reporting hierarchy changes you can easily create a new content set to produce reports based on the changed reporting hierarchy By maintaining multiple point in time content sets you can easily perform time based reporting by sim
203. down to the subledger details You can view journal entries and associated detail that originate from Oracle subledgers Payables Receivables Assets Projects Purchasing Inventory and WIP During drilldown you can use drag and drop capabilities to pivot accounting dimensions quickly reorganizing financial data to perform what if and what happened analysis of both summary and detail financial information The versatility of Analysis Wizard helps you quickly detect trends and exceptions in the financial data that underlies your reported amounts Drilling Down to Summary and Detail Accounts on page 7 6 Analysis Wizard Toolbar on page 7 10 Setting Analysis Wizard Options on page 7 11 Analysis Wizard Drilldown Flows on page 7 13 Applications Desktop Integrator Budget Wizard on page 4 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Journal Wizard on page 5 1 Analysis Wizard 7 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Analysis Wizard Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard on page 6 1 ADI Options on page 3 16 The Request Center on page 12 1 Analysis Wizard Features Analysis Wizard includes the following features m m m m Prerequisite Full support for average balances Cross set of books drilldown Segment security is enforced using the General Ledger profile option FSG Enforce Segment Value Security Multidimensional data analysis From your drill windows you can drag account segments periods and other
204. e Tax Identification Number In the United States the number used to identify 1099 suppliers If a 1099 supplier is an individual the Tax Identification Number is the supplier s social security number If a 1099 supplier is a corporation the Tax Identification Number is also known as the Federal Identification Number In some countries this value is called a NIF tax line type A distribution line used to record a sales or VAT tax charge on an invoice See also invoice distribution line tax location A specific tax location within your tax authority For example Redwood Shores is a tax location in the Tax Authority California SSan Mateo Redwood Shores Glossary 155 Glossary 156 tax tolerances The acceptable degrees of variance you define for the differences between the calculated tax amount on an invoice and the actual tax amount on the invoice The calculated tax amount is the amount of tax on the invoice as determined by the tax name for the invoice which has a defined tax rate and the amount of the invoice The actual tax amount is the sum of all the tax distribution lines If the variance between these two amounts exceeds the tolerances you specify Approval places the invoice on hold tax type A feature you use to indicate the type of tax charged by a tax authority when you define a tax name Applications Desktop Integrator uses the tax type during invoice entry to determine the financial impact of the tax When
205. e placed anywhere in the line item column Formatting you apply to any cell in the Parent line item row is applied to expanded rows in your financial report output Table 12 2 Line Item Tokens Description Token Replace Total value for parent amp T lt Parent Line Item gt lt Replacement replaces the Total value for an Text gt expanded row Replace line item text replaces amp R lt Line Item Text gt lt Replacement Text gt any line item text 12 40 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Customizing Themes for Financial Reports D To place a line item token in your report theme 1 Choose any blank cell in the line item column to place your token 2 Enter amp T or amp R to let ADI know you wish to use a token 3 Enter a space and the Parent line item or line item text you want to replace surrounded by brackets For example enter __ lt Revenue gt 4 Enter a space and the new name you wish to use For example _ lt Total Revenue gt 5 Save your work Note Any line item text you wish to replace must be specified exactly as it appears in the report definition Indented text and multiple words must be entered exactly as the original including all spaces and case Formatting with Line Item Image Tokens You can use line item image tokens with sequence numbers to format lines above or below the row you specify You must enter this token information in a specific order amp L lt sequ
206. e 3 28 4 Choose OK to save your work See Also Setting Analysis Wizard Options on page 7 11 Analysis Wizard Drilldown Flows on page 7 13 Applications Desktop Integrator Budget Wizard on page 4 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Journal Wizard on page 5 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard on page 6 1 ADI Options on page 3 16 The Request Center on page 12 1 7 12 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Analysis Wizard Drilldown Flows Analysis Wizard Drilldown Flows The following diagram depicts graphically the drilldown flows that are possible with the Analysis Wizard Figure 7 1 Analysis Wizard Drilldown Flows Context Attribute Average or Standard Balance T2 TH Show Summary Accounts Note 1 Summary Account Drill for Conte Show Detail rE Accounts Note 2 Show Detail Accounts Journal Details Line 10 07 202 Line 10 01 202 25 000 Line 20 07 202 Line 20 01 202 3 500 Line 30 07 202 Line 30 01 202 Line 40 07 202 Line 40 01 202 Show Subledger Details Note3 Subledger Details for Line 40 Detail Account for Context 1 Summary Account Drill for 07 202 4 000 10 000 Show Summary Accounts Show Subledger Details Note3 Analysis Wizard 7 13 Analysis Wizard Drilldown Flows Notes a The Show Summary Accounts button is only available when summary ranges are defined for the
207. e 3 42 Monitoring Requests on page 12 51 Journal Upload Options You can select three options to control uploading and importing m Rows to Upload Controls which rows in the journal worksheet to upload Select Flagged Rows to upload only those rows that are marked with a flag character in the upload column of your worksheet a All Rows to upload all rows in your worksheet regardless of whether changes have been made I Pre Validation You can prevalidate your journal data before you upload it to General Ledger Prevalidating can minimize the possibility that the General Ledger journal import process will fail because of a validation error Prevalidating is useful when you expect that the journal import process to be quite lengthy or when you plan to run it unattended such as overnight Additional Information Regardless of whether you choose to prevalidate your journal data the General Ledger journal import process will performs its usual server side validation activities Journal Wizard 5 21 Journal Upload Options Note If the General Ledger profile option GLDI Force Full Validation is set to yes ADI performs full validation of your journal data You cannot change this option from the Journal Wizard You can choose one of three prevalidation options for your journal data a Full validates all journal data including journal category journal source currency date and other journ
208. e Environment tab 5 Select the Path variable located in the System Variables region in Windows NT 3 51 or the System Variables region in Windows NT 4 0 6 Add the ORACLE_HOME BIN path to the beginning of the variable in the Value region for example C ORANT BIN SystemRoot 7 Choose SET to make the change permanent Choose OK to close the System window then close the Control Panel window 8 Shut down and restart Windows NT before running ADI Question Is system security breached by giving users GWYUID FNDNAM and Connect String information No the transparency of the GWYUID and FNDNAM to users is in accordance with AOL security standards for client server applications Access to all tables is not possible with this information Users may gain limited access to some basic tables through SQL However these records can only be viewed not updated What Formatting features are supported in Web Output The Web Output format recognizes the following report formatting features 2 18 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Technical Issues a Column Widths if there is any value in the column that does not fit within the assigned column width the browser will automatically increase the width of the entire column to accommodate the entire view a Alignment a Font Name a Font Size Excel fonts are mapped to HTML fonts as follows Table 2 4 Excel Fonts Mapped to HTML Excel Font Size HTML Font Size
209. e OK to close the Style window 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 above for each report output feature you want to customize in this theme Caution Make sure you close the Style window in step 4 before you change the formatting for other report output features If you don t close the Style window you may lose the formatting changes you ve already made 6 Optional As desired insert pictures into your theme by selecting Insert Picture from the Excel menu Additional Information The Request Center cannot extract the names of embedded images from a theme that is used to publish report output to the Web Instead the Request Center looks in the theme directory for a GIF or JPEG file with the same name as the theme If it finds a matching GIF or JPEG file the Request Center displays the image at the top of each report page The picture s alignment is the same as the image in your theme Only this one picture is included in your web published report output 7 Optional Choose the Publish To button then select a default path and filename to use for publishing web based reports with this theme The related HTML files for the report are always stored in this location regardless of the location you specify when you submit the report request Use this feature when you need to periodically publish reports to a consistent location 8 Optional Choose the Background button then select an image file to use as a background on
210. e Submit button from the Request Center toolbar Standard Fixed Format You can submit any of the standard reports that are available in Oracle Applications if they are available to your responsibility Standard Variable Format You can submit any standard variable format report for Oracle Assets if your responsibility allows Financial Statement You can submit any financial statement reports FSG that have been defined if your responsibility allows you to access the reports Ad Hoc You can define and submit an ad hoc report RXi Reports Submit RXi reports with attibute sets defined in Oracle Applications 12 8 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Submitting Reports Report Submission and Publishing r Report Type Standard Fixed Format Publish Report X Prompt ix C Standard Variable Format Default Output Type C Financial Statement x7 Spreadsheet Publishing Options Report Consolidation Disabled Parent Accounts hd Consolidation Parent Period Clits To submit a Standard Fixed Format report 1 Choose the Submit Report button from the Request Center toolbar The Report Submission and Publishing window appears Select Standard Fixed Format as the Report Type Optional Mark the Publish Report check box if you want the report to be published automatically after it finishes running The Request Center publishes t
211. e a new independent hierarchy to model a pending reorganization Only those users with proper authorization can modify hierarchies Validation rules insure correct relationships are maintained for a consistent chart of accounts Oracle Assets Create Assets Feature on page 9 1 The Create Assets feature provides a spreadsheet based interface to simplify asset creation Use the Create Assets feature to automatically build personalized asset entry spreadsheets based on the information required by your organization s specific implementation of Oracle Assets You can enter your asset data manually use the list of values and take advantage of Excel s data entry shortcuts You can also map data files from legacy systems or third party payables applications into the asset worksheet When you are satisfied with the worksheet the Create Assets feature automatically uploads the data into Oracle Assets Record Physical Inventory Feature on page 10 1 The Record Physical Inventory feature provides a spreadsheet based interface to simplify the physical inventory process Use the Record Physical Inventory feature to automatically build personalized physical inventory spreadsheets based on the information required by your organization s specific implementation of Oracle Introduction 1 3 Assets You can enter your physical inventory data manually use the list of values and take advantage of Excel s data entry shortcuts You can also map files
212. e batch share the same batch source and batch name Applications Desktop Integrator displays any differences between the control and actual counts and amounts payment date The date on which the status of an invoice is updated to Paid Applications Desktop Integrator uses the payment date as the GL Date for each payment payment distribution line A line representing the liability transaction on a payment Each payment has at least one liability distribution line but may have additional lines to record discounts taken and realized gains and losses foreign currency payments only payment document A medium you use to instruct your bank to disburse funds from your bank account to the bank account or site location of a supplier With Applications Desktop Integrator you can make payments using several types of payment documents You can send your supplier a check that you manually create or computer generate You can instruct your bank to wire funds to the bank account of a supplier You can create a tape or diskette for an electronic funds transfer For each payment document you can generate a separate remittance advice Applications Desktop Integrator updates your invoice scheduled payment the same way regardless of which payment document you use to pay an invoice Applications Desktop Integrator also allows you to instruct your bank to pay in a currency different from your functional currency if you enable the multiple currency system opt
213. e following options determine whether the copy check boxes are checked or unchecked in the wizard windows You can set the following defaults Make Copy Default If you select Yes the copy check boxes are checked whenever you create new report objects or define a new report as you are guided through the wizard windows If you select No the copy check boxes are unchecked Enforcement Level These settings determine ADI prompt messages as you move through report wizard windows Prompt ADI displays a message asking if you want to make a copy or use the original report or report object as your are guided through the report wizard Do Not Prompt ADI does not display a message Enforce Default ADI enforces the setting you select in the Make Copy Default field If the Make Copy Default is set to Yes you cannot change the check box settings as you are guided through the report wizard Note These options are overridden if the ADI security related profile options are defined in General Ledger Getting Started 3 27 General Ledger Options Ledger Options Budget Journal Report Definition X Report Analysis Drill Options Display Segment Values Show CO Grouped r Account Type Individually r Zero Balances F Outline Indicators amp Totals Include Descriptions for C Balancing Segment I Cost Center Segment Minimum Amount Width F Account Segment 15 i Environment Options Double Click
214. e or pre lien An encumbrance you record when you complete a purchase requisition A journal entry you make to record an anticipated expenditure as indicated by approval of a requisition Also known as pre commitment pre encumbrance or pre lien Glossary 31 Glossary 32 common bill A bill of material that is shared between organizations This enables you to reduce your maintenance effort by sharing the same bill structure among two or more bills of material For example if you have identical bills of material that produce the same product in two different organizations you can define common bills of material for the identical structures compensation rule An implementation defined name for an employee compensation method Also known as pay type Typical compensation rules include Hourly and Exempt complete invoice An invoice whose status is Complete When you enter a new invoice the status remains incomplete until you actually choose to complete it To have a status of Complete the invoice total must be greater than or equal to zero the invoice must have at least one invoice line revenue records must exist for each line revenue records for each line must add up to the line amount and a tax and revenue credit record must exist for each line An invoice whose status is Complete In order for an invoice to have a status of Complete the invoice total must be greater than or equal to zero have at least one invoice line revenue record
215. e window each tab corresponds to a specific FSG function as described below Report Row Column Content Row Order Report Tab Define an FSG report You specify the report name and description required components optional components and other options Row Tab Define rows and row sets You can enter format options display options and advanced options as well as assign accounts and create row calculations Column Tab Define columns and column sets You can enter balance control display and advanced options as well as format masks You can also assign accounts create column calculations and define column exceptions Content Tab Define a content set to apply to your report Suggestion You can also use the Report Wizard to create or modify content sets See Generating Content Sets on page 6 28 Row Order Tab Define a row order to apply to your report Display Report Navigator Choose this button to display the Report Navigator window which lists all report objects assigned to the currently open report worksheet Each report object can be expanded or collapsed similar to expanding or collapsing a directory tree in Windows Explorer to show the embedded details Selecting a detail item from the Navigator a row definition for example immediately opens the appropriate tab and item in the Report Object Properties window Report Wizard 6 9 Report Wizard Tools Row Properties Window T
216. ear Window Clears the currently displayed hierarchy from a window Only affects the hierarchy diagram not the underlying data Once cleared you can drag and drop a new hierarchy onto the window Close All Windows Closes all active windows without asking you if you want to save your changes You must select a new chart of accounts and segment or exit from the Account Hierarchy Editor Close All Windows Closes all active windows without asking you if you want to save your changes You must select a new chart of accounts and segment or exit from the Account Hierarchy Editor Save Launches a concurrent process to apply any changes you have made to the account hierarchy since you last saved it There is a toolbar icon for this menu selection Revert Discards all changes made since you last saved the hierarchy and reverts to the previously saved version Print Prints the contents of the current active window There is a toolbar icon for this menu selection Print Preview Previews your print output Print Setup Gives you print and page layout options Exit Closes the Account Hierarchy Editor Edit Menu The Edit Menu includes the following selections Duplicate Hierarchy Duplicates an existing hierarchy Modify Node Descriptions Changes the descriptions of parent and child segment values Find Finds segment values and descriptions in the Segment Values window Remove Deletes the selected segment value node from the account
217. ease 10 7 Oracle Assets Release 11 0 ADI Release 4 0 was the first release to provide support for Oracle Assets Release 11 0 2 2 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Installation Considerations Oracle Assets Release 11i ADI 7 0 is the first release to provide support for Oracle Assets Release 11i Question What are the technical requirements for Applications Desktop Integrator You need an Intel based or 100 compatible personal computer PC with the following Pentium processor or better Clock speed of 90 MHz or greater Network card SVGA color monitor with a resolution of at least 1024 x 768 pixels configured to use the small fonts option if available 32MB RAM minimum 96MB disk space ADI requires 26MB The remaining 70MB is for technology components that may already be installed on the PC Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows NT 3 51 or Windows NT 4 0 Note For Windows NT you must install the latest Service Packs a Service Pack 5 for Windows NT 3 51 a Service Pack 3 for Windows NT 4 0 or later a Microsoft Excel 7 0 32 bit Microsoft Excel 97 32 bit or Microsoft Excel 2000 Microsoft Excel 7 0 32 bit or Microsoft Excel 97 32 bit Excel 2000 Note Earlier versions of Excel are no longer supported Oracle General Ledger Release 10 7 character mode 10SC Production 16 1 or 10 7 NCA or later Oracle Assets Release 10 7 character mode 10SC Production
218. eate journal entries in a spreadsheet then upload your journal entries to General Ledger Chapter 6 Report Wizard describes how to use the ADI Report Wizard to define financial reports graphically in a spreadsheet then upload the report definitions to General Ledger Chapter 7 Analysis Wizard describes how to perform multidimensional analysis with report drilldown completely within Excel Use Analysis Wizard to quickly detect trends and exceptions in the financial data that supports your reported amounts Chapter 8 Account Hierarchy Editor describes how to create maintain and manipulate your General Ledger account structure using an intuitive drag and drop graphical interface Chapter 9 Create Assets Feature describes how to upload asset data from a spreadsheet into Oracle Assets You can upload data from legacy systems or bridge Oracle Assets with a third party payables application Chapter 10 Record Physical Inventory Feature describes how to upload physical inventory data into Oracle Assets then reconcile the data you loaded with information in the Oracle Assets production system Chapter 11 Import Text File describes how to import data from legacy systems third party payables applications barcode scanned data or other flat file sources into your ADI asset or inventory worksheet Chapter 12 Request Center describes the Application Desktop Integrator ADI Request Center You can use the Request Center to submit re
219. ed capital expenditures budget formula A mathematical expression used to calculate budget amounts based on actual results other budget amounts and statistics With budget formulas you can automatically create budgets using complex equations calculations and allocations budget hierarchy A group of budgets linked at different levels such that the budgeting authority of a lower level budget is controlled by an upper level budget budget interface table An Oracle General Ledger database table that stores information needed for budget upload The interface table from which Oracle Assets uploads budget information budget line Estimated cost revenue labor hours or other quantity for a project or task categorized by a resource budget organization An entity department cost center division or other group responsible for entering and maintaining budget data You define budget organizations for your company then assign the appropriate accounts to each budget organization An entity such as a department division or activity responsible for entering and maintaining budget data budget rules A variety of shorthand techniques you can use to speed manual budget entry With budget rules you can divide a total amount evenly among budget periods repeat a given amount in each budget period or enter budget amounts derived from your account balances budget upload The ability to transfer budget information from a spreadsheet t
220. edger For non adjusting periods See Oracle General Ledger User s Guide 5 12 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Creating Journal Entries Using ADI Template Type Functional Journal Template Style Single Journal Entry Set of Books Set of Books 2 Release 10 Database General Ledger Category List Text Adjustment Source List Text Spreadsheet Currency List Text USD Accounting Date Date 15 Oct 1996 Upl Co Ctr Acct Prd P L Sub Debit Credit pf iste vawe vae 01 100 1000 000 000 000 01 100 2500 000 000 000 01 100 5535 000 000 000 Messages N E a Ty Note This is not the end of the Journal Template Unprotect the sheet and insert as many rows as needed BD To create Functional Actuals Budgets or Encumbrances journal entries 1 Enter the journal header information as requested on the worksheet Additional Information Journal worksheets support entering effective and reversal dates for sets of books that have average balance processing enabled Note Note that Accounting Date is not required for Budget journals Journal Wizard 5 13 Creating Journal Entries Using ADI Note If the General Ledger profile option GLDI Journal Source is enabled the journal source specified in the profile option is inserted automatically into your journal worksheet You cannot change this value on your journal worksheet 1 Enter a Budget for budget
221. edit Credits that you assign to your salespeople when you enter orders invoices and commitments Credits can be either quota or non quota and can be used in determining commissions See also non revenue sales credit revenue sales credit sales tax A tax collected by a tax authority on purchases of goods and services The supplier of the good or service collects sales taxes from its customers tax is usually included in the invoice amount and remits them to a tax authority Tax is usually charged as a percentage of the price of the good or service The percentage rate usually varies by authority and sometimes by category of product Sales taxes are expenses to the buyer of goods and services sales tax structure The collection of taxing bodies that you will use to determine your tax authority State County City is an example of a Sales Tax Structure Applications Desktop Integrator adds together the tax rates for all of these components to determine a customer s total tax liability for an order a transaction salesperson A person who is responsible for the sale of products or services Salespeople are associated with orders returns invoices commitments and customers You can also assign sales credits to your salespeople schedule date The date the order line should be ready to ship This date is communicated from Oracle Order Entry to Oracle Inventory as the request date anytime you reserve or place demand for an order l
222. eement but does not prevent you from running these processes See also hard limit SFAS 52 U S Statement of Financial Accounting Standards number 52 issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board FASB which dictates accounting and reporting standards for translating foreign currency transactions in the United States Applications Desktop Integrator translates and revaluates such transactions according to SFAS 52 U S standards Usually SFAS 52 U S mandates the use of a period end exchange rate to translate asset and liability accounts and an average exchange rate to translate revenue and expense accounts Foreign currency denominated assets and liabilities are revalued using a period end rate on each Glossary 143 Glossary 144 balance sheet date to reflect the period end exchange rate in accordance with SFAS 52 U S You specify the account used for revaluation gains and losses in the Run Revaluation window You maintain the rates used for translation and revaluation in the Define Period Rates and Define Historical Rates forms SFAS 52 U S also mandates that you post any out of balance amounts arising from translation to a Cumulative Translation Adjustment account included in stockholders equity You define the Cumulative Translation Adjustment account in the Set of Books window SFAS 8 U S Statement of Financial Accounting Standards number 8 issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board FASB which mandat
223. efine Worksheet Layout window the information in the required and optional fields will change You can see the GL_INTERFACE column names rather than the descriptions of what those columns represent The column names display option is provided for technical users of General Ledger Under most circumstances leave this box unchecked You can customize the following items 1 Required Fields Journal lines for functional actual and foreign actual journals always display Account Debit and Credit Multiple entry journals also include journal Category Source Currency and Accounting Date 5 10 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Customizing Journal Worksheets Budget journal lines also include Period Multiple entry budget journals also include the Budget name but do not include Accounting Date Multiple entry encumbrance journal lines also include the Encumbrance Type You cannot change which required fields appear in your journal lines but you can rearrange their sequence See the section Moving Fields below Optional Fields You can include additional fields of information in your journal worksheet Optional fields include Description Stat Amount Reconciliation Reference Invoice Date Tax Code Invoice Identifier Invoice Amount VAT Context Line DFF Context Line DFF 1 to 10 Captured Info Context Captured Info DFF 1 to 10 Line Detail Report Source Detail Report Additional Line Info 1 to 8 Multiple entry j
224. efore making the next change To build your duplicate hierarchy one step at a time repeat this optional step as often as necessary making small changes each time To see the effect of each incremental change choose the Preview button before making the next change 6 Choose the Preview button to review your duplicate hierarchy which appears in a new hierarchy diagram window Make sure the results match your expectations Suggestion As you edit your duplicate hierarchy choose the Preview button as needed to update the hierarchy display 7 As you review your duplicate hierarchy choose one of the following buttons from the Duplicate Hierarchy window to take the corresponding action Undo Reverses the last change you made to your duplicate hierarchy using the Replace Lower Level Parent Value s region Choosing this action also restores the replacement criteria to the Replacement Order list You can then remove the criteria and define new replacement criteria using the Replace Lower Level Parent Value s region a Undo All Reverses all of your changes and closes the duplicate hierarchy diagram window Account Hierarchy Editor 8 29 Replacing Parent Segment Values a Accept Saves your duplicate hierarchy locally This action does not save the duplicate hierarchy to the database Warning To ensure that you save your hierarchy to the database make sure you complete step 8 To ensure that y
225. egrator which interacts with General Ledger s open interfaces Applications_INTERFACE using Journal Import and Applications_BUDGET_INTERFACE using Budget Upload Question Can I download actuals and use them as a basis for a budget Yes The Budget Wizard lets you download budgets and actuals into separate worksheets in the same workbook You can then copy and paste your actual amounts into your budget worksheet or create cell references from your actuals worksheet to your budget worksheet You can also create a budget model that references your actual amounts Question Now that I can use Reports to get my FSG output into Excel what happens if my report exceeds the Excel 16 000 line limitation Report output is not bound by the Excel line limitation The Request Center automatically splits report output into 16 000 line blocks for Excel 7 and 65 000 line 2 8 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Functional Issues blocks for Excel 97 with each block going into a separate worksheet within the workbook If you fill a workbook Request Center automatically opens another workbook and continues adding worksheets Question Does Applications Desktop Integrator support cross validation rules Applications Desktop Integrator enforces cross validation rules if you set the General Ledger profile option Flexfields Validate on Server to Yes This feature became available with ADI Release 2 0 Question What does it mean when try t
226. egrator uses the following key flexfields Accounting Flexfield Category Flexfield Location Flexfield Asset Key FlexfieldAn Oracle Applications feature you use to build custom fields used for entering and displaying information relating to your business Applications Desktop Integrator uses the following key flexfields Accounting Flexfield Item Catalogs Item Categories Flexfield Sales Order Flexfield Glossary 83 Glossary 84 Sales Tax Location Flexfield Stock Locators Flexfield System Items Flexfield Territory Flexfield An Oracle Applications feature you use to build custom fields used for entering and displaying information relating to your business Applications Desktop Integrator uses the following key flexfields Accounting Flexfield System Items FlexfieldAn Oracle Applications feature you use to build custom fields used for entering and displaying information relating to your business Applications Desktop Integrator uses the following key flexfields Accounting Flexfield Sales Tax Location Flexfield System Items Flexfield Territory Flexfield key flexfield segment One of up to 30 different sections of your key flexfield You separate segments from each other by a symbol you choose such as or Each segment can be up to 25 characters long Each key flexfield segment typically captures one element of your business or operations structure such as company division region or product for the Accoun
227. eign currency journal entries Many to Many attribute In Oracle Financial Analyzer a relationship between one or more values of one base dimension with one or more values of a second base dimension For example if you have a Many to Many attribute definition where the first base dimension is Organization and the second base dimension is Line Item then a single organization can be related to several line items and a single line item can be related to several organizations Mass Additions An Oracle Assets feature that allows you to copy asset information from another system such as Oracle Payables Create Mass Additions for Oracle Assets creates mass addition lines for potential assets You can review these mass addition lines in the Prepare Mass Additions window and actually create an asset from the mass addition line by posting it to Oracle Assets Invoice distribution lines that you transfer to Oracle Assets for creating assets Applications Desktop Integrator only creates mass additions for invoice distribution lines that are marked for asset tracking Invoice distribution lines distributed to Asset Accounting Flexfields are automatically marked for asset tracking Oracle Assets does not convert the mass additions to assets until you complete all of the required information about the asset and post it in Oracle Assets Mass Change A feature that allows you to change the prorate convention depreciation method life rate or capacity
228. eipt A Financials feature that allows you to automatically create supplier invoices in Payables based on receipts and purchase orders you enter in Purchasing Pay Only When Due A feature you use to determine whether to pay invoices in a payment batch during the discount period If you Pay Only When Due Yes Applications Desktop Integrator only selects invoices for which payment is due it postpones payment of invoices still in the discount period until another payment batch or until they are due If you do not Pay Only When Due No Applications Desktop Integrator also selects those invoices in the discount period for which the pay date basis is Discount pay site A supplier site that is able to receive payments A supplier must have at least one supplier site defined as a pay site before Payables allows payments to be issued to that supplier You cannot enter an invoice for a supplier site that is not defined as a pay site See also purchasing site RFQ Only Site pay type See compensation rule Pay Through Date A feature you use during automatic payment processing You define a payment cycle the number of days between regular payment batches and Payables calculates the Pay Through Date by adding the number of days in the payment Glossary 103 Glossary 104 cycle to the payment date Payables selects an invoice for payment if either the due date or discount date is before the Pay Through Date PayGroup See Pay Group
229. ekly submission of labor expenditure items You can enter timecards online or as part of a pre approved batch TIN See Tax Identification Number tolerance A feature you use to specify acceptable matching and tax variances You can specify either percentage based or amount based tolerances or both for quantity and item price variances between matched invoices and purchase orders You can also specify percentage based or amount based tolerances for your tax variances Approval uses the tolerance levels you define to determine whether to hold or approve invoices for payment See also Matching Tolerances Tax Tolerances See reconciliation tolerance tolerance percentage The percentage amount by which customers are allowed to exceed their credit limit and still pass the credit check toolbar The toolbar is a collection of iconic buttons that each perform a specific action when you choose it Each toolbar button replicates a commonly used menu item Depending on the context of the current field or window a toolbar button can be enabled or disabled You can display a hint for an enabled toolbar button on the message line by holding your mouse steadily over the button The toolbar generally appears below the main menu bar in the root window transaction code A feature you use to describe bank transactions prior to initiating automatic reconciliation from a bank tape You define transaction codes based on those your bank provides and Ap
230. elect a specific journal Source to import 4 Optional Check the Create Summary Journals check box to have General Ledger summarize all transactions that share the same account period and currency If you don t check this box General Ledger creates a journal line for every row 5 Optional Check the Post Errors to Suspense check box to have journal amounts whose accounts are invalid posted to a predefined suspense account To use this function suspense posting must be enabled in Oracle General Ledger 6 Select an option to Import Descriptive Flexfields The list of values includes a Do Not Import prevents importing descriptive flexfields Import with Validation General Ledger validates descriptive flexfield values 3 44 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Submitting Processes Import without Validation General Ledger imports descriptive flexfield values without validating them Optional Enter a Date Range in the Start and End fields Use this step to limit the lines to be imported when there are journal lines with different accounting dates Choose OK to submit your request or Cancel to abandon Note Once you submit the process the system starts a journal import concurrent request and displays the journal import request ID The Request Center automatically monitors the request and notifies you of the completion status when it is done Select Process Type Process Type
231. ementation of Oracle General Ledger Prerequisites With Journal Wizard you can m m Customize journal worksheets by adding supplemental journal entry information Use the powerful spreadsheet features of Excel For example you can use formulas to calculate journal amounts Save a journal worksheet to a file which can then be transferred to another PC for further changes even while disconnected from your General Ledger database Define a set of books Open one or more accounting periods for your set of books Journal Wizard 5 1 Creating Journal Worksheets Profile Options Set the following optional profile options in General Ledger m m See Also Journals Default Category ADI uses this value set for General Ledger as the default category in any single journal worksheet you create GLDI Create Group ID ADI automatically generates a group ID during journal upload GLDI Converted Entry Threshold ADI forces converted currency journals to balance within a set threshold amount before journal upload GLDI Balance by Accounting Date ADI forces journal amounts to balance by accounting date before journal upload GLDI Force Journal to Balance ADI forces journals to balance before journal upload GLDI Force Full Validation ADI forces full validation during budget and journal uploads from ADI If validation fails the upload does not proceed GLDI Journal Source When you en
232. en you check funds funds reservation The creation of requisition purchase order or invoice encumbrance journal entries Applications Desktop Integrator reserves funds for your invoice when you approve the invoice Approval creates encumbrance journal entries for an unmatched invoice or for price and quantity variances between an invoice and the purchase order to which you match the invoice Applications Desktop Integrator immediately updates your funds available balances and creates an encumbrance journal entry that you can post in your general ledger The process of reserving Glossary 67 Glossary 68 funds available You can reserve funds when you enter actual budget or encumbrance journals When you reserve funds Oracle Financials compares the amount of your transaction against your funds available and notifies you online whether funds are available for your transaction future date A date you use to record the payment date of a future dated payment document You only use future dates on payment documents with a future payment method Applications Desktop Integrator displays the future date on the future dated payment document to inform your supplier and bank when the bank should transfer funds to the supplier s bank In Applications Desktop Integrator the future date of a future dated payment is the same as the scheduled payment due date of the invoices being paid Applications Desktop Integrator also refers to the future date
233. ence number gt lt line image above the row gt lt line image below the row gt Where amp L signals you want to use a line item image token Sequence number is the sequence number of the row your want to format Line image above the row is the token indicating the line type above the row Line image below the row is the token indicating the line type below the row For example the token line amp L lt 30 gt ND instructs ADI to locate the row identified by sequence number 30 and to place no line above the row and a double line below the row Table 12 3 Line Item Tokens Description Token Reference Setting No Line amp N lt first setting above the row gt lt second setting below the row gt Request Center 12 41 Customizing Themes for Financial Reports Table 12 3 Line Item Tokens Description Token Reference Setting Single Line amp S lt first setting above the row gt lt second setting below the row gt Double Line amp D lt first setting above the row gt lt second setting below the row gt BD To place a line item token in your report theme 1 2 3 Choose any blank cell in the line item column to place your token Enter amp L to let ADI know you wish to use a token Enter the sequence number of the row you want to format Enter N no line S single line or D double line for the type of line you want above the row Enter N no line S single line or D double line fo
234. enditure cycle A weekly period for grouping and entering expenditures expenditure group A user defined name used to track a group of pre approved expenditures such as Timecards or Expense Reports expenditure item The smallest logical unit of expenditure you can charge to a project and task For example an expenditure item can be a timecard item or an expense report item expenditure item date The date on which work is performed and is charged to a project and task expenditure operating unit For an expenditure the operating unit where the expenditure item was incurred against a project expenditure organization For timecards and expense reports the organization to which the incurring employee is assigned unless overridden by organization overrides For usage supplier invoices and purchasing commitments the incurring organization entered on the expenditure expenditure type An implementation defined classification of cost that you assign to each expenditure item Expenditure types are grouped into cost groups expenditure categories and revenue groups revenue categories expenditure type class An additional classification for expenditure types that indicates how Oracle Projects processes the expenditure types For example if you run the Distribute Labor Costs process Oracle Projects will calculate the cost of all expenditure items assigned to the Straight Time expenditure type class Formerly known as system li
235. ent terms You can specify at the system level whether you want to allow customers to take unearned discounts See also payment terms Unearned Revenue Revenue received and recorded as a liability or revenue before the revenue has been earned by providing goos or services to a customer Oracle Projects calculates unearned revenue using the following formula Unearned Revenue Amount Invoiced Revenue Accrued unidentified payment The status of a payment for which the customer is unknown Applications Desktop Integrator retains unidentified payments for you to process further unit See unit of measure unit class A group of units of measure and their corresponding base unit of measure The standard unit classes are Length Weight Volume Area Time and Pack Glossary 159 Glossary 160 unit of measure A label for the production quantities for a units of production asset The unit used to measure production amounts Each unit of measure belongs to a unit of measure class A unit of measure records quantities or amounts of an expenditure item For example if you specify the unit Miles when you define an expenditure type for personal car use Oracle Projects calculates the cost of using a personal car by mileage The unit in which the quantity of an item is expressed such as Each or Dozen You can define a unit of measure in Oracle General Ledger and see the unit of measure information in Applications Desktop Integrator when match
236. enter to note the row and column sequence numbers for the cell or range of cells you wish to format 2 In column A of your report theme select the row you wish to format 3 Enter the ampersand symbol amp followed by the row sequence number you wish to use 4 Locate the column you wish to format and select the cell beneath the column heading 5 Enter the ampersand symbol amp followed by the column sequence number you wish to use 6 Use Excel s formatting capabilities to format a cell or range of cells as you like The Request Center uses sequence numbers to reference formatting instructions in your report theme with the information in your report definition to generate your formatted report output 12 44 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Customizing Themes for Financial Reports Attention Ihe Request Center searches for sequence numbers in your report output theme to determine format If sequence numbers are not specified in your report output theme the Request Center formats your report output following the steps below for Release 10 7 Note IIf you have upgraded to ADI 4 0 or later versions tokens line items and sequence numbers are applied to report themes you created in earlier ADI releases when you first publish a financial report using that theme Release 10 7 DB To apply individual cell formatting to your financial statement report output Release 10 7 1 In column A
237. ently selected customer address A location where your customer can be reached A customer can have many addresses You can also associate business purposes with addresses customer agreement See agreement customer agreement type See agreement type customer bank A bank account you define when entering customer information to allow funds to be transferred from these accounts to your remittance bank accounts as payment for goods or services provided See also remittance bank customer business purpose See business purpose customer class A method to classify your customers by their business type size or location You can create an unlimited number of customer classes Receivables QuickCode customer contact A specific customer employee with whom you communicate Applications Desktop Integrator lets you define as many contacts as you wish for each customer You can also define contacts for an address and assign previously defined contacts to each business purpose customer family agreement An agreement for a specific customer available to any related customer See also agreement generic agreement customer interface A program that transfers customer data from foreign systems into Oracle Receivables customer interface tables A series of two Oracle Receivables database tables from which Customer Interface inserts and updates valid customer data into your customer database Glossary 41 Glossary 42 customer
238. entralized tool for submitting monitoring and publishing your reports With the Request Center you can Submit Reports You can submit Standard Fixed Format Standard Variable Format or Financial Statement reports from the Request Center You can also schedule your reports to run at specific times and intervals using Oracle Application s standard request submission features Publish Report or Request Sets Publish a set of reports Standard Reports or Financial Reports you frequently use from Oracle General Ledger and Oracle Assets Use the Request Center to process all reports in your Request Set based on the themes submission and publishing options you apply to each report View Requests Retrieve request submission details or logs and view them in your preferred text viewer Cancel Requests You can cancel any pending requests you submitted from your responsibility Format Reports Use report themes to format report output You can create new themes or customize existing themes and apply their formatting to reports you create Publish Reports Publish your reports to a spreadsheet text file or to web pages stored on a local server or remote database View or Print Reports View your reports from a spreadsheet text viewer or web browser Reports you publish to a database can be accessed via Oracle Self Service Request Center 12 1 The Request Center Toolbar Web Applications or the Report Manager Kiosk and access g
239. environment Oracle Financial Analyzer provides complex budget modeling in a distributed environment The Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard provides a spreadsheet based reporting tool for quickly creating and running financial reports Oracle Financial Analyzer provides online analytical processing OLAP and reporting with balance drill down as well as report pivoting within a distributed environment Question Can Applications Desktop Integrator be used with Lotus 1 2 3 2 6 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Functional Issues No there are no current plans to provide a Lotus port Applications Desktop Integrator runs against Excel only Question What languages are available for Applications Desktop Integrator ADI supports the following languages Table 2 2 ADI Supported Languages English Finnish Japanese Norwegian German Portuguese Spanish Brazilian Portuguese Latin American Swedish Spanish French Czech Italian Greek Canadian French Hungarian Danish Polish Dutch Russian Korean Simplified Chinese Question What security is available for Applications Desktop Integrator Applications Desktop Integrator enforces the same username password and responsibility security as Oracle Applications Also you may choose to use function security or profile options both defined in Oracle Applications See the Appendix in Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Installation Guide for specific secu
240. epartment division group and so on for which he or she is responsible A financial statement containing information organized by management responsibility For example a responsibility report for an organization contains information for that organization a responsibility report for a division manager contains information for all organizational units within that division and so on A manager typically receives reports for the organizational units such as division department group and so on for which he or she is responsible responsibility type See process responsibility type restore To restore a fiscal year is to reload the depreciation expense and adjustment transaction records for that fiscal year into Oracle Assets from a storage device You can only restore the most recently purged fiscal year Glossary 133 Glossary 134 result See action result result code In Oracle Workflow the internal name of a result value as defined by the result type See also result type result value result type In Oracle Workflow the name of the lookup type that contains an activity s possible result values See also result code result value result value In Oracle Workflow the value returned by a completed activity such as Approved See also result code result type retroactive addition See prior period addition retroactive reinstatement See prior period reinstatement retroactive retirement See prior period
241. epreciation book layout template and worksheet options Select Corporate Depreciation Book Select Layout Select the corporate depreciation book in which you want to create assets The Oracle Assets profile option FA Security Profile extends to users working with Oracle Assets in ADI Your list of choices may be limited to sets of books associated with your responsibility For more information see your System Administrator or the Oracle Assets User Guide Layout templates allow you to select the fields that should be included in the asset worksheet They also control the order in which the data fields appear on your worksheet You can create a new layout template or edit view copy rename or delete an existing layout template Asset Wizard 9 3 Asset Worksheet Parameters You can make a layout template available to other users by checking the Public check box on the Edit Layout window W Edit Layout ojx Layout Name Default M Public Read Only Header Available Fields Accounting Date Date Asset Type Serial Number Depreciate ex Asset Key Ts E LGT List Te 4 Invoice Number j Manufacturer Model Employee Number Parent Asset Number Depreciation Reserve Salvage Value Leth Domeciation Lines fos Fae Asset Number Location Category Units Cost Description Text Text Text Value Value List Text Text kml 0 Drag and drop fields between grids to create your own Layout
242. er Pn i Help _ o Cancel To specify your local printer settings Choose the Options button from the Request Center toolbar Choose the Print Settings button From the list of values choose the Font to use for your locally printed reports Note As you make your selections in the Print Settings window the result is shown in the Preview region Specify the font Size Check the Bold and or Italic check boxes if you want your report to be printed in bold italic or bold and italic text Check the Page border check box if you want a border placed around the outside edge of each page of your report Choose OK to save your work Setting Report Publishing Options on page 12 18 The Request Center Toolbar on page 12 2 Setting Request Center Options on page 12 5 12 32 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Using Report Output Themes Formatting Report Output See Also To format your report output you can apply themes to any report request you submit through the Request Center You create new themes or customize existing themes in a spreadsheet environment using a combination of ADI and Excel formatting features You can define fonts font styles and sizes report backgrounds and colors add a corporate logo to your report and more You can fine tune your themes by using tokens and cell level formatting to control the appearance of your report output down to the cell level Genera
243. er you must enter a cancellation code to record why the customer wants to nullify the order or order line Order Entry QuickCode candidate A record that Applications Desktop Integrator selects to purge based on the last activity date you specify Applications Desktop Integrator only selects records that you have not updated since the last activity date you specify Applications Desktop Integrator does not purge a candidate until you confirm a purge capital gain threshold The minimum time you must hold an asset for Applications Desktop Integrator to report it as a capital gain when you retire it If you hold an asset for at least as long as the capital gain threshold Fixed Assets reports it as a capital gain when you retire it If you hold the asset for less than the threshold Fixed Assets reports it as an ordinary income from the retirement capitalized assets Capitalized assets are assets that you depreciate spread the cost expense over time The Asset Type for these assets is Capitalized capital project A project in which you build one or more depreciable fixed assets carrier See freight carrier cash basis An accounting method that lets you recognize revenue at the time payment is received for an invoice cash basis of accounting An accounting method in which you only recognize an expense when you incur the expense With the Cash Basis of Accounting Applications Desktop Integrator only creates journal ent
244. ers funds from your bank account into the bank account of a supplier you pay with the Electronic payment method employee billing title An employee title which differs from a job billing title that may appear on an invoice Each employee can have a unique employee billing title employee organization The organization to which an employee is assigned encumbrance See encumbrance journal entry An entry you make to record anticipated expenditures of any type Oracle Financials create requisition encumbrances and purchase order encumbrances automatically when encumbrance accounting or budgetary control is enabled You can also record other encumbrances manually For example you can record encumbrances for your payroll encumbrance accounting An Oracle Financials feature you use to create encumbrances automatically for requisitions purchase orders and invoices The budgetary control feature uses encumbrance accounting to reserve funds for budgets If you enable encumbrance accounting only you can create encumbrances automatically or manually however you cannot check funds online and Oracle Financials does not verify available funds for your transaction See also budgetary control An Oracle Government Financials feature that creates encumbrances automatically for requisitions purchase orders and invoices If you enable encumbrance accounting only you can create encumbrances automatically or manually You cannot check funds online
245. ersal Period and Clearing Company To display one of the above items as a row in your header check the box next to its name As with required fields you can change the display sequence See the section Moving Fields below D Moving Fields Use the directional buttons to change the display sequence of required or optional fields in your journal worksheet First select the field whose sequence you want to change Then choose one of the four directional buttons The field description moves immediately in either the Required Fields list or the Optional Fields list Top of Header gt Up One Row gt Down One Row le Bottom of Header le Journal Wizard 5 9 Customizing Journal Worksheets Define Worksheet Layout Worksheet Header Lines Required Fields m Optional Fields Description Stat Amount Line DFF Context Line DFF 1 Line DFF 2 Line DFF 3 Line DFF 4 Line DFF 5 Line DFF 6 Line DFF 7 Line DFF 8 Line DFF 9 Line DFF 10 Captured Info Context j lis leje ee ff 1 mn n 1 a 1 Aa Show l Database Columns Lines Tab Customize the information displayed on each journal line In a multiple entry journal worksheet the journal lines include the header information discussed earlier Note If you check the box labelled Database Columns located at the bottom of the D
246. erties window 6 10 reports ad hoc report components 12 13 adding and deleting columns 6 20 adding and deleting rows 6 19 publishing options 12 18 publishing text options 12 29 saving 6 17 setting report submission options 12 30 submitting from Request Center 12 8 submitting FSG or ad hoc 12 11 submitting standard 12 9 submitting standard variable format 12 10 text publishing options 12 29 web options 12 23 Request Center formatting report output 12 33 local printer settings 12 31 monitoring a request 12 52 monitoring requests 12 51 overview 12 1 setting options 12 5 specifying a sound file for request completion 12 7 stop monitoring requests 12 54 submitting reports 12 8 toolbar 12 2 using report output themes 12 33 viewing reports and log files 12 50 Request Center options 3 30 request sets 12 14 requests cancelling 12 50 monitoring 12 51 responsibility choosing a 3 15 rows expanded 12 46 RXi Reports 12 17 S security 3 1 validation and segment security 3 3 segment value descriptions modifying 8 34 setting budget worksheet parameters 4 6 signing on 3 10 signon information displaying 3 34 submitting request sets 12 14 RXi Reports 12 17 T tech19 2 18 toolbar 3 3 U uploading asset data upload options 9 11 uploading budgets from ADI 4 19 setting budget upload options 4 22 uploading inventory data upload options 10 12 uploading journal entries fr
247. es dsatoc E E RRE 12 8 Ad Hoc Report Components nsessessesstesesseertestesessesntestesessesntenteseonssntentesaessrnrentesnenseneneeseens 12 13 Reguest SES is 35 525 aeien ao a A OE TAIA OE ideas OE a AASE a 12 14 RX Reports iisstadion i bia iesi Tiin 12 17 Setting Report Publishing Options s sssssssesssesssessestessistessestensessnsnestentessesnententennesnnsneneeseess 12 18 Attribute Sets si 5 sss sores fata abate lates eoa ea eaea Ea thoes E oao A ENEA aa ES ES a a ie 12 21 Eocal Web Page Options miernes a ee eao eee a aR eni EEEE ona RE A SENEE 12 23 Spreadsheet Options Sre ere a RTE A E A E E T E E 12 26 Text Options seiorn Naa N cite N eee A a D Na ete te 12 29 Setting Report Submission Options ssssssssssssssseseessestessissessestenststesnestentessesnententensesnesneneennens 12 30 Specifying Your Printer Setn g Szinnai 12 31 Formatting Report Output sc sesir npin iien i eea e iiare aaea e e ai eE iE 12 33 Using Report Output Themes ssssssssssssissessssistsstsstsstesissessteniestenenstententensesnestentennesnenenteneens 12 33 Customizing Themes for Standard Fixed Format Repotts sssssssssessissesisrressesssssereeseess 12 35 Customizing Themes for Financial Reports ccccecccccssesesescs cesses cscseseseecsesesnsnseeeecenees 12 35 Positioning sine tems sesso cede ee cat see rts frat ieee eae Sai 12 38 Formatting with Tokens niecne terei e naie oE AAEE a Eaa a RETE Se EEEE ESE
248. es for project revenue See revenue sales credit Revenue credit you assign to your agents that is from your invoice lines The total amount of all revenue credit must be equal to your invoice lines amount revenue distribution rule A specific combination of revenue accrual and invoicing methods that determine how Oracle Projects generates revenue and invoice amounts for a project See revenue authorization rule revenue item A single line of a project s revenue containing event or expenditure item revenue summarized by top task and revenue category or event revenue recognition The point at which revenue is recorded The concept of revenue recognition is central to accrual basis accounting Revenue recognition schedules detail the points at which percent amounts of a sale are recognized as revenue revenue sales credit Sales credit you assign to your salespeople that is based on your invoice lines The total percentage of all revenue sales credit must be equal to 100 of your invoice lines amount Also known as quota sales credits See also non revenue sales credit sales credit revenue write off An event type classification that reduces revenue by the amount of the write off You cannot write off an amount that exceeds the current unbilled receivables balance on a project See also invoice write off reversing journal entry A journal entry General Ledger creates by reversing an existing journal entry You can reverse any journa
249. es that you use a historical exchange rate for all accounts based on past purchase exchanges and that you use a current exchange rate for all accounts based on current purchase current sale and future exchanges Applications Desktop Integrator remeasures specific account balances using historical rates you specify for companies in highly inflationary economies according to the standards of SFAS 8 U S SFAS 8 U S also mandates that you record any out of balance amounts arising from translation to an income expense account included in your income statement shortdecimal data type Oracle Financial Analyzer variables with a shortdecimal data type contain decimal numbers with up to 7 significant digits shortinteger data type Oracle Financial Analyzer variables with a shortinteger data type contain whole numbers with values between 32768 and 32768 Settlement Date The date before which you cannot apply a prepayment to an invoice Applications Desktop Integrator prevents you from applying a temporary prepayment to an invoice until on or after the Settlement Date of the prepayment Shared use assets When your accounting entities in the same corporate book share the use of an asset you can apportion depreciation expense to each by percentage or units used Ship Confirm A feature that allows shipping personnel to verify that they have shipped or backordered the items of an order line ship date The date upon which a shippable item i
250. es the formatting for all cells below it in that column Formatting Report Output on page 12 33 General Options on page 3 19 Expanded Rows Your report definitions may include children rows as an expansion of a parent row You format cells in the first expanded row and the following expanded rows assume the same formatting You can also format a cell or range of cells in any expanded row If formatting is not applied to any expanded rows the Request Center uses the defaults above to assign formatting DB To format an expanded row 1 2 3 Activate the cell below the Parent row in column A of your report theme Enter the ampersand symbol amp and sequence number of the Parent row After the sequence number enter E and the number for the position of the child row for example amp 20E1 Use Excel s formatting capabilities to format any cell or range of cells 12 46 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Formatting Standard Variable Format Reports Note You must enter and format each expanded row as a separate row in your report theme Formatting Standard Variable Format Reports You can create themes to format Standard Variable Format reports to use with Oracle General Ledger Receivables and Assets reporting Format the regions of your report and further refine your report by using tokens unique to Standard Variable Format reports A B E D E Asset
251. es when you cannot drop a selected value onto an existing value in the hierarchy diagram For example you cannot drop a child value onto another child value The Account Hierarchy Editor shows you when it is OK or not OK to drop a selected value While you are dragging a value through a no drop area of the Hierarchy Diagram window the cursor includes the disabled symbol When it is OK to drop your selection the disabled symbol disappears and the cursor changes to include a small rectangle at the lower right of the arrow Expanding and Collapsing Hierarchy Diagrams The symbol displayed for each value in your hierarchy diagram includes one of the following buttons on either its left right or bottom edge depending on the diagram view you are using See View Menu on page 8 12 These buttons indicate whether a parent child relationship exists and if so whether the relationship details are currently displayed or hidden Collapsible Parent children are currently displayed 8 8 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface Expandable Parent children are currently hidden No child values Choosing an expanded parent button hides the assigned child values Choosing a collapsed parent button displays the assigned child values Displaying Multiple Hierarchy Diagrams To display multiple hierarchies simultaneously you must create a new Hierarchy Diagram window for each hierarchy From t
252. esa 70 General and Administrative 999 889 95 989 900 99 989 990 99 999 999 99 95 999 999 89 999 999 99 929 998 99 999 999 99 E foje 999 999 99 999 999 89 999 999 89 999 999 89 107 108 09 FAA eS e ASE Report Indicators Row Definitions Reports Toolbar Report Wizard Tools In addition to the Reports Toolbar Report Wizard includes many other useful features and tools to make it easy for beginners intermediate and advanced users to create reports You can create or modify row and column properties column headings account assignments and row and column calculations You can also create and assign Content Sets and Row Orders and assign Display Sets The Report Wizard tools include For Beginning Users Collapsible expandable regions Excel based menu options and right mouse button options Report Wizard 6 5 Report Wizard Tools For Intermediate Users Displayable windows report worksheet buttons and the Report Object Properties window For Advanced Users The Row Properties and Column Properties windows Collapsible Expandable Regions The report worksheet includes buttons you can choose to expand or collapse various regions of the report worksheet When a region is expanded you can see additional information about that region For example in Figure 6 1 if you choose the plus button at the left margin adjacent to line 17 Report Wizard displays all of the report
253. esesssseesesssesssseessssseseseseseneeeseseees 6 6 Excel based Menu Options cvsisccncctseivnessesnesisis decree heschiev a i a Sist 6 7 Column Properties Window nnie throin pisaan aaa Ari atO Rra E EAE AEE aa TEE aae hes 6 11 Creating a Report Using Report Wizard ssssssesssesississessertisressesnestinsesnesnsnninnisnesnentieressesneene 6 12 Report Width Eee eaae ene e a a oA Aee E e eT eaa EEE A E e Aea a Ee Ee EE E 6 13 Saving a Report Using Report Wizard s sessssessesisesississesretisressesnintinsessesnsnsinsesnesnerinnesnesneene 6 17 Adding and Deleting Rows Using Report Wizard ssssssesssssssessesrirsissessessenrinsisnesnenreesesses 6 19 Adding and Deleting Columns Using Report Wizard sss sessssessessississessesserersesnerenreresses 6 20 Changing Row Properties Using Report Wizard s sssssessississesrirtisressesrsrinsessesnentennisnesnees 6 21 Adding and Deleting Row Account Assignments Using Report Wizard 0 008 6 23 Changing Column Properties Using Report Wizard 0 0 0 0 cece ce teeeneneteneeenees 6 25 Adding and Deleting Column Account Assignments Using Report Wizard 6 27 Generating Content Sets sic pectic aa asa aaae anta al a Eea aeania aaar INER E AAAA 6 28 Hierarchy Attributes ssssisnenenetan hanan EE ates A EREE AE N 6 31 Hierarchy Filtering OPOS meng aa ae a a a ra R aai 6 34 7 Analysis Wizard Applications Desktop Integrator Analysis Wizard
254. esktop Integrator Duplicating Parent Hierarchies When you duplicate a hierarchy you can replace lower level parent segment values using wild card searches or you can specify the new parent segment values directly See Parent Levels in an Account Hierarchy on page 8 2 Note You can replace lower level parent values when you duplicate hierarchies but you cannot replace child values To change child segment values in the duplicate hierarchy delete the child segment value then create a new value or drag and drop an existing one from the Segment Values window Additional Information To help you complete fields in the Duplicate Hierarchy window text dynamically appears in the Helpful Hints region at the bottom of the window Account Hierarchy Editor 8 27 Duplicating Parent Hierarchies Duplicate Hierarchy From 2000 Total Liabilities New Top Level Parent TL Description Total Liabilties m Replace Lower Level Parent Value s r Replacement Order Find Parent 2722 Replace With 077 B In Parent Level ALL Benove m Helpful Hint Enter a new parent value This value will replace all parent values duplicated from the former hierarchy You can use the wildcard character to represent any character including blank values The number of wildcards represent the maximum length allowed for this segment Undo Undo All Preview Can
255. et worksheet First select the field whose sequence will change Then choose one of the four directional buttons The field description will move immediately m Drag and Drop To move fields from the Available Fields region to the Header or Lines region or to move fields between the Header and Lines regions use your left mouse button to drag and drop fields to the proper location m Right Mouse Button You can also access directional functions by clicking the right mouse button to move fields to different regions or within the same region Create Worksheet in m m See Also New Workbook Select this option to create your asset worksheet as a new Excel workbook Current Workbook Select this option to create your asset worksheet as a new worksheet within the current Excel workbook This option is only available when you already have an Excel workbook open Creating Asset Worksheets on page 9 2 9 6 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Entering Data in Your Asset Worksheet Entering Data in Your Asset Worksheet You can enter data in an asset worksheet manually or by importing it from a text file Entering Data Manually To enter information manually you simply type directly in the worksheet Because you are in a spreadsheet environment you can use Excel s data entry functionality to drag and drop or copy and paste information You can also use the list of values to select data from a drop down box See Als
256. expenditures when you attempt to reserve funds for a transaction Oracle Financials notifies you online if funds available are insufficient for your transaction burden cost code An implementation defined classification of overhead costs A burden cost code represents the type of burden cost you want to apply to raw cost For example you can define a burden cost code of G amp A to burden specific types of raw costs with General and Administrative overhead costs business day Days on which financial institutions conduct business In General Ledger you choose which days of the calendar year are defined as business days You can include or exclude weekends and holidays as needed burden costs Burden costs are legitimate costs of doing business that support raw costs and cannot be directly attributed to work performed Examples of burden costs are fringe benefits office space and general and administrative costs burden multiplier A numeric multiplier associated with an organization for burden schedule revisions or with burden cost codes for projects or tasks This multiplier is applied to raw cost to calculate burden cost amounts For example you can assign a multiplier of 95 to the burden cost code of Overhead burden schedule An implementation defined set of burden multipliers that is maintained for use across projects Also referred to as a standard burden schedule You may define one or more schedules for different purposes
257. eys Always on Top Tip Wizard amp Display Tip Wizard Character File Size d C Program Files Microsoft Agent Merlinsfx Original Greeting Name C Double bai C Triple Getting Started 3 21 General Options Settings Tab Set miscellaneous ADI parameters Start ADI when Opening Workbook Check this option if you want ADI to start automatically if it is not already running whenever you open a budget journal or report worksheet in Excel If this option is not checked ADI does not start when you open worksheets Start Request Center at Signon Check if you want the Request Center to start automatically when you start ADI Show Upload Success Indicator Check if you want ADI to display upload success indicators on your budget journal and asset worksheets The indicators tell you whether related budget journal or asset lines uploaded successfully Zero Pad Account Values Check if you want account segment values to be zero padded For example an account number of 50 where the segment is four characters in length will display as 0050 Enable Hot keys Check this box to enable the special hot keys that are mapped from your keyboard to ADI s functions This is an alternative to using a mouse Always on Top Check this box to force Windows to always display the toolbar on top of all other open windows Tip Wizard Check this box if you want to use Microsoft Agent In the Character File window ente
258. f values 2 From the related poplists select the Chart of Accounts and Segment for the existing hierarchy Account Hierarchy Editor 8 37 Adding and Changing Rollup Groups with the Account Hierarchy Editor oN gi From the related poplists select the Chart of Accounts and Segment for the existing hierarchy Choose Rollup Groups from the Edit menu The Rollup Groups window appears Choose New The Rollup Group window appears Enter a name and description for the new rollup group Choose OK to close the Rollup Group window Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each rollup group you want to create When you are finished choose OK to close the Rollup Groups window Save your work DB To change an existing rollup group 1 See Also oe ao gt o N Choose the existing hierarchy whose rollup groups you want to change Choose Rollup Groups from the Edit menu Select the rollup group you want to change Choose Edit After making your changes choose OK Repeat steps 3 through 5 for each rollup group you want to change When you are finished choose OK Save your work The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface on page 8 4 The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu on page 8 10 The Account Hierarchy Editor Toolbar on page 8 14 Finding Segment Values on page 8 15 Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 17 Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8
259. f books reporting period report date and more anywhere in your financial report Choose from the list of tokens in the table below D To place a token in your report theme 1 Create a new theme or modify an existing report theme 2 Select a cell and type the ampersand symbol amp followed by the token Refer to the table of tokens below 3 Format the cell using Excel s formatting features Your financial report output displays the formatting you specified 12 38 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Customizing Themes for Financial Reports Note Enter amp Blank in a cell to prevent the display of any information from that cell in your report output Note Enter amp FastFormatting in any empty cell in your worksheet to disable all cell level formatting This allows you to quickly publish FSG reports when there is a large volume of reports and cell level formatting is not a requirement Table 12 1 Formatting Tokens Description Token n Reference Setting Blank amp Blank n a Content Set amp ContentSetExpan Report Submission and Expansion sionValue Publishing window Value Current Period amp CurrentPeriod Period Report Submission and Pbuslishing window Day of Interest amp DOIDATE n where n is Period Report Date the offset Submission and number Publishing window Day of Interest amp DOIDAY n where n is Period Report Day the offset Submission and number Publishing window
260. ferent currencies A Payables feature that allows you to enter multiple invoices together in a group You enter the batch count or number of invoices in the batch and the total batch amount which is the sum of the invoice amounts in the batch for each batch of invoices you create You can also optionally enter batch defaults for each invoice in a batch When you enable your batch control system option Applications Desktop Integrator automatically creates invoice batches for Payables expense reports prepayments and recurring invoices as well as all standard invoices invoice burden schedule A burden schedule used for invoicing to derive the bill amount of an expenditure item This schedule may be different from your revenue burden schedule if you want to invoice at a different rate at which you want to accrue invoice date The date that appears on a customer invoice This date is used to calculate the invoice due date according to the customer s payment terms The date an invoice was created This is also the date that Applications Desktop Integrator prints on each invoice Applications Desktop Integrator also use this date to determine the payment due date based on the payment terms you specify on the invoice Applications Desktop Integrator ensures that your invoice date always matches your general ledger date The date you assign to an invoice you enter in Applications Desktop Integrator Applications Desktop Integrator uses this da
261. field type Each record you import is divided into regions and each region holds a different piece of information Applications Desktop Integrator calls these regions fields and provides you with a list of the types of fields that can be interfaced through AutoLockbox final assembly order A discrete job created from a custom configuration or a standard configure to order item and linked to a sales order Also known as final assembly schedule finance charges Additional charges that you assign to customers for past due items You specify whether you want to charge your customers finance charges in their customer profiles Finance charges can be included on your customer s statements and dunning letters Financial Statement Generator A powerful and flexible tool you can use to build your own custom reports without programming You can define reports online with complete control over the rows columns and contents of your report firm schedule A burden schedule of burden multipliers that will not change over time This is compared to provisional schedules in which actual multipliers are mapped to provisional multipliers after an audit first bill offset days The number of days that elapse between a project start date and the date that the project s first invoice is issued fiscal year Any yearly accounting period without regard to its relationship to a calendar year Any yearly accounting period without regard to its relat
262. fine Report from the list of values Step 1 of Report Wizard appears i Report Wizard Step 1 Select Report Task to Perform Ei Use the Report Wizard to build maintain and submit financial statements within Excel Definitions Define Report C Generate Content Set Utilities Refresh Report from Database Save Reportto Database Display Report fools Cancel 2 Back Finish 2 Select Define Report as your Report Wizard task then choose Next 3 Select Blank Report then choose Next 4 Enter a Report Name then enter values for each of these fields Number of Rows The number of rows to use in your report Number of Columns The number of columns to use in your report Default Column Width The width to use for each column These can be changed later Line Item Width The width of the report area where the row labels will appear 6 14 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Report Width 10 11 12 13 14 15 Select the destination for the report worksheet New Workbook Creates the report worksheet in a new Excel workbook Current Workbook Creates the report worksheet as a new worksheet in the currently displayed Excel workbook Choose Next Select a default Format mask and Factor to use in your report worksheet Optional Select Yes to create a trend report Otherwise select No If you select No skip to step 13 Choose Next For your trend report s Balance Type selec
263. finished products or supplies Oracle Manufacturing also uses items to represent planning items that you can forecast standard lines that you can include on invoices and option classes that you can use to group options in model and option class bills See also inventory item Anything you buy sell or handle in your business An item may be a tangible item in your warehouse such as a wrench or tractor or an intangible item such as a service item attribute control level A method to maintain item attributes at the item master attribute level or the organization specific level by defining item attribute control consistent with your company policies For example if your company determines serial number control at headquarters regardless of where items are used you define and maintain serial number attribute control at the item master level If each organization maintains serial number control locally they maintain those attributes at the organization specific level Glossary 79 Glossary 80 item attributes Specific characteristics of an item such as order cost item status revision control COGS account and so on item category Code used to group items with similar characteristics such as plastic metal or glass items Item Flexfield See System Items Flexfield item groups A group of related products that can be added to one or more price list item type A term used by Oracle Workflow to refer to a grouping of all
264. fixed life usually using rates from a table life to date depreciation The total depreciation taken for an asset since it was placed in service Also known as accumulated depreciation line ordering rules You define line ordering rules for invoice lines that you import into Receivables using AutoInvoice AutoInvoice uses these rules to order invoice lines when it groups the transactions it creates into invoices debit memos and credit memos listing An organized display of Oracle Applications information similar to a report but usually showing setup data as opposed to transaction data list price Your base item cost to your customers You define the item list price on a price list and Oracle Order Entry applies all price adjustments against the item list price location A shorthand name for an address Location appears in address list of values to let you select the correct address based on an intuitive name For example you may want to give the location name of Receiving Dock to the Ship To business purpose of 100 Main Street A key flexfield combination specifying a particular place You assign each asset to a location Oracle Assets uses location information to produce Responsibility and Property Tax Reports Location Flexfield Oracle Assets lets you define what information you want to keep about the locations you use You use your Location Flexfield to define how you want to keep the information locator Physica
265. for invoice variances Approval prevents payment or posting of invoices that do not meet defined approval criteria by placing holds on the invoice Approval also releases holds when you resolve invoice exceptions You must submit Approval for each invoice to pay and post the invoice AutoAssociate An option that allows you to specify whether you want Applications Desktop Integrator to determine the customer using invoice numbers if the customer cannot be identified from either the magnetic ink character recognition MICR number or the customer number Applications Desktop Integrator checks the invoice numbers until it finds a unique invoice number for a customer Applications Desktop Integrator then uses this invoice number to identify the customer You can only use this feature if your bank transmits invoice numbers and if the AutoLockbox Validation program can identify a unique customer for a payment using an invoice number Otherwise Applications Desktop Integrator treats the payment as unidentified See also MICR number Glossary 13 Glossary 14 AutoCash Rule A feature that Post QuickCash uses to automatically apply receipts to a customer s open items AutoCash Rules include Apply to the Oldest Invoice First Clear the Account Clear Past Due Invoices Clear Past Due Invoices Grouped by Payment Term and Match Payment with Invoice See also AutoCash Rule Set Post QuickCash AutoCash Rule Set A feature that determines the order
266. for the same column When you select Custom the Custom AutoFilter window appears Budget Wizard 4 11 Changing the Budget Worksheet View Custom AutoFilter Eg Show Rows Where Co AE ok u lea a And Or k E fazi0 Use to represent any single character Use to represent any series of characters From the first poplist choose a compare value Shows rows whose value equals what you enter in the next poplist gt Shows rows whose value is greater than what you enter in the next poplist lt Shows rows whose value is less than what you enter in the next poplist gt Shows rows whose value is greater than or equal to what you enter in the next poplist lt Shows rows whose value is less than or equal to what you enter B in the next poplist lt Shows rows whose value is not equal to what you enter in the gt next poplist In the second poplist enter a value or choose one of the values available from the poplist When you enter a value you can use one of two wildcard characters To represent a single wildcard character To represent a series of wildcard characters 4 12 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Updating Budget Balances Using ADI See Also Caution You may notice unpredictable results when you apply a custom filter to an account segment value column of your budget worksheet This is because Excel treats the values in these columns as text rat
267. fore it publishes the report If this check box is clear your report publishes automatically Choose the Publishing button From the Apply Themes poplist select the report theme you want to use for the published report Note If you republish a financial report the Request Center applies the last theme you used to your republished financial report output You can choose a different theme from the Apply Themes poplist See Formatting Report Output on page 12 33 Select the Output Type for your report Local Web Page Publish your report output to web pages on a local drive Spreadsheet Publish your report output to an Excel spreadsheet Text Publish your report output to a text file Database Web Page Publish your report output to web pages stored in the database Complete the publishing options for the Output Type you selected in the previous step See Complete the publishing options for the Output Type you selected in the previous step Local Web Page Options on page 12 23 Spreadsheet Options on page 12 26 Text Options on page 12 29 Publishing Reports to the Database Report Manager Users Guide Request Center 12 19 Setting Report Publishing Options 8 Complete the report submission process See Submitting Reports on page 12 8 DB To publish report output manually 1 Select the report from the Request Center Completed or Hotlist tabs Note To publish a financial report that was sub
268. gin of journal entries Standard journal entry sources include payables payroll personnel and receivables Journal Import A General Ledger program that creates journal entries from transaction data stored in the General Ledger GL_INTERFACE table Journal entries are created and stored in GL_JE_BATCHES GL_JE_HEADERS and GL_JE_LINES jurisdiction code An abbreviated address that is specific to a Tax Supplier and more accurate than a simple five digit zip code K record A summary record of all 1099 payments made to suppliers for a single tax region that participates in the Combined Filing Program key flexfield An Oracle Applications feature you use to build custom fields in which you can enter and display information relating to your business The General Ledger Accounting Flexfield is a key flexfield An intelligent key that uniquely identifies an application entity Each key flexfield segment has a name you assign and a set of valid values you specify Each value has a meaning you also specify You use this Oracle Applications feature to build custom fields used for entering and displaying information relating to your business The Accounting Flexfield in your Oracle General Ledger application is an example of a key flexfield used to uniquely identify a general ledger account An Oracle Applications feature you use to build custom fields used for entering and displaying information relating to your business Applications Desktop Int
269. ground The sample worksheet to the left of the Workbook Region options reflects your color choices as you make them Note These color choices apply only to worksheets on your display not to report output You make report output color selections on the Theme Defaults tab of the General Options window General Options Worksheet Colors Theme Defaults Settings Installation Region Report Title 5 Font Arial E Size 14 Text Oo Bold amp Background Italic C Border Logo IDAORANT GLDIS0 FSGIMAGE APPSLOGO B Include Align With Border Left C Title amp Shadow C Right Heading Banner Use for DB Publishing m ORACLE Applications i x Theme Defaults Tab Choose the Theme Default tab to set the defaults for new report themes The report theme defaults are also used when the theme you specify for publishing a report does not exist or is damaged D Theme From the Region poplist you can select Report Title Report Heading Column Headings Line Items or Amounts Once selected the choices you make affect the related region as reflected in the sample report output For each theme option you can set the Font to use for displaying text the font Size whether text is Bold and or Italic the Text and Background colors and whether the report area should be enclosed by a Border 3 20 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator General Optio
270. group You can assign one or more Withholding Tax type tax names to a withholding tax group Assign a withholding tax group to an invoice or distribution line and use Oracle Payables to automatically withhold tax for expense reports and supplier invoices withholding tax rate The rate at which Payables withholds tax for an invoice distribution line that has a Withholding Tax type tax name assigned to it Work Breakdown Structure WBS The breakdown of project work into tasks These tasks can be broken down further into subtasks or hierarchical units of work work in process An item in various phases of production in a manufacturing plant This includes raw material awaiting processing up to final assemblies ready to be received into inventory work site The customer site where project or task work is performed Workflow Engine The Oracle Workflow component that implements a workflow process definition The Workflow Engine manages the state of all activities automatically executes functions maintains a history of completed activities and detects error conditions and starts error processes The Workflow Engine is implemented in server PL SQL and activated when a call to an engine API is made See also Account Generator activity function item type write off See invoice write off revenue write off write on An event type classification that causes revenue to accrue and generates an invoice for the amount of the wri
271. h you do not have to display all outputs in the alert message allocation entry A recurring journal entry you use to allocate revenues or costs alternative region An alternative region is one of a collection of regions that occupy the same space in a window where only one region can be displayed at any time You identify an alternative region by a poplist icon that displays the region title which sits on top of a horizontal line that spans the region Always Take Discount A Oracle Payables feature you use to always take a discount on a supplier s invoice if the payment terms for the invoice include a discount You define Always Take Discount as a Payables option that Payables assigns to new suppliers you enter When Always Take Discount is enabled for a supplier site you take a discount on that supplier s invoice site regardless of when you pay the invoice When Always Take Discount is disabled you only take a discount if you pay the invoice on or before the discount date applied Payment in which you record the entire amount as settlement for one or more debit items appropriation An authorization by a legislative body that permits a government to incur obligations and make payments for specified purposes An appropriation usually follows enactment of authorizing legislation Appropriations are limitations on the amounts agencies can obligate during the time specified in the appropriation act Glossary 9 Glossary 10 a
272. he Physical Inventory interface Oracle Application Flexfields Guide This manual provides flexfields planning setup and reference information for the Applications Desktop Integrator and General Ledger implementation team as well as for users responsible for the ongoing maintenance of Oracle Applications product data This manual also provides information on creating custom reports on flexfields data Oracle Report Manager User Guide This guide provides information on using the Report Manager to create and maintain reports you publish to the database Report can be unrestricted and available to all users via their personal home pages or a variety of scurity models can be applied that allow only authorized users to view entire reports or parts of reports Reports published to the database are accessed via the Oracle Business Intelligence System and Oracle Self Service Web Application Installation and System Administration Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Installation Guide This manual and the accompanying release notes provide information you need to successfully install Oracle Financials Oracle Public Sector Financials Oracle Manufacturing or Oracle Human Resources in your specific hardware and operating system software environment Oracle Applications Installation Manual This manual and the accompanying release notes provide information you need to successfully install Oracle Financials Oracle Public Sector Financials Orac
273. he Row Properties window is one of several ways you can enter values for your row properties When you choose the Row Properties button from the Report Wizard toolbar a poplist appears From the poplist you can choose Display Row D Properties Opens the Row Properties window When this window is open you can choose to open either of the other two windows Choose the Accts button to open the Row Account Assignments window a Choose the Calcs button to open the Row Calculations window D Account Assignments Opens the Row Account Assignments window Use this window to add edit or delete row account assignments T Calculations Opens the Row Calculations window Use this window to create edit or delete row calculations fo General amp Admin Expenses z la visi The Row Properties window and its related secondary windows are linked in that all the row related windows displays the detail information for one row The linking is controlled by the poplist that appears at the top of each window For example if you change the selection in the poplist of the Row Properties window the detail information in the other row related windows changes as illustrated in the diagram below 6 10 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard Tools Row Properties 20 General Expense 20 General Expense lt z vy Amount Type
274. he Segment Values window select the value to use as the topmost node of the new hierarchy then choose Open from the File menu Optionally you can select the File Open button from the toolbar Displaying Segment Value Details When you choose a segment value from either the Segment Values or Hierarchy Diagram windows the Account Hierarchy Editor displays a related Attributes window which shows segment value details as follows a Parent Attributes Segment Value Description Rollup Group Effective From and To dates Account Type and assigned Child Ranges Note If you drag and drop new child values onto a parent in the Hierarchy Diagram window the assigned Child Ranges in the Parent Attributes window are automatically updated a Child Attributes Segment Value Description Effective From and To dates Account Type Allow Budgeting and Allow Posting See Also The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu on page 8 10 The Account Hierarchy Editor Toolbar on page 8 14 Finding Segment Values on page 8 15 Account Hierarchy Editor 8 9 The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 17 Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 21 Adding or Changing Child Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 24 Duplicating Parent Hierarchies on page 8 26 Modifying Segment Value Descriptions on page 8 34 Adding and Chang
275. he hierarchy diagram to a modified tree structure Child nodes are displayed to the right of their parent node in a separate column There is a toolbar icon for this menu selection Horizontal Changes the orientation of the hierarchy diagram to that of a typical horizontal organization chart There is a toolbar icon for this menu selection Zoom In Zooms in on the current hierarchy diagram The items on your display are larger and easier to read but you see less of the overall diagram There is a toolbar icon for this menu selection 8 12 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu Note The hierarchy diagram may not display correctly when using this function unless you first change the default font Zoom Out Zooms out of the current hierarchy diagram You see more of the overall hierarchy diagram on your display but the individual items are smaller and might be difficult to read if you zoom out too far There is a toolbar icon for this menu selection Note The hierarchy diagram may not display correctly when using this function unless you first change the default font The hierarchy diagram may not display correctly when using this function unless you first change the default font Toolbar Toggles the toolbar on and off Status Bar Toggles the Account Hierarchy Editor status line on and off Window Menu The Window Menu includes the following options Cascade
276. he report using the options you specify in step 7 Note If you do not check the Publish Report check box the Publishing button is not available To set the publishing options and publish the report you must do so manually See Setting Report Publishing Options on page 12 18 Choose the Submission button to display the standard report submission parameters Request Center 12 9 Submitting Reports 5 From the poplist select the standard report you want to run Optionally choose the Find button to query a report name 6 Enter your standard report parameters in the region below the poplist Additional Information See the related Oracle application s user s guide for details about each report s parameters For example see Running Standard Reports and Listings Oracle General Ledger User s Guide for a further description of General Ledger report parameters Optional Choose the Publishing button to set your report publishing options See Setting Report Publishing Options on page 12 18 Optional Choose the Options button to set your report submission options See Setting Report Submission Options on page 12 30 Choose OK to submit your request or Cancel to abandon Alternatively if you want to run additional reports choose Submit to submit your request DB To submit a Standard Variable Format report 1 Make sure you are signed on with a responsibility that includes acces
277. hem later or perform budget analysis work on a different PC even when you are disconnected from your corporate database Prerequisites D Define a budget I Open one or more years for your budget D Define a budget organization then assign a budget entry type of Entered to the accounts for which you want to enter budget amounts Creating Budget Worksheets on page 4 2 Options Available When a Budget Worksheet is Open on page 4 5 Updating Budget Balances Using ADI on page 4 13 Budget Wizard 4 1 Creating Budget Worksheets Changing the Budget Worksheet View on page 4 8 Budget Rules on page 4 16 Graphing Budgets Using ADI on page 4 18 Uploading Budgets from ADI to General Ledger on page 4 19 Budget Upload Options on page 4 22 Getting Started with ADI on page 3 1 ADI Toolbar on page 3 3 ADI Options on page 3 16 Creating Budget Worksheets Create Budget Worksheet OF Current 4 2 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Creating Budget Worksheets To create a budget worksheet 1 2 3 Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select the Enter Budgets from the list of values Enter your budget worksheet parameters See Budget Worksheet Parameters on page 4 6 Choose OK ADI creates your budget worksheet and downloads any existing budget balances from General Ledger Note If the budget organization you select is password protected the system prompts
278. her than numeric We recommend that you check your results carefully Also you may find that you need to precede your specified filter value with a single or double quote character For example gt 3750 You may notice unpredictable results when you apply a custom filter to an account segment value column of your budget worksheet This is because Excel treats the values in these columns as text rather than numeric We recommend that you check your results carefully Also you may find that you need to precede your specified filter value with a single or double quote character For example Choose OK to apply your custom filter 4 Save your work To turn off your budget worksheet filters 1 Choose the View Filter button To reset all of your budget worksheet filters to their default values 1 Choose the Reset Filter button Creating Budget Worksheets on page 4 2 Updating Budget Balances Using ADI You can use Excel functions such as copy and paste values and formulas to update the values in your budget worksheet You can easily insert new budget accounts into your budget worksheet and you can use budget rules to divide a value among a range of cells or multiply the values in a range of cells by a constant Finally you can perform additional budget modeling by inserting new worksheets If you manually replace existing values in a budget worksheet the system flags modified rows by placing a flag character in the Upload
279. hy you add to a content set definition enter the hierarchy attributes that control how the hierarchy is expanded You can also specify whether you want the separate reports generated by the content set to be run sequentially or in parallel Include Choose the Parents check box to generate a separate report for each parent value in your hierarchy Choose the Children check box to generate a separate report for each child value in your hierarchy In this context a Parents are those parent values which are children of the hierarchy s parent value as shown in the Parent Value display field regardless of how they were defined on the Child Ranges window in Oracle General Ledger a Children are those child values which are children of the hierarchy s parent value that were defined in Oracle General Ledger using the Child Values Only option on the Child Ranges window Sort By Select Branch to sort reports by organization branch Select Level to sort reports by organization level For example assume your account structure includes a cost center segment whose segment values are as shown in the figure below Report Wizard 6 31 Hierarchy Attributes Figure 6 4 Example Cost Center Segment Values 999 All 100 Northern 200 Southern 300 Eastern 400 Western Cost Centers Cost Centers Cost Centers Cost Centers Note that cost centers 999 100 200 300 and 400 are all parent segment values Assuming you choose to include b
280. ials feature you use to perform summary level funds checking An account hierarchy lets Oracle Purchasing and Applications Desktop Integrator quickly determine the summary accounts into which your detail accounts roll up Account segment One of up to 30 different sections of your Accounting Flexfield which together make up your general ledger account code Each segment is separated from the other segments by a symbol you choose such as or Each segment typically represents an element of your business structure such as Company Cost Center or Account One of the sections of an Accounting Flexfield separated from the other sections by a symbol you choose such as or You can have up to 30 different Accounting Flexfield segments Each segment can be up to 25 characters long Each Accounting Flexfield segment typically captures one element of your agency s structure such as Fund Division Department or Program Account segment value A series of characters and a description that define a unique value for a particular value set Glossary 3 Glossary 4 account structure See Accounting Flexfield structure accounting calendar The calendar that defines your accounting periods and fiscal years in Oracle General Ledger You define accounting calendars using the Accounting Calendar window Oracle Financial Analyzer will automatically create a Time dimension using your accounting calendar accounting classification
281. iation See AutoReconciliation Glossary 15 Glossary 16 AutoOffset A feature that automatically determines the offset or credit entry for your allocation entry AutoOffset automatically calculates the net of all previous journal lines in your allocation entry reverses the sign and generates the contra amount AutoReduction An Oracle Applications feature in the list window that allows you to shorten a list so that you must scan only a subset of values before choosing a final value Just as AutoReduction incrementally reduces a list of values as you enter additional character s pressing Backspace incrementally expands a list AutoSelection A feature in the list window that allows you to choose a valid value from the list with a single keystroke When you display the list window you can type the first character of the choice you want in the window If only one choice begins with the character you enter AutoSelection selects the choice closes the list window and enters the value in the appropriate field AutoSkip A feature specific to flexfields where Oracle Applications automatically moves your cursor to the next segment as soon as you enter a valid value into a current flexfield segment You can turn this feature on or off with the user profile option Flexfields AutoSkip average balance The amount computed by dividing an aggregate balance by the number of calendar days in the related range available to promise A
282. id segment values Your organization can specify flexfields that will use shorthand flexfield entry and define shorthand aliases for these flexfields that represent complete or partial sets of key flexfield segment values shorthand window A single segment customizable field that appears in a pop up window when you enter a key flexfield The shorthand flexfield pop up window only appears if you enable shorthand entry for that particular key flexfield SIC code Standard Industry Classification Code A standard classification created by the government that is used to categorize your customers by industry sign on An Oracle Applications username and password that allows you to gain access to Oracle Applications Each sign on is assigned one or more responsibilities site use See business purpose skeleton entry A recurring journal entry the amounts of which change each accounting period You simply define a recurring journal entry without amounts then enter the appropriate amounts each accounting period For example you might define a skeleton entry to record depreciation in the same accounts every month but with different amounts due to additions and retirements source The origin of imported invoices When you enter and import an expense report in Applications Desktop Integrator or Web Employees the source is Payables Expense Reports When you import an expense report from Oracle Projects the source is Oracle Projects Yo
283. ies General Ledger uses average exchange rates to translate non historical revenue and expense accounts in accordance with FASB 8 U S Also known as period average exchange rate back value transactions Transactions whose effective date is prior to the current accounting date Also known as value dated transactions B record A summary record of all 1099 payments made to a supplier for one tax region backorder An unfulfilled customer order or commitment Oracle Order Entry allows you to create backorders either automatically or manually from released order lines See also Pick Release BACS See Bankers Automated Clearing System Glossary 17 Glossary 18 BAI An acronym for the Banking Administration Institute This organization has recommended a common format that is widely accepted for sending lockbox data If your bank provides you with this type of statement you can use Bank Statement Open Interface to load your bank statement information into Oracle Cash Management See also Bank Statement Open Interface balances table A General Ledger database table that stores your account balances called GL_ BALANCES balancing segment An Accounting Flexfield segment that you define so that General Ledger automatically balances all journal entries for each value of this segment For example if your company segment is a balancing segment General Ledger ensures that within every journal entry the total debits to company 01
284. ight carrier shipment A shipment is an individual package sent to a customer Thus a shipment might contain an entire order if all items in that order are pick released and packed together A shipment might contain just part of an order that is pick released and Glossary 145 Glossary 146 packed A shipment might also contain only part of a released order line where some of the items on the picking slip are not in stock shipment priority A term that indicates the urgency with which an order should be shipped to the customer Order Entry QuickCode shipment schedule An itemized list of when how where and in what quantities to ship an order line shippable item An item with the Shippable inventory item attribute set to Yes indicating that this item will appear on pick slips and pack slips See also intangible item shipping batch See picking batch shipping documents Shipping related reports such as the Bill of Lading Commercial Invoice Mailing Label and Pack Slip shipping instructions Notes that print on the pick slip These instructions are intended for internal use shorthand alias A user defined code or character string that represents a complete or partial flexfield value You can define as many aliases as you need for each key flexfield shorthand flexfield entry A quick way to enter key flexfield data using shorthand aliases names that represent valid flexfield combinations or patterns of val
285. in eia r a ea apa aa aaka isaisa r aiaa iat 3 19 General Ledger O pttoms iss nanes a aes ai a na issii 3 23 Request Center Options cccccecccesseseeeeeseeeeeseeseenseseecsensseseceeseseseesssessnseesecsesecesessesenssaeeesenaeeeees 3 30 Language Options pope er eee a aiK ae ea Ea E E EE i aea ae 3 32 Setting the Help System Location cccccceeccesessssssesesesesesesesesesesssesesesesesssesesesessseseseseecee 3 33 Displaying Signon Information 0 0cccc cece cece eesceceeseseecececsesnseececesesessneseseseseneseseceenes 3 34 Displaying ADI Release Information 0 cccc cc ceccccsesesesescscsesesescscsesesesescscsssesesescsessanseeeeees 3 36 Choosing Values from Lists 0 0 cccc cece cece ceeseseesecesssesesesessssseeesesesssssesesesesesseeseseseseseseess 3 37 ACCOUNESESMENE Val s niknas e a ea a E iE e E aA eaoh a Seata eS Epen 3 38 Choosing Account Segment Values s essessseeieesissessestertistissesnstestesnesnentinresnesnentensesnesnentenness 3 38 Submitting Processes orget ir a A A ri E NEEE A 3 42 General Wed Sere aa eTe e EN cavers thal AA E A a A ibe A S 3 42 Oracle ASSets esis tok eR ES N IG E iat E E I ERAN E 3 46 4 Budget Wizard Applications Desktop Integrator Budget Wizard n sessssessssississtssesrertinsisnesssrsinsesressenneesesses 4 1 Creating Budget Worksheets nnssnsnssssssessestersissessesssstessesnesnsntinsesnesnentinnisnesntntennisnesneenienesnesneen 4
286. inding Segment Values View Vertical Help The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface on page 8 4 The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu on page 8 10 Finding Segment Values on page 8 15 Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 17 Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 21 Adding or Changing Child Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 24 Duplicating Parent Hierarchies on page 8 26 Modifying Segment Value Descriptions on page 8 34 Adding and Changing Rollup Groups with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 37 Closing the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 39 Finding Segment Values Find Segment Ea Find Next Find What Accrued Commissions Cancel M Parent eee z me Search For Segment m Direction C Value Up Match Case Description Down T Match Whole Words Only The Account Hierarchy Editor lets you quickly search for a segment value by specifying the segment value or the segment value s description To narrow your search you can specify if the segment value or description is a parent or child value Account Hierarchy Editor 8 15 Finding Segment Values In addition you can specify if you want to match upper and lower case or whole words for your segment value or description BD To search for segment values or segment value descriptions 1 Open the Account Hierarchy Editor 2 Choose your ch
287. indow to display helpful tips about creating or customizing themes t Report Output Themes BEI CREATE Theme Use themes to standardize the look of your report output by automatically applying custom formatting CUSTOMIZE Theme Customize Background Publish To Use worksheet styles to further customize your theme beyond the default report wizard output options Open Theme button 2 Choose the Create button Choose from the following report types in the window that appears Financial Statement Standard Fixed Format Standard Variable Format 3 ADI creates a theme worksheet using the options specified on the New Theme Tab of General Ledger Options window See General Options on page 3 19 Theme Defaults Tab 4 Customize the theme worksheet as described in the next task 5 Save your theme by choosing File gt Save As from the Excel menu 12 34 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Customizing Themes for Financial Reports Suggestion Store all of your themes in the same directory on your PC This makes it easier to find them Also if you have a lot of themes group them in subdirectories under your main themes directory Customizing Themes for Standard Fixed Format Reports You can customize themes for Standard Fixed Format reports for Background choose the Background button in the Report Output Themes window to use a background for any report you c
288. ine schedule fixed date The date used to freeze bill rate or burden schedules for a project or task You enter a fixed date to specify that you want to use particular rates or multipliers as of that date You do not use schedule fixed dates if you want to use the current effective rates or multipliers for a particular schedule scheduled payment A schedule used to determine the amount and date of payment due You use payment terms to determine your scheduled payment as well as any discounts offered See also payment terms scheduling Order scheduling includes assigning demand or reservations warehouses shipment dates and lots or subinventories to an order line Scheduling can be done on unbooked orders in the Schedule Details zone of the Enter Orders form or on booked orders in the same zone on the Schedule Orders window scrollable region A region whose contents are not entirely visible in a window A scrollable region contains a horizontal or vertical scroll bar so that you can scroll horizontally or vertically to view additional fields hidden in the region secondary accounting method The accounting method you choose for your secondary set of books You can choose either the cash basis or accrual basis accounting methods Your secondary Glossary 141 Glossary 142 accounting method cannot be the same as your primary accounting method You do not need a secondary accounting method if you do not use a secondary set of books
289. iness operations With Applications Desktop Integrator you can maintain budget and actual statistics and use these statistics with budget rules and formulas status See customer status status line A status line appearing below the message line of a root window that displays status information about the current window or field A status line can contain the following or v symbols indicate previous records before or additional records following the current record in the current block Enter Query indicates that the current block is in Enter Query mode so you can specify search criteria for a query Count indicates how many records were retrieved or displayed by a query this number increases with each new record you access but does not decrease when you return to a prior record the lt Insert gt indicator or Jamp informs you that the current window is in insert character mode and the lt List gt lamp appears when a list of values is available for the current field step down allocation An allocation upon which you run another allocation For example you might allocate parent company overhead to operating companies based on revenues You can then use a step down allocation to allocate overhead to cost centers within the operating companies based on headcount An allocation upon which you run another allocation For example you might allocate parent fund overhead to operating funds based on revenues You can then use a step down alloc
290. ing Rollup Groups with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 37 The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu File Menu You can use the Account Hierarchy Editor s menu to change your hierarchy views edit hierarchies and change the properties of the hierarchy nodes There are six main menu selections a File Use to create a new Hierarchy Diagram window open or close a Hierarchy Diagram or Attributes window save hierarchies print the current window or exit from the Account Hierarchy Editor a Edit Use to undo changes remove a hierarchy node create or modify rollup groups or to change 1 display properties of Hierarchy Diagram windows 2 display fonts 3 display node properties a View Use to change the display view of the Hierarchy Diagram window a Window Use to cascade or tile your Hierarchy Diagram windows or to activate a specific window a Help Use to get help about the Account Hierarchy Editor The File Menu includes the following selections New Window Opens a new Hierarchy Diagram window for the current chart of accounts and segment There is a toolbar icon for this menu selection 8 10 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu Open Window If you select a segment value from the Segment Values window this menu selection creates a new Hierarchy Diagram window and uses the selected value as the topmost node of the hierarchy There is a toolbar icon for this menu selection Cl
291. ing Segment Values on page 8 15 Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 17 Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 21 Adding or Changing Child Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 24 Duplicating Parent Hierarchies on page 8 26 Modifying Segment Value Descriptions on page 8 34 Adding and Changing Rollup Groups with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 37 Closing the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 39 Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor You can use the Account Hierarchy Editor instead of the Key Segment Values window in General Ledger to define a hierarchy for a segment of your chart of accounts In addition to building new hierarchies you can use the Account Hierarchy Editor to change existing hierarchies regardless of where you defined them You can use the Account Hierarchy Editor instead of the Key Segment Values window to define a hierarchy for a segment of your chart of accounts In addition to building new hierarchies you can use the Account Hierarchy Editor to change existing hierarchies regardless of where you defined them Note You can only use the Account Hierarchy Editor for segments with value sets using Independent validation You can only use the Account Hierarchy Editor for segments with value sets using Independent validation Account Hierarchy Editor 8 17
292. ing an invoice to a purchase order For example you may want to define a unit of measure for Square Feet and then when you enter invoices for office rent you can track the square footage in addition to the dollar amount of the invoice See also statistical quantity unit of measure classes Groups of units of measure with similar characteristics Typical units of measure classes are Volume and Length unit of measure conversions Numerical factors that enable you to perform transactions in units other than the primary unit of the item being transacted units of production depreciation method A depreciation method that calculates the depreciation for an asset based on the actual production or use for that period This method uses the asset s actual production for the period divided by the capacity of the asset to determine depreciation Applications Desktop Integrator multiplies this fraction by the asset s recoverable cost unrealized gain or loss The measured change in value of an asset or liability over time Oracle Payables provides a report the Unrealized Gain and Loss Report that you can submit from the standard report submission form at any time to review your unrealized gains and losses See also realized gain or loss unscheduling The removal of the schedule status for an order line or detail if a line or detail is either demanded or reserved unscheduling will return the status to blank UOM See unit of measure
293. ing calendar period average exchange rate See average exchange rate period average to date The average of the end of day balances for a related range of days within a period period end exchange rate The daily exchange rate on the last day of an accounting period Applications Desktop Integrator automatically translates asset and liability account balances using period end rates in accordance with FASB 52 U S When you run revaluation for a period Applications Desktop Integrator automatically uses the inverse of your period end rate to revalue your foreign currency denominated assets and liabilities in accordance with FASB 52 U S For companies in highly inflationary economies Applications Desktop Integrator uses period end rates to remeasure the balances of asset and liability accounts according to FASB 8 U S personal library If an Oracle Financial Analyzer database object belongs to a personal library it means that the object was created by the workstation user and can be modified Glossary 107 Glossary 108 periodic alert An alert that periodically checks for the occurrence of your alert condition according to a schedule you define For example you can define a periodic alert to send a message to the Accounts Payable Supervisor once a week to report on the number of held invoices periodic key indicator alert A message Oracle Alert sends after scanning your database to notify you of current productivity
294. ion and define a multi currency payment format payment format A definition that determines your payment creation and remittance advice programs for a given payment document When you define a payment format you do so for a particular payment method An Oracle Receivables feature that allows you to make invoice payments using a variety of methods You can disburse funds using checks electronic funds transfers and wire transfers Receivables updates your scheduled payments the same way regardless of which payment method you use You can assign a payment method to suppliers supplier sites invoice scheduled payment lines and payment formats You can then assign one or more payment formats to a bank account You can have multiple payment formats for each payment method Receivables associates receipt class remittance bank and receipt account information with your receipt entries You can define payment methods for both manual and automatic receipts payment method A feature that allows you to make invoice payments using a variety of methods You can disburse funds using checks electronic funds transfers and wire transfers Applications Desktop Integrator updates your payment schedules the same way regardless of which payment method you use You can assign a payment method to suppliers supplier sites invoice payment schedule lines and payment formats You can then assign one or more payment formats to a bank account You can have Gloss
295. ion stored in a field made up of segments A different combination of segment values results when you change the value of one or more segments When you alter the combination of segment values you alter the description of the information stored in the field combination query See Existing Combinations combined basis accounting A method of accounting that combines both Accrual Basis Accounting and Cash Basis Accounting With Combined Basis of Accounting you use two separate sets of books one for the accrual basis accounting method and the other for the cash basis accounting method Applications Desktop Integrator creates journal entries for invoices and payments to post to your accrual set of books and creates journal entries for payments to post to your cash set of books comment alias A user defined name for a frequently used line of comment text which can be used to facilitate online entry of timecards and expense reports commitment A contractual guarantee with a customer for future purchases usually involving deposits or prepayments You can create invoices against the commitment to absorb the deposit or prepayment Oracle Receivables automatically records all necessary accounting entries for your commitments Oracle Order Entry allows you to enter order lines against commitments A journal entry you make to record an anticipated expenditure as indicated by approval of a requisition Also known as pre commitment pre encumbranc
296. ion to another government entity or recipient Glossary 7 Glossary 8 aggregate balance The sum of the end of day balances for a range of days There are three types of aggregate balances period to date PTD quarter to date QTD and year to date YTD All three are stored in the General Ledger database for every calendar day agent The customer name or supplier name on a bank statement line aging buckets Time periods you define to age your debit items Aging buckets are used in the Aging reports to see both current and outstanding debit items For example you can define an aging bucket that includes all debit items that are 1 to 30 days past due Applications Desktop Integrator uses the aging buckets you define for its Invoice Aging Report Used to define time periods represented in the forecast Examples of aging buckets are date ranges or accounting periods agreement A contract with a customer that serves as the basis for work authorization An agreement may represent a legally binding contract such as a purchase order or a verbal authorization An agreement sets the terms of payment for invoices generated against the agreement and affects whether there are limits to the amount of revenue you can accrue or bill against the agreement An agreement can fund the work of one or more projects An arrangement with a customer that sets business terms for sales orders in advance Oracle Order Entry lets you assign pricing accou
297. ions 3 30 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Request Center Options Limits Update Every i E Seconds Query Last 100 H Requests Flash Notification 5 H Times Display All gt Programs Sounds 4 Play Sound When Request Completes Normal D ORANT GLDISO SOUNDS WOW WAV Error D ORANT GLDISO SOUNDS HORNWHST WAV r Output Viewer bil bal A NOTEPAD EXE Help Print Settings Request Center 4 0 10 0 0 32 Bit Language Options Copyright c Oracle Corporation OK Cancel Limits Set limits for Request Center functions Update Every This is the query interval in seconds For example if you set the interval to 60 the system checks every 60 seconds to see if your request has completed processing Query Last Determines how many requests are retrieved in the Select Request to Monitor window when you choose the Query button Flash Notification The number of times the Request Center title bar flashes when a request completes Display You can limit which Oracle Applications requests are monitored by the Request Center by selecting the application name from the poplist If you select All you can monitor requests from all installed Oracle Applications Sounds See Specifying a Sound File for Request Completion on page 12 7 Output Viewer Select the program you want to use to view report output or request logs whenever you choose the View Output Log bu
298. ions Desktop Integrator tracks expensed items but does not create journal entries for them export A utility that enables you to copy data from an Oracle7 table to a file in your current directory The export utility is part of the Oracle7 Relational Database Management System export To move archive data to a different storage device external transaction Transactions between an EU European Union trader and a supplier or customer located in a non EU country Customers and sites in non EU countries are tax exempt and should have a zero tax code assigned to all invoices See also domestic transaction EU export file The file the export utility creates in your directory Export files must have the extension dmp It is wise to name the export file so it identifies the data in the table For example if you are saving fiscal year 1994 for your Fremont set of books you might call your export file FY94FR dmp external organization See organization factor Data upon which you perform some mathematical operation Fixed amounts statistical account balances account balances and report rows and columns are all data types you can use in formulas The payee of an invoice when the payee differs from the supplier on the invoice For example a supplier may have sold their receivables to a factor factoring The process by which you sell your accounts receivable to a financial institution such as a bank in return for cash Finan
299. ions on page 3 16 for further information on displaying toolbar icons Q Oa FTI Yx Until you successfully sign on to ADI you have access only to those icons and functions that do not interact with your applications database For example you can perform any of the daily work you need to do in an Excel spreadsheet open a saved budget worksheet apply budget rules work with Oracle Assets data or create a graph You can also sign on to Oracle Applications change your ADI options and access the Help functions You cannot download budget balances use Budget Wizard Journal Wizard or Report Wizard upload balances to the interface tables monitor requests or submit processes because these functions require that ADI be connected to your applications database You also do not have access to Oracle Assets the Assets icon does not appear on the ADI toolbar until you successfully sign on Note ADI observes the same password security as the application you are accessing If your password has expired or you experience problems with your password contact your system administrator for assistance After you sign on to ADI you may not have access to specific features and functions ADI compares security options set by your system administrator to those set for your responsibility to determine which ADI features you can use If you have trouble accessing certain ADI features contact your system administrator for assistance
300. ionship to a calendar year fixed asset An item owned by your business and used for operations Fixed assets generally have a life of more than one year are acquired for use in the operation of the business and are not intended for resale to customers Assets differ from inventory items since you use them rather than sell them fixed assets unit A measure for the number of asset parts tracked in Oracle Assets You can assign one or more units to a distribution line fixed date See schedule fixed date fixed price discount A discount that fixes the final selling price of the item so it is not affected by changes to the list price of the item This is a method of implementing discounts to the list price where the final price is contractually fixed regardless of changes to the list price as is the case with GSA prices For example if Item A has a list price of 100 a fixed price discount specifying a selling price of 90 results in a selling price of 90 even if the list price later increases to 110 fixed rate currencies Currencies with fixed exchange rates For example the Euro and currencies of countries in the European Monetary Union EMU flat file A file where the data is unformatted for a specific application flat tax A specific amount of tax regardless of the amount of the item There is no rate associated with flat taxes Flat taxes are charged on items such as cigarettes gasoline and insurance flat rate dep
301. isplays worksheet rows that have any value in the selected column 4 10 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Changing the Budget Worksheet View a Blanks displays worksheet rows that have only blanks in the selected column a NonBlanks displays worksheet rows that have only non blank values in the selected column a Top 10 when applied to a column containing amounts you can display the largest or smallest amounts in the column When you select this option the Top 10 AutoFilter window appears Top 10 AutoFilter 24x oe ecm 1o tems M Cancel Top Bottom Select Top to display the largest amounts Select Bottom to display only the smallest amounts number Enter the number of amounts you want to display This number is interpreted differently depending on whether you choose Items or Percent from the next field Items Percent Select Items to display the top or bottom number of amounts Select Percent to display the top or bottom number percent of amounts For example assume you have 400 budget lines in your worksheet Top 10 Items displays the top 10 amounts Bottom 20 Percent displays the bottom 80 20 of 400 amounts a Custom allows you to set custom filter values and combinations of filter values For example you can select accounts whose values are less than 5000 You can also select one of the logical operators AND and OR then specify a second custom filter value
302. it check rule credit check rule A rule that defines the components used to calculate a customer s outstanding credit balance Components include open receivables uninvoiced orders and orders on hold You can include or exclude components in the equation to derive credit balances consistent with your company s credit policies credit invoice An invoice you receive from a supplier representing a credit amount that the supplier owes to you A credit invoice can represent a quantity credit or a price reduction You can create a mass addition line from a credit invoice and apply it to an asset credit items Any item you can apply to an open debit item to reduce the balance due for a customer Applications Desktop Integrator includes credit memos on account credits and unapplied and on account cash as credit items Credit items remain open until you apply the full amount to debit items credit memo A document that partially or fully reverses an original invoice A document that partially or fully reverses an original invoice You can create credit memos in the Oracle Receivables Credit Memo window or with AutoInvoice credit memo reasons Standard explanations as to why you credit your customers Receivables QuickCode See also return reason cross currency receipt A receipt that is applied to a transaction denominated in a currency different than that of the receipt Cross currency receipt applications usually generate a foreig
303. ivables uses to determine when you will bill your customer and the accounting period in which the receivable amount is recorded You can bill In Advance or In Arrears See also bill in advance bill in arrears ITC See investment tax credit ITC amount The investment tax credit allowed on an asset The ITC amount is based on a percentage of the asset cost When you change an asset s cost in the accounting period you enter it Oracle Assets automatically recalculates the ITC amount ITC basis The maximum cost that Oracle Assets can use to calculate an investment tax credit amount for your asset If you enabled ITC ceilings for the asset category you assigned to an asset the ITC basis is the lesser of the asset s original cost or the ITC ceiling ITC ceiling A limit on the maximum cost that Oracle Assets can use to calculate investment tax credit for an asset You can use different ceilings depending on the asset s date placed in service ITC rate A rate used to calculate the investment tax credit amount This percentage varies according to the expected life of the asset and the tax year ITC recapture If you retire an asset before the end of its useful life Oracle Assets automatically calculates what fraction of the original investment tax credit must be repaid to the government This amount is called the investment tax credit recapture item Anything you make purchase or sell including components subassemblies
304. k This number consists of two segments The first segment is the Transit Routing number which identifies the bank from which your customer draws their check The second segment identifies your customer s account at that bank These segments correspond to the Bank Branch Number and the Bank Account Number fields in the Banks and Bank Accounts windows minimum accountable unit The smallest meaningful denomination of a currency this might not correspond to the standard precision While a currency may require a precision of three places to the right of the decimal point for example 001 one thousandth the lowest denomination of the currency may represent 0 025 twenty five thousandths Under this example the Minimum Accountable Unit would be 025 Calculations in this currency would be rounded to 025 the Minimum Accountable Unit not 001 the precision min max planning An inventory planning method used to determine when and how much to order based on a fixed user entered minimum and maximum inventory levels minimum depreciation expense The minimum possible depreciation expense for an asset in a mass depreciation adjustment The minimum depreciation expense for an asset in a tax book is the amount needed to bring the accumulated depreciation up to the accumulated depreciation in the corporate book or control book or zero whichever is greater minimum interest amount The amount below which Applications Desktop Integrator
305. ksheet displays the report title column headings and line items that will appear on your report Also included are number placeholders to indicate where the main body of report information will appear Finally the report worksheet will displays report indicators left of rows and above the columns that instantly tell you 6 4 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard Tools How many account ranges are assigned to a row or column The indicator is the actual number of assigned ranges a Whether a calculation has been defined The indicator is a C a Whether column exceptions are defined The indicator over the related column will be a E You use the Report Wizard tools to make changes to your report Figure 6 1 Report Wizard Interface Buttons expand or collapse hidden regions Column Definitions and Headings Report Worksheet Buttons N p E E ma alec D I N 0 P Q 2 3 a a 3 E Peport Indicators _ 14 Bana re 5 16 a r 28 29 w 30 4 999 999 89 999 909 99 99 909 99 999 999 99 E ofja 20 Sales Sa gag 999 999 99 999 999 98 999 999 99 E Bofa 30 Services 308 89 999 909 99 399 889 99 999 999 99 a c 999 999 99 999 999 99 999 999 99 999 999 99 66 _ 0 expenses 8 309 88 999 809 99 399 809 89 999 999 99 a 72 2 999 999 99 999 999 99 399 999 99 399 999 99 f
306. l transactions and creating all necessary accounting entries See also reconciliation tolerance AutoReconciliation Reconciliation Open Interface This interface lets you reconcile with payments and receipts from external systems reconciliation tolerance A variance amount used by Cash Management s AutoReconciliation program to match bank statement lines with receivables and payables transactions Ifa transaction amount falls within the range of amounts defined by a bank statement line amount plus minus the reconciliation tolerance a match is made See also AutoReconciliation record A record is one occurrence of data stored in all the fields of a block A record is also referred to as a row or a transaction since one record corresponds to one row of data in a database table or one database transaction record identifier A record identifier consists of either one or two characters which Applications Desktop Integrator uses to identify each record type For example Applications Desktop Integrator can identify a payment record in BAI bank files because this record always starts with the character 0 in the first position of the record record type A bank file is made up of many different rows or records Each record must have a type For example a record may store information about a payment record or a batch record Record types help Applications Desktop Integrator determine where different types of data are stored in your bank
307. l Applications system See also Reconciliation Open Interface open items Any item such as an invoice debit memo credit memo chargeback on account credit on account payment or unapplied payment whose balance due is not yet zero operator A mathematical symbol you use to indicate the mathematical operation in your calculation Glossary 97 Glossary 98 option See option item option class A group of related option items An option class is orderable only within a model An option class can also contain included items option class bill of material A bill of material for an option class item that contains a list of related options option class item An item whose bill of material contains a list of related options option group An option group is a set of option buttons You can choose only one option button in an option group at a time and the option group takes on that button s value after you choose it An option button or option group is also referred to as a radio button or radio group respectively option item A non mandatory item component in an option class or model bill of material Oracle8 tables A table is a two dimensional graphic representation of data consisting of columns and rows Categories of information are listed across the top of each table while individual listings of information are listed down the left side In this format you can readily visualize understand and use the inf
308. l Options on page 3 19 Using Report Output Themes You can define specific report formatting options then save them as a report output theme Once saved you can apply the theme to any report output that you download into Excel or publish as a web page You can also edit themes and create new ones To apply a report theme to your report output When you submit the report from the Report Submission and Publishing window or publish a report using Request Center s Publish Output button enter the path and name of the theme you want to use in the Apply Theme field See Submitting Reports on page 12 8 Setting Report Publishing Options on page 12 18 Setting Report Publishing Options To change the current theme When you republish a report the Request Center automatically applies the last theme you applied to your report type Republish your report by choosing the Publish Output button from the Request Center toolbar Make sure you change the system selected theme Suggestion When you change the theme of a spreadsheet based report use the Replace Output feature Otherwise you will get two copies of the same report but with different formatting Request Center 12 33 Using Report Output Themes D To create a theme 1 Choose the Format Report Output button from the Request Center toolbar The Report Output Themes window appears Suggestion Choose any of the light bulb icons from the Report Output Themes w
309. l Shift U Submit Process Start any the following processes Import budget values or journal entries from the interface tables to General Ledger Your process can also be submitted automatically fromt he Upload to Interface function See above Delete journal import data from the General Ledger Interface Submit Standard Fixed Format Standard Variable Format or Finanical FSG reports and publish on the web in a spreadsheet or a text file Insert Budget Account Insert a new account row into a budget worksheet Apply Budget Rule Use budget rules such as Repeat per Cell or Divide Evenly by Row to update your budgets z Hot key Ctrl Shift Z Add Budget Note Append notes to an entire budget an account or individual amounts in a budget worksheet E Hot key Ctrl Shift N cka Getting Started 3 5 ADI Toolbar Create Graph View your budget balances in graph form Hot key Ctrl Shift G Applications Desktop Integrator Be Ube tig vx Assets Menu Choose Assets to work with Oracle Assets features Create Assets Create asset data in an Excel spreadsheet qP Hot key Ctrl Shift B Record Physical Inventory Enter physical inventory data in an Excel Spreadhseet Import Text File Import a text file containing asset or physical inventory data which you format in an Excel spreadsheet and upload into Oracle Assets List of Values Choose from a list of valid values for a particul
310. l area within a subinventory where you store material For example a row aisle bin or shelf locator control A system technique for enforcing use of locators during a material transaction lockbox A service that commercial banks offer corporate customers to enable them to outsource their accounts receivable payment processing Lockbox processors set up special postal codes to receive payments deposit funds and provide electronic account receivable input to corporate customers lookup code The internal name of a value defined in an Oracle Workflow lookup type See also lookup type lookup type An Oracle Workflow predefined list of values Each value in a lookup type has an internal and a display name See also lookup code loss See realized gain or loss unrealized gain or loss lot A specific batch of an item identified by a number lot control A system technique for enforcing use of lot numbers during material transactions thereby enabling the tracking of batches of items throughout their movement in and out of inventory make to order An environment where customers order unique configurations that must be manufactured using multiple discrete jobs and or final assembly orders where the product from one discrete job is required as a component on another discrete job Oracle Manufacturing Release 10 does not provide special support for this environment beyond the support it provides for assemble to order manufact
311. l entry and post it to any open accounting period RFQ See request for quotation RFQ Only Site A supplier site from which you receive quotations revision A particular version of an item bill of material or routing revision control An inventory control option that tracks inventory by item by revision and forces you to specify a revision for each material transaction RMA See Return Material Authorization Glossary 137 Glossary 138 RMG Return of Material Goods See Return Material Authorization rollforward The process of taking the beginning balance of a period and then accounting for the transactions within that period by attempting to equate the beginning balance with the ending balance for the period rollup group A collection of parent segment values for a given segment You use rollup groups to define summary accounts based on parents in the group You can use letters as well as numbers to name your rollup groups root node A parent segment value in Oracle General Ledger that is the topmost node of a hierarchy When you define a hierarchy using the Hierarchy window you specify a root node for each segment Oracle Financial Analyzer creates a hierarchy by starting at the root node and drilling down through all of the parent and child segment values See also parent segment value root window The root window displays the main menu bar and tool bar for every session of Oracle Applications In
312. lacing Parent Segment Values ccccccsessesesesesesssesesesessesesesesssesesesescsesssesesessseseseseseeeses 8 30 Replacement Order Listoieserois e en en an a E A E E R A E 8 33 Modifying Segment Value Descriptions ssse sssssessestersissisrerestestesnesnstensesnesnentensesresnenrennens 8 34 Adding and Changing Rollup Groups with the Account Hierarchy Editor 0000 8 37 Closing the Account Hierarchy Editor 0 cccccccccscssescseststeeseeseceseececenenesesesneneseseeceeeseseeeananes 8 39 9 Asset Wizard 10 11 Create Assets Feature i 3 5 c5c5s60ee bententen chevhcntbeseevneecbbateshericssiesssanshotedbstgent esbentenlieaberd sucbnseeboosdbebens 9 1 Creating Asset Worksheets ccccccccssesesesescsesesesescscsesssesescscsssesesescsesssesescecscsssesnececesessneseseeases 9 2 Asset Worksheet Parameters meereist 9 3 Select Corporate Depreciation Book 2 0 0 c2c c0iiee eevee sce vtcid eeeteias e a 9 3 Select Layouts pe iae ir lado Eaa a g OE E S dha eid AE tee canbe a LF 9 3 Actions Button Optohsssne ono de deevaccis cies scesitens aves ei e e a e a doviedisie ccddiouavels 9 5 Editing Layout Templatesiar o oeiee ea eee E EE E E aa e EE E 9 6 Create Worksheet inenen here teeren aeea o aneta lets cad eri eea S ea eel eas cade PONA NERT 9 6 Entering Data in Your Asset Worksheet 0 0ccccccece cs cseeeseeeececeeeeseesesesseseeeseseseeeseseseseeees 9 7 Entering Data Manually ccic cs ceces
313. layed list Choose OK to complete your selection or Cancel to retain your previous selection If you select OK the system enters the related segment values in the Select Account Segment Values window Choose OK to enable your selection or Cancel to abandon it DB To choose account segment values using account aliases In Oracle General Ledger you can define aliases for accounts or combinations of account segments In an account alias some or all of the account segments have assigned values providing a shortcut method for entering accounts If you defined such aliases in General Ledger ADI displays these in the Account Alias list of values 1 Select an Account Alias The system inserts the predefined values into the Select Account Segment Values window Enter values for any segments that were not defined in the account alias To make your selections you can use the list of values feature for each segment as discussed above under the task To choose account segment values one segment at a time Getting Started 3 41 Submitting Processes 3 Choose OK to apply your selected account code combination or Cancel to abandon D To clear values from the Select Account Segment Values window 1 Choose the Clear Values button See Also Creating Journal Entries Using ADI on page 5 12 Choosing Values from Lists on page 3 37 Submitting Processes You can submit processes such as importing budgets and journals to Ge
314. le xvii xviii Manufacturing or Oracle Human Resources in your specific hardware and operating system software environment Oracle Applications Upgrade Manual This manual explains how to prepare your Oracle Applications products for an upgrade It also contains information on finishing the upgrade procedure for each product Refer to this manual and the Oracle Applications Installation Manual when you plant to upgrade your products Oracle Applications System Administrator s Guide This manual provides planning and reference information for the Oracle Applications System Administrator It contains information on how to define security customize menus and online help and manage concurrent processing Oracle General Ledger Technical Reference Manual The Oracle General Ledger Technical Reference Manual contains database diagrams and a destailed description of General Ledger and related applications database tables forms reports and programs This information helps you convert data from your existing applications integrate General Ledger with non Oracle applications and write custom reports for General Ledger Oracle Assets Technical Reference Manual The Oracle Assets Technical Reference Manual contains database diagrams and a detailed description of Oracle Assets and related applications database tables forms reports and programs this information helps you convert data from your existing applications integrate Oracle Assets
315. les you to enter a withholding status for each supplier 1099 types A 1099 classification scheme used in the United States for types of payments Each 1099 form has one or more payment types A 1099 supplier may receive payments from more than one type The 1099 MISC form has the following types rents royalties prizes and awards federal income tax withheld fishing boat proceeds medical and health care payments non employee compensation and substitute payments in lieu of dividends or interest Applications Desktop Integrator records 1099 payments by type so that you can report them according to IRS requirements Glossary 1 Glossary 2 2 way matching The process of verifying that purchase order and invoice information matches within accepted tolerance levels Applications Desktop Integrator uses the following criteria to verify two way matching Invoice price lt Order price Quantity billed lt Quantity ordered See also matching 24 hour format A time format that uses a 24 hour clock instead of am and pm so that 3 30 would be 3 30 am 16 15 would be 4 15 pm 19 42 would be 7 42 pm etc 3 way matching The process of verifying that purchase order invoice and receiving information matches within accepted tolerance levels Applications Desktop Integrator uses the following criteria to verify three way matching Invoice price lt Purchase Order price Quantity billed lt Quantity ordered Quantity billed lt Qu
316. levels The number of invoices you have entered during a period is an example of a periodic key indicator alert periodic troubleshooting alert A message Oracle Alert sends after scanning your database to notify you of discrepancies from goals or standards you have set Invoices on hold is an example of a periodic troubleshooting alert phantom assembly An assembly that Oracle Work in Process explodes through when it creates the bill of material for a job or schedule A particular assembly can be a phantom assembly on one bill and a subassembly on another Pick Release An order cycle action to notify warehouse personnel that orders are ready for picking pick release batch See picking batch pick release rule Order Entry A user defined set of criteria to define what order lines should be selected during pick release pick slip A pick slip is a internal shipping document that pickers use to locate items to ship for an order If you use standard pick slips each order will have its own pick slip within each picking batch If you use the consolidated pick slip the pick slip contains all orders released in that picking batch pick to order PTO A configure to order environment where the options and included items in a model appear on pick slips and order pickers gather the options when they ship the order Alternative to manufacturing the parent item on a work order and then shipping it pick to order PTO item A predefined
317. lications ADI is a spreadsheet based extension of Oracle General Ledger and Oracle Assets which offers full cycle accounting and asset management within the comfort and familiarity of a spreadsheet ADI will work with any of the following Oracle databases a Oracle RDBMS version 7 1 6 or higher 7 1 5 for Open VMS ADI will work with any of the following Oracle Applications xiii xiv a Release 10 7 or higher About This Installation Guide This guide is the primary source of information about Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator ADI It contains overview as well as task and reference information organized to facilitate daily reference It also includes a compilation of frequently asked questions This guide includes the following chapters and appendices Chapter 1 Introduction includes a brief introduction to each of ADI s major features Chapter 2 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s includes a comprehensive list of question about ADI that are frequently asked by users Chapter 3 Getting Started describes how to get started with the system sign on to a database and set ADI options Chapter 4 Budget Wizard describes how to use the Budget Wizard to download budgets from General Ledger into a spreadsheet edit the budget amounts then upload the revised budget amounts to General Ledger You can also analyze your budgets and create graphs Chapter 5 Journal Wizard describes how to use the ADI Journal Wizard to cr
318. lications Desktop Integrator Choosing Account Segment Values you select an invalid account one that has not been defined as active in General Ledger The system does not enter your selection on the journal worksheet Select Account Segment Yalues m Account Segment Values Account Alias RET Description D Retail Cost Center Finance Acct Cash Product None Product Line None Sub Account None alls The Select Account Segment Values window includes a table showing a row for each segment of your account code The columns displayed are Segment Value and Description For each segment the Value column has an associated list of values DB To choose account segment values one segment at a time 1 Place your cursor in the segment Value field 2 Type the value or choose the button with the small down arrow image on it The system displays a new List of Values window for this segment of the account code Getting Started 3 39 Choosing Account Segment Values he Se CON List of Values for Company m Choose Value r Eind Value Yalue Description Retail Institutional Insurance Property Investment Finance Acme Industries Pies Optional Reduce the number of entries in the list by entering a reduction value in the Find Value field then choosing the Find button Alternatively enable automatic list reduc
319. lies to these cells 4 14 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Inserting a New Budget Account 2 Choose the General Ledger button from the ADI toolbar and select Apply Budget Rule The Apply Budget Rules window appears indicating the range of cells you selected 3 Choose a budget Rule then enter an Amount 4 Select OK to apply the budget rule or Cancel to abort See Also Changing the Budget Worksheet View on page 4 8 Budget Rules on page 4 16 Inserting a New Budget Account on page 4 15 Adding Budget Notes to a Budget Worksheet on page 4 16 Inserting a New Budget Account You can easily insert a new budget account into a budget worksheet using the Insert Budget Account button on the ADI toolbar BD To insert a new budget account 1 Place the cursor anywhere in the row that is to follow the new budget account row 2 Choose the General Ledger button from the ADI toolbar and select Insert Budget Account The Select Account Segment Values window appears 3 Enter the segment values for the new budget account See Choosing Account Segment Values on page 3 38 4 Choose OK to create the new budget account Note Budget Wizard validates the new account before creating it If the segment values you specify are not a valid account the account is not created in your budget worksheet See Also Updating Budget Balances Using ADI on page 4 13 ADI Toolbar on page 3 3 Budget Wizard 4 15 Budget Rule
320. like or dislike about Applications Desktop Integrator or this installation guide Mail your comments to the following address or call us directly at 650 506 7000 Oracle Applications Documentation Manager Oracle Corporation 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood Shores CA 94065 U S A Or send electronic mail to appsdoc_us oracle com 1 Introduction Applications Desktop Integrator ADI is a spreadsheet based extension to select Oracle Applications that offers full cycle accounting and asset management within the comfort and familiarity of a spreadsheet ADI combines a spreadsheet s ease of use with the power of Oracle Applications to provide true desktop integration during every phase of your accounting cycle You can create budgets record transactions add assets reconcile inventory and run financial statements and inventory reports all without leaving your spreadsheet You can run ADI as a stand alone application without installing the full client version of Oracle General Ledger or Oracle Assets on your personal computer This gives you the ability to confirm and reconcile inventory revise budgets create journal entries and define financial and asset reports from any location without being connected to your server You only need to connect when you want to transfer data to or from Oracle Applications ADI includes the Budget Wizard Journal Wizard Report Wizard and Analysis Wizard to simplify your work with General Ledge
321. logical entry of data and de emphasizes complicated parenthetical arrangements of data import A utility that enables you to bring data from an export file into an Oracle7 table The import utility is part of the Oracle7 Relational Database Management System This utility is used to restore archived data Glossary 71 Glossary 72 import journal entry A journal entry from a non Oracle application such as accounts payable accounts receivable and fixed assets You use Journal Import to import these journal entries from your feeder systems integer data type Any Oracle Financial Analyzer variables with an integer data type containing whole numbers with values between 2 14 billion and 2 14 billion import program A program that imports your bank file from an external system into Applications Desktop Integrator Applications Desktop Integrator is set up to work with SQL Loader as the import program Two sample SQL Loader control files are included with Applications Desktop Integrator to assist you in writing your own custom control file imported invoice An invoice that is imported into Applications Desktop Integrator using the AutoInvoice program An invoice that is imported into Applications Desktop Integrator using the Invoice Import program included item A mandatory standard item in a bill of material that is shippable indicating that it ships whenever an order that includes its parent item is shipped Included items
322. lues based on your budget criteria selections Note If you choose Budgets and Actuals you can update your budget balances and view your actual balances You cannot update actual balances Status ADI calculates and displays statistics about your budget in the Status region The displayed status information includes the number of accounts associated with the selected budget organization and whether the selected budget can be updated Budget Wizard 4 7 Changing the Budget Worksheet View Note If you change your budget criteria and the Update Budget Status option is not checked on the Budget Wizard Options window you must manually refresh your statistics display To do so choose the small button with the question mark located next to the field labelled Number of Accounts See Also Creating Budget Worksheets on page 4 2 Changing the Budget Worksheet View While working on a budget worksheet you can change the information that is displayed in the worksheet For example you can choose to hide or display the context information that normally appears at the top of a budget worksheet This gives you more room to work with your budget numbers You can also hide or display account segment descriptions and you can apply view filters to control which budget worksheet rows appear on your display 4 8 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Changing the Budget Worksheet View Budget DETAIL FY96
323. marks of Oracle Corporation Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners Contents Preface i an eee ee a eee ete et ice ee aie eat xiii 1 Introduction General Ledgetsrissiinhae n na a as ee ia Eiai neS EEEE Niria 1 1 Oracle Assets n aaor ren aree sce alle AE A E ae a eaa A E aa E aE AEA 1 3 Oracle Applicatiois esenee mnnn a wld tetas Seine ye a 1 4 2 Frequently Asked Questions Installation Considerations 0 0ccccccccccccccccscesssccssscsscesscesesescesscsscesessesssececessecesessessseceesseesseaeens 2 1 Functional IssueSaennen anna ea a e aa See a E n ET Ee ee alee ASETA 2 6 Technical Iss s a ennen N T AE E E N NE T E AENOR 2 14 3 Getting Started Getting Started With ADI te E E E ER E N DE i 3 1 SO CULL EY ieee a cretion cit Ea e EEO EE a iaaa aa Ea Ea eA AE Naa a EAE Seraessate nie ehs 3 1 Validation and Segment Security s ssssseesesseeseseestestestsstesiestesteseentestestessnsnenientesensnestentessesneneeete 3 3 ADI Tool Dat iyuna eaa n neon a ive S SiE 3 3 Signing On tO ADI a aa aaae ersi aA ee eE earar aa E aAa E Ena aa aeaa iao EErEE a ER ERENS 3 10 Selecting an Applications Database cccccceseeececssseseesesesessesseesesssseseesesesssssesesesesessseseeess 3 12 Choosing a Responsibility cee cece ee E R aaeoa ia aS S Lara EN ASEE AE 3 15 ADE O ptlOns nenne ora E O E E EL EE EEEa silo ca SE ANTE E N E E TTEA 3 16 Toolbar Optom ssena E o a Es 3 16 General Options npoeiniiis
324. ment 11 GWYUID applsyspub pub FNDNAM apps Connect String faino NCA Connection e Server ID E To select an applications database from a list 1 From the Signon window choose the Define Databases button lfs 2 Select the applications database name from the Current Database poplist 3 Choose OK to confirm your selection or Cancel to return to the Signon window Getting Started 3 13 Selecting an Applications Database Edit Database Details Database Details x Name Vision Description Vision GWYUID applsyspub pub FNDNAM apps ts Connect String vision NCA Connection ooo Server ID Oooo ilis To edit the specification for a database in the list 1 2 3 Select the applications database name from the Current Database poplist Choose the Edit button The Edit Database Details window appears Modify the values in the window as needed Choose OK to retain your changes or Cancel to discard them Add Database Details Database Details Name PO Description fr O O GwuID sis FNDNAM is Connect String fr O O NCA Connection Doo O O Server ID Doo O ixis To add a new database to the list 1 2 Choose the Add button Complete the fields in the Add Database Details window 3 14 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Choosing a Responsibility See Also 3 Choose OK to save your new instance or Cancel to discard
325. merge A program that merges business purposes and all transactions associated to that business purpose for different sites of the same customer or for unrelated customers customer number The number a supplier assigns to your organization customer number A number assigned to your customers to uniquely identify them A customer number can be assigned manually or automatically depending on how you set up your system customer phone A phone number that is associated with a customer You can also assign phone numbers to your customer contacts customer profile A method used to categorize your customers based on credit information Oracle Receivables uses credit profiles to assign statement cycles dunning letter cycles salespersons and collectors to your customers You can also decide whether you want to charge your customers interest Oracle Order Entry uses the order and total order limits when performing credit checking customer profile class A category for your customers based on credit information payment terms currency limits and correspondence types customer relationship An association that exists between customers which lets you apply payments to related customers apply invoices to related customer s commitments and create invoices for related customers customer response Explanations comments or claims that customers make during conversation with a collector regarding the call reason customer site
326. minary budget which may be changed without affecting revenue accrual on a project Glossary 49 Glossary 50 draft invoice A potential project invoice that is created adjusted and stored in Oracle Projects Draft invoices require approval before they are officially accounted for in other Oracle Applications draft revenue A project revenue transaction that is created adjusted and stored in Oracle Projects You can adjust draft revenue before you transfer it to other Oracle Applications drilldown A software feature that allows you to view the details of an item in the current window via a window in a different application due from A liability account you use to record noncurrent portions of a long term debt owed by one fund to another fund within the same reporting entity due to An asset account you use to record the noncurrent portion of a long term loan from one fund to another fund within the same reporting entity dunning letter set A group of dunning letters that you can assign to your customer s credit profile dunning letters A letter that you send to customers to inform them of past due debit items Oracle Receivables lets you specify the text and format of each letter and whether to include unapplied and on account payments duplicate An exception that Oracle Alert has previously sent to the same distribution list You can choose to suppress duplicates completely for detail messages or to identify
327. mitted from Oracle General Ledger the Output Option on the Define Financial Report window in Oracle General Ledger must be set to Spreadsheet 2 Choose the Publish Output button from the Request Center toolbar 3 From the Apply Themes poplist select the report theme you want to use for the published report Note If you republish a financial report the Request Center applies the last theme you used to your republished financial report output You can choose a different theme from the Apply Themes poplist 4 Select the Output Type for your report 5 Complete the appropriate publishing options for the Output Type you selected in the previous step 6 Choose OK to publish the report or Cancel to abandon 12 20 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Setting Report Publishing Options Attribute Sets Request Center Messages Lx esse Sie ra Request ID 194744 completed successfully Description Output published to Excel ip Click on the Message to see its description The Request Center Messages window appears informing you your report has been published Use attribute sets to arrange information for Oracle General Ledger Accounts Receivable and Asset reports using the Standard Variable Format report type You can access attribute sets by choosing the report type Standard Variable Format and choosing the Publishing button in the Report Submission and Publishing
328. mouse button 3 Choose Delete Object gt Line Item from the menu See Also Report Wizard Interface on page 6 5 Reports Toolbar on page 6 2 Report Wizard Tools on page 6 5 Creating a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 12 Saving a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 17 The Request Center on page 12 1 Overview of the Financial Statement Generator Oracle General Ledger User s Guide Adding and Deleting Columns Using Report Wizard You can add and delete columns in a report worksheet using the Reports Toolbar the menu options or the right mouse button options Note When you add a new column to a report worksheet Report Wizard automatically sets the Display Zero property to No DB To add columns to a report worksheet 1 Place your cursor in the column that precedes the new column From the Reports Toolbar 1 Choose the Insert Delete Column Object button 2 Select Insert Column then choose OK 6 20 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Changing Row Properties Using Report Wizard Using menu options 1 Select Insert gt Insert Report Object gt Column from the main menu Alternatively select ReportWizard gt Insert Object gt Column from the main menu Using the right mouse button 1 Select the right mouse button 2 Choose Insert Object gt Column from the menu DB To delete columns from a report worksheet 1 Place your cursor in the column to be deleted From the Reports To
329. n Enter the Name of the content set to which you want to add the hierarchy Select Add as the Action you want to take Specify the segment and related parent value for the new hierarchy Enter your hierarchy attributes then choose Next Enter your hierarchy filtering options Choose Finish The Report Wizard displays a graphical representation of the hierarchy you just created in your content set definition D To replace an existing content set 1 m e O N See Also Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Define Report from the list of values Select Generate Content Set then choose the Next button Enter the Name of the content set you want to replace Select Replace as the Action you want to take Complete the content set definition as described above under the task To create a new content set Hierarchy Attributes on page 6 31 Hierarchy Filtering Options on page 6 34 6 30 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Hierarchy Attributes Hierarchy Attributes G i Report Wizard Step3GenerateContentSet OZO Z OZO O Wizard Step 3 Generate Content Set i Report Wizard Step3GenerateContentSet OZO Z OZO O Next specify the attributes which define your content set Parent Yalue fas F Children Sort By Branch O Level Display Type ReporyTotal gt Run Reports Sequentially In Parallel Help Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish For each hierarc
330. n exchange gain or loss due to fluctuating exchange rates between currencies cross site and cross customer receipts Receipts that you apply across customers and sites and are fully applied Each of these receipts appears on the statements of the customer site that owns the receipt The invoice s to which you have applied a cross receipt appear on the statement of the customer or site that owns the invoice credit receiver A person receiving credit for project or task revenue One project or task may have many credit receivers for one or many credit types credit type An implementation defined classification of the credit received by a person for revenue a project earns Typical credit types include Quota Credit and Marketing Credit cross rate An exchange rate you use to convert one foreign currency amount to another foreign currency amount In Applications Desktop Integrator you use a cross rate to convert your invoice currency to your payment currency Cross Project responsibility A responsibility that permits users to view and update any project cross project user A user who is logged into Oracle Projects using a Cross Project responsibility Glossary 39 Glossary 40 cross validation rules Rules that define valid combinations of segment values a user can enter in an account Cross validation rules restrict users from entering invalid combinations of account segment values Rules that define valid combinations of segmen
331. n you submit a request in Oracle Applications that does not require your interaction such as releasing shipments or running a report the Concurrent Manager does the work for you enabling you to complete multiple tasks simultaneously concurrent process A non interactive task that you request Oracle Applications to complete Each time you submit a non interactive task you create a new concurrent process A concurrent process runs simultaneously with other concurrent processes and other interactive activities on your computer to help you complete multiple tasks at once concurrent processing Allows a single processor to switch back and forth between different programs concurrent queue A list of concurrent requests awaiting completion by a concurrent manager Each concurrent manager has a queue of requests waiting to be run If your system administrator sets up your Oracle Application to have simultaneous queuing your request can wait to run in more than one queue concurrent request A request to Oracle Applications to complete a non interactive task for you You issue a request whenever you submit a non interactive task such as releasing a shipment posting a journal entry or running a report Once you submit a request Oracle Applications automatically takes over for you completing your request without further involvement from you or interruption of your work Glossary 33 Glossary 34 configuration A group of order li
332. n 1 5 1 6 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator 2 Frequently Asked Questions This list of Frequently Asked Questions FAQ about Applications Desktop Integrator is organized into three major sections a Installation Considerations on page 2 1 a Functional Issues on page 2 6 a Technical Issues on page 2 14 The answers are presented in the sections that follow Installation Considerations How can install Applications Desktop Integrator for use with older versions of Oracle General Ledger 32 bit ADI works with all currently certified versions of Oracle General Ledger including Release 10SC You do not need to take any special action Question What versions of ADI are compatible with Oracle General Ledger and Oracle Assets Table 2 1 Oracle ore Applications Applications Desktop Integrator Release Release GL Oracle General Ledger A Oracle Assets 3 0 3 2 4 0 4 1 5 0 6 0 7 0 1li GL A 11 0 GL GL A GL A GL A GL A GL A Frequently Asked Questions 2 1 Installation Considerations Table 2 1 Oracle inati Applications Applications Desktop Integrator Release Release GL Oracle General Ledger A Oracle Assets 10SC Prod 16 1 GL GL GL GL A GL A GL A GL A 10 7 NCA GL GL GL GL A GL A GL A_ GL A 10 7 Character GL GL GL GL A GL A GL A GL A Mode Question Do I need a full client installation of Oracle General Ledger 10SC to use Applications Desktop Integrator No you do not need a full clie
333. n General Ledger uses the information to create a journal entry batch for each set of books and accounting period You can name your journal entry batches the way you want for easy identification Glossary 81 Glossary 82 in your general ledger Applications Desktop Integrator attaches the journal entry category date and time of transfer to your batch name so that each name is unique If you choose not to enter your own batch name when you transfer posting information Applications Desktop Integrator uses the journal entry category date and time of transfer journal entry category A category used to indicate the purpose or nature of your journal entry General Ledger associates each of your journal entry headers with a journal entry category Journal entry categories specify what kind of transaction the journal entry represents A category used to indicate the purpose or nature of your journal entry General Ledger associates each of your journal entry headers with a journal entry category There are three journal entry categories in Applications Desktop Integrator if you use the accrual basis accounting method Invoices Payments and All both Invoices and Payments If you use the cash basis accounting method Applications Desktop Integrator only assigns the Payment journal entry category to your journal entries A category in which Applications Desktop Integrator describes the purpose or type of journal entry Standard journal entry categ
334. n editing a layout template you must ensure you include all required fields in the template Otherwise ADI will not be able to create your physical inventory worksheet Required fields are indicated by a red asterisk There are several fields that are conditionally required Asset Number Tag Number and Serial Number You must include at least one of these fields in your template If one is included the other two fields are optional Conditionally required fields are marked with a green asterisk 10 6 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Entering Data in Your Physical Inventory Worksheet 1 Directional Buttons Use the directional buttons to change the display sequence of fields in the header or body of your physical inventory worksheet First select the field whose sequence will change Then choose one of the four directional buttons The field description will move immediately 1 Drag and Drop To move fields from the Available Fields region to the Header or Lines region or to move fields between the Header and Lines regions use your left mouse button to drag and drop fields to the proper location m Right Mouse Button You can also access directional functions by clicking the right mouse button to move fields to different regions or within the same region Create Worksheet in D New Workbook Select this option to create your physical inventory worksheet as anew Excel workbook I Current Workbook Select
335. n inventory You control inventory for inventory items by quantity and value Typically the inventory item remains an asset until you consume it You recognize the cost of an inventory item as an expense when you consume it or sell it You generally value the inventory for an item by multiplying the item standard cost by the quantity on hand See also item Glossary 75 Glossary 76 investment tax credit ITC A United Sates tax credit that is based on asset cost invoice A document that you create in Oracle Receivables that lists amounts owed for the purchases of goods or services This document also lists any tax freight charges and payment terms A document you receive from a supplier that lists amounts owed to the supplier for purchased goods or services In Oracle Payables you create an invoice online using the information your supplier provides on the document Payments inquiries adjustments and any other transactions relating to a supplier s invoice are based upon the invoice information you enter A summarized list of charges including payment terms invoice item information and other information that is sent to a customer for payment invoice batch A group of invoices you enter together to ensure accurate invoice entry Invoices within the same batch share the same batch source and batch name Receivables displays any differences between the control and actual counts and amounts An invoice batch can contain invoices in dif
336. n item and then reversing any transactions against this item that occurred after the As Of Date You must enter the beginning GL Date of your GL Date range to determine your beginning balance You must enter the ending GL Date of your GL Date range to determine the ending balance When the process completes you should verify the amounts on the reports US Sales and Use tax Levied on the end consumer prior stages of supply are exempt by certificate awarded by the state of the recipient Government and other organizations are Glossary 161 Glossary 162 exempt by statue Many taxes may apply to a single transaction including state County City Transit and Muni tax Monthly returns to each state are required only if the operating company is registered for business within that state Monthly reporting of Sales and Use tax can be on an accrual or cash basis user profile A set of changeable options that affect the way your applications run You can change the value of a user profile option at any time See profile option value Data you enter in a parameter A value can be a date a name or a code depending on the parameter value set A group of values and related attributes you assign to an account segment or to a descriptive flexfield segment Values in each value set have the same maximum length validation type alphanumeric option and so on value added tax VAT A tax on the supply of goods and services paid for by
337. n page 12 1 6 18 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Adding and Deleting Rows Using Report Wizard Adding and Deleting Rows Using Report Wizard You can add and delete rows in a report worksheet using the Reports Toolbar the menu options or the right mouse button options Note When you add a new row to a report worksheet Report Wizard automatically sets the Display Zero property to No DB To add rows to a report worksheet 1 Place your cursor in the row that precedes the new row From the Reports Toolbar Choose the Insert Delete Row Object button Select Insert Line Item then choose OK Using menu options Select Insert gt Insert Report Object gt Line Item from the main menu Alternatively select ReportWizard gt Insert Object gt Line Item from the main menu Using the right mouse button Select the right mouse button Choose Insert Object gt Line Item from the menu D To delete rows from a report worksheet 1 Place your cursor in the row to be deleted From the Reports Toolbar Choose the Insert Delete Row Object button Select Delete Line Item then choose OK Report Wizard 6 19 Adding and Deleting Columns Using Report Wizard Using menu options 1 Select Edit gt Delete Report Object gt Line Item from the main menu Alternatively select ReportWizard gt Delete Object gt Line Item from the main menu Using the right mouse button 2 Select the right
338. n the Apply Theme poplist Current Workbook The report is published to the currently active Excel workbook You can choose Add Output To create the report as a new worksheet Replace Output To overwrite an existing worksheet Apply Formatting Leave this check box blank if you want your report to use the same theme as the report you are replacing Check this box if you want to apply the theme specified in the Apply Theme poplist If you want to create a worksheet with no formatting choose the nocolor xls theme from the Apply Theme poplist Request Center 12 27 Setting Report Publishing Options How Will a Report Output Worksheet be Formatted Standard Reports Standard Variable Reports First report output worksheet in the workbook Newest report output worksheet in the workbook Ifthe specified theme contains a formatted report output worksheet Ifthe specified theme is missing or does not contain a report output worksheet Ifthe specified theme contains a formatted report output worksheet Ifthe specified theme is missing or does not contain a report output worksheet New Workbook Spreadsheet Option Current Workbook Add Output Current Workbook Replace Output Output 1 r IX Apply Formatting f Current Workbook Replace Output Output 1 I Apply Formatting Applies background formatting and uses logo from specified report theme No background formatti
339. n the information required by your organization s specific implementation of Oracle Assets You can enter your asset data manually use the list of values and take advantage of Excel s data entry shortcuts You can also map data files from legacy systems or third party payables applications into the asset worksheet When you are satisfied with the worksheet the Create Assets feature automatically uploads the data into Oracle Assets With the Create Assets feature you can 1 Create and customize asset worksheets D Use the powerful spreadsheet features of Excel 1 Save an asset worksheet to a file which can then be transferred to another PC for further changes even while disconnected from your Oracle Assets database Prerequisites 1 Complete Oracle Assets setup steps Creating Asset Worksheets on page 9 2 Asset Worksheet Parameters on page 9 3 Uploading Asset Data into Oracle Assets on page 9 8 Asset Wizard 9 1 Creating Asset Worksheets Asset Upload Options on page 9 11 Choosing Values from Lists on page 3 37 Choosing Account Segment Values on page 3 38 Creating Asset Worksheets Bc x Build a personalized spreadsheet to enter assets by selecting a Depreciation Book and a Layout Select Corporate Depreciation Book US CORP he Select Layout Default IZ Create Worksheet in New Workbook Current Workbook DB To create an asset worksheet 1 Choose the Assets button from the ADI
340. n where ADI s web based help files are installed 3 Select the Help Language Select Use default to have your help files displayed in U S English To use any other language select Specific then select the language from the poplist 4 Chose OK to save your work Note A profile option governing the location of help files can be set in Oracle Applications If you signon to a database where this profile option is enabled the location of ADI help files is automatically determined for you You cannot change the location of help system files See your system administrator for additional information See Also ADI Options on page 3 16 General Ledger Options on page 3 23 Language Options on page 3 32 Installing Client Software Applications Desktop Integrator Installation Guide Displaying Signon Information From the ADI toolbar you can choose to display information about your signon details You can display functional information such as the set of books name associated with your current responsibility or technical information such as the language code you are using for ADI 3 34 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Displaying Signon Information Signon Information Functional Technical r Set of Books Details Name USOPS Functional Currency USD Calendar Standard Period Type Month Dynamic Insertion No Client Validation Flextield Structure LEI EW ae Cost Center gt SEGMENT2 Ac
341. n you define your set of books When you create encumbrances automatically in Oracle Purchasing or Applications Desktop Integrator General Ledger automatically creates a balancing entry to your Reserve for Encumbrance account as you post your encumbrance journal entries General Ledger overwrites the balancing segment for your Reserve for Encumbrance account so you automatically create the reserve for encumbrance journal entry to the correct fund responsibility A level of authority in an application Each responsibility lets you access a specific set of Oracle Applications windows menus reports and data to fulfill your role in an organization Several users can share the same responsibility and a single user can have multiple responsibilities A level of authority within Applications Desktop Integrator Each responsibility provides a user with access to a menu and a set of books You can assign one or more responsibilities to each user Responsibilities let you control security in Applications Desktop Integrator responsibility report A financial statement containing information organized by management responsibility For example a responsibility report for a cost center contains information for that specific cost center a responsibility report for a division manager contains information for all organizational units within that division and so on A manager typically receives reports for the organizational unit s such as cost center d
342. nal worksheet For multiple entry journal worksheets the Header tab is disabled and its title changes to No Header because the header information appears in the journal lines you can change their settings on the Lines tab Note If you check the box labelled Database Columns located at the bottom of the Define Worksheet Layout window the information in the required and optional fields will change You can see the GL_INTERFACE column names rather than the descriptions of what those columns represent The column names display option is provided for technical users of General Ledger Under most circumstances leave this box unchecked 5 8 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Customizing Journal Worksheets You can customize the following header items 1 Required Fields Headers for functional actual and foreign actual journals always display the journal Category Source Currency and Accounting Date Budget journal headers also include Budget name but do not include Accounting Date Encumbrance journal headers also include the Encumbrance Type You cannot change which required fields appear in your journal header but you can rearrange their sequence See the section Moving Fields below D Optional Fields You can include additional fields in your journal worksheet Optional fields include Group ID Batch Name Batch Description Journal Name Journal Description Journal Reference Reverse Journal Rev
343. nals for a non average daily balance set of books must balance by accounting date or upload to General Ledger will fail A red frowning face with the message Journal entries are not balanced appears in the message box of your journal worksheet T GLDI Converted Entry Threshold When this profile option is enabled the difference between converted debit and credit entry amounts must be less than or equal to a specific amount The difference is posted to the largest journal entry line amount When the difference exceeds the threshold amount journal upload will fail A red frowning face with the message Converted journal imbalance exceeds allowed threshold appears in the message box of your journal worksheet Creating Journal Worksheets on page 5 2 Uploading Journal Entries from ADI to General Ledger on page 5 17 Choosing Account Segment Values on page 3 38 Choosing Values from Lists on page 3 37 Uploading Journal Entries from ADI to General Ledger After creating journal entries in a journal worksheet you must upload them to Oracle General Ledger for posting Uploading is a two step process First you must upload your journal entries to the interface table Second you must import the journal entries from the interface table to General Ledger Figure 5 lillustrates this process Journal Wizard 5 17 Uploading Journal Entries from ADI to General Ledger Additional Information If you specify a Reversal Period but leave
344. nd choose the Actions button Choose the Rename option from the poplist Enter the new name of the layout template Choose OK D To delete an existing layout template 1 From the Record Physical Inventory window choose the layout template you want to delete Choose the Actions button Select the Delete option from the poplist Choose Yes to confirm that you want to delete the layout template Record Physical Inventory 10 5 Physical Inventory Worksheet Parameters D To view an existing layout template 1 From the Record Physical Inventory window select a layout to view and choose the Actions button Choose the View Edit option from the poplist Choose Cancel when you are finished viewing the layout template Actions Button Options D New Choose this option to create a new layout template D View Edit Choose this option to view or edit an existing layout template Note When you choose this option when the default template is selected you have the option only to view the default template You cannot edit the default template D Copy Choose this option to copy an existing layout template D Rename Choose this option to rename an existing layout template Note You cannot rename the default template 1 Delete Choose this option to delete an existing layout template Note You cannot delete the default template Editing Layout Templates 1 Required Fields Whe
345. neral Ledger You can post mass additions and compare physical inventory to Oracle Assets General Ledger To submit a process for General Ledger you must make selections in the Select Process Type window Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Submit Process from the list of values to open the window Process Type Region a Choose Budget Import or Journal Import to import amounts to General Ledger from General Ledger Interface tables Note You generally use this feature to complete an upload and import process that was requested previously but which specified the Do Not Start option for the Budget or Journal Import process Choose Delete Journal to delete journal import data from the GL Interface table a Choose the Query button to see the budgets or journal sources available for import Parameters Region 3 42 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Submitting Processes The information displayed in the parameters region depends on whether you query budget or journal import in the Process Type region You can view budgets or journal sources available for import Select Process Type Process Type Budget Import Journal Import Delete Journal Import Data Parameters Hils Organization CORPORATE 1997 Operations To submit a budget import process 1 Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Submit Process from the list of value
346. nes that correspond to a customer s selection of a base model and associated options Configurations can either be shipped as individual pieces as a Set kit or as an assemble configuration item See also assemble to order model configuration item model pick to order model configuration item The item that corresponds to a base model and a specific list of options chosen by the customer Oracle Bills of Material creates a new configuration item each time a customer orders an ATO model A PTO model appears as a list of items on the pick slip for the picker to gather for shipment See also assemble to order model configuration pick to order model configurator The Enter Configuration Options form that allows you to choose options that are available for a particular model thus defining a particular configuration for the model configure to order An environment where you enter customer orders by choosing a base model and then selecting options from a list of choices consolidation A General Ledger feature that allows you to combine the results of multiple companies even if they are in different sets of books with different currencies calendars and charts of account The Consolidated Billing Invoice program lets you print a single monthly invoice that includes all of your customer s transactions for the period This lets you send one consolidated billing invoice instead of a separate invoice for each transaction consoli
347. ng applied Uses logo from Theme Defaults tab of ADI options only if the logo is in BMP format Applies background formatting and uses logo from specified report theme No background formatting applied Uses logo from Theme Defaults tab of ADI options only if the logo is in BMP format Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable FSG or Ad Hoc Reports E SS Se Se eee Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable First report output worksheet in the workbook Newest report output worksheet in the workbook Ifthe specified theme contains a formatted report output worksheet Ifthe specified theme is missing or does not contain a report output worksheet Ifthe specified theme contains a formatted report output worksheet Ifthe specified theme is missing or does not contain a report output worksheet Applies formatting from specified report theme Applies default formatting specified on the Theme Defaults tab of ADI options 12 28 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Applies formatting from specified report theme Applies default formatting specified on the Theme Defaults tab of ADI options Setting Report Publishing Options Text Options See Also Set the following options if you choose Text as your Output Type when publishing a report Report Submission and Publishing r Report Type C Standard Fixed Format Publish Report gt lt
348. ng Started 3 9 Signing On to ADI Applications Desktop Integrator Budget Wizard on page 4 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Journal Wizard on page 5 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard on page 6 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Analysis Wizard on page 7 1 The Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 1 Create Assets Feature on page 9 1 Record Physical Inventory Feature on page 10 1 Import Text File Feature on page 11 1 The Request Center on page 12 1 Signing On to ADI To use Oracle Applications you need an Oracle Applications sign on which consists of a unique username and password These are different from the username and password you use to sign on to your computer If you are not sure of your Oracle Applications sign on consult your system administrator Oracle Applications security is based on your sign on since this connects you to your responsibilities which control your access to applications functions reports and data Prerequisite 1 You must define at least one database before you can successfully sign on to Oracle Applications 3 10 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Signing On to ADI Signon r Signon Details Username Controller Password Database General Ledger Use Last Responsibility x lls er Ex To sign on to ADI 1 2 Start ADI and choose the Signon button from the toolbar From the Database poplist select the applications da
349. ng and inspection A condition of a returned inventory item signifying it has been received but is being inspected for damage If in acceptable condi tion the items are transferred to stock and a credit can be issued If unac ceptable the items can be returned to the customer or scrapped recipient A person to whom Oracle Alert sends a message The recipient may receive a message through electronic mail or via a printer reciprocal customer relationship An equal relationship shared between two customers Both customers can enter invoices against each others commitments as well as pay each others debit items An equal relationship shared between two customers Both customers can share agreements enter invoices against each others commitments as well as pay each others debit items reconciliation An analysis that explains the difference between two balances If you are using Cash Management to reconcile receipts payments are reconciled when they are matched to a bank statement line The process of matching and clearing your bank account statement lines with payments and receipts entered in Payables and Receivables A reconciled document has been matched to a bank statement line in Cash Management Applications Desktop Integrator inserts a cleared date and amount for all payments that your bank reports as cleared Glossary 125 Glossary 126 reconciliation The process of matching bank statement lines to appropriate batches and detai
350. ng window 2 Inthe Submission Tab choose the Standard Report radio button 3 From the poplist choose the RXi report you want to publish 4 Formatting and publishing options will automatically be assigned by the Request Center You can choose the Publishing and Options buttons to review how formatting and publishing options were applied in Oracle Applications These options cannot be changed 5 Choose OK to submit your RXi report The Request Center will monitor the submission and publication of your RXi report See Also Oracle Financials RXi Report Administration Tool User s Guide Setting Report Publishing Options You can publish your report output to web pages a spreadsheet a text file or into a database You can also choose to have the report automatically published after your request completes processing Report requests listed on the Request Center s Completed or Hotlist tabs can be manually published DB To publish report output automatically 1 When you are submitting the report from the Report Submission and Publishing window check the Publish Report check box See Submitting Reports on page 12 8 12 18 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Setting Report Publishing Options Note If you do not check the Publish Report check box the Publishing button is not available and you must publish the report output manually see next task Check the Prompt check box to have the system ask you be
351. nkage expenditures Activities that represent payments repayments or receipts for goods or services provided For some governments expenditures include anticipated expenses such as encumbrances in addition to activity that directly leads to an outlay of cash such as an invoice In Oracle Public Sector Financials the term expenditures includes actual expenses and accrued liabilities Expenditures do not include anticipated expenses such as encumbrances expense report A document that details expenses incurred by an employee for the purpose of reimbursement You can enter expense reports online in Payables or Web Employees or you can import them from Projects expense report A document that for purposes of reimbursement details expenses incurred by an employee You can set up expense report templates to match the format of your expense reports to speed data entry You must create invoices from Payables expense reports using Invoice Import before you can pay the expense reports expensed asset An asset that you do not depreciate but charge the entire cost in a single period Oracle Assets does not depreciate an expensed asset or create any journal entries for it You can however use Oracle Assets to track expensed assets The Asset Type for these assets is Expensed Glossary 57 Glossary 58 expensed item Items that do NOT depreciate the entire cost is charged in a single period to an expense account Applicat
352. nks belong in different payment sources Your name for a source from which your company receives cash Your receipt sources determine the accounting for payments that are associated with them Receipts that you deposit in different banks belong in different payment sources receipts Payment received in exchange for goods or services These include applied and unapplied receipts entered within the GL date range that you specified If the receipt is applied within the GL date range that you specified it will appear in the Applied Receipts register otherwise it will appear in the Unapplied Receipt Register See also cross site and cross customer receipts cross currency receipt receivable activities Predefined Oracle Receivables activities used to define the general ledger accounts with which you associate your receivables activities receivables activity name A name that you use to refer to a receivables activity You use receivables activities during the setup process to create accounting distributions for cash and miscellaneous receipt payments receivables adjustments discounts receivables accounts and finance charges received quantity The quantity of an inventory item returned by a customer for which you are not issuing a credit Sometimes this is temporary while you evaluate the condition of the item other times you return the items to the customer or keep them but do not allow a credit See also accepted quantity receivi
353. ns Note To select colors choose either the text or background color box Alternatively choose the text or background area in the report output sample shown in the Wizard Options window When the Select Color window appears select a color then choose OK 1 Logo You can specify an image file to be displayed on your report output Specify the path and filename for the image or choose the Find button to browse your directory structure for the file you want Once you select your image set these options a Include Border Surround the image with a narrow Border a Include Shadow Display the image with a drop down Shadow a Align Select Left to display the image on the left side of your report output or Right to display the image on the right side a Width Select Title to have the image display to the left or right of your report title Select Heading to have the image display to the left or right of your report heading a Banner Use for DB Publishing Enable the checkbox to include a banner in your reports published to the database and displayed by Report Manager As you make your selections ADI updates the sample image on the right side of the window x General Options Worksheet Colors Theme Defaults Settings Installation Parameters Start ADI when Opening Workbook Start Request Center at Signon Show Upload Success Indicator Zero Pad Account Values kilis Enable Hot K
354. ns we suggest you use null ranges for detail account ranges rather than using ranges that include T for parent segment values This generally makes Analysis Wizard drilldown operations more efficient 4 Choose the Apply button to see your changes reflected in the report worksheet Within the report worksheet 1 Place your cursor in the row whose account assignments you want to change 2 If the row s properties are not currently visible choose ReportWizard gt Show Attributes gt Line Item from the main menu You can also select the right mouse button then choose Show Attributes gt Line Item from the menu 3 Enter the new account assignments directly into the related cells of the report worksheet See Also Report Wizard Interface on page 6 5 Reports Toolbar on page 6 2 Report Wizard Tools on page 6 5 Creating a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 12 6 24 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Changing Column Properties Using Report Wizard Saving a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 17 Changing Column Properties Using Report Wizard You can change the properties assigned to a column by using the Reports Toolbar or by making changes directly in the report worksheet You can also create column calculations Note You can use Excel functions to align your column headings and Report Wizard will adjust your column set properties accordingly DB To change column properties From the Reports T
355. nsure that the Concurrent Report Copies profile option is set to 1 or greater Question What should do if get the message Data source name not found and no default driver specified when Applications Desktop Integrator is building a budget worksheet You should make sure that the database names you have defined in Applications Desktop Integrator do not include special characters such as commas dollar signs pound signs etc We recommend that you restrict the characters used in your database names to spaces the characters A through Z and the numbers 0 through 9 Question Why doesn t ADI s context sensitive online help work properly with Internet Explorer If ADI s web based online help has been installed locally on your PC context sensitive online help will not work with Internet Explorer This is caused by a problem in Internet Explorer that prevents it from recognizing properly formatted URL references when those references are to web pages stored on a local drive You can resolve this problem by installing your ADI help files on a central web server within your organization and accessing online help from there Note that this 2 16 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Technical Issues solution will also save a lot of disk space on the individual PCs within your organization since ADI s online help files do not have to be installed on each PC Question When I m using ADI with Excel 97 why does Excel continually ask if
356. nt Value The segment value must comply with the security rules you defined for the value set associated with the segment The Account Hierarchy Editor validates the value when you close the Child Attributes window Optionally enter a Description and specify a range of Effective Dates If you are creating a new child value for the natural account segment specify an Account Type Mark the Enable check box if you want to use this segment value for example in the Enter Journals window in General Ledger Additional Information If you create a new child segment value you cannot delete it You can however disable the segment value at any time by unmarking the Enable check box on the Child Attributes window Mark the appropriate check boxes if you want to Allow Posting and Allow Budgeting for this segment value Choose OK to close the Child Attributes window Save your work DB To change the attributes for a child segment value 1 2 Choose the child node whose attributes you want to change Make any changes in the Child Attributes window then save your work Note If you edit a child node that appears more than once in a hierarchy the Account Hierarchy Editor changes all occurrences of that node to keep the attributes consistent Account Hierarchy Editor 8 25 Duplicating Parent Hierarchies See Also Warning When you upload segment value attribute changes to General Ledger yo
357. nt installation of Oracle General Ledger on your PC Applications Desktop Integrator interacts with GL s open interface tables GL_ INTERFACE using Journal Import and GL_LBUDGET_INTERFACE using Budget Upload These interface tables have remained constant since the initial character mode version of Release 10 This means that you can run Applications Desktop Integrator even if you are not running 10SC Question What Releases of Oracle General Ledger can use with ADI General Ledger Release 10 7 If you use Oracle General Ledger Release 10 7 NCA you can continue to use Applications Desktop Integrator in its client server configuration Note however that Applications Desktop Integrator is not a web enabled product like General Ledger NCA Rather each product provides its own separate user interface to a web enabled Oracle Applications database The middle application server tier introduced by the General Ledger NCA Java client has no effect on Applications Desktop Integrator s ability to access the Oracle Applications database General Ledger Release 11 0 ADI Release 3 2 was the first release to provide support for Oracle General Ledger Release 11 General Ledger Release 11i ADI Release 7 0 is the first release to provide support for Oracle General Ledger Release11i Question What Releases of Oracle Assets can use with ADI Oracle Assets Release 10 7 ADI Release 4 1 was the first release to provide support for Oracle Assets Rel
358. ntestenensnenteneesnnsnenteneeneent 8 7 Expanding and Collapsing Hierarchy Diagrams sssssssssssissessessiesisstesenssesisseessesneseeneeenees 8 8 Displaying Multiple Hierarchy Diagrams ss sssssessssessesssesissessessensiesiestesensnesteniestnsnnnteneesnese 8 9 Displaying Segment Value Details pssssssssiisisniienssieniishs ia 8 9 The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu sssssssssssessessesssesiesessssssesteseessnneeninstesennnesiesiesennsenteseenee 8 10 File Memi soiit iniedi iire E e eA EEEE A dete AE ENNA AREKEA AEREO AERAN ASSE debbbethe 8 10 Bdit Menu oa a reaa EE A ETELE D a a ea E A ats itt EAEE AS 8 11 View MEDU so e iiio E AA AEREE NEA EEE EE E E EE ES 8 12 Window Metitle s Acc0 5 astas iad A E R N oath eatin S 8 13 The Account Hierarchy Editor Toolbar 0 0 0ccc cece cece eeecececseeneeececeseeensneseseseseneseseseenes 8 14 Finding Segment Values siena an e inane Ea aA sasis 8 15 Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor 8 17 Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor 0 00 8 21 Mersing RANGES sisi 508 ce cedsostanenidascicesshaveutsotailopeseonainnSysseonstsssteveusstadoncdenedslseatansebansenaey endsbaed oo 8 23 Adding or Changing Child Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor 0 0 00 8 24 Duplicating Parent Hierarchies ccccccscccssssesesescsesesesesescscsesesescscsesesesescscsssesesescsesesnseeceees 8 26 Rep
359. nth or display information by supplier number instead of supplier name Most standard reports in Applications Desktop Integrator that you can submit manually have a set of report parameters report security group A feature that helps your system administrator control your access to reports and programs Your system administrator defines a report security group which consists of a group of reports and or programs and assigns a report security group to each responsibility that has access to run reports using Standard Report Submission When you submit reports using Standard Report Submission you can only choose from those reports and programs in the report security group assigned to your responsibility report set A group of reports that you submit at the same time to run as one transaction A report set allows you to submit the same set of reports regularly without having to specify each report individually For example you can define a report set that prints all of your regular month end management reports reporting currency The currency you use for financial reporting If your reporting currency is not the same as your functional currency you can use foreign currency translation to restate your account balances in your reporting currency reporting entity The oversight unit and all related component units that combine to form a governmental reporting entity reporting hierarchies Summary relationships within an account segment
360. nting invoicing and payments terms to an agreement You can assign discounts to agreements that are automatically applied You can refer to an agreement when you enter an order for a particular customer and have relevant default values automatically fill in the order using standard value rule sets See also customer family agreement generic agreement agreement type A classification for agreements Reference agreement types in defining discounts or automatic note rules classify your agreements to control selection of agreements during order entry as well as for reporting purposes Order Entry QuickCode An implementation defined classification of agreements Typical agreement types include purchase order and service agreement alert An entity you define that checks your database for a specific condition and sends or prints messages based on the information found in your database alert input A parameter that determines the exact definition of the alert condition You can set the input to different values depending upon when and to whom you are sending the alert For example an alert testing for users to change their passwords uses the number of days between password changes as an input Oracle Alert does not require inputs when you define an alert alert output A value that changes based on the outcome at the time Oracle Alert checks the alert condition Oracle Alert uses outputs in the message sent to the alert recipient althoug
361. ntity of an item is available on a certain date when transacted against a particular charge entity Once reserved the product cannot be allocated to another sales order or transferred in Inventory Oracle Order Entry checks ATR Available to Reserve to verify an attempted reservation Also known as hard reservation See also Available to Reserve Reserve for Encumbrance A portion of fund balance you use to record anticipated expenditures In Oracle Financials you define your Reserve for Encumbrance account when you define your set of books Oracle Financials uses your Reserve for Encumbrance account to create offsets for unbalanced encumbrance entries you create in Oracle Purchasing Oracle Payables and General Ledger Reserve for Encumbrance account The account you use to record your encumbrance liability You define a Reserve for Encumbrance account when you define your set of books When you create encumbrances automatically in Oracle Purchasing or Applications Desktop Integrator General Ledger automatically creates a balancing entry to your Reserve for Encumbrance account as you post your encumbrance journal entries General Ledger overwrites the balancing segment for your Reserve for Encumbrance account so you automatically create the reserve for encumbrance journal entry to the correct company Reserve for Encumbrance account The account you use to record your encumbrance liability You define a Reserve for Encumbrance account whe
362. nvoice that has a posting hold because all holds prevent payment pre commitment See commitment pre encumbrance See commitment pre lien See commitment predefined serial number An alphanumeric prefix and a beginning number for your serial numbers before you assign them to items Predefined serial numbers are validated during receiving and shipping transactions premium cost See overtime cost prepayment A payment you make to a supplier in anticipation of his provision of goods or services A prepayment may also be an advance you pay to an employee for anticipated expenses In Oracle Payables a prepayment is a type of invoice that you can apply to an outstanding invoice or employee expense report to reduce the amount of the Glossary 111 Glossary 112 invoice or expense report You must approve the prepayment and fully pay the prepayment before you can apply the prepayment prerequisite A combination of a specific order cycle action and an associated result that must occur before an order progresses to its next action in an order cycle See also cycle action order cycle passing result price adjustment The difference between the list price of an item and its actual selling price Price adjustments can have a positive or negative impact on the list price Price adjustments that lower the list price are also commonly known as discounts Price adjustments can be for an order line or the entire order pri
363. o Choosing Values from Lists on page 3 37 Choosing Account Segment Values on page 3 38 Importing Data into Your Worksheet You can import data from legacy systems or third party payables applications to your asset worksheet Once you have created a data file map using the Import Text File feature you can save it and apply it to future conversion Notes 1 For many of the fields on an asset worksheet you can select from a list of values See Choosing Values from Lists on page 3 37 D Choosing the View Context button will display or hide the asset worksheet context information at the top of the worksheet Context information includes Corporate Book and Database T Choosing the View Header button will display or hide the asset worksheet header information located just below the context information D ADI will automatically place a flag character in the Upload column for every asset entry When you start the asset upload process you can choose to process all rows or only the rows that are marked for upload Asset Wizard 9 7 Uploading Asset Data into Oracle Assets Note If you copy and paste an asset entry ADI does not place a flag character in the Upload column for your new asset entry You can manually enter one by placing your cursor in the upload column cell where you want the flag character then typing any character or number from your keyboard See Also Creating Asset Worksheets on page
364. o Applications Desktop Integrator For example with the spreadsheet interface you can upload budget information from your spreadsheet to Applications Desktop Integrator The process by which Oracle Assets loads budget information from the Budget Interface table into the Budget worksheet You can use the Budget Upload process to transfer budget information from a feeder system such as a spreadsheet to Oracle Assets Glossary 23 Glossary 24 budget worksheet Oracle Assets holds your budget in the budget worksheet so that you can review and change it before you load it into your budget book Your budget must be ina budget book before you can run depreciation projections or reports budgetary account An account segment value such as 6110 that is assigned one of the two budgetary account types You use budgetary accounts to record the movement of funds through the budget process from appropriation to expended appropriation Budgetary Account An account that contains a budgetary account budgetary account type Either of the two account types Budgetary DR and Budgetary CR budgetary control An Oracle Financials feature you use to control actual and anticipated expenditures against a budget When budgetary control is enabled you can check funds online for transactions and you can reserve funds for transactions by creating encumbrances Oracle Financials automatically calculates funds available budget less encumbrances less actual
365. o allocate depreciation expense and to produce your Property Tax and Responsibility Reports distribution list A distribution list is a set of mail names to whom Oracle Alert sends a message when it finds an exception condition An alert can have many distribution lists and each distribution list can have its own set of input variables to increase your control over who gets messages about what For example to send a message about furniture to Joe Smith and about telecommunications equipment to Sally Jones you can define two distribution lists and enter the appropriate item class as an input variable to each list distribution rule See revenue distribution rule distribution set A predefined group of general ledger accounting codes that determine the debit accounts for other receipt payments Receivables lets you relate distribution sets to receivables activities to speed data entry A Payables feature you use to assign a name to a predefined expense distribution or combination of distributions by percentage Payables displays on a list of values the list of Distributions Sets you define With Distribution Sets you can enter routine invoices into Payables without having to enter accounting information distribution total The total amount of the distribution lines of an invoice The distribution total must equal the invoice amount before you can pay or post an invoice document category A document category is used to split transa
366. o see your changes reflected in the report worksheet Within the report worksheet 1 Place your cursor in the row whose properties you want to change 2 If the row s properties are not currently visible choose ReportWizard gt Show Attributes gt Line Item from the main menu You can also select the right mouse button then choose Show Attributes gt Line Item from the menu 3 Place your cursor in the active cell of the row property whose value you want to change 4 Enter anew value DB To change row calculations 1 From the Reports Toolbar choose the Row Properties button Select Calculations then choose OK Alternatively you can choose the Calcs button from the Row Properties window The Row Calculations window appears 6 22 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Adding and Deleting Row Account Assignments Using Report Wizard Note You can resize this window as needed You can also resize the columns displayed within the window by selecting the column separators and moving them to the left or right 2 From the poplist select the row whose calculations you want to change 3 Change the calculation information as needed Suggestion Many of the fields in the Row Calculations window have poplists where you can select from a list of values 4 Choose the Apply button to see your changes reflected in the report worksheet See Also Report Wizard Interface on page 6 5 Reports T
367. o use as the minimum width for each of your budget worksheet value columns 3 24 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator General Ledger Options a Update Budget Status Check this box to have the system automatically update the budget status information on the Create Budget Worksheet window anytime you make changes to your budget worksheet parameters 1 Graph Region Define default options for displaying graphs when you choose the Create Graph button from the ADI toolbar a Style From the poplist you can choose Area Bar Column Line and Pie charts The default is Column a 2D or 3D To display two dimensional or three dimensional graphs The default is 3D a Generate Axes Check the box to include these values as labels on the axes of your graphs a Include Budgets and Actuals Check the box to instruct ADI to graph both your budget and actual values for Excel workbooks where you ve elected to include both budget and actual amounts Ledger Options Budget Journal Report Definition Report Analysis Format Apply Format to Font Arial ri d 2 Size fo H x Goblins C Italic Bold Layout Default Number of Rows fo Minimum Width of Value Columns fe B Header Field Name Width 5 Context Width 3 E Gb Gb Field Value Width 3 Journal Tab Choose general format settings for journal and asset worksheets You can change defaults for Forma
368. o view an FSG report and I get a Reports window to format my report In Production 15 we modified the FSG engine to add a method for Request Center to determine how to segment the output since the different output regions Report Heading Column Headings Line Items and Amounts can have different formats When running against Production 14 this feature is not available Therefore before the output is automatically loaded into Excel a Request Center window pops up with a sample of the actual output and prompts you to position a few pointers to mark the region boundaries This window is similar to Excel s Text Import feature but significantly easier to use one step with drag and drop Also Request Center uses default positioning that will work with most reports Question If require Budget Journals can use Applications Desktop Integrator Yes you can use the Journal Wizard which performs uploads through the journal API and creates journals You cannot use the Budget Wizard since it uploads through the budget API which does not create journals So create budgets in a standard budget worksheet then cut and paste the amounts into a journal worksheet for uploading Question After downloading a budget can insert rows with new code combinations for upload Yes ADI includes a Budget Wizard feature you can use to insert new budget accounts Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar then select Insert Budget Account Note that the
369. ociated with the hierarchy is ignored here Filter Balances Choose None to report all balances for the accounts in this hierarchy when you use the content set Choose Detail Only to report only detail balances Choose Summary Only to report only summary balances Reports Toolbar on page 6 2 Report Wizard Tools on page 6 5 Creating a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 12 Saving a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 17 6 34 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Hierarchy Filtering Options Generating Content Sets on page 6 28 Hierarchy Attributes on page 6 31 Hierarchy Filtering Options on page 6 34 The Request Center on page 12 1 The Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 1 Overview of the Finanical Statement Generator Oracle General Ledger User s Guide Report Wizard 6 35 Hierarchy Filtering Options 6 36 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator T Analysis Wizard Applications Desktop Integrator Analysis Wizard See Also The Applications Desktop Integrator Analysis Wizard combines multidimensional analysis with report drilldown completely within Excel You can select amounts from spreadsheet based FSG reports and drill into the underlying financial information within Oracle Applications Analysis Wizard provides access to the complete range of accounts that support a particular reported amount You can select an individual account and drill into its summary balances detail balances journal lines and
370. of costing revenue accrual and invoicing Oracle Projects applies the burden multipliers to the raw cost amount of an expenditure item to derive an amount this amount may be the total cost revenue amount or bill amount You can override burden schedules by entering negotiated rates at the project and task level See also Firm Schedule Provisional Schedule Burden Schedule Revision Burden Schedule Overrides burden schedule override A schedule of negotiated burden multipliers for projects and tasks that overrides the schedule you defined during implementation burden schedule revision A revision of a set of burden multipliers A schedule can be made of many revisions burden structure A burden structure determines how cost bases are grouped and what types of burden costs are applied to the cost bases A burden structure defines relationships between cost bases and burden cost codes and between cost bases and expenditure types burdened cost The cost of an expenditure item including raw cost and burden costs business entity A person place or thing that is tracked by your business For example a business entity can be an account a customer or a part business group The highest level of organization and the largest grouping of employees across which a company can report A business group can correspond to an entire Glossary 25 Glossary 26 company or to a specific division within the company Each installation of Or
371. of the AutoCash Rules that the Post QuickCash program will use when automatically applying receipts to a customer s open items You can choose to include discounts finance charges and items in dispute when calculating your customer s open balance AutoClear Formerly an Oracle Payables feature this was replaced by Oracle Cash Management features in Release 10SC AutoReconciliation An Oracle Cash Management feature that allows you to reconcile bank statements automatically This process automatically reconciles bank statement details with the appropriate batch journal entry or transaction based on user defined system parameters and setup Oracle Cash Management generates all necessary accounting entries See also reconciliation tolerance available transactions Receivables and payables transactions that are available to be reconciled by Cash Management AutoCopy budget organizations A feature that automatically creates a new budget organization by copying account assignments from an existing budget organization AutoCopy budgets A feature that automatically creates a new budget by copying all of the data from an existing budget Budget AutoCopy copies budget amounts only from open budget years Autolnvoice A program that imports invoices credit memos and on account credits from other systems to Oracle Receivables AutoLockbox See lockbox automatic event An event with an event type classification of Autom
372. of your report theme select the cell for the row you wish to format Enter the name of the line item you wish to use as a format definition For example if your financial report definition contains a line item Net Income type Net Income in the selected cell Use Excel s formatting capabilities to format a cell or range of cells in that row The Request Center will use the theme to format information in the Net Income row of your report definition Request Center 12 45 Customizing Themes for Financial Reports See Also Note The Request Center runs a series of processes to format your financial reports 1 The Request Center first looks for line item names in your report theme and your report definition If the search finds matching line item names for example Net Income then formatting for Net Income in the report theme is assigned to the designated row in your report output If your report definition has more rows than specified in your report theme the Request Center formats those extra rows based on the criteria below High level formatting for themes is based on region styles Your spreadsheet contains report title report heading column heading line item and amounts regions ADI provides default styles for these regions If all other format choices listed above are exhausted the Request Center uses default styles to format your report output The first cell in any column in the amounts region determin
373. oicing rule that records the receivable at the end of the revenue recognition schedule for invoices that span more than one accounting period See also invoicing rules bill in advance Bill of Exchange A method of payment Also known as a future dated payment in some countries including France See also Future Date Payment An agreement made with your customer in which they promise to pay a specified amount on a specific date called the maturity date for goods or services This process involves the transfer of funds from your customer s bank account to your bank account BOE A method of payment involving the transfer of funds between bank accounts where one party promises to pay another a specified amount on a specified date Bill of Lading A carrier s contract and receipt of goods transported from one location to another bill of material BOM A listing of all the subassemblies intermediates parts and raw materials that go into a parent assembly or product configuration It shows the quantity of each part required to make an assembly You may think of a bill of material as a recipe or formula for a configuration Oracle Order Entry uses a bill of material format to define configurations See also configuration model bill rate A rate per unit at which an item accrues revenue and or is invoiced for time and material projects Employees jobs expenditure types and non labor resources can have bill rates bill rate schedule
374. oks 2 gt Up to 10 ranges can be selected Select All None Cancel D To select an effective account range in subsequent drilldowns 1 2 From the Context window choose the View Filter button For each effective account range you want included in your drilldowns check the Include check box Otherwise leave the check box unmarked You must select at least one effective account range You cannot select more ranges than Analysis Wizard 7 5 Drilling Down to Summary and Detail Accounts See Also that specified in the message Up to ranges can be selected toward the bottom of the Effective Ranges window 3 Choose OK to save your work Drilling Down to Summary and Detail Accounts on page 7 6 Analysis Wizard Toolbar on page 7 10 Setting Analysis Wizard Options on page 7 11 Analysis Wizard Drilldown Flows on page 7 13 Applications Desktop Integrator Budget Wizard on page 4 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Journal Wizard on page 5 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard on page 6 1 ADI Options on page 3 16 The Request Center on page 12 1 Drilling Down to Summary and Detail Accounts From the Context window you can drill down to the summary and detail accounts and balances From detail accounts you can drill down further to view journal details Within any drilldown window you can pivot and filter the displayed information for analysis purposes Summary Balances Net
375. olbar 1 Choose the Insert Delete Column Object button 2 Select Delete Column then choose OK Using menu options 1 Select Edit gt Delete Report Object gt Column from the main menu Alternatively select ReportWizard gt Delete Object gt Column from the main menu Using the right mouse button 1 Select the right mouse button 2 Choose Delete Object gt Column from the menu Changing Row Properties Using Report Wizard You can change the properties assigned to a row by using the Reports Toolbar or by making changes directly in the report worksheet You can also create row calculations Report Wizard 6 21 Changing Row Properties Using Report Wizard DB To change row properties From the Reports Toolbar 1 Choose the Row Properties button Select Properties then choose OK The Row Properties window appears Note You can resize this window as needed You can also resize the columns displayed within the window by selecting the column separator and moving it to the left or right 2 From the poplist select the row whose properties you want to change 3 Locate the specific property to change then place your cursor in the right column of the property row 4 Enter anew value for the property Alternatively you can select a value if a poplist is displayed 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each specific property you want to change 6 Choose the Apply button from the Row Properties window t
376. olumn Calculations window appears Note You can resize this window as needed You can also resize the columns displayed within the window by selecting the column separators and moving them to the left or right 2 From the poplist select the column whose calculations you want to change 3 Change the calculation information as needed Suggestion Many of the fields in the Column Calculations window have poplists where you can select from a list of values 4 Choose the Apply button to see your changes reflected in the report worksheet See Also Report Wizard Interface on page 6 5 Reports Toolbar on page 6 2 Report Wizard Tools on page 6 5 Creating a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 12 Saving a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 17 6 26 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Adding and Deleting Column Account Assignments Using Report Wizard Adding and Deleting Column Account Assignments Using Report Wizard See Also You can add or delete column account assignments by using the Reports Toolbar To change account assignments for a column 1 Choose the Column Properties button from the Reports Toolbar Select Account Assignments then choose OK Alternatively you can choose the Accts button from the Column Properties window The Column Account Assignments window appears Note You can resize this window as needed You can also resize the columns displayed within the win
377. om the ADI toolbar Hide Windows When Navigating Mark this check box to close the active drill window when you drill up to the previous or down to the next drill window Getting Started 3 29 Request Center Options See Also Only one drill window will be open at any one time If you do not choose this option all drill windows remain open as you drill up and down to other drill windows a Maximum Active Drills Enter a number for the maximum number of drill context windows you can have active at one time Note Each open drill window consumes system resources If you have too many drill windows open at the same time it can overtax your system Use the Maximum Active Drills option to prevent accidentally overloading your PC ADI Options on page 3 16 Applications Desktop Integrator Budget Wizard on page 4 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Journal Wizard on page 5 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard on page 6 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Analysis Wizard on page 7 1 The Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 1 Request Center Options You can set various Request Center options by choosing the Options button from the ADI toolbar and selecting Request Center from the list of values You can also select the Options button from the Request Center toolbar From the Options window you can set limits sounds and the default output viewer You can also define default print settings and change the language opt
378. om ADI 5 17 upload options 5 21 V values choosing from lists 3 37 W wizard options setting 3 23 worksheet parameters Create Assets 9 3 Record Physical Inventory feature 10 3 Index 5 Index 6
379. on Guide Use Request Center to publish a financial FSG report s output to an Excel spreadsheet Suggestion When you define your FSG report rows and columns use null ranges for detail account ranges rather than using ranges that include T for parent segment values This generally makes Analysis Wizard drilldown operations more efficient When you define your FSG report rows and columns use null ranges for detail account ranges rather than using ranges that include T for parent segment values This generally makes Analysis Wizard drilldown operations more efficient Starting Analysis Wizard D To start Analysis Wizard 1 2 Select a specific financial amount from one of your report output worksheets Choose the General Ledger button from the ADI toolbar and select Analyze Report from the List of Values The Analysis Wizard window appears This window includes the Analysis Wizard toolbar and Context window Analysis Wizard 7 3 Applications Desktop Integrator Analysis Wizard Analysis Wizard oll Drill 1 47 322 566 00 FS vx A Context Attributes Amount 47 322 566 00 Amount Includes Detail balances only Period Mar 97 F Currency luso Functional Amount Type Sl Effective Ranges E View Filter lt Show Summary Accounts show Detail Accounts gt Show Detail Accounts gt Detail Accounts gt Reference The Conte
380. on is only available to system administrators Further Limit By sNothing All requests that meet your Request Status and Request Owner selections appear in the list Program Name Select this option then specify a program name to limit the requests that appear in the list to only those with the same program name Request ID Select this option then specify a request ID to limit the requests that appear in the list to only those with the same request ID Attention To query FSG reports choose Program Name from the Further Limit By poplist In the second poplist choose Financial Statement Generator The query results present you with a list of FSG report names 4 Choose the Query button to have the Request Center retrieve a list of requests that meet the selection criteria you specified above You can limit this list to the most recent number of requests you specified on the Options window by checking the Return Last Requests check box 5 Select a request from the list Request Center 12 53 Monitoring Requests 6 Choose Add to add the request The Request Center places the request on either the Pending or Completed tab depending on the status 7 Repeat the above steps to add multiple requests 8 Choose Close when you are finished adding requests Note When a monitored request has completed its entry is automatically moved from the Pending tab to the Completed tab of the Request Center win
381. ons 2 5 Functional Issues ADI Online Help for Release 11i will be provided as a documentation patch Contact Oracle Support Services and refer to bug 1348841 for more information See Also Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Installation Guide Functional Issues Question Where can find documentation for Applications Desktop Integrator Applications Desktop Integrator documentation is available from the following sources a On line help Choose the Help button from anywhere within Applications Desktop Integrator The publications Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Tutorial and Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator User s Guide These documents can be downloaded at http docs oracle com They may also be ordered through Oracle Documentation Sales a The publication Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Installation Guide explains how to install ADI This document can be downloaded at http docs oracle com Question What Releases of Excel does ADI support Support for Excel 7 Office 95 became available with ADI Release 1 0 Support for Excel 97 Office 97 became available with ADI Release 2 1 Support for Excel 2000 became available with ADI Release 6 0 Question How does Applications Desktop Integrator relate to Oracle Financial Analyzer The Applications Desktop Integrator Budget Wizard provides a spreadsheet based budget entry screen that facilitates simple data entry and modeling ina disconnected
382. onsibilities Program can also mean an agency s mission programs functions activities services projects and processes You can define a segment of your Accounting Flexfield to capture program information when you implement Oracle Public Sector Financials project A unit of work that can be broken down into one or more tasks A project is the unit of work for which you specify revenue and billing methods invoice formats a managing organization and project manager and bill rate schedules You can charge costs to a project and you can generate and maintain revenue invoice unbilled receivable and unearned revenue information for a project Glossary 115 Glossary 116 Project Accounting Period An implementation defined period against which project performance may be measured Also referred to as PA Periods You define project accounting periods to track project accounting data on a periodic basis by assigning a start date end date and closing status to each period Typically you define project accounting periods on a weekly basis and your general ledger periods on a monthly basis Project Burdening Organization Hierarchy The organization hierarchy version that Oracle Projects uses to compile burden schedules Each business group must designate one and only one version of an organization hierarchy as its Project Burdening Organization Hierarchy Note In Oracle Projects Implementation Options each operating unit is associated
383. oolbar 1 Choose the Column Properties button Select Properties then choose OK The Column Properties window appears Note You can resize this window as needed You can also resize the columns displayed within the window by selecting the column separator and moving it to the left or right From the poplist select the column whose properties you want to change Locate the specific property to change then place your cursor in the right column of the property row Enter a new value for the property Alternatively you can select a value if a poplist is displayed Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each specific property you want to change Choose the Apply button from the Column Properties window to see your changes reflected in the report worksheet Within the report worksheet Report Wizard 6 25 Changing Column Properties Using Report Wizard 1 If the column properties are not currently visible choose Report Wizard gt Show Attributes gt Column from the Excel menu You can also select the right mouse button then choose Show Attributes gt Column from the menu 2 Place your cursor in the active cell of the column property whose value you want to change 3 Enter a new value DB To change column calculations 1 Choose the Column Properties button from the Reports Toolbar Select Calculations then choose OK Alternatively you can choose the Calcs button from the Column Properties window The C
384. oolbar on page 6 2 Report Wizard Tools on page 6 5 Creating a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 12 The Request Center on page 12 1 Adding and Deleting Row Account Assignments Using Report Wizard You can add or delete row account assignments directly in the report worksheet or by using the Reports Toolbar BD To change account assignments for a row From the Reports Toolbar 1 Choose the Row Properties button Select Account Assignments then choose OK Alternatively you can choose the Accts button from the Row Properties window The Row Account Assignments window appears Report Wizard 6 23 Adding and Deleting Row Account Assignments Using Report Wizard Note You can resize this window as needed You can also resize the columns displayed within the window by selecting the column separators and moving them to the left or right 2 From the poplist select the row whose account assignment information you want to change 3 Change the account assignment information as needed Suggestions a Many of the fields in the Row Account Assignments window have poplists where you can select from a list of values To easily change the actual account range choose an existing account assignment from the Low Account or High Account columns The Select Account Segment Ranges window appears where you can select values for your account range Ifyou plan to use the Analysis Wizard to perform account drilldow
385. oose the Actions button and select Delete 12 22 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Setting Report Publishing Options 2 Name your attribute set in the window that appears following your selection New New Attribute Set window Copy Copy Attribute Set window Rename Rename Attribute Set window ss Attribute Set MEE Attribute Set taite Public AEE a e Drag and drop from the list of available attributes into the Cost Selected Attributes grid to create your own Attribute Set Cost Center i Date Placed In Service XF Apply sorting and grouping characteristics to individual attributes Description within the Selected Attributes grid Expense Acct Life Yr Mo X Move columns within the Selected Attributes grid to specify the Method order in which they should appear in the report XJ Use Group by to break on repeating values within your report Le ee x elel gt Selected Attributes j i CIP Cost Acct Adjusted Rate Asset Cost Acct Asset Number Capacity Company Value 1 Value 1 Value 1 Value 1 Value 1 Value 1 Value 2 Value 2 Value 2 Value 2 Value 2 Value 2 Value 3 Value 3 Value 3 Value 3 Value 3 Value 3 Value 4 Value 4 Value 4 Value 4 Value 4 Value 4 Value 5 Value 5 Value 5 Value 5 Value 5 Value 5 lum i a Help Cancel 3 Drag and drop from the list of Available Attributes to the Selected Attributes grid to create your own attribute set OR
386. op Level Parent field defining a replacement criteria with In Parent Level set to 1 has no effect The poplist displays the levels of your original hierarchy as numbers with 1 being the topmost level Since the segment value for level 1 of your duplicate hierarchy is determined by the value you enter in the New Top Level Parent field defining a replacement criteria with In Parent Level set to 1 has no effect 2 Choose the Add button to move your replacement criteria to the Replacement Order list Replacement Order List As you define replacement criteria a new line appears in the Replacement Order list each time you press the Add button on the Duplicate Hierarchy window You can add as many replacement criteria to the list as you want When you choose the Preview button Account Hierachy Editor applies your replacement criteria in the order they appear in the Replacement Order list The order of your replacement criteria is important You must replace higher level parent segment values before you replace any lower level parent segment values Account Hierarchy Editor 8 33 Modifying Segment Value Descriptions See Also Account Hierarchy Editor warns you if you try to replace lower level parent segment values first From the Replacement Order list you can perform the following operations a Reorder Select a number in the Order column then drag drop it to anew order position The associated replacement criteria moves to
387. or example if the worksheet is named Budget1 the graph is named Chart1A A second graph for the same budget worksheet is named Chart1B and so on There is a limit of 26 graphs for any one budget worksheet DB To change the appearance of your graph a Modify the default settings for graphs then create the graph again or Consult the Excel user s guide and online Help for further information about Excel s chart formatting functions D To delete a graph 1 With the graph displayed on your screen select Edit gt Delete Sheet from the Excel menu 2 Choose OK to delete the graph or Cancel to keep it 4 18 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Uploading Budgets from ADI to General Ledger See Also Budget Worksheet Parameters on page 4 6 Uploading Budgets from ADI to General Ledger After entering or modifying budget balances in a worksheet you must upload the amounts to General Ledger for posting You can choose to replace or increment the existing General Ledger budget balances Uploading budgets is a two step process First you must upload your worksheet budget balances to the interface table Second you must import the balances from the interface table to General Ledger illustrates this process Caution If any user defined information such as your budget or budget organization includes an apostrophe in the name you cannot upload budget changes to General Ledger To upload successfully rename any
388. ories include accruals payments and vouchers journal entry header A method used to group journal entries by currency and journal entry category within a journal entry batch When you initiate the transfer of invoices or payments to your general ledger for posting Applications Desktop Integrator transfers the necessary information to create journal entry headers for the information you transfer Journal Import in General Ledger uses the information to create a journal entry header for each currency and journal entry category in a journal entry batch A journal entry batch can have multiple journal entry headers journal entry lines Each journal entry header contains one or more journal entry lines The lines are the actual journal entries that your general ledger posts to update account balances The number and type of lines in a journal entry header depend on the volume of transactions frequency of transfer from Applications Desktop Integrator and your method of summarizing journal entries from Applications Desktop Integrator journal entry source An indicator of which feeder system your journal entries come from such as Applications Desktop Integrator General Ledger associates each of your journal entries with one journal entry source This allows you to group related journal entry transactions for reporting and analysis in your general ledger The source by which Applications Desktop Integrator identifies and differentiates the ori
389. ormation Oracle Financials products use Oracle8 tables to store the information you need to run your business order cycle An order cycle is a sequence of actions you or Oracle Order Entry perform on an order to complete the order An order cycle lets you define the activity an order follows from initial entry through closing You can define as many order cycles as your business requires Order cycles are assigned to order types See also action result order cycle action See cycle action order date The date upon which an order for goods or services is entered order scheduling See scheduling order type A classification of an order In Oracle Order Entry order type controls order cycle order numbering source point in the cycle to credit check transaction type standard value rule set and navigation preference set of an order Orderlmport An Oracle Order Entry open interface that allows you to import your transaction information from an original system into Applications Desktop Integrator See also feeder program organization A business unit such as a plant warehouse division department and so on Oracle Order Entry refers to organizations as warehouses on all Order Entry windows and reports A business unit such as a company division or department Organization can refer to a complete company or to divisions within a company Typically you define an organization or a similar term as part of your account when y
390. ort Select a report for which you want to change publishing options Place your cursor in the Publishing Options column on the same row as your report Double click or choose the Publishing P button The Select Publishing Options for lt your report name gt window appears Change the publishing options for your report and choose OK Change the publishing options for any other reports in your set Choose OK to update your template with the new changes To create a new template enter a new template name in the Publishing Template field before you choose OK Your publishing options are saved You are returned to the Request Center You can submit any RXi Report defined in Oracle Applications from the Request Center The Request Center will monitor the submission and publication of your report Formatting attributes and publishing parameters are defined in Oracle Request Center 12 17 Setting Report Publishing Options Applications and applied to your report In addition security rules defined in Oracle Applications are extended to users submitting RXi reports from the Request Center Standard Request Center formatting and publishing options such as report themes and output types cannot be applied to RXi reports from the Request Center Prerequisites Create RXi reports in Oracle Applications with applied attribute sets and publishing parameters DB To submit an RXi report 1 Navigate to the Report Submission and Publishi
391. osts to determine the premium cost for overtime or other factors labor cost rate The hourly raw cost rate for an employee This cost rate does not include overhead or premium costs labor invoice burden schedule A burden schedule used to derive invoice amounts for labor items labor multiplier A multiplier that is assigned to a project or task and is used to calculate the revenue and or bill amount for labor items by applying the multiplier to the raw cost of the labor items labor revenue burden schedule A burden schedule used to derive revenue amounts for labor items legal entity An organization that represents a legal company for which you prepare fiscal or tax reports You assign tax identifiers and other relevant information to this entity lamp A one word message that Oracle Applications displays in the message line of any window to notify you that a particular feature is available for a particular field A single word message that appears on the message line to indicate whether a function such as lt Insert gt or lt List gt is available for the current field Glossary 85 Glossary 86 leasehold improvement An improvement to leased property or leasehold Leasehold improvements are normally amortized over the service life or the life of the lease whichever is shorter lien See commitment obligation life based depreciation method A depreciation method that spreads out the depreciation for an asset over a
392. oth parents and children in your report the cost center segment values will appear in the following order on your detail report Table 6 2 Sort by Branch Sort by Level 999 All cost centers 999 All cost centers 100 Northern cost centers 100 Northern cost centers 110 Region 110 200 Southern cost centers 120 Region 120 300 Eastern cost centers 130 Region 130 400 Western cost centers 200 Southern cost centers 110 Region 110 210 Region 210 120 Region 120 6 32 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Table 6 2 Sort by Branch Sort by Level 220 Region 220 230 Region 230 240 Region 240 300 Eastern cost centers 310 Region 310 320 Region 320 330 Region 330 340 Region 340 350 Region 350 400 Western cost centers 410 Region 410 420 Region 420 430 Region 430 440 Region 440 130 Region 130 210 Region 210 220 Region 220 230 Region 230 240 Region 240 310 Region 310 320 Region 320 330 Region 330 340 Region 340 350 Region 350 410 Region 410 420 Region 420 430 Region 430 440 Region 440 Hierarchy Attributes Display Type Enter the content set display type This display type applies to all of the rows that Report Wizard generates in the content set definition for the parent segment specified in your hierarchy See Content Set Display Types Oracle General Ledger User s Guide See Content Set Display Typest conset disp
393. ou implement Oracle Financials See also business group A government or public sector entity or sub entity Organization can refer to an entire agency or to divisions within an agency For example an agency might be composed of several bureaus each of which has several departments Each department is an organization as is each bureau and the agency itself A state university system is an organization as is each campus within the university system and each department within each campus Typically you define organization or a similar term as part of your Accounting Flexfield when you implement Oracle Public Sector Financials Internal organizations are divisions groups cost centers or other organizational units in a company External organizations can include the contractors your company employs Organizations can be used to demonstrate ownership or management of functions such as projects and tasks non labor resources and bill rate schedules See also Item Validation Organization organization hierarchy An organizational hierarchy illustrates the relationships between your organizations A hierarchy determines which organizations are subordinate to Glossary 99 Glossary 100 other organizations The topmost organization of an organization hierarchy is generally the business group organization structure See organization hierarchy original budget The budget amounts for a project at the first successful baselining of the projec
394. ou save your hierarchy to the database make sure you complete step 8 a Cancel Cancels your hierarchy duplication process and closes the Duplicate Hierarchy window 8 When you are done creating your duplicate hierarchy save your changes to the database To do this choose the Save button from the Account Hierarchy toolbar or choose File gt Save from the menu Suggestion Refresh the Account Hierarchy Editor after you save hierarchies to the database To refresh choose a different segment in the Segment Field then choose Yes when asked Do you want to save your changes To continue working select the segment you want to work with from the Segment Field poplist Refresh the Account Hierarchy Editor after you save hierarchies to the database To refresh choose a different segment in the Segment Field then choose Yes when asked Do you want to save your changes To continue working select the segment you want to work with from the Segment Field poplist Replacing Parent Segment Values When you duplicate a hierarchy you can choose to replace the lower level parent segment values in the existing hierarchy with new values to be used in the duplicate hierarchy You can a Replace all lower level parent segment values a Modify parent segment values for specific lower levels of the hierarchy following an order that you define 8 30 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Replacing Parent Segment Values No
395. ound File for Request Completion on page 12 7 Performance Test Scenarios for Journal Wizard Upload on page A 1 Enabling Security within ADI Applications Desktop Integrator Installation Guide General Ledger Options Enter options for Budget Wizard Journal Wizard Report Wizard and Analysis Wizard such as decimal places fonts color selections graph styles and various defaults Getting Started 3 23 General Ledger Options Ledger Options Budget Journal Report Definition Report Analysis Format Decimal Places Minimum Width of Value Columns 12 Update Budget Status Style Area Column 3D ial Line Pils Graph Generate Axes Include Budgets and Actuals D To set any of the options discussed in this section 1 Choose the Options button from the ADI toolbar 2 Choose Ledger Options from the list of values The Ledger Options window appears 3 Set your Budget Journal Report Definition and Report Analysis options 4 Choose OK to save your work Budget Tab Choose defaults for budget formatting and graphing 1 Format Region Define default options for formatting budget worksheets Decimal Places The number of decimal places up to five the system displays for all values in your worksheet The default is Database which draws the decimal places option from your General Ledger database a Minimum Width of Value Columns The Excel column width t
396. ounting Flex Segment Account ba 0 xl 2 ADB Accounting Flex Account 2 od 1699 Asset Clearing El 1110 mon 1700 Total Other Assets 1120 2000 2100 gt 2110 1710 Prepaid Expenses 1130 1 1720 Other Investments 1730 Other Assets 1140 1740 Proceeds of Sale Clearing 1150 0 1800 Total Intercompany Due Fro 1810 Due from First National Ban 1820 Due from Second National E 1830 Due from Third National Bai 1840 Due from Fourth National B 1850 Due from Fifth National Ban 1890 Intercompany Other Total Liabilities 2100 Total Demand Deposits 2110 Demand Deposits 2120 Accrued Interest Payable 2200 Total Savings Accounts 2210 Time Deposits 2220 Accrued Interest Payable 1 2300 Total Fed Funds Liabilities 2310 Fed Funds Sold 2400 Total Accounts Payable 2410 Accounts Payable 2420 Official Checks Outstanding 2430 Federal Taxes Payable 2440 State Taxes Payable STK fo fo lolol Tel le lol fo loli ole le tote TT T TT 2450 Deferred Income Taxes Pay 2460 Cost of Removal Clearing 2ann Total Accrued Fynences 2800 fF The Account Hierarchy Editor displays your account hierarchies graphically in one or more scrolling Hierarchy Diagram windows From a Hierarchy Diagram window you can build modify and view account hierarchies You build hierarchies by selecting values from the Segment Values window d
397. ountries include Austria Belgium France Finland Germany Ireland Italy Luxemburg the Netherlands Portugal and Spain The official abbreviation for the euro is EUR This abbreviation is used for all commercial business and financial purposes and has been registered with the International Standards Organization ISO event A summary level transaction assigned to a project or top task that records work completed and generates revenue and or billing activity but is not directly related to any expenditure items For example unlike labor costs or other billable expenses a bonus your business receives for completing a project ahead of schedule is not attributable to any expenditure item and would be entered as an event event alert An alert that runs when a specific event that you define occurs For example you can define an event alert to immediately send a message to the buyer if an item is rejected on inspection An alert that runs when a specific event occurs that you define For example you can define an event alert to send a message to the Accounts Payable Supervisor when an Accounts Payable Clerk enters an invoice that exceeds your maximum invoice amount for that supplier event type An implementation defined classification of events that determines the revenue and invoice effect of an event Typical event types include Milestones Scheduled Payments and Write Offs exception A single occurrence of an event returned by
398. our form the View Menu Hide Attributes Reverses the actions of Show Attributes Insert Object Inserts a new Line Item Line Account Assignment Column or Column Heading Row Delete Object Deletes the selected Line Item Line Account Assignment Column or Column Heading Row Move Column Left Moves the currently selected column one column to the left Move Column Right Moves the currently selected column one column to the right Report Wizard 6 7 Report Wizard Tools Summary Report Layout See description under View Menu above Detail Report Layout See description under View Menu above Save Report to Database Saves the current report to General Ledger Refresh Report from Database Refreshes the currently displayed report worksheet Pending changes are discarded Right Mouse Button Options When you use the right mouse button while the cursor is resting anywhere within a report worksheet the system displays a subset of the Report Wizard menu described above The Save and Refresh Report options are not available Displayable Windows You can define or modify reports and report objects from any of the many displayable windows that appear when you select certain options from the Reports Toolbar For example when you select the Column Properties button Report Wizard displays the Column Properties window where you can define your report columns You can display the Row Properties Report Object Propertie
399. our of a component you can assign four reference designators to that component one for each usage reference document type The kind of source used to provide default information on a return such as a sales order purchase order entered on a sales order or an invoice See also reference source reference field A field from which you can obtain the default context field value for your context prompt The reference field you use for a particular descriptive flexfield is always located in the zone or form that contains the descriptive flexfield reference source Provides default information on a return by allowing the user to enter a unique combination of reference document type document number and line number that Glossary 127 Glossary 128 identifies the original sales order for the returning item See also reference document type region A collection of logically related fields set apart from other fields by a dashed line that spans a block Regions help to organize a block so that it is easier to understand reimbursement A transaction you reflect once for the government as a whole such as expenditures you make from a fund that are properly applicable to another fund For example if you charge an expenditure to the special revenue fund that is properly chargeable to the general fund you reimburse the special revenue fund by recording the expenditure in the general fund and reducing the expenditure in the special reven
400. our set Place your cursor in the Publishing Options column on the same row as your report Double click or choose the Publishing P button The Publishing Options window appears Apply Themes and Request Center publishing options to your report Define publishing options for all other reports in your set If you do not like the default template name for your set change the name in the Publishing Template field Choose OK The reports in your Set will be published and your publishing options will be saved under the template name you defined 12 16 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator RXi Reports Note Publishing options must be specified for all reports in your Report or Request Set or the set will not be processed by the Request Center Note Reports in a Report Set are published as each completes Reports in a Request Set are published only when all are complete DB To change publishing options for a defined template 1 2 RXi Reports Navigate to the Submit and Publish Sets window Choose the Define button The Define Select a Set window appears The 100 most recent sets are listed in the Financial Report and Standard Request Sets regions of the window Select a set and choose OK or double click on a set The Select Publishing Options for lt your set name gt appears The reports in your set appear in this window along with the last publishing options you defined for each rep
401. ournal worksheets also include Group ID Batch Name Batch Description Journal Name Journal Description Journal Reference Reverse Journal Reversal Period and Clearing Company Foreign Actuals journal worksheets also include Converted Debit and Converted Credit To display one of the above items as a column in your journal lines check the box next to its name As with required fields you can change the display sequence See the section Moving Fields below Moving Fields Use the directional buttons to change the display sequence of required or optional fields in your journal worksheet First select the field whose sequence you want to change Then choose one of the four directional buttons The field description moves immediately in either the Required Fields list or the Optional Fields list The actual journal worksheet lines move as follows Top of Header ki l 4 Up One Row Down One Row Journal Wizard 5 11 Creating Journal Entries Using ADI Bottom of Header 4 See Also Journal Worksheet Options on page 5 4 Creating Journal Worksheets on page 5 2 Creating Journal Entries Using ADI You can enter four types of journal entries in your journal worksheet Functional actuals Foreign actuals Budgets or Encumbrances There are only slight variations in the information you need to enter for each type of journal entry Note You can only enter journals for adjusting periods in General L
402. ouse button while your cursor is in the field Select an item from the displayed list of values Note When you are selecting an amount type you first need to select one of the three kinds Actual Budget or Encumbrance amount types When you do so related options appears in the poplist on the Select Amount Type window Select one of these Choose OK to confirm your selection or Cancel to abort Account Segment Values You can also choose from lists of values when you are entering account segment values for your journal entry lines However choosing from these lists works a bit differently than described above See Choosing Account Segment Values on page 3 38 See Also Creating Journal Entries Using ADI on page 5 12 Choosing Account Segment Values When you select the List of Values button while your cursor is located within one of the account segments ADI displays the Select Account Segment Values window From this window you can choose segment values one of four ways m m m m Enter them directly Choose from lists of values for each segment one segment at a time Use a secondary List of Values button to select from valid account code combinations Use a predefined account alias to reduce the selection list Regardless of the selection method you use ADI validates the account you select If the dynamic inserts feature is not enabled in General Ledger ADI warns you when 3 38 Oracle App
403. out button to customize the journal worksheet 4 Optional Choose the Edit Layout button to customize the journal worksheet 5 Choose OK ADI automatically creates your journal worksheet Note Unprotect your worksheet to insert additional rows into the journal template Choose Tools gt Protection gt Unprotect from the Excel menu DB To create additional journal worksheets in the same session 1 While viewing a journal worksheet choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Enter Journals from the list of values Journal Wizard 5 3 Journal Worksheet Options 2 Select your journal worksheet options 3 Choose OK Note You can create additional journal worksheets using different applications databases or responsibilities Simply sign on to the desired database and responsibility before creating your new worksheet DB To save a journal worksheet to disk 1 Select File gt Save As from the Excel menu 2 Enter a name and specify a path for the journal worksheet file 3 Choose OK to save the file or Cancel to abandon the operation DB To open a save journal worksheet 1 Select File gt Open from the Excel menu 2 Select the path where the journal worksheet is located Excel displays the names of the files in a separate list 3 Choose the journal worksheet name from the list of values 4 Select OK to open the file or Cancel to abort If ADI is installed but not running
404. overned by security models Monitor Requests Monitor specific requests and receive automatic notification when they have completed Sign On Off Sign on to or disconnect from applications databases You can change your responsibility from within the Request Center Launch Other Products You can launch ADI and other Oracle Applications directly from the Request Center toolbar D To start the Request Center 1 Choose Programs gt Oracle ADI gt Request Center from the Start menu 2 Sign on to a database using your Oracle Applications username and password See Also The Request Center Toolbar on page 12 2 Setting Request Center Options on page 12 5 Submitting Reports on page 12 8 Formatting Report Output on page 12 33 The Request Center Toolbar Request Center ME E OS2eEDD BABLOGRRENETWIVXA From the Request Center toolbar you can access all of Request Center s features for submitting monitoring and publishing your reports Submit Report Submit standard or FSG reports to be run on oO your server 12 2 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator The Request Center Toolbar e e A ES isl E Show Request Details Show submission details such as phase status and request date for a selected request Cancel Request Cancel a concurrent request View Output Log Download a selected request report output or log file and view it in the default output viewer that you select
405. ow you can choose to include descriptions for each of your account segments Suggestion Including descriptions can affect the performance of your drilldowns We suggest you only include descriptions for critical account segments Other Options Mark the appropriate check box to enable the following options in your drill windows Show Account Type Automatically show the account type when you drill down to detail accounts Suppress Zero Balances Choose this option if you do not want zero balance amounts to be displayed in your drill windows Show Outline Indicators Choose this option to display expand collapse indicators in your drill windows This feature is useful when you are performing multidimensional analysis Show Totals Automatically include totals for the rows and columns in your drill windows Environment Options Region Selections you make in the Environment Options region can only be made in this window If you change the Environment Options during a drill down your changes become effective the next time you initiate a drill D Environment Options Make your selections to set Environment Options Double Click Drill Enabled Mark this check box to enable the ability to drilldown by choosing an amount from one of the displayed drill windows You can also use this feature to drill down on amounts from your spreadsheet published report output i e you do not have to choose the Analysis Wizard button fr
406. ozen budgets and budget organizations into a budget worksheet However you cannot upload any changes to General Ledger Currency Currencies defined for your selected budget organization 4 6 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Budget Worksheet Parameters Period Range Start Starting period for your selected budget Period Range End Ending period for your selected budget Note You make selections for each option in the same manner Place your cursor in the option field then use Down Arrow to cycle through the available values Alternatively you can select the expand list indicator on the right hand side of the option field to display a scrollable list of all the available values Worksheet Options Worksheet Options control the information that appears in your budget worksheet J Workbook Specify where the budget worksheets are created New Create your budget worksheet as a new Excel workbook Current Create your budget worksheet as a new worksheet within the current Excel workbook This option is only available when you already have an Excel workbook open Include Determines the budget worksheets to include in the workbook Budgets Only Creates a single Excel worksheet that contains values only for the budget you defined with your budget criteria selections Budgets and Actuals Creates two Excel worksheets in the same Excel workbook One sheet contains budget values the other actual va
407. pand all of the related vertical or horizontal regions 6 6 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard Tools Excel based Menu Options When you create or open a report worksheet Report Wizard adds a number of options to your Excel menus These menu options provide another way to access many of the Report Wizard features Edit Menu View Menu Insert Menu Report Wizard Menu Delete Report Object Deletes the currently selected report object either a Line Item Line Account Assignment Column or Column Heading row Summary Report Layout Changes the view of the report worksheet to a summary layout same as selecting both the vertical and horizontal 1 buttons Detail Report Layout Changes the view of the report worksheet to a detail layout same as selecting both the vertical and horizontal 2 buttons Insert Report Object Use to insert a Line Item Line Account Assignment Column or Column Heading Row Show Report Wizard Toolbar Display the Reports Toolbar if it has been closed Show Attributes Used as follows Line Item Displays the properties of the currently selected row Column Displays the report s column properties Report Desctiptions Displays the report names and descriptions This is the same as choosing the topmost plus button from the left margin of the worksheet All Objects Displays all report objects and properties This is the same as choosing Detail Report Lay
408. parent asset has one or more subcomponent assets First you add the parent asset Then you add the subcomponent asset and assign it to the parent asset in the Additions form You can change parent subcomponent relationships at any time parent request A concurrent request that submits other concurrent requests child requests For example a report set is a parent request that submits reports and or programs child requests parent segment value An account segment value that references a number of other segment values called child segment values Applications Desktop Integrator uses parent segment values for creating summary accounts for reporting on summary balances and in MassAllocations and MassBudgeting You can create parent segment values for independent segments but not for dependent segments An Accounting Flexfield segment value that references a number of other segment values which are referred to as child segment values Applications Desktop Integrator uses parent segment values for creating Accounting Flexfields that summarize others and for creating summary reports Oracle Financial Analyzer uses parent and child segment values to create hierarchies See also child segment value partial matching A condition where the invoice quantity is less than the quantity originally ordered in which case you are matching only part of a purchase order shipment line See also matching complete matching partial retirement A trans
409. pes Build Format and Remittance Advice payment schedules The due date and discount date for payment of an invoice For example the payment term 2 10 Net 30 lets a customer take a two percent discount if payment is received within 10 days with the full invoice amount due within 30 days of the invoice date See also scheduled payment payment terms payment terms The due date and discount date for payment of a transaction For example the payment term 2 10 Net 30 lets a customer take a two percent discount if payment is received within 10 days after 10 days the entire balance is due within 30 days of the invoice date with no applicable discount See also discount scheduled payment payroll A group of employees that Oracle Payroll processes together with the same processing frequency for example weekly monthly or bimonthly Within a Business Group you can set up as many payrolls as you need See also payroll run payroll run The process that performs all of the payroll calculations You can set payrolls to run at any interval you want See also payroll precedence numbers Numbers used to determine how Receivables will compound taxes The tax line with the highest precedence number will calculate tax on all tax lines with a lower precedence number period type You use the general ledger accounting period types to define your general ledger calendar You use accounting period types to define your account
410. physical inventory worksheet name from the list of values If ADI is installed but not running it will start automatically when you open the physical inventory worksheet Physical Inventory Worksheet Parameters When you use the Record Physical Inventory feature to create a physical inventory worksheet you must specify certain parameters Once you set these parameters ADI creates a physical inventory worksheet based on the parameters you provided There are three parameters you must set physical inventory layout template and worksheet options Record Physical Inventory 10 3 Physical Inventory Worksheet Parameters Select Physical Inventory Select the physical inventory for which you want to run the Physical Inventory comparison Select Layout Layout templates allow you to select the fields that should be included in the physical inventory worksheet They also control the order in which the data fields appear on your worksheet You can create a new layout template or edit view copy rename or delete an existing layout template You can make a layout template available to other users by checking the Public check box on the Edit Layout window W Assets Physical Inventory Layout _ of x Layout Name Default M Public Read Only Header Available Fields Serial Number Location a Asset Key t w Category j Manufacturer Model Uns CEBE Asset Number Units Description Text Value Text
411. plications Desktop Integrator uses them to load information from your bank tape For example your bank may use transaction codes T01 T02 and T03 to represent debit credit and stop payment You define transaction codes that your bank uses to identify different types of transactions on its statements For Glossary 157 Glossary 158 example your bank may use transaction codes T01 T02 and T03 to represent debit credit and stop payment transaction type An invoice control feature that lets you specify default values for invoice printing posting to the general ledger and updating open receivable balances The kind of action performed on an asset Transaction types include Addition Adjustment Transfer and Retirement Transaction types determine how Cash Management matches and accounts for transactions Cash Management transaction types include Miscellaneous Receipt Miscellaneous Payment Non Sufficient Funds NSF Payment Receipt Rejected and Stopped transactions These include invoices debit memos credit memos deposits guarantees and chargebacks entered with a GL date that is between the beginning and ending GL dates The transactions are displayed in the Transaction Register in the Functional Currency column See also batch source transaction batch sources See batch sourceforeign currency translation transferred date The date on which you transfer costs revenue and invoices to other Oracle Applications tr
412. ploading Budgets from ADI to General Ledger amp Upload Budgets to Interface Options Rows To Upload Upload Mode Pre Validation Flagged Rows Replace C Full C All Rows Increment None Duplicate Rows in Interface Table Prompt Before Deletion of Existing Row Is Always Delete Existing Row Duplicate rows may exist in the interface table as budget import has yet to be run Start Budget Import DB To upload budget balances from a budget worksheet to the interface table 1 While viewing a budget worksheet that has been modified choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Upload to Interface from the list of values 2 Enter your budget upload options See Budget Upload Options on page 4 22 3 Choose OK to initiate the upload process or Cancel to abandon Caution If your budget organization is password protected the system prompts you to enter the password Enter the password then choose OK When the process completes the system notifies you of the completion status For budget lines which do not upload successfully the system provides an explanation in the Messages section of the budget worksheet If you selected Show Upload Success Indicator from the general options window the system also displays status indicators in the Messages section for each budget line Budget Wizard 4 21 Budget Upload Options DB To import budget balances from the interface table
413. ply selecting the appropriate point in time content set when you run your financial report When generating a content set with the Report Wizard you specify one or more hierarchies based on different parent segment values The Report Wizard expands each hierarchy beginning with the parent segment value to create the individual rows of the content set You control how each hierarchy is expanded by defining hierarchy attributes and filtering options il Report Wizard Step 2 Generate Content Set x Use Content Sets to create hierarchy libraries produce multiple reports or filter report contents Name 999 Page Expand Parents z ER Action Replace C Add Segment Company SOCSY Parent Value E Enter a new content set name or use the Find button to choose an existing content set Cancel lt Back Einish D To create a new content set 1 Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Define Report from the list of values 2 Select Generate Content Set then choose the Next button The Report Wizard Step 2 Generate Content Set window appears 3 Enter a Name for your new content set 4 Specify the segment and related parent value for your first content set hierarchy 6 28 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Generating Content Sets Segment The account segment on which you want the report to break For example choose your company segment to create separate reports for each of you
414. port and monitor concurrent processes You can also download format and publish report output This Book is Available Online This user s guide is available online in HTML format All other Oracle Applications user s guides are available online in both HTML and Adobe Acrobat format The paper and online version of this manual are identical use whichever is most convenient The HTML version of this book is optimized for onscreen reading and lets you follow hypertext links for easy acces to books across our enties library you can also search for words and phrases if you national language is supported by Oracle s Information Navigator The HTML documentation is available from the ADI toolbar or from a URL provided by your system administrator Note that the HTML documentation is translated into over twenty languages An Adobe Acrobat version of this manual is available on the ADI CD ROM For other Oracle Applications you can order an Oracle Applications Documentation Library CD Release 11 containing Adobe Acrobat versions of each manual in the Oracle Applications documentation set Using this CD you can search for information read it on screen and print individual pages sections or entire books When you print from Adobe Acrobat the resulting printouts look just like pages from an Oracle Applications hard copy manual Assumptions This guide assumes you have a working knowledge of the principles and customary practices of
415. pplier invoices Within each payment method you can define as many payment formats as you want A payment format determines your payment creation and remittance advice programs Multiple Reporting Currencies An Oracle General Ledger feature that allows you to report in your functional currency and in one or more foreign currencies NACHA National Automated Clearing House Association This is the US system for making direct deposit payments to employees natural account segment In Oracle General Ledger the segment that determines whether an account is an asset liability owners equity revenue or expense account When you define your chart of accounts you must define one segment as the natural account segment Each value for this segment is assigned one of the five account types Natural Application Only A Transaction Type parameter that if enabled does not let you apply a transaction to a debit item if the application will reverse the sign of the debit item for example from a positive to a negative balance Natural Application does not apply to chargebacks and adjustments See Overapplication navigation preference set A series of user defined navigational options in the Enter Orders and Enter Return Material Authorizations forms You can define as many navigation preference sets as you want and assign one to each order type nesting The act of grouping calculations to express the sequence of routines in a formula
416. pproval action A cycle action that you can define in your order cycle to require explicit approval of an order or order line before that order or line progresses further through the order cycle You can define an approval step at the order or order line level When you define an approval step you must approve all orders or order lines using that order cycle depending on the approval step level You can also use approvals in order cycles for returns RMAs See also configure to order approval limits Limits you assign to users for adjustment entry Applications Desktop Integrator enforces the limits that you define here as your users enter receivables adjustments When users enter adjustments that are within their approval limit Applications Desktop Integrator automatically approves the adjustment When users enter adjustments outside their approval limit Applications Desktop Integrator assigns a status of pending to the adjustment approved date The date on which an invoice is approved archive To archive a fiscal year is to copy the depreciation expense and adjustment transaction data for that year to a storage device archive To store historical transaction data outside your database archive table Applications Desktop Integrator copies your account balances from the Balances Table GL_BALANCES to your Archive Table GL_ARCHIVE_BALANCES Applications Desktop Integrator copies your journal details from the Journal Entry t
417. profile option GLDI Create Group ID so that ADI creates a group ID for every journal upload When enabled ADI creates a message in the Template Type row in the context region of your worksheet after you upload your journals The message indicates the type of journal and the last group ID number used A sample message is Funct ional Journal Last upload Group ID was 1310 If the profile option GLDI Create Group ID is enabled and you create a customized journal worksheet with a group ID column ADI does not override any group ID values you enter in the worksheet when you upload Instead a message appears in the message box after every journal entry stating Group ID has been replaced with a system generated value In addition the standard Group ID message appears in the context region of your worksheet 5 16 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Uploading Journal Entries from ADI to General Ledger See Also Below are profile options set by your system administrator that control entered journals These profile options can influence the success or failure of the journal upload process m GLDI Force Journal to Balance When this profile option is enabled your journals must balance or upload to General Ledger will fail A red frowning face with the message Journal entries are not balanced appears in the message box of your journal worksheet 1 GLDI Balance by Accounting Date When this profile option is enabled your jour
418. publishing reports spreadsheet options 12 26 R Record Physical Inventory feature inventory upload options 10 12 layout templates 10 4 overview 10 1 worksheet parameters 10 3 release information displaying 3 36 Replacement Order list 8 33 replacing parent segment values 8 30 Report Definition tab 3 26 report definitions creating 6 12 report formatting formatting individual cells 12 42 report indicators Report Wizard 6 4 report output themes 12 33 applying to report output 12 33 changing 12 33 creating 12 34 customizing 12 47 customizing financial report themes 12 35 report sets 12 14 report themes macro 12 49 using cell level formatting 12 42 using tokens 12 38 Report Wizard 6 1 adding and deleting column account assignments 6 27 adding and deleting columns 6 20 adding and deleting row account assignments 6 23 adding and deleting rows 6 19 changing column properties 6 25 changing row properties 6 21 Column Properties window 6 11 creating report definitions 6 12 Index 4 generating content sets 6 28 interface 6 4 menu options 6 7 reports toolbar 6 2 saving areport 6 17 tools 6 5 Report Wizard interface 6 4 collapsible expandable regions 6 6 displayable windows 6 8 graphical report layout 6 4 menu options 6 7 report indicators 6 4 Report Navigator 6 9 Report Object Properties window 6 9 report worksheet buttons 6 8 right mouse button options 6 8 Row Prop
419. quantity of a particular item at a negotiated price Each purchase order in Purchasing can consist of one or more purchase order lines purchase order requisition line Each purchase order line is created from one or more purchase order requisition lines Oracle Payables creates purchase order requisition lines from individual requisitions purchase order shipment A scheduled delivery of goods or services from a purchase order line to a specified location Each purchase order line can have one or more purchase order shipments Applications Desktop Integrator defines a purchase order shipment by a purchase order line location you enter in Oracle Payables When you perform matching during invoice entry you can match an invoice to one or more shipments purchase requisition An internal request for goods or services A requisition can originate from an employee or from another process such as inventory or manufacturing Each requisition can include many lines generally with a distinct item on each requisition line Each requisition line includes at least a description of the item the unit of measure the quantity needed the price per item and the Accounting Flexfield you are charging for the item Also known as internal requisition See also internal sales order purchasing site A supplier site from which you order goods or services You must enter at least one purchasing site before Purchasing will allow you to enter a purchase order
420. r To facilitate chart of account maintenance use the Account Hierarchy Editor ADI also includes the Create Assets Record Physical Inventory and Import Text File features to simplify your work with Oracle Assets The Request Center enhances your reporting capabilities using Excel to help you publish reports to a spreadsheet printer or the Web General Ledger Applications Desktop Integrator Budget Wizard on page 4 1 The Budget Wizard provides a spreadsheet based interface to simplify budget data entry and modeling in a disconnected environment Use The Budget Wizard to automatically build a budget spreadsheet based on the budgets and budget Introduction 1 1 organizations you have previously set up in General Ledger You can download existing budget balances from General Ledger or create a new budget Enter your new budget balances manually use budget rules or use formulas and models You can then automatically graph your budgets and use a variety of graph styles to compare budget and actual balances Afterward you can save a budget spreadsheet on your PC and work on it at any time When you are satisfied with your new budget balances you can automatically upload them to General Ledger Applications Desktop Integrator Journal Wizard on page 5 1 Use the Journal Wizard to design and automatically generate spreadsheet based journal entry worksheets Enter your journal entries directly in this worksheet where you can take advant
421. r Analysis Wizard on page 7 1 The Analysis Wizard combines multidimensional analysis with report drilldown completely within Excel You can select amounts from spreadsheet reports and drill into the underlying financial information within Oracle Applications The Analysis 1 2 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Wizard presents the complete range of accounts that support a particular reported amount You can select an individual account and drill into its summary balances detail balances journal lines down to Payables and Receivables subledger details During drilldown you can use drag and drop capabilities to pivot accounting dimensions quickly reorganizing financial data to perform what if and what happened analysis of both summary and detail financial information The versatility of the Analysis Wizard helps you quickly detect trends and exceptions in the financial data that supports your reported amounts The Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 1 The Account Hierarchy Editor allows you to create maintain and manipulate General Ledger account structures from a single location using an intuitive and easy to learn drag and drop interface Use the Account Hierarchy Editor to keep your account structure consistent with changes in your organization You can create new parent and child values or modify dependencies in an existing hierarchy copy your current hierarchy to make changes without affecting the original or creat
422. r Cancel to abandon 3 48 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Submitting Processes Note Once you submit the process the system starts a Physical Inventory Comparison concurrent request and displays the Physical Inventory Comparison request ID If you checked the View Results check box ADI also starts a Physical Inventory Comparison Report concurrent request The Physical Inventory Comparison Report runs once the Comparison process completes ADI Request Center automatically monitors the requests and notifies you of the completion status when finished See Also Uploading Asset Data into Oracle Assets on page 9 8 Uploading Physical Inventory Data into Oracle Assets on page 10 9 Getting Started 3 49 Submitting Processes 3 50 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator 4 Budget Wizard Applications Desktop Integrator Budget Wizard See Also With the Applications Desktop Integrator ADI Budget Wizard you can download an existing budget from Oracle General Ledger into Microsoft Excel modify it in Excel then automatically upload your revised budget amounts to General Ledger You can also analyze budgets by downloading both actual and budget balances from General Ledger then using Excel to perform comparisons between the actual and budget values Since ADI uses Excel to create budget worksheets you can easily save your worksheets to your local hard disk or floppy disk making it possible to edit t
423. r Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor Closing the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 39 Defining Your Chart of Accounts Planning Your Summary Accounts Oracle General Ledger User s Guide Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor You can use the Account Hierarchy Editor to add new parent segment values assign child ranges for a parent segment value change parent attributes and merge child ranges D To create a new parent segment value 1 Start the Account Hierarchy Editor by choosing the Ledger button from the ADI toolbar then selecting the View Account Hierarchy option from the list of values From the related poplists select the Chart of Accounts and Segment for the existing hierarchy Choose New Parent Value from the Segment Values window The Parent Attributes window appears Enter a new Segment Value The segment value must comply with the security rules you defined for the value set associated with the segment The Account Hierarchy Editor validates the value when you close the Parent Attributes window Optionally enter a Description assign a Rollup Group and specify a range of Effective Dates If you are creating a new parent value for the natural account segment specify an Account Type Mark the Enable check box if you want to use this segment value for example in the Enter Journals window in General Ledger Additional Information If you create a
424. r a bill of material at a certain moment in time freight carrier A commercial company used to send product shipments to your customers freight charges A shipment related charge added during ship confirmation and billed to your customer Order Entry QuickCode freight terms An agreement indicating who pays the freight costs of an order and when they are to be paid Freight terms do not affect accounting freight charges Order Entry QuickCode function A PL SQL stored procedure referenced by an Oracle Workflow function activity that can enforce business rules perform automated tasks within an application or retrieve application information The stored procedure accepts standard arguments and returns a completion result See also function activity function activity An automated Oracle Workflow unit of work that is defined by a PL SQL stored procedure See also function function security An Oracle Applications feature that lets you control user access to certain functions and windows By default access to functionality is not restricted your system administrator customizes each responsibility at your site by including or excluding functions and menus in the Responsibilities window functional currency The principal currency you use to record transactions and maintain accounting data within Applications Desktop Integrator The functional currency is usually the currency in which you perform most of your business trans
425. r companies Parent Value A specific parent segment value Report Wizard expands the parent to all of its detail levels and creates the necessary rows in the content set definition All parent values underneath the root parent node are found even if they are technically part of a child range Note To specify multiple hierarchies for a content set add each additional hierarchy separately See the next task To add a hierarchy to an existing content set Choose Next The Report Wizard Step 3 Generate Content Set window appears Enter your hierarchy attributes See Hierarchy Attributes on page 6 31 Choose Next The Report Wizard Step 4 Generate Content Set window appears Enter your hierarchy filtering options See Hierarchy Attributes on page 6 31 Choose Finish The Report Wizard displays a graphical representation of the hierarchy you just created in your content set definition M Report Wizard Step 5 Generate Content Set x Generation complete The following hierarchy was applied to your content set 99 All Companies H 20 Western Region Companies My 30 Eastern Region Companies Cancel lt Back Export Report Wizard 6 29 Generating Content Sets DB To add a hierarchy to an existing content set 1 CN See eM Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Define Report from the list of values Select Generate Content Set then choose the Next butto
426. r example the data markers in a graph s legend contain dimension labels that show what data each data marker represents Dimension labels can be short meaning they display the object name of a dimension or user specified meaning they display a label that you typed using the Dimension Labels option on the Graph Report or Worksheet menus dimension values Elements that make up an Oracle Financial Analyzer dimension For example the dimension values of the Product dimension might include Tents Canoes Racquets and Sportswear direct debit An agreement made with your customer to allow the transfer of funds from their bank account to your bank account The transfer of funds occurs when the bank receives a document or tape containing the invoices to be paid disbursement type A feature you use to determine the type of payment for which a payment document is used For example computer generated payments and recorded checks or wire transfers discount Order Entry A reduction of the list price of an item In Oracle Order Entry you can associate discounts with price lists and apply them either automatically or manually to an order or order line The amount or percentage that you allow a customer to decrease the balance due for a debit item In Receivables you use Payment Terms to define customer discounts and can choose whether to allow earned and unearned discounts See also best discount fixed price discount price adjustment
427. r fixed assets group records the asset they create another journal entry to the asset clearing account to balance the entry from the payables group closed order An order and its order lines that have completed all actions of the order cycle and on which the Close Orders program has been run column set A Financial Statement Generator report component you build within Applications Desktop Integrator by defining all of the columns in a report You control the format and content of each column including column headings spacing and size calculations units of measure and precision A typical column set includes a header column for headings and subheadings currency assignments amount types and calculation columns totals You can also define a column set with each column representing a different company to enhance consolidation reporting You can also define a column set with each column representing a different fund to enhance reporting by fund group columns Oracle database tables consist of columns Each column contains one type of information The format to indicate tables and columns is TABLE_ NAME COLUMN_NAME combination block A combination block displays the fields of a record in both multi record summary and single record detail formats Each format appears in its own separate window that you can easily navigate between combination of segment values A combination of segment values uniquely describes the informat
428. r the path name for the character you wish to use Choose the Show Characters button to test display the Agent General Options Worksheet Colors Theme Defaults Settings Installation Parameters F Run Custom Macros Perform Self Check at Startup f Play Sounds for Events Plies F Write Statistics Files for Support Directory and Files Integrator Directory DAORANT GLDI90 User Settings Directory CAORANN GLDI90 Integrator Program Filename GLDI9032 EXE Applications Program Filename AIAP45 EXE 3 22 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator General Ledger Options Installation Tab See Also Set miscellaneous parameters Run Custom Macros In a future version of ADI you will be able to run custom macros before and after certain ADI processes Perform Self Check at Startup Check if you want ADI to perform a self check when you start the system Play Sounds for Events Check if you want ADI to play sounds for events such as error messages Write Statistics Files for Support Check if you want ADI to gather statistics when you run performance testing scenarios See also Performance Test Scenarios for Journal Wizard Upload on page A 1 Directory and Files region The Integrator Directory User Settings Directory Integrator Program Filename and the Applications Program Filename Do not modify these items unless told to do so by your System Administrator Specifying a S
429. r the type of line you want below the row Save your work Note Whenever you want only a single or double line to appear below a row you must enter N to instruct ADI that no line appears above the row For example you must enter amp L lt 30 gt ND to create a double line below the row identified by sequence number 30 The N instructs ADI that no line appears above the row Cell Level Formatting You can format individual cells in your financial report themes to refine the appearance of your report output This feature works for financial reports with General Ledger Release 11i 11 0 and 10 7 Warning Cell level formatting overrides formatting you defined for Report Title Report Headings Column Headings Line Items and Amounts when you created or customized report output themes 12 42 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Customizing Themes for Financial Reports Note Cell level formatting for Release 11i 11 0 and 10 7 follow different processes See the tasks below Heading Regions Report Title Report Heading and Column In the report title report heading and column heading regions of your theme you can format any cell or range of cells and the formatting is expressed in your report output You may also enter tokens text or numbers in any cell within these regions to be displayed in your report output Note You can remove rows from the Header region in your theme
430. racle Applications ADI Version Version Subledger you can drill to 7 0 1li AR AP Assets Projects Purchasing Inventory and WIP 7 0 11 0 AR AP 6 0 11 0 and earlier AR AP D To Drilldown to subledger detail 1 From the Detail Accounts window select a detail balance and choose the Show Journal Details button The Journal Details window appears 2 Select a journal entry and choose the Show Subledger Details button The Subledger Details window appears You can see detail for transactions that originated from the Oracle subledger Analysis Wizard 7 9 Analysis Wizard Toolbar See Also Drilling Down to Summary and Detail Accounts on page 7 6 Analysis Wizard Toolbar on page 7 10 Setting Analysis Wizard Options on page 7 11 Analysis Wizard Drilldown Flows on page 7 13 Applications Desktop Integrator Budget Wizard on page 4 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Journal Wizard on page 5 1 Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard on page 6 1 ADI Options on page 3 16 The Request Center on page 12 1 Analysis Wizard Toolbar FSRa yx From the Analysis Wizard toolbar you can access all of Analysis Wizard s features for drilling down to detail accounts and balances EZA Window Navigate to an open drilldown window Export to Spreadsheet Export the highlighted balance information to a Microsoft Excel worksheet Export to Clipboard Export the highlighted balance information to the Window clip
431. ragging them to the Hierarchy Diagram window then dropping them Select drag and drop are defined as follows a Select Position your cursor on the segment value Press and hold down the left mouse button a Drag While continuing to hold down the left mouse button move the cursor to the location on your hierarchy diagram where you want to add the new value a Drop Release the left mouse button Account Hierarchy Editor 8 7 The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface The first value you place in the Hierarchy Diagram window becomes the topmost parent node of the displayed hierarchy When you place this first value the Account Hierarchy Editor automatically displays the value plus any currently assigned descendants Note Ifthe first value has parents of its own the Account Hierarchy Editor does display them This is because the system always treats the first value you place as the topmost node of your hierarchy To continue building a hierarchy you select additional values from the Segment Values window then drag and drop them in the Hierarchy Diagram window Any new values must be added to existing values on the hierarchy diagram For example you can select a child value drag it to the Hierarchy Diagram window then drop it onto the topmost node You can also select a parent value drag it to the Hierarchy Diagram window and drop it between two existing connected nodes However there are instanc
432. ram that uploads your actual or budget data from a spreadsheet into Applications Desktop Integrator staged dunning A dunning method in which letters are based on the dunning levels of past due debit items This method lets you send dunning letters based on the number of days since the last letter was sent rather than the number of days items are past due For each dunning letter you specify the minimum number of days that must pass before Receivables can increment an item s dunning level and include this item in the next letter that you send standard balance The usual and customary period to date quarter to date or year to date balance for an account The standard balance is the sum of an account s opening balance plus all activity for a specified period quarter or year Unlike an average balance no additional computations are needed to arrive at the standard balance standard actions Oracle Order Entry provides you with a selection of predefined actions called standard actions Use these actions along with those you define yourself to create your customized order cycles See also cycle action order cycle standard bill of material A bill of material for a standard item such as a manufactured product or assembly Standard bills contain no optional components See also bill of material standard component A mandatory component that is used to assemble an ATO assemble to order item or configuration standard ent
433. ranslation rate The rate General Ledger uses to translate your functional currency into a foreign currency for your transactions Applications Desktop Integrator provides transaction information based on daily rates you enter in the system and rate exceptions you define for individual transactions This transaction information allows General Ledger to calculate an accurate weighted average translation rate window A box around a set of related information on your screen Many windows can appear on your screen simultaneously and can overlap or appear adjacent to each other Windows can also appear embedded in other windows You can move a window to a different location on your screen window title A window title at the top of each window indicates the name of the window and occasionally context information pertinent to the content of the window The context information contained in parenthesis can include the organization set of books or business group that the window contents is associated with WIP See work in process withholding In some cases the Internal Revenue Service requires companies to withhold a portion of payments to 1099 suppliers who meet specific criteria These payments are for federal income tax Before withholding any payments you need to inform the supplier in writing You then send the accumulated withholding amount with another window to the Internal Revenue Service once per quarter withholding tax
434. rarchy Editor choose the Ledger button from the ADI toolbar then select the View Account Hierarchy option from the list of values See ADI Toolbar on page 3 3 See Note The View Account Hierarchy option is only visible if your responsibility allows you to modify account structures The Account Hierarchy Editor window includes two subwindows the Segment Values window and the Hierarchy Diagram window 8 4 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface Account Hierarchy Editor ADB Accounting Flex Account File Edit View Window Help Chart of Accounts ADB Accounting Flex Segment Account 2 ADB Accounting Flex Account 2 New child value New parent value 0000 None 1000 Total Assets 1100 Total Cash 1110 Cash Correspondent Bank 1 1120 Cash Correspondent Bank 2 1130 Cash Correspondent Bank 3 1140 Cash on Hand Branches 1150 Cash in Transit 1160 Cash Federal Reserve Bank 1200 Total Government Bonds 1210 Government Bonds 1300 Total Loans 1310 Loans 1320 Loans Non accrual 1330 Accrued Interest Receivable 1340 Allowance for Loan Losses 1400 Total Investments Held for Sale 1410 Bond Investments 1420 Equity Investments 1430 Other Investments Held for Sal 1500 Total Trading Account Assets 1510 Bonds 1520 Equities 1530 Other Trading Account Assets 1600 Total Fixed Assets 1605 Telecommunications Equipmer 1610 Accumulated Depreciation Tel 1620 Comp
435. rarchy Filtering Options on page 6 34 The Request Center on page 12 1 Reports Toolbar ERO ek gt BSF When you create a new report or open an existing one Report Wizard displays the Reports Toolbar You can also display the toolbar as follows 6 2 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Reports Toolbar See Also DB To open the Reports Toolbar from the ADI toolbar 1 Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Define Report from the list of values 2 Select Display Report Tools from the Report Wizard window 3 Choose Finish Report Wizard Interface on page 6 5 Report Wizard Tools on page 6 5 in m E m m Objects Display all report and object properties These include Report Row Column Content and Row Order properties that are active for the currently displayed report See Report Object Properties Window on page 6 9 Row Properties Display the Row Properties window From here you can see all of the properties associated with each of your row definitions You can also choose to display additional windows showing Row Account Assignments and Row Calculations See Row Properties Window on page 6 10 Column Properties Display the Column Properties window From here you can see all of the properties associated with each of your column definitions You can also choose to display additional windows showing Column Account Assignments Column Calculations and
436. reate groups of icons on the main toolbar to reflect your style of working with ADI Note The Signon General Options and Exit icons are always displayed on the toolbar Switch Orientation Select this option to toggle between horizontal and vertical display of the ADI toolbar 3 18 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator General Options Reset Icons Select this option to reset your toolbar to the default ADI toolbar General Options Choose general options and default settings for ADI Choose your settings for worksheet colors and report themes Lx General Options Worksheet Colors Theme Defaults Settings Installation Workbook Regions Field Text Field Background C Context Text C Context Background Data Entry Area C Sheet Background elleIisI To set any of the options discussed in this section 1 Choose the Options button from the ADI toolbar 2 Choose General Options from the list of values The General Options window appears 3 Set your Worksheet Colors Theme Defaults Setting and Installation options 4 Choose OK to save your work Worksheet Colors Tab Choose default color settings for journal budget report and asset worksheets You can set colors for Field Text Field Background Context Text Context Background Getting Started 3 19 General Options Data Entry Area and Sheet Back
437. reate with this report theme Logo insert a logo into your report themes by selecting a cell and choosing Insert gt Picture from the Excel menu Column Width format the column widths in your theme using Excels formatting capabilities Customizing Themes for Financial Reports You have many formatting options to control the appearance of your Standard Fixed Format reports and Financial reports DB To customize a theme for a Standard Fixed Format report or a Financial Report 1 From the Report Output Themes window choose the Open Theme button to open the theme you want to customize Alternatively create a new theme as described above Choose the Customize button From the menu that appears select the report output feature whose formatting you want to change You can change the formatting of the Report Title Report Heading Column Headings Line Items and Amounts The Format Cells window opens Define your formatting choices within each tab of the Format Cells window Request Center 12 35 Customizing Themes for Financial Reports Note The Format Cells window is part of Excel s standard functionality Please refer to your Excel reference manual or Excel s online help for more information on formatting cells Warning Cell level formatting and formatting with tokens will override the General formats you establish using customize themes 4 Choose OK to save your changes then choos
438. reciation method A depreciation method that calculates the depreciation for an asset based on a fixed rate each year This method uses a constant rate which Applications Desktop Integrator multiplies by an asset s recoverable cost or net book value as of the beginning of each fiscal year FlexBudgeting A feature that uses budget formulas and statistics to create a flexible budget For example a manufacturing organization may want to maintain a flexible budget based on actual units of production to eliminate volume variances during an analysis of actual versus budgeted operating results Glossary 61 Glossary 62 flexfield An Oracle Applications field made up of segments Each segment has an assigned name and a set of valid values Oracle Applications uses flexfields to capture information about your organization There are two types of flexfields key flexfields and descriptive flexfields flexfield segment One of the sections of your key flexfield separated from the other sections by a symbol that you define such as or Each segment typically represents an element of your business such as cost center product or account flexible address format Oracle Applications allows you to enter an address in the format most relevant for the country of your customer supplier bank or remit to site This is done by using descriptive flexfields to enter and display address information in the appropriate formats The descriptive
439. removing a hold on an order or order line Order Entry QuickCode released date The date on which an invoice and its associated revenue is released remit to addresses The address to which your customers remit their payments remittance advice A document that lists the invoices being paid with a particular payment document You can create and define remittance advices which you can use with any payment format or you can use a standard remittance advice that Applications Desktop Integrator provides remittance bank The bank in which you deposit your receipts reorder point planning An inventory planning method used to determine when and how much to order based on customer service level safety stock carrying cost order setup cost lead time and average demand replacement order A sales order created to replace goods being returned by a customer replenish to order See assemble to order ATO report An organized display of Oracle Applications information A report can be viewed online or sent to a printer The content of information in a report can range from a Glossary 129 Glossary 130 summary to a complete listing of values A combination of at least a row set and column set and optionally a content set display group row order and runtime options such as currency and override segment name that you can define and name When you request financial statements you can enter this name and Applications Desktop In
440. responsibility ME Hot key Ctrl Shift S Change Responsibility Choose a different responsibility once you ve signed on to your Application database F Hot key Ctrl Shift R Applications Desktop Integrator Qube ig wx General Ledger Menu Choose General Ledger to access the vay following ADI wizards and General Ledger features Enter Budgets Create Budget worksheets refresh values in the current budget worksheet or edit the budget criteria for the current budget worksheet Hot key Ctrl Shift B Enter Journals Create a worksheet for entering journals Hot key Ctrl Shift T Define Report Define FSG reports or download existing report definitions E Hot key Ctrl Shift D Analyze report Perform multidimensional analysis with report drilldown completely within Exce LA E 3 4 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator ADI Toolbar View Account Hierarchy Editor Start the Account Hierarchy Editor which you can use to manage your account structure The button does not appear unless your responsibility allows you to modify account structures List of Values Choose from a list of valid values for a Ey EEn p item such as currency or journal category Hot key Ctrl Shift L Upload to Interface Upload your budget values or journal entries to the General Ledger interface tables Provides the option to automatically start the Submit Process function see below Hot key Ctr
441. ries for invoice payments Cash Clearing Account The cash clearing account you associate with a payment document You use this account if you integrate Oracle Payables with Oracle Cash Management or if you generate future dated payment documents Oracle Payables credits this account instead of your Asset Cash account and debits your Liability account when you post uncleared payments Oracle Payables debits this account and credits your Asset Cash account once you clear your payments in Oracle Cash Management Glossary 27 Glossary 28 You must enable the Allow Reconciliation Accounting Payables option to be able to enter a cash clearing account for a bank account and payment document cash flow Cash receipts minus cash disbursements from a given operation or asset for a given period cash forecast Projection or estimate of cash position based on estimated future sales revenue earnings or costs category See item category A feature you use to purge a particular group of records from the database Applications Desktop Integrator lets you choose from 5 separate categories Suppliers Simple Invoices Simple Requisitions only if you installed Oracle Purchasing Simple Purchase Orders only if you installed Oracle Purchasing Matched Invoices and POs only if you installed Oracle Purchasing category flexfield Fixed Assets lets you group your assets and define what descriptive and financial information you want to keep
442. ries from a journal worksheet to the interface table 1 While viewing your journal worksheet choose General Ledger from the ADI s toolbar and select Upload to Interface from the list of values 2 Enter your Journal Upload Options See Journal Upload Options on page 5 21 3 Choose OK to start the journal upload or Cancel to abandon For rows that do not upload successfully the system provides an explanation in the Messages section of the journal worksheet If you selected Show Upload Success Indicator from the general options window the system also displays status indicators in the Messages section for each journal line Additional Information You can upload a journal worksheet more than once effectively creating multiple journals from the same spreadsheet DB To import journals from the interface table to General Ledger 1 Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar select Submit Process and Journal Import 5 20 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Journal Upload Options 2 Enter your Select Process Type options 3 Choose OK to submit your request or Cancel to abandon 4 Ifthe record you selected for import has journal lines with different accounting dates the system displays the range of accounting dates included in your journal lines To limit the lines imported enter a different date range then Choose OK See Also Journal Upload Options on page 5 21 Submitting Processes on pag
443. rious kinds of supplier information such as Pay Group and Supplier Type You can create as many lookup codes for each item as you require You can add or inactivate Supplier Codes to meet your changing business needs SWIFT940 A common format used by many banks to provide institutional customers with electronic bank statements If your bank provides you with this type of statement you can use Bank Statement Open Interface to load your bank statement information into Oracle Cash Management See also Bank Statement Open Interface bank statement supplier invoice An external supplier s invoice entered into Oracle Payables system linkage An obsolete term See expenditure type class supplier number A number or combination of numbers and characters that uniquely identifies a supplier within your system supplier site A facility maintained by a supplier for the purpose of conducting business A supplier may have one or many supplier sites Payables maintains supplier information regarding each supplier site you define for asupplier You may define a supplier site as a pay site only a purchasing site only both a pay site and a purchasing site or as an RFQ only site in which case it may not have purchase orders entered against it See also pay site purchasing site RFQ only site supply reserved A schedule status showing that Oracle Work in Process WIP has recognized the demand for an item or configuration and opened a
444. rity information Note Segment value security became available with ADI Release 2 0 Question How can I change the budget name organization currency or period range of an existing budget worksheet Frequently Asked Questions 2 7 Functional Issues Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar then select the Budget Wizard and choose Edit Budget Criteria Question How can use a single Applications Desktop Integrator worksheet with several databases You can create a worksheet for each database in a single workbook then copy and paste or create cell references from one worksheet to the other Question Are there plans to support table validated value sets within Applications Desktop Integrator This feature became available with ADI Release 2 0 Question What does it mean when I receive the messages This action cannot be completed because the Microsoft Excel Sheet application EXCEL is busy Excel is not running or is unavailable This message appears if you are in cell EDIT mode when you try to perform another action If you first exit edit mode by leaving the active cell you will not get this message Question How can a character mode Oracle General Ledger customer obtain and use Applications Desktop Integrator Order the Applications Desktop Integrator software which is free for supported customers Character mode users can then communicate with their database through Applications Desktop Int
445. rnal Entries from ADI to General Ledger Figure 5 1 Uploading Journal amp JWSHEET XLS Enter journal information into the journal Template Type worksheet Template Stgle Set of Books Database Category Source Currency Accounting Date Upload to Interface Choose the Upload to Interface button Upi Co Ctr Acct This action populates the interface table in General Ledger GL_INTERFACE Entries Functional Journal Single Journal Entry Set of Books 2 Release 10 General Ledger Adjustment Spreadsheet SD D i 10 Oct 96 Prd PiL Sub Debit Credit Messages SEE eee 1500 1200 150 2000 l d Submit Journal Import Automatic Procedure Submitted automatically if you chose one of the two auto submit options Manual Procedure Choose the Submit Import during the journal upload Process button to start the journal import process General Ledger Database Journal Wizard 5 19 Uploading Journal Entries from ADI to General Ledger Upload Journals to Interface Options Rows To Upload Pre Validation Full C All Rows C Partial C None XJ Partial pre validation only validates reference information Start Journal Import r Post Account Errors to Suspense Create Summary Journals Descriptive Flex Do Not Import BD To upload journal ent
446. ry A recurring journal entry whose amount is the same each accounting period For example you might define a standard entry for fixed accruals such as rent interest and audit fees standard item Any item that can have a bill or be a component on a bill except planning items option classes or models Standard items include purchased items subassemblies and finished products standard memo lines A type of line that you assign to an invoice when the item is not an inventory item for example Consulting Services You define standard memo lines to speed data entry when creating your transactions standard note A routine message you can predefine and automatically or manually attach to orders returns order lines and return lines to convey important information See also one time note automatic note Standard Request Submission A standard interface in Oracle Applications in which you run and monitor your application s reports and other processes STAT The statistical currency Oracle General Ledger uses for maintaining statistical balances If you enter a statistical transaction using the STAT currency Oracle General Ledger will not convert your transaction amounts standard reversal A payment reversal where Applications Desktop Integrator automatically updates your general ledger and re opens the debit items you closed by reversing the original payment Glossary 149 Glossary 150 standard value source
447. ry Comparison r Parameters Kathy s JANS8 CA SAC SACHQ 000000 M Category M Location Inventory Name Major category Minor category St St Cty Building Locat _ UK LON LONHQ 8900 CASAC SACHA 000000 Olivier Inventory UK LON LONHQ 8900 Olivier Inventory BUILDING MFG UK LON LONHQ 8900 uj3 CA SAC SACHQ 000000 F View Results DB To submit the Compare Physical Inventory process 1 Choose the Assets button from the ADI toolbar and select Submit Process gt Compare Physical Inventory from the list of values Optional Check the Category check box if you want Oracle Assets to compare assets only for a specific category ADI displays the number of records associated with each inventory category location combination or each inventory category combination If you do not check this box Oracle Assets compares assets for all categories Optional Check the Location check box if you want Oracle Assets to compare assets only for a specific location ADI displays the number of records associated with each inventory category location combination or each inventory location combination If you do not check this box Oracle Assets compares assets for all locations Optional Select the Inventory Name Category and Location Check the View Results check box if you want to generate the Physical Inventory Comparison Report Choose OK to submit your request o
448. s Budget Rules There are four budget rules Each performs a different operation on your range of specified cells a Divide Evenly by Row Takes an amount you specify divides it by the number of columns in your specified range then enters the result in each cell of the specified range For example consider a range that consists of three columns and five rows 15 total cells If the amount you specify is 1 500 the result placed in each cell is 500 a Divide Evenly by Cells Takes an amount you specify divides it by the number of cells in your specified range then enters the result in each cell For example consider the same range noted in the previous example If you select Divide Evenly by Cells the result placed in each cell is 100 Repeat per Cell Takes an amount you specify and places it in every cell of the specified range a Multiply Each Cell by a Factor Multiplies each cell in the specified range by an amount you enter See Also Updating Budget Balances Using ADI on page 4 13 ADI Toolbar on page 3 3 Adding Budget Notes to a Budget Worksheet You can add notes or comments to the amounts and accounts in your budget worksheet You can also add a note for the entire budget Use notes and comments to annotate budget amounts explain how an amount is calculated or describe accounts Additional Information Budget Notes uses the cell note feature of Microsoft Excel For more information about cell notes
449. s Row Object Action Column Object Action and Format Report Output windows in the same manner From many of these windows you can display yet other windows For example from the Row Properties window you can display the Row Account Assignments window where you can assign account ranges to your report s rows Report Worksheet Buttons If you choose to define your report by making entries directly in the report worksheet the system provides several convenient buttons that makes report creation and editing easier Build Creates a report heading definition based on your column properties such as amount type and period offset Has the same effect as creating default headings in FSG Trim Removes leading and trailing spaces from column headings Refresh Applies changes made to column properties to the main body of the report worksheet 6 8 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Report Wizard Tools Report Object Properties Window If you are familiar with General Ledger s Financial Statement Generator FSG and all of the options that can be specified for rows columns row sets column sets and other report objects then you already know how to use the Report Object Properties window in Report Wizard From the Report Object Properties window you can create an FSG report the same way you do in General Ledger The window appears when you select the Report Objects button from the Reports Toolbar There are five tabs on th
450. s Select Budget Import The Select Process Type window appears Select Budget Import from the Process Type region then choose the Query button Any budgets that are available for importing appear in the Parameters region Select the specific budget and budget organization you want to import Choose OK to submit your request or Cancel to abandon Note Once you submit the process the system starts a budget import concurrent request and displays the budget import request ID The Request Center automatically monitors the request and notifies you of the completion status when it is done Getting Started 3 43 Submitting Processes Select Process Type r Process Type C Budget Import Journal Import Delete Journal Import Data EJ Parameters 7 Spreadsheet 1577 Post Errors to Suspense Account Ea Spreadshee 1578 Import Descriptive Flexfields preadsneel p z H v Spreadshee 1580 2 Import With Validation Date Range Start 5 31 98 End 5 31 98 z DB To submit a journal import process 1 Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select Submit Process from the list of values Select Journal Import The Select Process Type window appears 2 Select Journal Import from the Process Type region then choose the Query button All available journal sources appear in the Parameters region Information for each item includes Source Group ID and number of Records 3 S
451. s between the transaction and revaluation dates result in revaluation gains or losses revaluation gain loss account An income statement account you specify in which Applications Desktop Integrator records net revaluation gains and losses in accordance with FASB 52 U S You specify the account you want to use for unrealized revaluation gains and losses in the Run Revaluation window You can change your revaluation gain loss account as often as you want When you run revaluation Applications Desktop Integrator creates a batch of revaluation journal entries that adjust your revaluation gain loss account Applications Desktop Integrator also marks the journal entries for reversal in the next accounting period revaluation journal entry A journal entry that is automatically created when you run revaluation for a range of accounts denominated in a foreign currency Applications Desktop Integrator creates a batch of revaluation journal entries when the exchange rate used for conversion on your transaction date differs from the exchange rate on your balance sheet date Applications Desktop Integrator creates a journal entry to adjust an income statement gain and loss account for exchange rate fluctuations in accordance with FASB 52 U S revaluation status report A report that summarizes the results of your revaluation Applications Desktop Integrator automatically generates this report whenever you revalue foreign asset and liability accoun
452. s external to ADI For each custom icon you choose to display on the toolbar you must specify Description A name for the button This name appears when you place the cursor over the button on the toolbar Command Line The path and name of the program you want to associate with the toolbar button This is the program that launches when you choose the button Working Directory The pathname to the program that is specified under Command Line Getting Started 3 17 Toolbar Options Toolbar Options Mave Icons Add Icons Available Icons Toolbar Icons 1 Main gt py Signon w Ledger e E Change Responsibility AB Assets H Applications iT Options g Assets H Ba Toolbar 5 B Applications E amp Ledger Submit es Asset Submit H Tip Wizard SIL ils if Use the arrow buttons to move icons from the list of available icons onto the toolbar Click on the symbols to view icons from each group before moving them Move Icons Tab Use this tab to move icons to and from your ADI toolbar You may also group and arrange icons on the toolbar Available Icons The list of icons you can place on the ADI toolbar Select the or sign to see the contents of poplists related to icons on the main toolbar You can move these icons to main ADI toolbar Toolbar Icons The list of icons as they appear on the main ADI toolbar Note Use the separator button to c
453. s from using your computer to access General Ledger or Oracle Assets DB To disconnect from an applications database 1 Choose the Signon button from the ADI toolbar 2 Choose the Disconnect button 3 Choose Yes to disconnect See Also Selecting an Applications Database on page 3 12 Choosing a Responsibility on page 3 15 Selecting an Applications Database From the Select Database window you can select a database from a list edit the specifications for a database add a new database or delete a database To use an applications database with ADI you specify a A Current Database name and Description You can choose any name and description Note The database name you choose must have at least six characters 3 12 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Selecting an Applications Database a GWYUID Gateway User ID FNDNAM and Connect String which are system level parameters for your database You must supply these If you do not know them consult your system administrator a NCA Connection If you want to launch NCA applications from the ADI toolbar you must specify the entire name and directory location of the applet bat file See your system administrator for more information a Server ID Required only if the database is using Applications Server Security See your system administrator Select Database r Applications Database Current Database Tk a Description ADI Develop
454. s must exist for each line revenue records for each line must add up to the line amount and a tax and sales credit record must exist for each line compound tax A method of calculating tax on top of other tax charges You can create compound taxes in the Transactions window or with AutoInvoice complete matching A condition where the invoice quantity matches the quantity originally ordered and you approve the entire quantity See also matching partial matching consolidated billing invoice An invoice that you send to a customer to provide a summary of their receivables activity for the month This invoice includes a beginning balance the total amount of any payments received since the prior consolidated billing invoice an itemized list of new charges for example invoices credit memos and adjustments in either summary or detail format a separate reporting of consumption tax and the total balance due for this customer construction in process CIP asset A depreciable fixed asset you plan to build during a cap ital project The costs associated with building CIP assets are referred to as CIP costs See also capital project component See Standard Component component item An item associated with a parent item on a bill of material concurrent manager A unique facility that manages many time consuming non interactive tasks within Oracle Applications for you so you do not have to wait for their completion Whe
455. s one report for each department context field prompt A question or prompt to which a user enters a response called a context field value When Oracle Applications displays a descriptive flexfield pop up window it displays your context field prompt after it displays any global segments you have defined Each descriptive flexfield can have up to one context prompt context field value A response to your context field prompt Your response is composed of a series of characters and a description The response and description together provide a unique value for your context prompt such as 1500 Journal Batch ID or 2000 Budget Formula Batch ID The context field value determines which additional descriptive flexfield segments appear context response See context field value context segment value A response to your context sensitive segment The response is composed of a series of characters and a description The response and description together provide a unique value for your context sensitive segment such as Redwood Shores Oracle Corporation Headquarters or Minneapolis Merrill Aviation s Hub context sensitive segment A descriptive flexfield segment that appears in a second pop up window when you enter a response to your context field prompt For each context response you can define multiple context segments and you control the sequence of the context segments in the second pop up window Each context sensitive segment t
456. s responsible for communication between you and a specific part of your customer s agency For example your customer may have a shipping contact person who handles all questions regarding orders shipped to that address Applications Desktop Integrator lets you enter contacts for your customers addresses and business purposes A representative who is responsible for communication between you and a specific part of your customer s company For example your customer may have a shipping contact person who handles all questions regarding orders shipped to that address Applications Desktop Integrator lets you enter contacts for your customers addresses and business purposes A customer representative who is involved with a project For example a contact can be a billing contact the customer representative who receives project invoices contact role A responsibility that you associate to a specific contact Applications Desktop Integrator provides Bill To Ship To and Statements but you can enter additional responsibilities contact type An implementation defined classification of project contacts according to their role in the project Typical contact types are Billing and Shipping Glossary 35 Glossary 36 content set A report component you build within General Ledger that defines the information in each report and the printing sequence of your reports For example you can define a departmental content set that print
457. s sales credit given in excess of your revenue sales credit See also revenue sales credit Glossary 95 Glossary 96 object or object classification A means of identifying transactions by the nature of the goods or services purchased such as personnel compensation supplies and material or equipment Typically Object is a segment of your Accounting Flexfield when you implement Oracle Public Sector Financials Many agencies have standard object classification codes Objects are also known as Detail in some governments obligation An encumbrance you record when you turn a requisition into a purchase order A transaction representing a legally binding purchase See also commitment purchase order encumbrance encumbrance One to Many attribute A relationship in Oracle Financial Analyzer where one or more values of a base dimension are related to a single value of an aggregate dimension For example if you have a One to Many attribute definition where the base dimension is Organization and the aggregate dimension is Level each organization can be related to only a single level offset account An offset account is used to balance journal entries in your General Ledger For example offsetting accounts for a guarantee are the Unbilled Receivables and the Unbilled Revenue accounts offset account An offset account is used to balance journal entries in your General Ledger For example offsetting accounts for a guarantee are the
458. s shipped Ship Partial An order attribute indicating whether you allow partial shipments of an order If you enter Yes for the Ship Partial field on an order individual order lines can be shipped as they are available and you can assign different ship to locations and other order line details to different shipments in an order line See also Ship Together ship set A ship set is a group of order lines linked by a common number that you want the full quantity to ship all together A ship set may include as many items on an order as you want and one order may contain more than one ship set Assigning order lines to a ship set allows you to force the full quantity of those order lines to ship simultaneously Ship To Address The address of the customer who is to receive products or services listed on the invoice or order Ship Together An order attribute indicating that you do not allow partial shipments of the order You can also specify a configuration as Ship Together by setting the Ship Model Complete item attribute for the model item to Yes See also Ship Partial ship together model Ship Together model A model item with the Ship Model Complete item attribute set to Yes This indicates that the entire configuration must be delivered in the same shipment If the item attribute is set to No components can ship separately ATO items and configurations are inherently Ship Together models See also ship set ship via See fre
459. s to Oracle General Ledger Receivables or Assets data You can change your responsibility from the Request Center or ADI toolbars Choose the Submit Report button from the Request Center toolbar The Report Submission and Publishing window appears Select Standard Variable Format as the Report Type Mark the Publish Report check box The Request Center will publish the report using the options you specify in steps 9 11 Choose your report from the Report poplist Choose the Submission button to display the variable report submission parameters Complete your submission parameters Choose the Publishing Button A different view of the Report Submission and Publishing Window appears Choose an attribute set from the Apply Attribute Set poplist 12 10 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Submitting Reports See Attribute Sets on page 12 21 10 Set your other report publishing options See Setting Report Publishing Options on page 12 18 11 Optional Choose the Options button to set your report submission options See Setting Report Submission Options on page 1 2 30 12 Choose OK to submit your request or Cancel to abandon Alternatively if you want to run additional reports choose Submit to submit your request Report Submission and Publishing elis r Report Type Publish Report i C Standard Fixed Format Prompt x Standard Variable Format Default Output
460. sary 113 Glossary 114 prior period reinstatement A reinstatement is a prior period reinstatement if you enter it in an accounting period that is after the period in which the retirement took place Also known as retroactive reinstatement prior period retirement A retirement is a prior period retirement if you enter it in an accounting period that is after the period in which you entered the retirement Also known as retroactive retirement prior period transfer A transfer is a prior period transfer if you enter it in an accounting period that is after the period in which the transfer took place Also known as retroactive transfer process A set of Oracle Workflow activities that need to be performed to accomplish a business goal See also Account Generator process activity process definition process activity An Oracle Workflow process modelled as an activity so that it can be referenced by other processes also known as a subprocess See also process process cycle The planned schedule for batch processing of costs revenue and invoices according to your company s scheduling requirements See streamline request process definition An Oracle Workflow process as defined in the Oracle Workflow Builder See also process process responsibility type An implementation defined name to which a group of reports and processes are assigned This group of reports and processes is then assigned to an Oracle Projects re
461. save the record No Validation does not validate the address adjusted current earnings ACE A set of depreciation rules defined by United States tax law Oracle Assets supports the Adjusted Current Earnings tax rules adjustment A Oracle Receivables feature that allows you to increase or decrease the amount due of your invoice debit memo chargeback deposit or guarantee Applications Desktop Integrator lets you create manual or automatic adjustments advance An amount of money prepaid in anticipation of receipt of goods services obligations or expenditures In Oracle Payables an advance is a prepayment paid to anemployee You can apply an advance to an employee expense report during expense report entry once you fully pay the advance An amount of money prepaid in anticipation of receipt of goods services obligations or expenditures Generally an advance is made by a government to a payee to whom the government has an obligation and not more than the obligation For example a government might issue a travel advance to an employee before the beginning of a trip agency An executive branch department independent board commission bureau committee section office or other establishment of a government A representative organization of a federal government state or local government or institution of higher education agent An individual responsible for providing goods or services or authorizing their provis
462. se A cost base refers to the grouping of raw costs to which burden costs are applied Examples of cost bases are Labor and Materials cost budget The estimated cost amounts at completion of a project Cost budget amounts can be summary or detail and can be burdened or unburdened cost burden schedule A burden schedule used for costing to derive the total cost amount You assign the cost burden schedule to a project type that is burdened this default cost burden Glossary 37 Glossary 38 schedule defaults to projects that use the project type and then from the project to the tasks below the project You may override the cost burden schedule for a project or a task if you have defined the project type option to allow overrides of the cost burden schedule cost distribution The act of calculating the cost and determining the cost accounting for an expenditure item cost rate The monetary cost per unit of an employee expenditure type or resource Cost to Cost A revenue accrual method that calculates project revenue as budgeted revenue multiplied by the ratio of actual cost to budgeted cost Also known as percentage of completion method or percentage spent method credit check An Oracle Order Entry feature that automatically checks a customer order total against predefined order and total order limits If an order exceeds the limit Oracle Order Entry places the order on hold for review by your finance group See also cred
463. service If you retire an asset before it is fully reserved Oracle Assets uses the retirement convention to determine how much depreciation to take in the last year of life based on the retirement date Your tax department determines your prorate and retirement conventions prorate date Oracle Assets uses the prorate date to calculate depreciation expense for the first and last year of an asset s life protection level In Oracle Workflow a numeric value ranging from 0 to 1000 that represents who the data is protected from for modification When workflow data is defined it can either be set to customizable 1000 meaning anyone can modify it or it can be assigned a protection level that is equal to the access level of the user defining the data In the latter case only users operating at an access level equal to or lower than the data s protection level can modify the data See also Account Generator provisional schedule A burden schedule of estimated burden multipliers that are later audited to determine the actual rates You apply actual rates to provisional schedules by replacing the provisional multipliers with actual multipliers Oracle Projects Glossary 119 Glossary 120 processes adjustments that account for the difference between the provisional and actual calculations proxima payment terms A payment term you define for invoices due on the same day each period such as your credit card or telephone bills When yo
464. sheet date Applications Desktop Integrator automatically creates a journal entry in accordance with FASB 52 U S to adjust your unrealized gain loss account when you run revaluation foreign currency translation A process that allows you to restate your functional currency account balances into a reporting currency Applications Desktop Integrator multiplies the average periodic or historical rate you define by your functional currency account balances to perform foreign currency translation Applications Desktop Integrator translates foreign currency in accordance with FASB 52 U S Applications Desktop Integrator also remeasures foreign currencies for companies in highly inflationary economies in accordance with FASB 8 U S form A logical collection of fields regions and blocks that appear on a single screen Oracle Applications forms look just like the paper forms you use to run your business All you need to do to enter data is type onto the form See window formula entry A recurring journal entry that uses formulas to calculate journal entry lines Instead of specifying amounts as you would for a standard entry you use formulas and Applications Desktop Integrator calculates the amounts for you For example you might use recurring journal entries to do complex allocations or accruals that are computed using statistics or multiple accounts Free On Board FOB See FOB freeze To fix the definition of a flexfield o
465. sing ADI The format of a single entry journal worksheet is slightly different from a multiple entry journal worksheet However the same information is entered for the journal entries a Choosing the View Context button displays or hides the journal worksheet context information at the top of the worksheet Context information includes Template Type Template Style Set of Books and Database Choosing the View Header button displays or hides the journal worksheet header information located just below the context information Header information includes Category Source Currency and Accounting Date plus any optional information you ve chosen to display ADI automatically places a flag character in the Upload column for every journal line you enter When you start the journal upload process you can choose to process all rows or only the rows that are marked for upload Note If you copy and paste a journal line ADI does not place a flag character in the Upload column for your new journal line You can manually enter a flag by placing your cursor in the upload column cell where you want the flag character then typing any character or number from your keyboard The Journal Wizard interprets three adjoining blank rows in a journal worksheet as the end of the journal entry Therefore any journal lines that appear after three blank rows are ignored when you upload your journals Your system administrator can enable the
466. sis reduction rate to the ITC basis to determine the amount by which it will reduce the depreciable basis Oracle Assets displays the basis reduction rate with its corresponding investment tax credit rate in the Assign Investment Tax Credit form so you can easily see whether the rate you choose will reduce the depreciable basis of the asset Glossary 19 Glossary 20 batch source A source you define in Oracle Receivables to identify where your invoicing activity originates The batch source also controls invoice defaults and invoice numbering Also known as transaction batch sources beginning balance The beginning balance is the balance of the transaction item as of the beginning GL Date that you specified This amount should be the same as the Outstanding Balance amount of the Aging 7 Buckets Report where the As Of Date is the same as the beginning GL Date best discount The most advantageous discount for the customer For example you have a customer discount of 15 and a item discount of 25 for Product B If you enter an order line for the customer for Product A the line is discounted 15 If you enter an order line for the customer for product B the line is discounted 25 bill in advance An invoicing rule that enables you to record the receivable at the beginning of the revenue recognition schedule for invoices that span more than one accounting period See also invoicing rules bill in arrears bill in arrears An inv
467. sponsibility A process responsibility type gives a user access to Oracle Projects reports and programs appropriate to that user s job For example the process responsibility type Data Entry could be a set of reports used by data entry clerks See responsibility product See item product configuration See configuration production depreciation method See units of production depreciation method production interface table The table in which Applications Desktop Integrator stores the information you need to use the Production Interface Information in the Production Interface table is stored in columns production upload The process by which Oracle Assets loads production information from the Production Interface table into Oracle Assets You can use the Production Information Upload process to transfer production information from a feeder system such as a spreadsheet to Oracle Assets profile option A set of changeable options that affect the way your applications run In general profile options can be set at one or more of the following levels site application responsibility and user Refer to the Applications Desktop Integrator Profile Option appendix for more information Refer to the Profile Option appendix in the Oracle General Ledger User s Guide for more information program An organized set of objectives directed towards a common purpose or goal undertaken or proposed by an agency to carry out its resp
468. stomers within the EU if you do not know their VAT registration number The destination country and inventory item controls which VAT rate to use intraEU zero rated transactions Transactions between registered traders in different EU European Union countries An Intra EU transaction is zero rated if and only if you know the customer s VAT registration number otherwise VAT must be charged on the invoice intangible asset A long term asset with no physical substance such as a patent copyright trademark leasehold and formula You can depreciate intangible assets using Applications Desktop Integrator intangible item A non physical item sold to your customers such as consulting services or a warranty Intangible items are non shippable and do not appear on pick slips and pack slips See also shippable item Glossary 73 Glossary 74 inter organization transfer Transfer of items from one inventory organization to another You can have freight charges and transfer credits associated with inter organization transfer You can choose to ship items directly or have them go through in transit inventory intercompany account A general ledger account that you define in an Accounting Flexfield to balance intercompany transactions You can define multiple intercompany accounts for use with different types of accounts payable journal entries intercompany journal entry A journal entry that records transactions between affili
469. t PA Date The end date of the PA Period in which costs are distributed revenue is created or an invoice is generated This date is determined from the open or future PA Period on or after the latest date of expenditure item dates and event completion dates included in a cost distribution line revenue or an invoice PA Period See Project Accounting Period PA Period Type The Period Type as specified in the PA implementation options for Oracle Projects to copy project accounting periods Oracle Projects uses the periods in the PA Period Type to populate each Operating Unit s PA periods PA periods are mapped to GL periods which are used when generating accounting transactions PA periods drive the project summary for Project Status Inquiry You define your accounting periods in the Operating Unit s Set of Books Calendar pack slip An external shipping document that accompanies a shipment itemizing in detail the contents of that shipment packing instructions Notes that print on the pack slip These instructions are for external shipping personnel For example you might wish to warn your carriers of a fragile shipment or your customer s receiving hours parallel processing Parallel processing allows segments of a program to be processed by different processors at the same time to reduce the overall time to complete the program parameter report See report parameter Glossary 101 Glossary 102 parent asset A
470. t original system The external system from which you are transferring data into Applications Desktop Integrator tables other receipts See miscellaneous receipts out of balance batch The status of a batch when the control count or amount does not equal the actual count or amount Overapplication A Transaction Type parameter that if enabled lets you apply a transaction to a debit item even if it will reverse the sign of the debit item for example from a positive to a negative balance Overapplication applies to debit items such as debit memos deposits guarantees credit memos and on account credits See also Natural Application Only overflow record A type of bank file record that stores additional payment information that could not fit on the payment record Each overflow record must have a payment record as a parent Typically an overflow record will store additional invoice numbers and the amount of the payment to apply to each invoice Overtime Calculation Program A program that Oracle Projects provides to determine which kind of overtime to award an employee based on the employee s compensation rule and hours worked If your company uses this automatic overtime calculation feature you may need to modify the program based on the overtime requirements of your business overtime cost The dollar amount over straight time cost that an employee is paid for overtime hours worked Also referred to as Premium Cos
471. t DB To import data into your worksheet 1 Open the asset or physical inventory worksheet to which you are mapping data 2 Choose the Assets button from the ADI toolbar 3 Choose Import Text File from the Assets toolbar 4 Enter your Import Text File parameters Import Text File 11 1 Import Text File Parameters See Import Text File Parameters on page 11 2 5 Choose OK to complete the import Import Text File Parameters When you import a text file into an asset or physical inventory worksheet you must specify certain parameters Once you set these parameters ADI imports the text file based on the parameters you provided There are three parameters you must set source file delimiter and mapping template Choose Source File Choose the source file from which you want to import data into your asset or physical inventory worksheet Check the First Row Contains Field Names check box to indicate that the first row of your data file contains header information Delimiter Choose the delimiter used to separate data fields in your data file Choose either Tab Comma Semicolon or Other If you choose Other enter the delimiter used in your data file Mapping Templates Mapping templates allow you to map data in a text file to the fields on your asset or inventory worksheets You can create a new mapping template or edit view copy rename or delete an existing mapping template You can make a mapping templ
472. t Layout and Header 1 Format Change the appearance of fields and hints in your journal worksheet Fields appear as row and column headings in your template Hints appear as the detail information underneath or to the right of the headings Getting Started 3 25 General Ledger Options Apply Format to Select Fields or Hints then set the following values Font Select a font name from the list of values Size Select a type size from the list of values Italic Check if you want the related text displayed in italic typeface or leave blank for normal text Bold Check if you want the related text displayed in bold typeface or leave blank for normal text Layout Change journal worksheet layout options Default Number of Rows Select or enter a value from 1 to 65 500 for the number of journal lines to display in your journal worksheet Minimum Width of Value Columns Select or enter a value from 1 to 20 for the minimum width to be used in displaying amount fields Header Use to set the display widths for Field Name Context and Field Value in a journal worksheet header Width is expressed as the number of Excel worksheet columns used to display the item The range of values is 1 to 10 columns Select or enter a valid value for each item in the template header Ledger Options Budget Journal Report Definition Report Analysis _ Defaults Rows 10 g Y Format 99 999 999 99
473. t Actual Budget or Encumbrance then select an Amount Type from the poplist Select Roll Forward to create a report where the columns successively move forward in time for example Jan Feb Mar Apr etc Select Roll Backward to create a report where the columns successively move backwards in time for example Dec Nov Oct Sep etc Select a time Increment for the trend report You can choose Daily Monthly or Quarterly Choose Finish to create the report worksheet Use the Report Wizard Tools to define the row and column properties enter column headings assign accounts and create row and column calculations When you are finished save the report BD To create a report using existing report objects 1 Choose General Ledger form the ADI toolbar and select Define Report from the list of values Select Define Report as your Report Wizard task then choose Next Select Report Components then choose Next To use an existing row set select it from the Row Set poplist To create a new row set select new row set from the poplist or choose the New button when the system asks you to enter your reduction criteria Report Wizard 6 15 Report Width 10 11 12 13 14 15 To use an existing column set select it from the Column Set poplist To create a new column set select new column set from the poplist or choose the New button when the system asks you to enter your reduction criteri
474. t File 11 3 Import Text File Parameters DB To copy an existing mapping template 1 From the Import Assets Text File window select a template to copy Choose the Actions button Choose the Copy option from the poplist Enter a unique name for the copied mapping template Choose OK DB To rename an existing mapping template 1 From the Import Assets Text File window select a mapping template to rename and choose the Actions button Choose the Rename option from the poplist Enter the new name of the mapping template Choose OK BD To delete an existing mapping template 1 From the Import Assets Text File window choose the mapping template you want to delete Choose the Actions button Select the Delete option from the poplist Choose Yes to confirm that you want to delete the mapping template DB To view an existing mapping template 1 From the Import Assets Text File window select a mapping template to view and choose the Actions button Choose the View Edit option from the poplist Choose Cancel when you are finished viewing the mapping template Actions Button Options D New Choose this option to create a new mapping template D View Edit Choose this option to view or edit an existing mapping template Note When you choose this option when the default template is selected you have the option only to view the default template You cannot edit the default template
475. t balances for an accounting period in your calendar You can Glossary 135 Glossary 136 review this report to identify accounts that were revalued in Applications Desktop Integrator and journal batches and entries that were created because of the revaluation revenue In Oracle Projects the amounts recognized as income or expected billing to be received for work on a project revenue accrual The function of calculating and distributing revenue revenue authorization rule A configurable criterion that if enabled must be met before a project can accrue revenue For example an active mandatory revenue authorization rule states that a project manager must exist on a project before that project can accrue revenue Revenue authorization rules are associated with revenue distribution rules See also revenue distribution rule revenue budget The estimated revenue amounts at completion of a project Revenue budget amounts can be summary or detail revenue burden schedule A burden schedule used for revenue accrual to derive the revenue amount for an expenditure item This schedule may be different from your invoice burden schedule if you want to accrue revenue at a different rate than you want to invoice revenue category An implementation defined grouping of expenditure types by type of revenue For example a revenue category with a name such as Labor refers to labor revenue revenue credit Credit that an employee receiv
476. t segment whose display order you want to change then move it up or down Mark the check box for each account segment shown in the Display Order column whose description you would like to display in your budget worksheet In the Sort Order column select the account segment whose sort order you want to change then move it up or down For each account segment select a Sort Direction from the related poplist Choose OK to return to the Create Budget Worksheet window DB To save a budget worksheet to disk 1 2 3 Select File gt Save As from the Excel menu Enter a name and specify a path for the budget worksheet file Choose OK to save the file or Cancel to abandon the operation D To open a saved budget worksheet 1 2 Select File gt Open from the Excel menu Select the path where the budget worksheet is located Excel displays the names of the files in a separate list Choose the budget worksheet name from the list of values Select OK to open the file or Cancel to abort If ADI is installed but not running ADI starts automatically when you open the budget worksheet Options Available When a Budget Worksheet is Open on page 4 5 4 4 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Options Available When a Budget Worksheet is Open Options Available When a Budget Worksheet is Open Even while you are working on an open budget worksheet you can use the Budget Wizard to Create Budget Worksheet Build
477. t values choosing 3 38 accounts using Account Hierarchy Editor 8 1 adi frequently asked questions 2 1 Index ADI toolbar 3 3 Analysis tab 3 28 Analysis Wizard 7 1 drilldown flows 7 13 drilling down to summary and detail accounts 7 6 features 7 2 pivoting and filtering drilldown data 7 6 setting options 7 11 toolbar 7 10 applications database selecting 3 12 Applications Desktop Integrator ADI 1 4 attribute sets 12 21 budget accounts inserting new 4 15 budget balances updating 4 13 budget notes adding 4 16 budget rules in ADI 4 16 Budget tab 3 24 budget upload options setting 4 22 Budget Wizard 4 1 adding budget notes 4 16 budget criteria 4 6 budget rules 4 16 changing the worksheet view 4 8 creating budget worksheets 4 2 Index 1 graphing budgets 4 18 inserting new budget accounts 4 15 options when a budget worksheet is open 4 5 setting budget upload options 4 22 setting budget worksheet parameters 4 6 updating budget balances 4 13 uploading budgets 4 19 view filters 4 8 budget worksheets creating in ADI 4 2 budgets adding budget notesin ADI 4 16 ADI Budget Wizard 4 1 entering with ADI 4 1 graphing using ADI 4 18 status 4 7 updating balances from ADI 4 13 uploading from ADI 4 19 C cancelling requests 12 50 cell level formatting 12 42 release 10 6 and 10 7 12 45 Release 11 12 44 closing Account Hierarchy Editor 8 39 Colors tab 3 19 content se
478. t values that a user can enter in an key flexfield Cross validation rules restrict users from entering invalid combinations of key flexfield segment values Cumulative Translation Adjustment A balance sheet account included in stockholder s equity in which Applications Desktop Integrator records net translation adjustments in accordance with FASB 52 U S You specify the account you want to use for Cumulative Translation Adjustment when you define each set of books in the Set of Books window current dimension The Oracle Financial Analyzer dimension from which you are selecting values The current dimension is the one you specified in the Dimension box of the Selector window Choices you make and actions you take in lower level windows ultimately affect this dimension by selecting values from it to include in a report graph or worksheet current object The Oracle Financial Analyzer object upon which the next specified action takes place Generally the current object is the one most recently selected However if you use a highlight a group of objects such as data cells in a column the first object in the group is the current object current budget The most rec ently baselined budget version of the budget current record indicator Multi record blocks often display a current record indicator to the left of each record A current record indicator is a one character field that when filled in identifies a record as being curr
479. tabase You must sign on before you can monitor requests for a specific database All databases to which you are signed on are shown in the Databases tab of the Request Center window Disconnect Disconnect from the selected Oracle Applications database Change Responsibility Choose a different responsibility once you ve signed on to your chosen database If ADI is running and you change your responsibility from within the Request Center you do not need to change the ADI responsibility Applications Desktop Integrator Start Applications Desktop Integrator if it is installed on your PC Eek e a Oracle Applications Start Oracle Applications When you select this buttton you are asked to select an applications database If you select the same database you are using for your Request Center session you do not have to enter your unsername and password in Oracle Applications z kd Options Set the Request Center options z3 12 4 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Setting Request Center Options Help Access the Request Center s online help Minimize Minimize the Request Center window on your desktop Exit Close and exit the Request Center x i j Pending Request Indicator Indicates that a request is currently pending See Also Setting Request Center Options on page 12 5 Submitting Reports on page 12 8 Formatting Report Output on page 12 33 Monitoring Requests on page 12 51
480. tabase to which you want to sign on ADI displays the name of the database you used during your last session if any Note The database name you choose must have at least six characters Note To add or delete a database to from the poplist or to edit the specifications for an existing database choose the Define Databases button or navigate to the Select Database window Enter your Username and Password Your password does not appear as you type it to prevent others from seeing it Keep your password confidential to prevent access by unauthorized users Check the Use Last Responsibility check box to use the same responsibility you used during your last session with ADI To select a new responsibility make sure the check box is unchecked Choose OK If you checked the Use Last Responsibility check box ADI automatically connects you to your database If you left the box unchecked the system prompts you to choose a responsibility Getting Started 3 11 Selecting an Applications Database Note If your signon is unsuccessful the system displays the Signon window again Repeat steps 2 through 5 above Disconnecting a Database There may be situations when you want to disconnect from the applications database without closing ADI For example if you are going to be away from your computer for a while you can disconnect ADI from your applications database as a way to prevent unauthorized user
481. tall Applications Desktop Integrator some sound files are added to either the Orant GLDI90 Sounds or Orawin95 GLDI90 Sounds directory on your PC You can use one of these sound files or provide your own BD To specify a sound file 1 Choose the Options button from the Request Center toolbar 2 Check the Play Sound When Request Completes check box 3 Choose the Find button for the Normal field 4 From the Choose Sound File window select the drive directory and filename for your sound file Note You can use the Files of Type list to reduce the number of files that are displayed in the filename list Select a file type from the list 5 Choose OK Request Center 12 7 Submitting Reports 6 7 Optional Choose the Test button to hear the sound you selected Choose OK to save your selection DB To specify a sound file to play when errors occur 1 See Also Choose the Options button from the Request Center toolbar Check the Play Sound When Request Completes check box Choose the Find button for the Error field Select the drive directory and filename for your sound file Choose OK Optional Choose the Test button to hear the sound you selected Choose OK to save your selection The Request Center Toolbar on page 12 2 Setting Request Center Options on page 12 5 Monitoring Requests on page 12 51 Submitting Reports You can submit the following types of reports by choosing th
482. te You must replace higher level parent segment values first For example you must replace level 2 parent segment values before replacing level 3 parent segment values You must replace higher level parent segment values first For example you must replace level 2 parent segment values before replacing level 3 parent segment values a Replace only the topmost lower level parent segment value leaving the remaining lower level parent segment values intact You define the replacement criteria that Account Hierarchy Editor uses to replace the lower level parent segment values You do this by entering values in the Find Parent Replace With and In Level fields then adding those values to the Replacement Order list You can use wildcards in these three fields to look for and replace complete or partial parent segment values You can specify multiple replacement criteria and the order in which Account Hierarchy Editor applies them when duplicating the hierarchy BD To replace lower level parent values 1 Complete the following fields Find Parent Enter the lower level parent segment value you want to replace You can enter a single parent segment value or use the wildcard symbol to select multiple parent segment values Note that Account Hierarchy Editor interprets the wildcard symbol to mean any character including blanks Note When you first open the Duplicate Hierarchy window the Find Parent field includes all wildcar
483. te on Glossary 165 Glossary 166 XpenseXpress See expense report year average to date The average of the end of day balances for a related range of days within a year year to date depreciation The depreciation taken for an asset so far this fiscal year Zengin The standard file format for bank transfers in Japan The profile option AR Alternate Name Search determines whether you can transfer this type of bank file into Receivables using AutoLockbox The profile option AR Zengin Character Set lets you choose the character set to use when importing bank files of this type Zoom A forms feature that is obsolete in GUI versions of Oracle Applications A Account Hierarchy Editor adding or changing child values 8 24 adding or changing parent values 8 21 adding or changing rollup groups 8 37 changing account hierarchies 8 17 closing 8 39 displaying segment value details 8 9 duplicating hierarchies 8 26 expanding and collapsing hierarchy diagrams 8 8 finding segment values 8 15 Hierarchy Diagram window 8 7 Hierarchy status symbols 8 5 interface 8 4 merging ranges 8 23 modifying segment value descriptions 8 34 multiple hierarchy diagrams 8 9 parent levels concept 8 2 Replacement Order list 8 33 replacing parent segment values 8 30 Segment Values window 8 5 toolbar 8 14 using 8 1 Account Hierarchy Editor menu 8 10 editmenu 8 11 file menu 8 10 window menu 8 13 account segmen
484. te to calculate the invoice due date according to the payment terms for the invoice The invoice date can be the date the invoice was entered or it can be a different date you specify invoice distribution line A line representing an expenditure item on an invoice A single expenditure item may have multiple distribution lines for cost and revenue An invoice distribution line holds an amount account code and accounting date invoice distribution line types A feature that classifies every invoice distribution line as an item tax freight or miscellaneous distribution invoice format The columns text and layout of invoice lines on an invoice Invoice Import An Oracle Payables process you use to import invoices from non Oracle payables systems and to create invoices from Payables expense reports You can also use Invoice Import to create invoices from expense reports in Oracle Projects When you initiate Invoice Import Oracle Payables imports the required invoice or expense report information and automatically creates invoices with invoice distribution lines from the information Oracle Payables also produces a report for all invoices or expense reports it could not import invoice item A single line of a project s draft invoice formatted according to the project invoice formats invoice number A number or combination of numbers and characters that uniquely identifies an invoice within your system Usually generated automati
485. tegrator automatically enters the report components and runtime options for you You simply specify the accounting period Applications Desktop Integrator automatically enters the rest resource A user defined group of employees organizations jobs suppliers expenditure categories revenue categories expenditure types or event types for purposes of defining budgets or summarizing actuals report component An element of a Financial Statement Generator report that defines the format and content of your report Report components include row sets column sets content sets row orders and display sets You can group report components together in different ways to create custom reports report headings A descriptive section found at the top of each report giving general information about the contents of the report Report headings provide you with general information about the contents of the report Report headings provide you with the name of the Set of Books selected for all Applications Desktop Integrator transactions and reports Applications Desktop Integrator prints the name of your Set of Books in the heading of most reports report option See report parameter report parameter Options that let you sort format select and summarize the information in your reports A variable you use to restrict information in a report or determine the format of the report For example you may want to limit your report to the current mo
486. tem Applications Desktop Integrator supports two three and four way matching matching tolerances The acceptable degrees of variance you define for matched invoices and purchase orders Applications Desktop Integrator measures variance between quantities and item prices for invoices and purchase orders You can define tolerances for order quantities including Maximum Quantity Ordered and Maximum Quantity Received You can also define tolerances for price variances including exchange rate amounts shipment amounts and total amounts If any of the variances between a matched invoice and purchase order exceed the tolerances you specify Approval places the invoice on hold material transaction Transfer between issue from receipt to or adjustment to an inventory organization subinventory or locator Receipt of completed assemblies into inventory from a job or repetitive schedule Issue of component items from inventory to work in process maturity date A date that determines when funds for an automatic receipt can be transferred from your customer s bank account to your bank account See also Bill of Exchange maximum depreciation expense The maximum possible depreciation expense for an asset in a mass depreciation adjustment The maximum depreciation expense for an asset is the greatest of the depreciation actually taken in the tax book the amount needed to bring the accumulated depreciation up to the accumulated depreciation
487. the Lines Region of the worksheet For example if the field YTD Depreciation dependent field is placed in the Header Region and the field Cost independent field is placed in the Lines Region the following error is displayed in the worksheet Message column upon upload YTD Depreciation must have a value 2 12 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Functional Issues To correct or avoid this error you can a Place both the dependent and independent fields in the Header Region a Place both the dependent and independent fields in the Lines Region a Place the independent field in the Header Region and the dependent field in the Lines Region Question Can I access the General Ledger Account Hierarchy Editor through ADI The General Ledger Account Hierarchy Editor is available through ADI 3 2 and higher and supports the following releases a Character Mode 10 6 10 7 a Smart Client 10 6 Prod 15 10 7 Prod 16 a NCA 10 7 11 0 0 a Applications 11i The Account Hierarchy Editor is available in English language only Question Why can t access the Switch Themes feature from the Request Center The Switch Themes feature is available for use only with spreadsheet output with ADI Releases 3 2 and earlier You cannot use this feature to switch themes for web or text output You also cannot apply cell level formatting with Switch Themes For ADI Releases 4 0 and higher republish your worksheet using a different theme Rep
488. the Reverse Journal field blank the journal upload process will fail for that journal In a multiple journal worksheet only the specific journal row will fail during uploading Caution The Journal Wizard interprets three adjoining blank rows in a journal worksheet as the end of the journal entry Therefore any journal lines that appear after three blank rows are ignored when you upload your journals Caution If your account includes multiple segments with the same name you should rename them so the segment names are unique Otherwise you may encounter errors during the ADI journal upload process Note If any user defined information such as journal source or journal category includes an apostrophe in the name you cannot upload journal worksheets that include this information to General Ledger To upload successfully rename any user defined information in General Ledger so it does not include apostrophes Additional Information If you experience journal upload performance problems you can run a series of tests to help identify trouble spots See Performance Test Scenarios for Journal Wizard Upload page Note EMU Fixed is the only type currency that can be used for ADI journals with a Euro derived rate after December 31 1998 The exchange rate is derived from rate tables maintained by General Ledger 5 18 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Uploading Jou
489. the consumer but collected at each stage of the production and distribution chain The collection and payment of value added tax amounts is usually reported to tax authorities on a quarterly basis and is not included in the revenue or expense of a company With Applications Desktop Integrator you control the tax names on which you report and the reference information you want to record You can also request period to date value added tax reports variable An Oracle Financial Analyzer database object that holds raw data Data can be numerical such as sales or expense data or textual such as descriptive labels for products variable text Variable text is used when dialog boxes or their components are unlabeled or have labels that change dynamically based on their current context The wording of variable text does not exactly match what you see on your screen vendor See supplier void check stock A feature you use to void a range of blank check stock voucher number A number used as a record of a business transaction A voucher number may be used to review invoice information in which case it serves as a unique reference to a single invoice warehouse See organization warehouse To store approved invoices for payment by a central Treasury or a central accounts payable department warrant An order by authorized legislative or executive officials directing the treasurer to pay a specific sum to order or to the be
490. the new position a Remove Select a number in the Order column and choose the Remove button to remove the row of replacement criteria Optionally you can double click the item in the Replacement Order list You can resize any of the columns in the Replacement Order list by selecting one if its column boundaries and dragging it to the left or right The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface on page 8 4 The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu on page 8 10 The Account Hierarchy Editor Toolbar on page 8 14 Finding Segment Values on page 8 15 Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 17 Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 21 Adding or Changing Child Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 24 Duplicating Parent Hierarchies on page 8 26 Modifying Segment Value Descriptions on page 8 34 Adding and Changing Rollup Groups with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 37 Closing the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 39 Defining Segment Values Defining Key Flexfields Planning Your Summary Accounts Oracle General Ledger User s Guide Modifying Segment Value Descriptions You can use the Modify Node Descriptions window to change descriptions for groups of Parent and Child segment values within a hierarchy You can search for 8 34 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Modifying Segment Value Descriptions and replace groups of descriptions isolate
491. the pending list to the completed list Note When you submit an FSG report request the name of the report appears in the column Program Name on the Pending or Completed tab Request Center af x OsatDO eS OsGGx xan a x x Pending Completed Hotlist Databases Program Name Final Payment Register Request Date a 8 2 01 10 30 18 An Dom1151 975274 OPERATIOI Completed Normal Trial Balance 8 2 01 8 48 59 AM Dom1151 975268 OPERATIOI Completed Normal Summary Income Stateme 8 2 01 8 36 35 AM Dom1151 974865 OPERATIOI Completed Normal Purchasing Documents Op 8 1 01 10 33 25 Ph Dom1151 974862 OPERATIOI Completed Normal Purchasing Documents Op 8 1 01 10 29 11 Ph Dom1151 974403 OPERATIOI Completed Normal Receiving Transaction Prc 8 1 01 4 01 53 PM Damilki lazaana ODEDA TIOL Camnlatad Alarmal Dacoint Trovallar Con 911101 4 01 62 Dia You can use the toolbar in the Request Center window to access Request Center features See Request Center Toolbar page There are also four tabs you can select to view different information Pending All pending requests that you have submitted are listed on this tab You can add a request to the pending list by choosing the Monitor Request button from the Request Center toolbar Request Center 12 51 Monitoring Requests Completed All compl can add a request to th eted requests th
492. tiicsaedatscsesiessiedhceadielp satanestas anibeeisavtbadelevevaslecseebdharsdovebithaaios 9 7 Importing Data into Your Worksheet cccccssesesssesssssesesescesssesesesessesesesesssescsescsssnseecseesen 9 7 INOLOS EREA E EREA E E E E ENEA 9 7 Uploading Asset Data into Oracle Assets cccccccscssesesseseteescecesescsnenenesesesneseseseeeecesessseananenes 9 8 Asset Upload Options rapot a a a a ee EE R e a R S 9 11 Record Physical Inventory Record Physical Inventory Feature 0 cccccc ccc cece eseseseececeseesnesececesessneseseseseesneseseseenes 10 1 Creating Physical Inventory Worksheets ccccccsesessesssessssesseseseessseeseseessseseseseseseseseeees 10 2 Physical Inventory Worksheet Parameters ccccccccsesseseeseeseseseeceenesesesneenesesceseeesesesnanenes 10 3 Select Physical Inventory cct cotiad na p bbee neds a eie r raara a a e iia 10 4 Select Layo teer murein Ei ies ar R Ea e r A 10 4 Actions Button Options cccccceeessesesesessesescscsesecsesesesesessnsesesesseeescscsesececsesesesasseecsesaeeseeeseentes 10 6 Editing Lay out Templates sic sse riens en a caecidiveless tester E AR ERRE 10 6 Create Worksheet ince chi crtika a e a E AE aT Teea En E E E 10 7 Entering Data in Your Physical Inventory Worksheet ccccccsssssessssesssseeseseseeeeseeees 10 7 Entering Data Manually siistesiscccssessesesnatsesstesvasvese doors n nnani ra a ins 10 7 Importing Data into Your Worksheet
493. ting Flexfield and item version number or color code for the Item Flexfield key flexfield segment value A series of characters and a description that provide a unique value for this element such as 0100 Eastern region or V20 Version 2 0 key indicators A report that lists statistical receivables and collections information that lets you review trends and projections Also an Oracle Applications feature you can use to gather and retain information about your productivity such as the number of invoices paid You define key indicator periods and Applications Desktop Integrator provides a report that shows productivity indicators for your current and prior period activity key member An employee who is assigned a role on a project A project key member can view and update project information and expenditure details for any project to which they are assigned Typical key member types include Project Manager and Project Coordinator kit An item that has a standard list of components or included items that you ship when you process an order for that item A kit is similar to a pick to order model because it has shippable components however it has no options and you order it directly by its item number not using the configuration selection screen See also pick to order model labor cost The cost of labor expenditure items labor cost multiplier A multiplier that is assigned to an indirect project task and applied to labor c
494. ting summary accounts you must delete and recreate your summary templates in General Ledger 5 Choose OK to close the Range window The newly defined Child or Parent range is shown in the Child Ranges region of the Parent Attributes window 6 Choose OK when you are finished assigning child ranges 7 Save your work 8 22 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor DB To change the attributes for a parent segment value 1 Choose the parent node from the Segment Values window whose attributes you want to change 2 Make any changes in the Parent Attributes window then save your work Note If you edit a node that appears more than once in a hierarchy the Account Hierarchy Editor changes all occurrences of that node to keep the attributes consistent Warning When you upload segment value attribute changes to General Ledger you can also change General Ledger account code combination attributes See Segment Value Inheritance General Ledger User s Guide Merging Ranges When you create hierarchies using the drag and drop feature of the Account Hierarchy Editor the system automatically updates parent segment attributes as you build your hierarchies For example if you drag the child segment value 1100 Accounts Receivable to the parent segment value Asst Assets the Account Hierarchy Editor changes the attributes of
495. tion A customer classification that indicates the customer is a U S government customer and pricing for products on the GSA price sheet should reflect the fixed pricing of the GSA contract Whenever a product is on the GSA price sheet it cannot be sold to commercial customers for the same or less price than the government customer guarantee A contractual obligation to purchase a specified amount of goods or services over a predefined period of time hard limit An option for an agreement that prevents revenue accrual and invoice generation beyond the amount allocated to a project or task by the agreement If you do not impose a hard limit Oracle Projects automatically imposes a soft limit of the same dollar amount See also soft limit historical exchange rate A weighted average rate for transactions that occur at different times Applications Desktop Integrator uses historical rates to translate owner s equity accounts in accordance with FASB 52 U S For agencies in highly inflationary economies Applications Desktop Integrator uses historical rates to remeasure specific historical account balances according to FASB 8 historical exchange rate A weighted average rate for transactions that occur at different times Applications Desktop Integrator uses historical rates to translate owner s equity accounts in accordance with FASB 52 U S For companies in highly inflationary economies Applications Desktop Integrator uses his
496. tion includes Physical Inventory Name and database Choosing the View Header button will display or hide the physical inventory worksheet header information located just below the context information ADI will automatically place a flag character in the Upload column for every physical inventory entry When you start the physical inventory upload process you can choose to process all rows or only the rows that are marked for upload Note If you copy and paste a physical inventory entry ADI does not place a flag character in the Upload column for your new physical inventory entry You can manually enter one by placing your cursor in the upload column cell where you want the flag character then typing any character or number from your keyboard The Record Physical Inventory feature interprets three adjoining blank rows in a physical inventory worksheet as the end of the physical inventory entry Therefore any information that appears after three blank rows will be ignored when you upload your physical inventory data Import Text File Feature on page 11 1 10 8 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Uploading Physical Inventory Data into Oracle Assets Uploading Physical Inventory Data into Oracle Assets After creating physical inventory data in a physical inventory worksheet you must upload them to Oracle Assets Figure 10 1 illustrates this process Note The Record Physical Inventory feature interprets three
497. tion by checking the box to the left of the Find Value field As you type each character of your reduction value the displayed list will get smaller Note To display all values enter a percent sign in the Find Value field or leave the field blank Select a value from the displayed list Choose OK to carry out your selection or Cancel to abandon it Repeat steps 1 through 5 as necessary for each segment in your account code Choose OK to finish entering your account code combination or Cancel to start over DB To choose account segment values using the secondary list of values button 1 Choose the Find Accounts button from the Select Account Segment Values window The system will display a list of valid account codes 3 40 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Choosing Account Segment Values 2 5 List of Account Codes x Co Ctr Acct Prd P L Sub Account Type 01 000 1000 000 000 000 Asset Expense Asset Asset Asset Expense Expense Asset Asset Expense Subset of Accounts C All Accounts Optional Select the All Accounts option or the Subset of Accounts option If you select Subset of Accounts the list is reduced to include only those combinations that match the account segment values currently set in the previous window If you select All Accounts all account code combinations are shown Select an account from the disp
498. tional Choose the Background button then select an image file to use as a background on any report you create with this report output theme The background you choose is automatically applied to spreadsheet and web published reports 9 When you are done making changes save the theme 12 48 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Custom Macro Formatting with Tokens You can use three tokens to format columns in your Standard Variable Format reports Table 12 4 Formatting Tokens Token Description amp AF Autofit ADI sets the width of the column to the number of characters of the largest output in that column amp default_line_format The formatting you define for this cell determines formatting for displaed output All other cells below this cell in a column assume the same formatting characteristics amp printable_format The formatting you define for this cell determines formatting for printed output All other cells below this cell in a column assume the same formatting characteristics BD To use tokens in Standard Variable Format reports 1 Select the appropriate cell for which you want to use a token For example if you want to format displayed output locate the amp default_line_format cell The cell level formatting features are not available for Standard Variable Format reports Custom Macro You can enter a custom macro in your report theme to take advantage of Excel s macro functionality
499. tions Desktop Integrator Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor DB To add values to an existing hierarchy 1 5 From within the Account Hierarchy Editor select the Chart of Accounts and Segment for the existing hierarchy diagram Select the parent segment value that represents the topmost node of your hierarchy then drag and drop it in the Hierarchy Diagram window The Account Hierarchy Editor displays the parent value plus all of its child values From the Segment Values window select the value you want to add to your hierarchy Drag the selected value to the intended parent value in the Hierarchy Diagram window then drop it Note The appearance of your cursor changes to include a small rectangle when the cursor is positioned over a parent value Additional Information You can add a parent segment value between existing parent and child values Drop the new parent value on one of the lines connecting existing parent and child values The Account Hierarchy Editor inserts the new parent value Attention When you change parent child relationships that affect existing summary accounts you must delete and recreate your summary templates Save your work DB To move values within an existing hierarchy 1 2 Choose the hierarchy diagram within which you want to move values Select the child value you want to move and drag it to the new inten
500. to define a billing cycle billing title See Employee Billing Title Job Billing Title block Every Oracle Applications window except root and modal windows consists of one or more blocks A block contains information pertaining to a specific business entity Generally the first or only block in a window assumes the name of the window Otherwise a block name appears across the top of the block with a horizontal line marking the beginning of the block book See depreciation book booking An action on an order signifying that the order has all the necessary information to be a firm order and processed through its order cycle Borrowed and Lent revenue A revenue entry that is created to record when an employee works on a project that is managed by a different organization than the expenditure organization This revenue entry is created to separately track project organization revenue versus employee organization revenue budget Estimated cost revenue labor hours or other quantities for a project or task Each budget may optionally be categorized by resource Different budget types may be set up to classify budgets for different purposes In addition different versions can exist for each user defined budget type current original revised original and historical versions The current version of a budget is the most recently baselined version See also budget line resource budget book A book that you use to track plann
501. to diskette as Excel files Figure 6 3 Report Creation Process From scratch Using existing existing report report objects Finish Report Definition Define row col properties Define calculations Define column exceptions Define content set Define row order Required Lj Optional Report Width Using an Finish Report Definition Modify Report Assign accounts Modify row col Account assignments Definition __ properties Row column properties Define calculations Calculations Define column Column exceptions exceptions Content set Select content set Row order Select row order General Ledger lets you define reports with unlimited width You can take advantage of this in ADI with the following restrictions Table 6 1 Action Vehicle Conditions Download Report to a spreadsheet number of columns in the column set Definitions must be lt 246 less the number of flexfield segments x2 Report Wizard 6 13 Report Width Table 6 1 Action Vehicle Conditions Define Reports in a spreadsheet number of columns in the column set must be lt 246 less the number of flexfield segments x2 Submit Reports n a none Publish Reports to a web format none Publish Reports to a spreadsheet column set must be lt 255 columns BD To create a new report new report objects 1 Choose General Ledger from the ADI toolbar and select the De
502. to give youa different view for analysis Filter Values Me x Show Value 01 000 4100 000 000 000 03 000 4100 000 000 000 04 000 4100 000 000 000 05 000 4100 000 000 000 gt At least one value must be selected Select All None Cancel D To filter information in drilldown windows 1 In the drilldown window place your cursor in the area directly below the row heading or column heading whose displayed values you want to filter 2 Choose the right mouse button then choose filter values from the menu The Filter Values window appears 7 8 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Drilling Down to View Subledger Detail 3 Mark the Show check box for each value you want displayed on your drilldown window Leave the check box unmarked if you do not want the value displayed 4 Choose OK to save your work BD To remove filters in drilldown windows 1 In the drilldown window place your cursor in the area directly below the row heading or column heading whose displayed values are currently filtered 2 Choose the right mouse button then choose Show All Values from the menu Drilling Down to View Subledger Detail You can view subledger transaction activity supporting journal entries for Oracle subledgers The table below details the subledgers you can drill to depending on the version of ADI and Oracle Applications you are using Additional Information Table 7 1 Subledger Drill O
503. toolbar 2 Choose the Create Assets button from the Assets toolbar 3 Enter your asset worksheet parameters See Asset Worksheet Parameters on page 9 3 4 Choose OK ADI automatically creates your asset worksheet DB To create additional asset worksheets in the same session 1 While viewing an asset worksheet choose the Create Assets button from the Assets toolbar 2 Enter your asset worksheet parameters See Asset Worksheet Parameters on page 9 3 3 Choose OK ADI automatically creates your asset worksheet 9 2 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Asset Worksheet Parameters DB To save an asset worksheet to disk 1 Select File gt Save As from the Excel menu 2 Enter a name and specify a path for the asset worksheet file 3 Choose OK to save the file or Cancel to abandon the operation DB To open a saved asset worksheet 1 Select File gt Open from the Excel menu 2 Select the path where the asset worksheet is located Excel will display the names of the files in a separate list 3 Choose the asset worksheet name from the list of values 4 If ADI is installed but not running it will start automatically when you open the asset worksheet Asset Worksheet Parameters When you create an asset worksheet you must specify certain parameters Once you set these parameters ADI creates an asset worksheet based on the parameters you provided There are three parameters you must set corporate d
504. tor Question What versions of Oracle Applications are supported Oracle General Ledger Release 10 7 character mode 10SC NCA or later Oracle Assets Release 10 7 or later Question What can do if get a runtime error 1005 when Applications Desktop Integrator builds a new journal or budget worksheet This error occurs when Excel tries to set printed page settings but no printer is installed Make sure you have installed at least one printer in Windows Also you must select one of your installed printers as the default printer Note This will not occur in Applications Desktop Integrator Production 15 or later Question What can do if get a runtime error and only a partially built journal or budget worksheet Check your AUTOEXEC BAT file to ensure that the ORACLE_HOME IN directory is present Usually it will appear as follows PATH C RAWININ C 05 C INDOWS Question What causes Null Segment Value in Account messages or Invalid lt field_name gt when the field value is valid errors Account segment above prompts list of values prompts must be unique and cannot be the same as any field names used in your journal worksheet Ensure that your above prompts are unique using the Define Key Flexfield Segments window in Oracle General Ledger Question Where are my Applications Desktop Integrator preferences stored ADI 3 0 or later Stores preferences in the Windows Registry under the keys named
505. torical rates to remeasure specific historical account balances according to FASB 8 hold An Oracle Applications feature that prevents a transaction from occurring or completing until the hold has been released You can place a hold on an invoice or an invoice schedule line in Payables All holds in Payables prevent payment some holds also prevent posting to your general ledger A feature that prevents an order or order line from progressing through the order cycle You can place a hold on any order or order line hold parameter A criterion you use to place a hold on an order or order line Valid hold parameters are customer customer site order and item hold source An instruction for Oracle Order Entry to place a hold on all orders or lines that meet criteria you specify Create a hold source when you want to put all current and future orders for a particular customer or for a particular item on automatic hold Oracle Order Entry gives you the power to release holds for specific orders or order lines while still maintaining the hold source Oracle Order Entry holds all new and existing orders for the customer or item in your hold source until you remove the hold source hold type A term that indicates the kind of hold you place on an order or order line Order Entry QuickCode HP Notation Mathematical logic upon which EasyCalc is based HP Notation is used by Hewlett Packard calculators HP Notation emphasizes straightforward
506. tput as a spreadsheet web page or text file You can save reports or report output to a file which can then be transferred to another PC for further changes or review even while disconnected from your General Ledger database Suggestion Use ADI to distribute custom reports worldwide to your subsidiaries Create a row and column set in General Ledger and use the Report Wizard to create your report in Excel format Zip your Excel report and distribute it via the web Your subisidiaries can open the Excel report and transfer the definitions to their own General Ledgers Your custom reports can be distributed worldwide in a matter of hours Report Wizard 6 1 Reports Toolbar Prerequisites See Also 1 Define a set of books 1 Open one or more accounting periods for your set of books Reports Toolbar on page 6 2 Report Wizard Tools on page 6 5 Creating a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 12 Saving a Report Using Report Wizard on page 6 17 Adding and Deleting Rows Using Report Wizard on page 6 19 Adding and Deleting Columns Using Report Wizard on page 6 20 Changing Row Properties Using Report Wizard on page 6 21 Adding and Deleting Row Account Assignments Using Report Wizard on page 6 23 Changing Column Properties Using Report Wizard on page 6 25 Adding and Deleting Column Account Assignments Using Report Wizard on page 6 27 Generating Content Sets on page 6 28 Hierarchy Attributes on page 6 31 Hie
507. ts generating 6 28 hierarchy attributes 6 31 hierarchy filtering options 6 34 Create Assets feature asset upload options 9 11 layout templates 9 3 overview 9 1 setting asset worksheet parameters 9 3 creating budget worksheets 4 2 creating journal entries 5 12 customizing journal worksheets 5 6 D drill options 3 28 Duplicate Hierarchy window 8 28 duplicating hierarchies Index 2 Account Hierarchy Editor 8 26 E enter journals using ADI 5 1 entering budgets Budget Wizard 4 1 expanded rows 12 46 F Financial Statement Generator FSG using Report Wizard 6 1 Find Segment window 8 16 finding segment values Account Hierarchy Editor 8 15 format tokens 12 38 formatting attribute sets 12 21 expanded rows 12 46 frequently asked questions ADI 2 1 functional issues 2 6 installation considerations 2 1 technical issues 2 14 G General Ledger Account Hierarchy Editor 8 1 Budget Wizard 4 1 import processes 3 42 Journal Wizard 5 1 Report Wizard 6 1 General tab 3 22 getting started 3 1 graphing budgets using ADI 4 18 H help system setting the location 3 33 hierarchy attributes for content sets 6 31 hierarchy diagrams displaying multiple diagrams 8 9 expanding and collapsing 8 8 hierarchy filtering options for content sets 6 34 hot keys 3 3 import processes General Ledger 3 42 Oracle Assets 3 46 submitting 3 42 Import Text File feature m
508. ts matched purchase order Payables tracks any exchange rate variances for your foreign currency invoices exemption certificate A document obtained from a taxing authority which certifies that a customer or item is either partially or fully exempt from tax The document details the reason for the exemption and the effective and expiration dates of the certificate Existing Combinations A feature specific to key flexfields in data entry mode that allows you to enter query criteria in the flexfield to bring up a list of matching predefined combinations of segment values to select from expenditure A group of expenditure items incurred by an employee or an organization for an expenditure period Typical expenditures include Timecards and Expense Reports Glossary 55 Glossary 56 expenditure week ending date The last day of an expenditure week period All expenditure items associated with an expenditure must be on or before the expenditure ending date and must fall within the expenditure week identified by the expenditure week ending date expenditure category An implementation defined grouping of expenditure types by type of cost For example an expenditure category with a name such as Labor refers to the cost of labor expenditure comment Free text that can be entered for any expenditure item to explain or describe it in further detail expenditure cost rate The monetary cost per unit of a non labor expenditure type exp
509. ts in the US while in others there may be only one Each authority may charge a different tax rate You can define a unique tax name for each tax authority If you have only one tax authority you can define a unique tax name for each tax rate that it charges A governmental entity that collects taxes on goods and services purchased by a customer from a supplier In some countries there are many authorities e g state local and federal governments in the US while in others there may be only one Each authority may charge a different tax rate Within Applications Desktop Integrator tax authority consists of all components of your tax structure For example California San Mateo Redwood Shores for State County City Applications Desktop Integrator adds together the tax rates for all of these locations to determine a customer s total tax liability for an invoice Tax book A depreciation book that you use to track financial information for your reporting authorities tax codes Codes to which you assign sales tax or value added tax rates Oracle Receivables lets you choose state codes as the tax code when you define sales tax rates for the United States Receivables QuickCode tax engine A collection of programs user defined system parameters and hierarchical flows used by Applications Desktop Integrator to calculate tax tax exempt A customer business purpose or item to which tax charges do not apply See also exemption certificat
510. tself a child of the higher level parent value 3100 which also includes the child values 3150 and 3180 Parent value 3100 is in turn a child of the topmost parent value 3000 which also includes the lower level parent values 3200 and 3300 as well as all of their child values When you select a parent level in Account Hierarchy Editor you are selecting the parent segment value plus all of its child values which include lower level parents and their associated child values For example if you select the parent value 3300 from the hierarchy shown in the diagram above you are selecting the values 3300 3310 3311 3312 3315 3318 3350 and 3370 Account Hierarchy Editor 8 3 The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface on page 8 4 The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu on page 8 10 The Account Hierarchy Editor Toolbar on page 8 14 Finding Segment Values on page 8 15 Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 17 Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 21 Adding or Changing Child Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 24 Duplicating Parent Hierarchies on page 8 26 Modifying Segment Value Descriptions on page 8 34 Adding and Changing Rollup Groups with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 37 Closing the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 39 The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface To start the Account Hie
511. tton from the Request Center toolbar You can enter the path and program name directly or choose the Find button to search your computer for the program you want Printer Settings Choose the Printer Settings button to specify a default font to use when printing reports to a local printer See Specifying Your Printer Settings on page 12 31 Getting Started 3 31 Language Options 1 Language Options Choose the Language Options button to change the language that the Request Center uses in windows menus and tool tips See Language Options on page 3 32 See Also Monitoring Requests on page 12 51 The Request Center Toolbar on page 12 2 Specifying Your Printer Settings on page 12 31 Language Options If U S English is not your native language you can change the language ADI uses in windows menus and tool tips You can also change the font and font characteristics 3 32 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Setting the Help System Location See Also To change the language used by ADI 1 Choose the Options button from the ADI toolbar and select Language Options from the list of values The Language Options window appears In the Language region select Use default to use U S English To use any other language select Specific then select the language from the poplist If needed change the Font see next task Additional Information For many non English languages you must ch
512. u can also change General Ledger account code combination attributes See Segment Value Inheritance General Ledger User s Guide When you upload segment value attribute changes to General Ledger you can also change General Ledger account code combination attributes See Segment Value Inheritance General Ledger User s Guide The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface on page 8 4 The Account Hierarchy Editor Menu on page 8 10 The Account Hierarchy Editor Toolbar on page 8 14 Finding Segment Values on page 8 15 Adding or Changing Account Hierarchies with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 17 Adding or Changing Parent Values with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 21 Duplicating Parent Hierarchies on page 8 26 Modifying Segment Value Descriptions on page 8 34 Adding and Changing Rollup Groups with the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 37 Closing the Account Hierarchy Editor on page 8 39 Duplicating Parent Hierarchies You can use the Account Hierarchy Editor to duplicate existing parent hierarchies The duplicated hierarchy inherits all the attributes from the source hierarchy such as account type rollup groups effective dates enabled status and lower level parents and children The new hierarchy is completely independent of the source hierarchy Any changes you make to the new hierarchy do not affect the source hierarchy unless both hierarchies share the same parent and child values 8 26 Oracle Applications D
513. u can define other sources in Applications Desktop Integrator for invoices you import from other accounting systems source transaction For related transactions the identifying source transaction from which the related items are created sourcing The action of identifying a purchasing source or supplier for goods or services To identify the best sources for your purchases you can create RFQs that you send to your suppliers enter quotations from your supplier and evaluate these quotations for each item you purchase split amount A dollar amount that determines the number of invoices over and under this amount as well as the total amounts remaining For example your company generates invoices that are either 300 or 500 You choose 400 as your split amount so that you can review how much of your open receivables are comprised Glossary 147 Glossary 148 of your 300 business and how much corresponds to your 500 business The split amount appears in the Collection Effectiveness Indicators Report split payment terms A feature used to automatically schedule multiple payments for an invoice You can split payments using either a flat amount or a percentage of the total amount due spot exchange rate A daily exchange rate you use to perform foreign currency conversions The spot exchange rate is usually a quoted market rate that applies to the immediate delivery of one currency for another spreadsheet interface A prog
514. u define a proxima payment term you specify a cutoff day and the day of month due This type of payment term is also used with consolidated billing invoices See also cutoff day consolidated billing invoice PTO item See pick to order item PTO model See pick to order model purchase order PO A document used to buy and request delivery of goods or services from a supplier The order on which the purchasing department approved a purchase purchase order distribution Each purchase order shipment consists of one or more purchase order distributions A purchase order distribution consists of the Accounting Flexfield information Oracle Payables uses to create invoice distributions purchase order encumbrance A transaction representing a legally binding purchase Oracle Government Purchasing subtracts purchase order encumbrances from funds available when you approve a purchase order When you cancel a purchase order Oracle Government Purchasing creates appropriate reversing entries in your general ledger Also known as obligation encumbrance or lien A transaction representing a legally binding purchase Oracle Purchasing subtracts purchase order encumbrances from funds available when you approve a purchase order If you cancel a purchase order Oracle Purchasing creates appropriate reversing encumbrances entries in your general ledger Also known as obligation encumbrance or lien purchase order line An order for a specific
515. ublishing lets you apply themes for any output type spreadsheet web or text ADI Releases 4 0 and higher also support cell level formatting Question When I specify a BMP file as the company logo in my Theme why does the resulting spreadsheet output display an icon with a GIF filename To insert bitmap image files into Themes choose Insert gt Picture from the Excel toolbar Do not insert your images by choosing Insert gt Object from the Excel toolbar Question How can I enter both numbers and letters into an accounting flexfield without having it converted into an exponential number during upload Choose the Options button from the ADI toolbar and select General Options Select the Settings tab Clear the Zero Pad Account Values check box Question Are there naming conventions to use with my ADI worksheets Frequently Asked Questions 2 13 Technical Issues Use any name you like Be sure to eliminate any spaces in your worksheet name Excel macros do not function correctly if there are spaces in the worksheet name See the following example Test1 xls correct Test 1 xls incorrect Question What do do when the data columns in my standard report are not split in the right places You can create a new theme or modify an existing theme to match the widths of the columns in your theme with those in the report output Use the Import Wizard to easily match theme columns with report output columns To align columns 1
516. ue fund to be reimbursed related transaction Additional transactions that are created for labor transactions using the Labor Transaction Extension All related transactions are associated with a source transaction and are attached to the expenditure item ID of the source transaction You can identify and process the related transactions by referring to the expenditure item ID of the source transaction Using labor transaction extensions you can create identify and process the related transactions along with the source transaction relationship An association you can create between two or more customers in Receivables to make payment applications easier See also reciprocal customer relationship relative amount The amount that represents the numerator for the ratio used to determine the amount due You specify your relative amount when you define your payment terms Amount Due Relative Amount Base Amount Invoice Amount release An actual order of goods or services you issue against a blanket purchase order The blanket purchase order determines the characteristics and prices of the items The release specifies the actual quantities and dates ordered for the items You identify a release by the combination of blanket purchase order number and release number See Pick Release release code The release name Applications Desktop Integrator or you assign when releasing a hold from an invoice release reason Justification for
517. ues for your Property Types Retirement Types Asset Descriptions Journal Entries and Mass Additions Queue Names A feature you use to create reference information you use in your business This reference information appears in lists of values for many of the fields in Payables windows There are three basic kinds of QuickCodes supplier payables and employee With QuickCodes you can create Pay Groups supplier types and other references used in Payables quota sales credits See revenue sales credit non revenue sales credit raw costs Costs that are directly attributable to work performed Examples of raw costs are salaries and travel expenses realized gain For foreign currency entries a realized gain is the difference in your functional currency between the invoiced amount and the payment amount if the payment in functional currency is less than the invoiced amount realized gain or loss The actual gain or loss in value that results from holding an asset or liability over time Realized gains and losses are shown separately on the Income Statement See also unrealized gain or loss foreign currency exchange gain or loss realized loss For foreign currency entries a realized loss is the difference in your functional currency between the invoiced amount and the payment amount if the invoiced amount in functional currency is less than the amount of the payment Glossary 123 Glossary 124 reasons Standard definitions
518. uestions 2 11 Functional Issues a You change the drill down period or amount type in the Analysis Wizard context window a The amount in the financial report is an expanded row of a line item In this case the drill down will show the total of all expanded rows for the current line item fa column from the original column set fails to be included then drill down may incorrectly calculate the period for the drill Change the period using the context window a Flexfield Segment Security Rules may prevent the responsibility using the drill down feature from viewing original journal entries created under a different responsibility a Journals may have been posted after the report was run Question When I upload my asset worksheet receive an error message stating that certain fields in my worksheet must have a value When I check the worksheet the fields do contain values Why do I receive this error message The following fields in the Asset worksheet are dependent on other fields for complete validation Table 2 3 Dependent Fields in the Asset Worksheet This field is dependent on This independent field YTD Depreciation Cost Salvage Value Cost Depreciation Reserve Cost Date Placed in Service Category Original Depr Start Date Conversion Date ADI cannot validate Oracle Assets business rules if the dependent field is placed in the Header Region of the asset worksheet and the independent field is placed in
519. ules for your transactions You can define an accounting rule where revenue is recognized over a fixed or variable period of time For example you can define a fixed duration accounting rule with monthly revenue recognition for a period of 12 months accrual accounting An accounting method you use to recognize revenue when you create invoices accrual basis accounting A method of accounting in which you recognize revenues in the accounting period in which you earn revenues and recognize expenses in the accounting period in which you incur the expense Both revenues and expenses need to be measurable to be reportable Glossary 5 Glossary 6 accrue through date The date through which you want to accrue revenue for a project Oracle Projects picks up expenditure items having an expenditure item date on or before this date and events having a completion date on or before this date when accruing revenue An exception to this rule are projects that use cost to cost revenue accrual in this case the accrue through date used is the PA Date of the expenditure item s cost distribution lines accumulation An obsolete term See also summarization accumulated depreciation The total depreciation taken for an asset since it was placed in service Also known as life to date depreciation and depreciation reserve ACE See adjusted current earnings ACE book A tax book for Adjusted Current Earnings ACE tax calculations a
520. unless you also enable budgetary control See also budgetary control encumbrance journal entry A journal entry that increases or relieves encumbrances Encumbrance entries can include encumbrances of any type If you have enabled encumbrance accounting when you successfully approve an invoice matched to an encumbered purchase order Applications Desktop Integrator automatically creates encumbrance journal entries that relieve the original encumbrance journal entries Applications Desktop Integrator also creates new encumbrance journal entries for any quantity or price variance between an invoice and the matched purchase order Applications Desktop Integrator automatically creates encumbrance journal entries for an unmatched invoice when you approve the invoice A journal entry you create online that increases or relieves your encumbrances Encumbrance entries can include encumbrances of any type You can enter manual encumbrance entries define encumbrance allocations or use Journal Import to import encumbrance entries from other financial systems encumbrance type An encumbrance category that allows you to track your anticipated expenditures according to your purchase approval process and to more accurately control your planned expenditures Examples of encumbrance types are commitments requisition encumbrances and obligations purchase order encumbrances An encumbrance category that allows you to track your anticipated expenditures
521. uploads the data into Oracle Assets With the Record Physical Inventory feature you can LJ Customize physical inventory worksheets D Use the powerful spreadsheet features of Excel D Save a physical inventory worksheet to a file which can then be transferred to another PC for further changes even while disconnected from your Oracle Assets database 1 Generate comparison reports to determine if assets are missing or in the wrong location Prerequisites I Open a physical inventory in Oracle Assets Record Physical Inventory 10 1 Creating Physical Inventory Worksheets 1 Ensure that the In Physical Inventory check box is checked for all assets in Oracle Assets that you want included when you run the Physical Inventory Comparison program See Also Creating Physical Inventory Worksheets Physical Inventory Worksheet Parameters on page 10 3 Entering Data in Your Physical Inventory Worksheet on page 10 7 Uploading Physical Inventory Data into Oracle Assets on page 10 9 Physical Inventory Upload Options on page 10 12 Choosing Values from Lists on page 3 37 Choosing Account Segment Values on page 3 38 Physical Inventory Oracle Assets User s Guide Creating Physical Inventory Worksheets 73 Record Physical Inventory x Build a personalized spreadsheet to create maintain and adjust physical inventory by selecting an Inventory and a Layout X XXXXXX Select Inventory Aug 1997 i Select Layout X XXX
522. ur budget worksheet When you first create a budget worksheet the selected account segment s descriptions appear in your worksheet To view or hide your account segment descriptions choose the View Desc button at the top of the budget worksheet This toggles between viewing and hiding descriptions Budget Wizard 4 9 Changing the Budget Worksheet View Note If you have not chosen any segments in the previous step the View Desc button does not appear on your budget worksheet BD To view and set your budget worksheet filters 1 Choose the View Filter button from the top of the budget worksheet A poplist appears beside each column description as follows 2 Choose the View Filter button from the top of the budget worksheet A poplist appears beside each column description Uplpy Copy Ctr Acct Prdpy PLE Subpy JAN92 ii al 01 ot 01 01 01 01 ot 01 01 01 0 01 When you choose the poplist button for a column a list appears showing all the values for that column plus the options All Blanks NonBlanks Top 10 and Custom 3 Choose filter values for selected columns For example to view only account 4110 for company 01 in the above example choose 01 for the Co filter value and 4110 for the Acct filter value Your budget worksheet display immediately changes to show only those rows with matching filter values You can also select these special values from any column s poplist All d
523. uring Glossary 87 Glossary 88 mandatory component A component in a bill that is not optional Usually refers to components in an assemble to order model or option class bill that are not optional to distinguish them from options Mandatory components in pick to order model bills are often referred to as included items especially if they are shippable manual clearing The process where prior to receiving their bank statement users mark transactions that are known to be cleared through the bank which creates an up to date cash position These cleared transactions are still available for the actual reconciliation process Once the bank statement is received Oracle Cash Management can automatically perform all appropriate reconciliation steps See also clearing manual reconciliation The process where you manually reconcile bank statement details with the appropriate batch or detail transaction Oracle Cash Management generates all necessary accounting entries See also AutoReconciliation reconciliation reconciliation manual invoice An invoice that you enter using either the Transactions or Transactions Summary window manual journal entry A journal entry you enter at a computer terminal Manual journal entries can include regular statistical intercompany and foreign currency entries A journal entry you create online using the Enter Journals window Manual journal entries include regular statistical interfund and for
524. user defined information in General Ledger so it does not include apostrophes If any user defined information such as your budget or budget organization includes an apostrophe in the name you cannot upload budget changes to General Ledger To upload successfully rename any user defined information in General Ledger so it does not include apostrophes Budget Wizard 4 19 Uploading Budgets from ADI to General Ledger Figure 4 1 Uploading Budgets Sheet Enter budget information into the budget worksheet Seb JAN 96 FEB 96 MAR 96 APR 96 MAY 96 JUN 96 JUL 96 000 25000 26000 27000 w 000 37557 37839 38123 w 000 1523 1534 1546 Upload to Interface 3 000 12688 12783 12879 b 10151 10227 10303 k 000 1015 1023 1030 Choose the Upload k 00 76129 76700 77275 to Interface button w 00 83742 84370 85003 b 000 15226 15340 15455 w 000 22839 23010 23183 h 8780 8846 8912 h 000 2335 2352 2370 b 000 508 51 515 w 000 3553 3579 3606 This action populates ET the interface table o 000 126882 127834 128792 in General Ledger jl al Submit Budget Import Automatic Procedure Submitted automatically if you chose one of the two auto submit options during the budget upload Manual Procedure Choose the Submit Import Process button to start the budget import process General Ledger Database 4 20 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator U
525. uter Equipment 1630 Accumulated Depreciation Cor 1640 Furniture and Fixtures 1650 Accumulated Depreciation Fur 1660 Buildings 1670 Accumulated Depreciation Bui x WZ Hierarchy Diagram Window sao yi 65071 1660 5 1670 gt i680 5 16850 Segment Values Window a o a eS he he h b a gt S he a2 a D he e T he he T D kej be Segment Values Window When you select a Chart of Accounts and Segment using the poplists located just below the toolbar the Account Hierarchy Editor displays all of the segment values in the Segment Values window The system uses the following symbols to represent the hierarchy status of a segment value Child value Parent Value L Account Hierarchy Editor 8 5 The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface Disabled segment value Child value with an assigned parent Top level parent k A QO Parent with an assigned parent Ta In addition to existing segment values selections for New Parent Value and New Child Value appear at the top of the Segment Values window You can use these selections to define new parent or child segment values 8 6 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator The Account Hierarchy Editor Interface Hierarchy Diagram Window z Account Hierarchy Editor ADB Accounting Flex Account File Edt View Window ols ee Al 2 Chart of Accounts ADB Acc
526. want to disable macros Excel 97 includes a feature to help prevent Excel macro viruses from infecting your PC This feature assumes that any macro that runs automatically when a worksheet is opened including the Applications Desktop Integrator Excel add in may be a virus If you use up to date virus software to protect your PC it is probably safe to disable Excel 97 s macro virus detection feature You can disable macro virus detection in Excel 97 on the popup window that appears when Excel 97 detects an automatically run macro Simply uncheck the Always Ask Before Opening Workbooks with Macros check box then choose Enable Macros to continue Question Why do I receive a Cannot find macro filename macroname error after opening a saved workbook Excel 97 includes a macro virus protection feature that disables all of the macros within a workbook to prevent them from running While this successfully prevents a macro virus from attacking your PC it also prevents any application written in Excel such as ApplicationsDI from working We recommend that you install on your PC and keep current one of the many commercially available anti virus software products This will protect your PC from all viruses not just Excel macro viruses Once you ve installed an anti virus product disable the Excel macro virus protection feature as follows 1 From the Excel menu choose Tools gt Options 2 Select the General tab 3 Unmark the Ma
527. where Are the examples correct Do you need more examples What features did you like most If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement please indicate the document title and part number and the chapter section and page number if available You can send com ments to us in the following ways Electronic mail appsdoc_us oracle com FAX 650 506 7020 Attn Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Postal service Oracle Corporation Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood Shores CA 94065 USA If you would like a reply please give your name address telephone number and optionally elec tronic mail address If you have problems with the software please contact your local Oracle Support Services xi xii Preface Welcome to Release 7 1 of the Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator User s Guide This preface explains how to use this manual and lists the typographical conventions used throughout It includes the following topics a Overview and reference information a Answers to Frequently Asked questions Specific tasks you can accomplish using ADI a How to use ADI windows a ADI functions and features a Implementation suggestions a Applications Desktop Integrator system setup This preface explains how this user s guide is organized and introduces other sources of infomration that can help you Compatibility ADI is an integral part of Oracle App
528. window Request Center 12 21 Setting Report Publishing Options Lx Report Submission and Publishing r Report Type A Publish Report x 4 C Standard Fixed Format Prompt Standard Variable Format Default Output Type x C Financial Statement x Spreadsheet Sa EA r Themes oO Apply Theme g E DAORANT GLDI90 THEMES RPTMGR ASSET_COST_BAL_DB XLS r Output Type gt Attribute Sets nee Apply Attribute Set o INI C Web Page Spreadsheet Options Sy Publish To BR CATEMP Asset_Cost_Balance_Report XLS New Workbook Curent Workbook aa C Text Tab Database Add Output Replace Output NE C Web Page i o Apply Formatting To work with an attribute set 1 Choose one of the following actions New To create a new attribute set choose the Actions Button and select New View or Edit To view or edit an existing attribute set select an attribute set from the Apply Attribute Set poplist Choose the Actions Button and select View Edit Copy or Rename To copy or rename an attribute set select an attribute set from the Apply Attribute Set poplist Choose the Actions Button and select Copy or Rename Suggestion You can copy or rename the default attribute set as a base template to create a new attribute set Delete To delete an attribute set select an attribute set from the Apply Attribute Set window Ch
529. with an organization hierarchy and version for project setup invoice level processing and project reporting The Project Burdening Organization Hierarchy selected for the business group does not have to match the hierarchy version in the Implementation Options project chargeable employees In a multiple organization installation employees included as labor resource pool to a project This includes all employees as defined in Oracle Human Resources who belong to the business group associated with the project operating unit project funding An allocation of revenue from an agreement to a project or task project operating unit The operating unit within which the project is created project task organization The Organization that owns the project or task This can be any organization in the LOV list of values for the project setup The Project Task Organization LOV contains organizations of the Project Task Organization Type in the Organization Hierarchy and Version below the Start Organization You specify your Start Organization and Version in the Implementation Options window project role The responsibility or position assigned to an employee on a project project role type An implementation defined classification of the role or responsibility that an employee can have on a project When you define project role types you can determine whether an employee assign to a particular project role type can query labor costs
530. xist in your TNSNAMES ORA file SQL Net or Net8 is unable to connect to the database To avoid this kind of situation Oracle recommends that you use Oracle Network Manager to administer your SQL Net or Net8 configuration files If the configuration files must be manually edited the following information provides some guidelines To correct the relationship between SQLNET ORA and TNSNAMES ORA Enter your connect string in ADI s database definition window as he040f world SQL Net or Net8 is able to connect to the database because this entry exists in your TNSNAMES ORA file You can also correct the relationship between SQLNET ORA and TNSNAMES ORA as follows Enter your connect string in ADI s database definition window as he040f Change the entry in the TNSNAMES ORA file from he040f world to he040f us oracle com SOL Net or Net8 is able to connect to the database because he040f us oracle com exists in your TNSNAMES ORA file Question Can I have multiple installations of ADI on the same client PC No ADI can only be installed once on a client PC and the installation must be performed in the default Oracle home Question How is ADI Online Help installed in Release 11i In Release 11i Oracle Applications Help files are in HTML format and stored in the database To load these files into the database a utility called FNDGFU is used To run the utility see Oracle Applications System Administrator s Guide Frequently Asked Questi
531. xt window shows you information about the amount on which you ve chosen to drill down Fields in the Context window are the Amount what the Amount Includes Detail Summary or Both balances the Period Currency whether the currency is your functional currency or a foreign currency the Amount Type and the number of Effective Ranges selected From the Context window you can change the Period or the effective date when average balance processing is enabled for your set of books and the Amount Type without returning to the FSG report output spreadsheet to select a different amount on which to drill down Note If there are missing columns in your FSG report output the Analysis Wizard context information may be displayed incorrectly You can change the Period in the Context window to display the correct information The Context window includes five buttons View Filter Choose this button to see all of the effective account ranges associated with the amount in the Context window The effective account ranges are based on the row account assignments column account assignments content set report segment override and column segment override used to generate the FSG report 7 4 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Applications Desktop Integrator Analysis Wizard Effective Ranges SBE desta San Lunt t High Account _ Display Ears Rea Set of Books The profile option GLDI Maximum Effective Ranges for Drilldown
532. you enter a tax of type Sales Applications Desktop Integrator creates a separate invoice distribution line for the tax amount When you enter a tax of type Use Applications Desktop Integrator does not create the invoice distribution line template A pattern that Applications Desktop Integrator uses to create and maintain summary accounts For each template you specify Applications Desktop Integrator automatically creates the appropriate summary accounts Time dimension An Oracle Financial Analyzer dimension whose values represent time periods A time period can be a month quarter or year The length of the Time dimension s values is determined by the Width option on the Maintain Dimension window Terms Date Basis The method that determines the date from which Applications Desktop Integrator calculates an invoice scheduled payment The terms date basis can be Current Goods Received Invoice or Invoice Received territory A feature that lets you categorize your customers or salespeople For example you can categorize your customers by geographic region or industry type Territory Flexfield A key flexfield you can use to categorize customers and salespersons Time and Materials T amp M A revenue accrual and billing method that calculates revenue and billings as the sum of the amounts from each individual expenditure item The expenditure item amounts are calculated by applying a rate or markup to each item timecard A we
533. your business area This guide also assumes you are familiar with Oracle Applications and ADI If you have never used these products we suggest you attend one or more of the training classes available through Oracle Education See Other Information Sources for more information about ADI and Oracle training XV Do Not Use Database Tools to Modify Oracle Applications Data Oracle provides powerful tools you can use to create store change retrieve and maintain information in an Oracle database But if you use Oracle tools like SQL Plus to modify Oracle Applications data you risk destroying the integrity of your data and you lose the ability to audit changes to your data Because Oracle Applications tables are interrelated any change you make using an Oracle Applications window can update many tables at once But when you modify Oracle Applications data using anything other than Oracle Applications windows you may change a row in one table without making corresponding changes in related tables If your tables get out of synchronization with each other you risk retrieving erroneous information and you risk unpredictable results throughout Oracle Applications When you use Oracle Applications windows to modify your data Oracle Applications automatically checks that your changes are valid Oracle Applications also keeps track of who changes information But if you enter information into database tables using database tools you may store inv
534. ypically prompts you for one item of information related to your context response contract project A project for which you can generate revenue and invoices Typical contract project types include Time and Materials and Fixed Price Formerly known as a direct project control amount A feature you use to specify the total amount available for payment of a recurring payment When you generate invoices for a recurring payment Oracle Payables uses the control amount and the total number of payments to determine the invoice amount control book A tax book used for mass depreciation adjustments that holds the minimum accumulated depreciation for each asset control file A file used by SQL Loader to map the data in your bank file to tables and columns in the Oracle database You must create one control file for each different bank file you receive unless some or all of your banks use the exact same format conversion A process that converts foreign currency transactions to your functional currency See also foreign currency conversion Corporate book A depreciation book that you use to track financial information for your balance sheet corporate exchange rate An exchange rate you can optionally use to perform foreign currency conversion The corporate exchange rate is usually a standard market rate determined by senior financial management for use throughout the organization You define this rate in Oracle General Ledger cost ba
535. ysical Inventory Comparison request a Submit a concurrent request to monitor your Physical Inventory Comparison request a Display a window showing Number of errors in the upload to the interface table 10 12 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator Physical Inventory Upload Options Physical Inventory Comparison Request ID A message indicating that a concurrent request has been submitted for the Physical Inventory Comparison Process Request ID 1 View Comparison Check this box to automatically run the Physical Inventory Comparison Report when you upload the physical inventory data See Also Submitting Processes on page 3 42 Record Physical Inventory 10 13 Physical Inventory Upload Options 10 14 Oracle Applications Desktop Integrator 11 Import Text File Import Text File Feature The Import Text File feature allows you to import data from legacy systems third party payables applications barcode scanners or any other flat data file sources to your worksheet Using the Import Text File feature you can map fields in your source file to fields in your worksheet Once you have created the map using the Import Text File feature you can save it and apply it to future conversions Prerequisites 1 Create an asset or inventory worksheet in which you will import data See Also Importing Data into a Worksheet on page 11 1 Import Text File Parameters on page 11 2 Importing Data into a Workshee

Applications Desktop Integrator User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents